Programming Manual

A50-031167-001 ISSUE 1.0 January 2011

Copyright
NEC Corporation reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or features at any time without notice. NEC Corporation has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers. The information contained herein is the property of NEC Corporation and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval of NEC Corporation. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Copyright 2011 NEC Corporation Printed in Japan

TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 Introduction

Section 1 BEFORE YOU START PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Section 2 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Section 3 HOW TO ENTER PROGRAMMING MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Section 4 HOW TO EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Section 5 USING KEYS TO MOVE AROUND IN THE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Section 6 PROGRAMMING NAMES AND TEXT MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Section 7 SYSTEM NUMBER PLAN/CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Section 8 CONCEPT OF SLOT NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Chapter 2 Programming the SL1000

Section 1 PROGRAMMING YOUR SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-01 : Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 10-02 : Location Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 10-03 : ETU Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 10-04 : Music On Hold Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 10-06 : ISDN BRI Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 10-07 : Conversation Recording Resource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 10-08 : Pre-Ringing Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 10-12 : CPU Network Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 10-14 : Managed Network Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 10-15 : Client Information Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 10-16 : Option Information Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 10-17 : H.323 Gatekeeper Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 10-18 : H.323 Alias Address Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 10-19 : VoIPDB DSP Resource Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26 10-23 : SIP System Interconnection Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 10-24 : Daylight Savings Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 10-25 : H.323 Gateway Prefix Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 10-26 : IP System Operation Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 10-28 : SIP System Information Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 10-29 : SIP Server Information Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 10-30 : SIP Authentication Information Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 10-33 : SIP Registrar/Proxy Information Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35 10-36 : SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36 10-37 : UPnP Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 10-39 : Fractional Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 10-40 : IP Trunk Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 10-42 : Virtual Loop Back Port Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40 10-45 : IP Routing Table Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 10-46 : DR700 Server Information Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 10-48 : License Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 10-49 : License File Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 10-50 : License Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46 10-51 : PRI/T1/E1 Selection of PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 10-52 : Free/Demo License Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 10-61 : Relay Port Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Programming Manual i

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-01 : System Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 11-02 : Extension Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56 11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 11-09 : Trunk Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59 11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60 11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63 11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-66 11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-69 11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-71 11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72 11-19 : Remote Conference Pilot Number Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-73 11-20 : Dial Extension Analyze Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup 12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75 12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78 12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79 12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-80 12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-81 12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-82 12-08 : Night Mode Service Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing 13-01 : Speed Dialing Option Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84 13-02 : Group Speed Dialing Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85 13-03 : Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-86 13-04 : Speed Dialing Number and Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-87 13-05 : Speed Dial Trunk Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89 13-06 : Speed Dial Number and Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-90 13-11 : Abbreviated Dial Group Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92 14-02 : Analog Trunk Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 14-04 : Behind PBX Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 14-05 : Trunk Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99 14-06 : Trunk Group Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100 14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102 14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-104 14-09 : Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105 14-11 : ID Setup for IP Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106 14-12 : SIP Register ID Setup for IP Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107 14-15 : ISDN Call Forward Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108 14-16 : ISDN Call Transfer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-109 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-110 15-02 : Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-112 15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116 15-05 : IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-119 15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-122 15-07 : Programmable Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-123 15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-130 15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-131 15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132 15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-133 ii Programming Manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS
15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-134 15-13 : Loop Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-135 15-16 : SIP Register ID Setup for Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-136 15-17 : CO Message Waiting Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-137 15-18 : Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-138 15-22 : Mobile Extension Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-139 Program 16 : Department Group Setup 16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-140 16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-142 16-03 : Secondary Department Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-143 16-04 : Call Restriction Between Department Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-144 Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-01 : System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-145 20-02 : System Options for Multiline Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-146 20-03 : System Options for Single Line Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-148 20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-150 20-05 : System Options for Charging Cost Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-151 20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-152 20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-153 20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-155 20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-157 20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-159 20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-160 20-12 : Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-163 20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-164 20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-169 20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-171 20-16 : Selectable Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-173 20-17 : Operator Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-175 20-18 : Service Tone Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-176 20-19 : System Options for Caller ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-177 20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-178 20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-179 20-22 : System Options for Wireless - DECT Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-180 20-23 : System Options for CTI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-181 20-25 : ISDN Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-182 20-26 : Multiplier for Charging Cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-184 20-28 : Trunk to Trunk Conversation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-185 20-29 : Timer Class for Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-186 20-30 : Timer Class for Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-187 20-31 : Timer Class Timer Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-188 20-34 : Remote Conference Group Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-191 20-35 : Extension's Operator Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-192 20-36 : Trunk's Operator Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-193 20-37 : Operator Extension Group Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-194 20-38 : Operator Group Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-195 20-39 : Shortcut Operation Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-196 20-40 : Function Key List Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-197 20-41 : Service Code Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-198 20-42 : Night Mode for each package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-199 20-43 : Power supply for each package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-200 20-44 : Watch Mode Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-201 20-45 : Remote Watch Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-202 20-46 : Security Sensor Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-203 20-47 : Time pattern setting for Watch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-204 Programming Manual iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS
20-48 : Time pattern setting for Security Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-205 20-49 : Caller ID Shared Group Basic Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-206 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-207 21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-210 21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-211 21-04 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-212 21-05 : Toll Restriction Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-213 21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-215 21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-217 21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-218 21-09 : Dial Block Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-219 21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-220 21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-221 21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-222 21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-223 21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-224 21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-225 21-17 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-226 21-18 : IP Trunk (H.323) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-227 21-19 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-228 21-20 : SIP Trunk Call Discernment Setup for Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-229 21-21 : Toll Restriction for Trunks (Seized Trunk Basis Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-230 21-22 : CO Message Waiting Indication - Call Back Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-231 21-24 : Forced Access Dial Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-232 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-233 22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-235 22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-236 22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-237 22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-238 22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-239 22-07 : DIL Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-240 22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-241 22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-242 22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-243 22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-244 22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-247 22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-248 22-14 : VRS Delayed Message for IRG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-249 22-15 : VRS Delayed Message for Department Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-250 22-16 : Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-251 22-17 : Dial-In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-252 22-18 : Private Call Assignment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-253 22-19 : DID MFC Dialing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-254 22-20 : Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-255 Program 23 : Answer Features Setup 23-02 : Call Pickup Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-256 23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-257 23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-258 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup 24-01 : System Options for Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-259 24-02 : System Options for Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-260 24-03 : Park Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-262 24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-263 iv Programming Manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS
24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-264 24-09 : Call Forward Split Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-265 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-01 : VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-266 25-02 : DID/DISA VRS Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-267 25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-268 25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-269 25-05 : VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-270 25-06 : VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-271 25-07 : System Timers for VRS/DISA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-272 25-08 : DISA User ID Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-274 25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-275 25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-276 25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-277 25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-278 25-13 : System Option for DISA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-279 25-15 : DUD/DISA Transfer Target Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-280 Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing 26-01 : Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route) Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-281 26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-282 26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-283 26-04 : ARS Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-284 26-05 : LCR Carrier Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-285 26-06 : LCR Authorisation Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-286 26-07 : LCR Cost Centre Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-287 26-08 : LCR Manual Override Access Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-288 26-09 : LCR Manual Override Exemption Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-289 26-11 : Transit Network ID Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-290 26-12 : Network Specific Parameter Table for ARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-291 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup 30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-292 30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-293 30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-294 30-04 : DSS Console Alternate Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-299 30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-300 Program 31 : Paging Setup 31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-302 31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-304 31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-305 31-04 : External Paging Zone Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-307 31-05 : Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-308 31-06 : External Speaker Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-309 31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-310 31-08 : BGM on External Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-311 31-10 : External Paging Group Basic Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-312 Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup 32-01 : Door Box Timers Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-313 32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-314 32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-315 32-04 : Door Box Name Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-316 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-317 34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-318 34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-319 34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-320 Programming Manual v

TABLE OF CONTENTS
34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-321 34-06 : Add/Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-322 34-07 : E&M Tie Line Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-323 34-08 : Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-324 34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-325 34-11 : E1 Trunk Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-328 Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup 35-01 : SMDR Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-329 35-02 : SMDR Output Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-330 35-03 : SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-333 35-04 : SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-334 35-05 : Account Code Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-335 35-06 : Verified Account Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-336 Program 40 : Voice Recording System 40-01 : Voice Mail Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-337 40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-338 40-10 : Voice Announcement Service Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-339 40-11 : Preamble Message Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-341 Program 42 : Hotel Setup 42-01 : System Options for Hotel/Motel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-342 42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-343 42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-344 42-04 : Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-345 42-05 : Hotel Room Status Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-346 42-06 : PMS Service Setting (Not Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-347 42-07 : PMS Restriction Level Conversion Table (Not Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-348 42-08 : Text Message Setup for Hotel Room Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-349 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup 44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-351 44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-352 44-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-354 44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-355 44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-356 44-06 : Additional Dial Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-358 44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-359 44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-360 44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-361 44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-362 Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration 45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-363 45-02 : NSL Option Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-365 45-04 : Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-366 45-05 : Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Additional Digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-367 Program 47 : InMail 47-01 : InMail System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-368 47-02 : InMail Station Mailbox Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-372 47-03 : InMail Group Mailbox Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-376 47-06 : Group Mailbox Subscriber Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-377 47-07 : InMail Routing Mailbox Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-381 47-08 : Call Routing Mailbox Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-383 47-09 : Announcement Mailbox Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-385 47-10 : InMail Trunk Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-386 47-11 : InMail Answer Table Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-388 47-12 : InMail Answer Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-391 47-13 : InMail Dial Action Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-395 vi Programming Manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS
47-15 : Routing Directory Mailbox Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-398 47-17 : Routing Distribution Mailbox Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-399 47-18 : InMail SMTP Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-400 47-19 : InMail POP3 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-401 47-20 : Station Mailbox Message Notification Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-402 47-21 : Station Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-403 47-22 : Group Mailbox Message Notification Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-404 47-23 : Group Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-405 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-01 : Service Tone Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-406 80-02 : DTMF Tone Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-411 80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-412 80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-414 80-05 : Date Format for SMDR and System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-416 80-06 : Reference Impedance Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-417 80-07 : Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-418 80-08 : MFC Tone Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-419 80-11 : MFC Tone Receiver Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-420 80-12 : Caller ID Receiver Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-422 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-01 : CO Initial Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-423 81-04 : ISDN BRI Layer 1 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-425 81-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-426 81-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-427 81-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-429 81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-430 81-09 : COT CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-433 81-13 : E1 Trunk Timer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-435 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-437 82-02 : Key Telephone LED Pattern Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-439 82-04 : ASTU Initial Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-441 82-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer2 (S-Point) Initial Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-442 82-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer3 (S-point) Timer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-443 82-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Station Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-444 82-09 : SLIU CODEC Filter Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-445 82-13 : Volume Level Data Setup for TXD TEL2 [LKTS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-447 82-14 : Handset/Headset Gain Setup for Multi Line Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-448 82-18 : KST CODEC Filter Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-449 82-19 : KST CODEC Filter Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-450 82-20 : Volume level Data Setup for KST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-452 82-21 : Sensor Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-453 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB 84-01 : H.323 Trunk Basic Information Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-454 84-02 : H.225 and H.245 Information Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-456 84-07 : Firmware Download Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-458 84-09 : VLAN Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-459 84-10 : ToS Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-460 84-13 : SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-461 84-14 : SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-464 84-15 : H.323/SIP Phone Keep Alive Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-465 84-16 : VoIPDB Limiter Control Gain Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-466 84-19 : SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-467 84-20 : SIP Extension Basic Information Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-470 84-22 : DR700 Multiline Logon Information Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-471 Programming Manual vii

TABLE OF CONTENTS
84-23 : DR700 Multiline Basic Information Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-472 84-24 : DR700 Multiline CODEC Basic Information Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-474 84-26 : VoIP Basic Setup (DSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-476 84-27 : VoIP Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-477 84-28 : DR700 Multiline Firmware Name Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-478 84-29 : SIP-MLT CODEC Information Fixed Mode Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-479 84-31 : VoIPDB Echo Canceller Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-480 Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-01 : Installation Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-482 90-02 : Programming Password Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-483 90-03 : Save Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-485 90-04 : Load Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-486 90-05 : Slot Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-487 90-06 : Trunk Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-488 90-07 : Station Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-489 90-08 : System Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-490 90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-491 90-10 : System Alarm Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-492 90-11 : System Alarm Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-498 90-12 : System Alarm Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-499 90-13 : System Information Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-500 90-16 : Main Software Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-501 90-17 : Firmware Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-502 90-19 : Dial Block Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-503 90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-504 90-21 : Traffic Report Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-505 90-23 : Deleting Registration of IP Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-506 90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-507 90-25 : System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-508 90-26 : Program Access Level Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-509 90-28 : User Programming Password Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-510 90-31 : DIM Access over Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-511 90-33 : Preselected Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-512 90-34 : Firmware Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-530 90-35 : Wizard Programming Level Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-531 90-36 : Firmware Update Time Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-532 90-38 : User Programming Data Level Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-533 90-39 : Virtual Loop Back Port Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-536 90-41 : Server Setting to Update Terminal Local Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-537 90-42 : DR700 Multiline Terminal Version Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-538 90-43 : Deleting Terminal License of DR700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-539 90-44 : Deleting Terminal License of TCP Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-540 90-45 : Temporary Password Change for Multiline Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-541 90-50 : System Alarm Display Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-542 90-51 : Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-543 90-52 : System Alarm Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-544 90-53 : System Alarm Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-545 90-54 : PC/Web Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-546 90-55 : Free License Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-547 90-56 : NTP Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-548 90-57 : Backup Recovery Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-549 90-58 : Restore Recovery Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-550 90-59 : Delete Recovery Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-551 90-60 : T1/ISDN Layer Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-552 90-63 : DR700 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-553 viii Programming Manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS
90-65 : 1st Party CTI Authentication Password Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-554 90-66 : FTP Firmware Update setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-555 90-67 : Backup Data Auto-save Interval Time Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-557 90-68 : Side Tone Auto Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-557 Program 92 : Copy Program 92-01 : Copy Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-558 92-02 : Delete All Extension Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-561 92-03 : Copy Program by Port Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-562 92-04 : Extension Data Swap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-563 92-05 : Extension Data Swap Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-565 92-06 : Fill Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-566 92-07 : Delete Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-567

Programming Manual

ix

LIST OF TABLES
Table 1-1 Table 1-2 Table 1-3 Table 2-1 Table 2-2 Table 2-3 Table 2-4 Table 2-5 Table 2-6 Table 2-7 Keys for Entering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Keys for Entering Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 System Number Plan/Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 System Numbering Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 Function Number List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-124 Function Number List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-127 Ringing Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-171 Program 22-03 - Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-236 Function Number List [1] General functional level (00 ~ 99, #00 ~ #99) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-294 Function Number List [2] Appearance Function Level ( 00 - 99) (Service Code 852 )

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-298 Table 2-8 47-02-16 Default Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-375 Table 2-9 47-06-14 Default Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-379 Table 2-10 47-07-03 Default Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-382 Table 2-11 47-10-03 Default Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-387 Table 2-12 Basic Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-406 Table 2-13 Default Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-420 Table 2-14 Description of Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-492

Programming Manual

Introduction
SECTION 1 BEFORE YOU START PROGRAMMING

1
Introduction

Before customizing your system be sure to read this chapter first.

This chapter provides you with detailed information about the system programs. By changing a program, you change the way the feature associated with that program works. In this chapter, you find out about each program, the features that the program affects and how to enter the program data into system memory. This Manual is created for System : SL1000

SECTION 2

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

This section lists each program in numerical order. For example, Program 10-01 is at the beginning of the section and Program 92-01 is at the end. The information on each program is subdivided into the following headings : Description describes what the program options control. The Default Settings for each program are also included. When you first install the system, it uses the Default Setting for all programs. Along with the Description are the Conditions which describe any limits or special considerations that may apply to the program. The reverse type (white on black) just beneath the Description heading is the program access level. You can only use the program if your access level meets or exceeds the level the program requires. Refer to How to Enter Programming Mode on the next page for a list of the system access levels and passwords. Feature Cross Reference provides you with a table of all the features affected by the program. You will want to keep the referenced features in mind when you change a program. Customizing a feature may have an effect on another feature that you did not intend. Telephone Programming Instructions shows how to enter the program data into system memory. For example : 1 Enter the programming mode.

Programming Manual

1-1

SL1000
2 15-07-01

ISSUE 1.0

tells you to enter the programming mode, dial 150701 from the telephone dial pad. After you do, you will see the message 15-07-01 TEL on the first line of the telephone display. This indicates the program number (15-07), item number (01), and that the options are being set for the extension. The second row of the display KY01 = 01 indicates that Key 01 is being programmed with the entry of 01. The third row allows you to move the cursor to the left or right, depending on which arrow is pressed. To learn how to enter the programming mode, refer to How to Enter Programming Mode on this page.

SECTION 3

HOW TO ENTER PROGRAMMING MODE

To enter programming mode : 1 Go to any working display telephone. In a newly installed system, use extension (port 1). 2 Do not lift the handset. 3 Press Speaker. 4 #

* # *.

5 Dial the system password + Hold. Refer to the following table for the default system passwords. To change the passwords, use 90-02 : Programming Password Setup on page 2-483.

Password

User Name
nec-i tech

Level
1 (MF) 2 (IN)

Programs at this Level

Manufacture Level (MF) : 80-02, 81-04, 81-05, 82-02, 82-05, Installation (IN) : All programs in this section not listed for MF, SA, & SB System Administrator - Level 1 (SA) : 10-01, 10-02, 10-12, 10-13, 10-14, 10-15, 10-16, 10-17, 10-18, 10-23, 1024, 10-25, 10-28, 10-29, 10-45, 12-02, 12-03, 12-04, 12-08, 15-01, 15-07, 15-09, 15-10, 15-11, 20-16, 20-34, 21-07, 21-14, 22-04, 22-11, 22-17, 2508, 30-03, 30-04, 32-02, 45-02, 84-22, 90-03, 90-04, 90-06, 90-07, 90-19, 90-57, 90-58, 90-59, 90-65 System Administrator - Level 2 (SB) : 13-04, 13-05, 13-11, 21-20

******
12345678

0000

admin1

3 (SA)

9999

admin2

4 (SB)

1-2

Introduction

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

SECTION 4

HOW TO EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

To-exit the programming mode : When you are done programming, you must be out of a program option to exit (pressing the MUTE key will exit the program option). 1 Press MUTE key to exit the program options, if needed.

2 Press Speaker. If changes were to the system programming, "Saving System Data" is displayed. 3 The display shows "Complete Data Save" when completed and exits the telephone to an idle mode. To save a customers database, a blank Compact Flash (CF) Card is required. Insert the CF Card into the CPU and, using Program 90-03, save the software to the CF Card. (Program 90-04 is used to reload the customer data if necessary.) Note that a CF Card can only hold one customer database. Each database to be saved requires a separate drive.

CF card CPU card CF Slot (CN2) VMDB-C1

SECTION 5 USING KEYS TO MOVE AROUND IN THE PROGRAMS

Once you enter the programming mode, use the keys in the following chart to enter data, edit data and move around in the menus.

Table 1-1 Keys for Entering Data

When you want to ...
Enter Data into program Next Index Prior Index Select Data 0 ~ 9,

Telephone Programming

Cursor Key (Up)

*, #, Line Key (1 ~ 6)

Cursor Key (Down) Line Key (1 ~ 6)

Programming Manual

1-3

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

When you want to ...

All Clear Register Go Back to Prior Screen Move Cursor Jump Up/Down Delete single character Next Page Toggle between Number/Character While in a Entering Number Prior Page Quit the programming Move Curosr to Left Change Program Number Change Index Number Change Program Number Change Index Number Move Curosr to Right Speaker Exit Flash HOLD Enter MUTE Clear / Back DND / CONF Clear / Back Help

Telephone Programming

Cursor Key (Left) -

Cursor Key (Right)

SECTION 6

PROGRAMMING NAMES AND TEXT MESSAGES

Several programs (e.g., Program 20-16 : Selectable Display Messages) require you to enter text. Use the following chart when entering and editing text. When using the keypad digits, press the key once for the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press the key 2 three times. Press the key six times to display the lower case letter. The name can be up to 12 digits long.

Table 1-2 Keys for Entering Names

Use this keypad digit ...
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

When you want to ...

Enter characters : 1 @ [ ] ^ _ ` { | } Enter characters : A-C, a-c, 2. Enter characters : D-F, d-f, 3. Enter characters : G-I, g-i, 4. Enter characters : J-L, j-l, 5. Enter characters : M-O, m-o, 6. Enter characters : P-S, p-s, 7. Enter characters : T-V, t-v, 8. Enter characters : W-Z, w-z, 9. Enter characters : 0 ! # $ % & ( ) Enter characters : 0

*
#

# = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex : TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use the right arrow Softkey instead to accept and/or add a space.)

*+,-./:;<=>?

1-4

Introduction

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Use this keypad digit ...

Clear/Back Flash

When you want to ...

Clear the character entry one character at a time. Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.

SECTION 7

SYSTEM NUMBER PLAN/CAPACITIES

The following table provides the capacities for the SL1000 system.

Table 1-3 System Number Plan/Capacities

System Number Plan/Capacities System Type
System Analog Caller ID Detector (detected by DSP) Classes of Service Day/Night Mode Numbers Day/Night Service Patterns Dial Tone Detector DTMF Receiver Toll Restriction Classes Verifiable Account Code Table Trunk Trunk Port Number Trunk Ports (Total) : Analog Trunks BRI Trunk Ports T1/E1/PRI Trunk Ports VoIPDB Trunk Ports (VoIPDB & MEMDB is required. Need license to be Max.) External Paging (Use Analog Trunk ports) External MOH (Use Analog Trunk ports) BGM Trunk Port (Use Analog Trunk ports) DID Translation Tables DID Translation Table Entries DISA : Classes of Service Users Ring Groups Trunk Access Maps Trunk Group Numbers 15 15 25 126 25 2014 2509 2204 1407 1405 126 126 48 36 90 132 channels 15 8 4 132 15 800 3506 2006 1207 1207

Number Plan/Capacities

Related Program

Note

16

3 1 1 20 800 2210 2210

Programming Manual

1-5

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

System Number Plan/Capacities System Type

Trunk Routes Extension Telephone Extension Ports Multiline Terminals Single Line Phones/Analog Devices VoIPDB Extensions (SIPMLT/Std) (VoIPDB & MEMDB is required. Need license to be Max. (SIP-Std)) Hybrid Extension Ports: Physical Ports Telephone Extension Number Range Virtual Extension Ports Virtual Extension Number Range Door Boxes Door Box Numbers DSS Consoles Numbers : 60 Button DSS Console Operator Access Number Operator Extension Speed Dialing Speed Dialing Groups Speed Dialing Bins Speed Dialing Table-Common Automated Attendant VRS Message Numbers Conference Conference Circuits Department and Pickup Groups Department (Extension) Group Numbers Call Pickup Group Numbers Hotline Internal Hotline External Hotline Paging and Park Internal Page Group Numbers External Page Group Numbers External Speakers 0, 01 ~ 32 1~3 1~3 3102 3104 3104 128 128 1 ~ 32 1 ~ 32 1601 2302 32 : maximum (16 Parties Per Conference) 1 ~ 100 2506 32 0 ~ 999 900 1302 1302 130103 128 96 128

Number Plan/Capacities
25

Related Program
1406

Note

32

01 ~ 08 1 ~ 8999 ( Extension cannot start with 0 or 9)

* *

* *

50

1104 1104 3202 3202 3001

1 ~ 8999 ( Extension cannot start with 0 or 9) 8 1~8 12 0 (Default) 15

1-6

Introduction

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

System Number Plan/Capacities System Type

Park Group Numbers Park Orbits SMDR SMDR Ports VRS/VM InMail VRS/VM InMail VRS/VM Ports (Need license and MEMDB) VRS Port (Need MEMDB) VRS Attendant Messages VRS Recordable Messages VRS Ports VoIPDB RTP Ports RTCP Ports DSP Resources Passwords Programming Passwords : Level 1 (MF) PCPro/WebPro User Name : Level 2 (IN) PCPro/WebPro User Name : Level 3 (SA) PCPro/WebPro User Name : Level 4 (SB) PCPro/WebPro User Name : Programming Password Users 0 ~ 65534 0 ~ 65535 16 1 16 16 3 100 16 401002 1~2 3503

Number Plan/Capacities
1 ~ 64 1 ~ 64

Related Program
2403 2403

Note

****** nec-i
12345678 tech 0000 admin1 9999 admin2 8

Extension numbers can be one to eight digits long. Refer to the Flexible System Numbering feature in the SL1000 Features and Specifications Manual.

SL1000 needs Power Calculation depending on the system configuration.

Programming Manual

1-7

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

SECTION 8

CONCEPT OF SLOT NUMBER

Each unit installed to the system has a slot number assigned. Some of slot number are fixed to a unit that be installed. Other slots are not fixed to unit but fixed to location where it is installed. Below chart shows the slot and its number :

Main KSU
Slot 0 Base Unit
Slot 4 4th Unit Slot 3 3rd Unit Slot 2 2nd Unit Slot 1 Base Unit C P U

Expansion KSU 1-3

Slot 8/12/16 4th Unit Slot 7/11/15 3rd Unit Slot 6/10/14 2nd Unit Slot 5/9/13 Base Unit E X I F E

1-8

Introduction

Programming the SL1000

SECTION 1 PROGRAMMING YOUR SYSTEM

2
Programming the SL1000

The information contained in this chapter provides the information necessary to properly program your system. The programming blocks are organized into the following programming modes. Programming Modes
Program Number : Program Name
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup on page 2-3 Program 11 : System Numbering on page 2-50 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup on page 2-75 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing on page 2-84 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup on page 2-92 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup on page 2-110 Program 16 : Department Group Setup on page 2-140 Program 20 : System Option Setup on page 2-145 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup on page 2-207 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup on page 2-233 Program 23 : Answer Features Setup on page 2-256 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup on page 2-259 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup on page 2-266 Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing on page 2-281 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup on page 2-292 Program 31 : Paging Setup on page 2-302 Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup on page 2-313 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup on page 2-317 Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup on page 2-329 Program 40 : Voice Recording System on page 2-337 Program 42 : Hotel Setup on page 2-342 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup on page 2-351 Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration on page 2-363 Program 47 : InMail on page 2-368

Programming Manual

2-1

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program Number : Program Name

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System on page 2-406 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk on page 2-423 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension on page 2-437 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP on page 2-454 Program 90 : Maintenance Program on page 2-482 Program 92 : Copy Program on page 2-558

2-2

Programming the SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-01 : Time and Date
Level

SA
Description
Use Program 10-01 : Time and Date to change the system Time and Date through system programming. Extension users can also dial Service Code 828 to change the time if allowed by an extension Class of Service. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07

10
Item Input Data
07 ~ 96 01 ~ 12 01 ~ 31 1 ~ 7 (Sun ~ Sat) 00 ~ 23 00 ~ 59 00 ~ 59

Default
No setting No setting No setting No setting No setting No setting No setting

Description
Enter 2 digits for year (07 ~ 96). Enter 2 digits (01 ~ 12) for the month. Enter 2 digits (01 ~ 31) for the day. Enter digit for the day of the week (1 = Sunday, 7 = Saturday). Enter 2 digits for the hour (00 ~ 23). Enter 2 digits for the minute (00 ~ 59). Enter 2 digits for the second (00 ~ 59).

Year Month Day Week Hour Minute Second

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Clock/Calendar Display/Time and Date

Programming Manual

2-3

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-02 : Location Setup
Level

SA
Description
Program Use Program 10-02 : Location Setup to define the location of the installed system.

Input Data

10

Item No.
01 02 03 04 05

Item
Country Code International Access Code Other Area Access Code Area Code Trunk Access Code

Input Data

Default
No setting 00 0 No setting No setting

Description
Enter the country code. Enter the international access code. Enter the other area access code. Enter the local area code. Enter the trunk access code digits required to place an outgoing call.

Dial (up to four digits) : 0 ~ 9, , #

* * Dial (up to two digits) : 0 ~ 9, , # * Dial (up to six digits) : 0 ~ 9, , # * Dial (up to eight digits) : 0 ~ 9, , # *

Dial (up to four digits) : 0 ~ 9, , #

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-4

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-03 : ETU Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 10-03 : ETU Setup to setup and confirm the Basic Configuration data for each unit. When changing a defined terminal type, first set the type to 0 and then plug the new device in to have the system automatically define it or you may have to reseat the unit. The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed. Program

Input Data For HBI PKG Setup

Physical Port Number 01 ~ 08

10
Default

Item No.

Item

Input Data
0 = No setting 1 = Multi-Line Telephone 2 = SLT 8 = Door Phone 10 = DSS Console 3 ~ 9, 11, 12 = Not Used 1 ~ 128 1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 ~ + 15.5dB) 1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 ~ + 15.5dB) 0 = Hybrid Port 1 = Door Phone 0 = None 1 = 12 Line 2 = 24 Line

01

Terminal Type

02 03 04 05

Logical Port Number Transmit Gain level for SLT Receive Gain level for SLT Select port type

32 32 0

06

Multi-Line Telephone Line

For COIU Unit Setup

Physical Port Number 1~4

Item No.
01 02

Item
Logical Port Number Select port type

Input Data
1 ~ 48 0 = Trunk 1 = Audio Port

Default
0 0

Note

For BRIU PKG Setup

ISDN Line Number 01 ~ 02

Item No.
01 ISDN Line Mode

Item

Input Data
0 = No setting 1 = T-Point 2 = S-Point 3 ~ 5= Not Used 6 = S-Point (Leased Line)

Default
1

Programming Manual

2-5

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item No.
02

Item
Logical Port Number

Input Data
[0 : No setting] = 0 [1 : T-Point] = 1 ~ 126 [2 : S-Point] = 1 ~ 128 [3 ~ 5] = Not Used [6 : S-Point (Leased Line)] = 1 ~ 128

Default
0

The starting port number of a BRI line is displayed. Two logic ports are automatically assigned to a BRI line.
03 04 Connection Type Layer 3 Timer Type

0 = Point-to-Multipoint 1 = Point-to-Point 1~5

0 1

Program

10
05 06 07 08 09

Each timer value of Layer 3 is set up for every type using Program 81-06 (T-Bus).
CLIP Information Announcement Based on this setting, the system includes a Presentation Allowed (1) or Presentation Restricted (0) in the Setup message to allow or deny the Calling Party Number. Program 1501-04 must also be set to 1 if this option is enabled. Connection Bus Mode S-point DDI digits Dial Sending Mode ISDN Protocol definition Dial Information Element ISDN Protocol definition [Only when Dialing Sending Mode (10-03-08) is set for 1 (Overlap Sending] Master/Slave System If set to 0, system is synchronized to network clock. If set to 1, system is not synchronized to the network clock. Networking System No. Service Protocol for S-point Call Busy Mode for S-point 0 = No 1 = Yes 1

0 = Extended passive bus 1 = Short passive bus 0~4 0 = Enblock Sending 1 = Overlap Sending 0 = Keypad Facility 1 = Called Party Number

0 0 1 1

10

0 = Slave System 1 = Master System

11 14 15 17

0 ~ 50 0 = Keypad facility 1 = Specified Protocol for Aspire system 0 = Alerting 1 = Disconnect

0 0 0 0

ISDN Line Ringback Tone 0 = Disable System can provide ringback tone, if set to 1 : 1 = Enable Enable. Type of Number ISDN Protocol definition 0 = Unknown 1 = International number 2 = National number 3 = Network specific number 4 = Subscriber number 5 = Abbreviated number 0 = Unknown 1 = ISDN numbering plan 2 = Data numbering plan 3 = Telex numbering plan 4 = National standard numbering plan 5 = Private numbering plan 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 = Disable 1 = Enable

18

19

Numbering Plan Identification ISDN Protocol definition

22 24

QSIG Operation Mode Power feeding for S-point

0 0

2-6

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 1.0 For PRIU PKG Setup

ISDN Line Number 01 ~ 30

SL1000

Item No.
01

Item
ISDN Line Mode

Input Data
0 = No setting 1 = T-Point 2 = S-Point 3 ~ 5= Not Used 6 = S-Point (Leased Line) [0 : No setting] = 0 [1 : T-Point] = 1 ~ 126 [2 : S-Point] = 1 ~ 128 [3 ~ 5] = Not Used [6 : S-Point (Leased Line)] = 1 ~ 128

Default
1

Note

02

Logical Port Number

The start port number of a PRI line is displayed.

03 04 CRC Multi-frame (CRC4) (Only for 2M = 30ch Mode) Layer 3 Timer Type

Program

10
1 1

0 = off 1 = on 1~5

Each timer value of Layer 3 is set up for each type in Program 81-06 (T-Bus)
05 CLIP Information 0 = No Based on this setting, the system 1 = Yes includes a Presentation Allowed (1) or Presentation Restricted (0) in the Setup message to allow or deny the Calling Party Number. Program 15-01-04 must also be set to 1 if this option is enabled. Length of Cable 0 = Level 1 1 = Level 2 2 = Level 3 3 = Level 4 4 = Level 5 0-4 0 = Enbloc Sending 1 = Overlap Sending 1

06

07 08 09

S-point DDI digits Dial Sending Mode ISDN Protocol definition

0 1 1

Dial Information Element 0 = Keypad Facility ISDN Protocol definition Only 1 = Called Party Number when Dial Sending Mode (10-0308) is set for 1 (Overlap Sending). Master/Slave System (Network Mode only) Networking System Number (Network Mode only) Loss-Of-Signal Detection Limit If the transmit/receive voltage is less than the setting in 10-03-13, the system considers this as Loss-Of-Signal and the PRI does not come up. Note that there are different values based on the setting in 10-03-12 for the PRI. Service Protocol for S-point Call Busy Mode for S-point 0 = Slave System 1 = Master System 0 ~ 50 0 = Level 0 (lowest sensitivity) 1 = Level 1 2 = Level 2 3 = Level 3 4 = Level 4 5 = Level 5 6 = Level 6 7 = Level 7 (highest sensitivity) 0 = Keypad facility 1 = Specified Protocol for Aspire system 0 = Alerting 1 = Disconnect

10 11 13

0 0 2

14 15

0 0

Programming Manual

2-7

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item No.
16 17

Item
Two B-Channel Transfer for PRI Service 0 = off 1 = on

Input Data

Default
0 0

Note

ISDN Ringback Tone 0 = Disable System can provide ringback 1 = Enable tone, by setting 10-03-17 is set to 1 : Enable. Type of Number ISDN Protocol definition. Select the number type for the ISDN circuit. 0 = Unknown 1 = International number 2 = National number 3 = Network Specific number 4 = Subscriber number 5 = Abbreviated number 0 = Unknown 1 = ISDN numbering plan 2 = Data numbering plan 3 = Telex numbering plan 4 = National standard numbering plan 5 = Private numbering plan 0 = Standard (same as NI-2) 1 = reserved 2 = reserved 3 = DMS (A211) 4 = 5ESS 5 = DMS (A233) 6 = 4ESS 7 = NI-2 0 = Auto 1 = 4 Ports 2 = 8 Ports 3 = 12 Ports 4 = 16 Ports 5 = 20 Ports 6 = 24 Ports 7 = 28 Ports 0 = Disable 1 = Enable

18

Program

10

19

Numbering Plan Identification ISDN Protocol definition. Select the Numbering Plan used for the ISDN circuit.

20

Network Exchange Selection Select the ISDN protocol for the ISDN circuit

21

Number of Ports

22

QSIG Operation Mode

For DTI (T1) PKG Setup

Physical Port Number 01 ~ 30

Item No.
01

Item
Logical Port Number The start port number of a T1 line is displayed, and 24 logic ports are automatically assigned to a DTI (T1) line. T1 Signal Format Selection Zero Code Suppression Line Length Selection 1 ~ 126

Input Data

Default
0

02 03 04

0 = D4 (12 Multi Frame) 1 = ESF (24 Multi Frame) 0 = B8ZS 1 = AMI/ZCS 0 = 0 feet ~ 133 feet 1 = 133 feet ~ 266 feet 2 = 266 feet ~ 399 feet 3 = 399 feet ~ 533 feet 4 = 533 feet ~ 655 feet 0 = Internal 1 = External

0 0 0

05

T1 Clock Source

2-8

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
06 Number of Ports

Item
0 = Auto 1 = 4 Ports 2 = 8 Ports 3 = 12 Ports 4 = 16 Ports 5 = 20 Ports

Input Data

Default
0

For E1 PKG Setup

Physical Port Number 01 ~ 30

Program
Default
0 0 1 0

Item No.
01 02 04 05

Item
Logical Port Number Number of channels E1 Clock Source Transmit Pulse Mask 1 ~ 126 0 ~ 30 0 = Internal 1 = External

Input Data

10

0 = 01 to 133 feet 1 = 133 to 266 feet 2 = 266 to 399 feet 3 = 399 to 533 feet 4 = 533 to 655 feet 0 = Double Frame (no CRC-4) 1 = Multiframe Structure (CRC-4) 0 = AMI 1 = HDB3 0 = 0.91/1.70 V 1 = 0.74/0.84 V 2 = 0.59/0.84 V 3 = 0.42/0.45 V 4 = 0.32/0.45 V 5 = 0.21/0.20 V 6 = 0.16/0.10 V 7 = 0.10/not defined

06 07 10

Frame Type Line Coding Receive Input Threshold

0 1 2

For VoIPDB PKG Setup

Physical Port Number 01 ~ 16

Item No.
01 02

Item
Trunk Logical Port Number Trunk Type 1 ~ 126 0 = H.323 1 = SIP

Input Data

Default
0 1

Conditions
When changing a defined terminal type, first set the type to 0 and then plug the new device in to have the system automatically define it, or redefine the type manually. The system must have a unit installed to view/change the options for that type of unit.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-9

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-04 : Music On Hold Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 10-04 : Music on Hold Setup to set the Music on Hold (MOH) source. For internal Music on Hold, the system can provide a service tone callers on hold or one of eleven synthesized selections.

10

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Music on Hold Source Selection

Input Data
0 = Internal MOH 1 = External MOH 2 = Service Tone 3 = VMDB

Default
0

Description
Internal Music Tune - The tune is set by Program 10-04-02. External Source - ACI input via analog trunk port (COI3) (SL1000, program 10-03-02;COIU) . Silence - Callers on hold hear silence. Download File1 : Farewell Song (by Chopin) Download File2 : Die Forelle (by F. Schubert) Download File3 : Plaisir damour (by J.P.E.Martini)

02

Music on Hold Tone [In case Item 1 is 0.] Selection 1 = Download File1 2 = Download File2 3 = Download File3 [In case Item 1 is 1, 2, or 3.] 1 ~ 100 = VRS Message Number Audio Gain Setup 1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 ~ + 15.5 dB)

03

32 (0 dB)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Background Music Music on Hold

2-10

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-06 : ISDN BRI Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 10-06 : ISDN BRI Setup define the TE1 selection and DID mode for DID callers when the BRI feature is used. Program

Input Data
Slot No. 01 ~ 16

10
Default
0 0 No setting No setting

ISDN Line No.

01 ~ 04

Item No.
01 02 03 04

Item
TEI selection DID mode SPID1 SPID2

Input Data
0 = Select by SPID number 1 = Select by Channel ID number 0 = Route by Called Party Number 1 = Route by Redirecting Number Maximum 20 digits

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-11

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-07 : Conversation Recording Resource
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 10-07 : Conversation Record Resource to select the number of Conference circuits to be used for Conversation Recording. Even if this program is set to 0', the telephone conversation recording function can be used. In this case, 32 (16 x 2) circuits will be shared by conference recording and conversation recording. The number of the conference circuits occupied by a conversation recording is two.

10

Input Data
The number of Conversation Recording
0 ~ 16 (0 = No setting, 1 ~ 16 = 2 ~ 32 Conference Resource)

Default
0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Conference

2-12

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-08 : Pre-Ringing Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 10-08 : Pre-Ringing Setup to enable or disable pre-ringing for trunk calls. This sets how a trunk initially rings a telephone. With pre-ringing, a burst of ringing occurs as soon as the trunk LED flashes. The call then continues ringing with the normal ring cadence cycle. Without pre-ringing, the call starts ringing only when the normal ring cadence cycle occurs. This may cause a ring delay, depending on when call detection occurs in reference to the ring cycle. Program

10

Input Data
Item No.
01 Pre-Ringing

Description
0 = No 1 = Yes

Input Data

Default
0

Conditions
Used with Analog Trunks only.

Feature Cross Reference

Central Office Calls, Answering

Programming Manual

2-13

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup to allocate the circuits on the CPU for either DTMF receiving or dial tone detection. The CPU has 20 circuits initially, and an additional 16 circuits are added when a VMDB is installed. By Adding EXIFE system can have up to 132 . These are used as follows: Extension: DTMF receiver for single line telephone Trunk: DTMF receiver for analog trunks, dial tone & busy tone detectionfor analog trunks

10

Input Data
Circuit/Resource Number 01 ~ 132

Item No.
01

Input Data
0 = Common Use 1 = Extension Only 2 = Trunk Only

Default Setting
Resource 01 - 132 = 0 (Common) Resource 01 - 20 are Baic resource (only use Basic Board) Resource 21 - 36 are vmdb resource (only use Basic Board) Resource 37 - 68 are EXIFE1 resource (only use Expansion 1) Resource 69 - 100 are EXIFE2 resource (only use Expansion 2) Resource 101 - 132 are EXIFE3 resource (only use Expansion 3)

Conditions
CPU has 20 Channel DSP resources (receivers)only for basic CPU Unit. VMDB has additional 16 DSP resource witch you can add to CPU. Addition to that EXIFE also each has 32 DSP resource (receivers) only for expand unit In case of 0 (= Common) is selected, and if 14-02-10 (Caller ID receive ability) is set to Yes, DSP resources are always allocated to analog trunk only, not for analog extension. If 14-02-10 is set to No, the DSP resources can be used for both analog trunk and analog extension commonly.

Feature Cross Reference

Caller ID Central Office Calls, Placing Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

2-14

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-12 : CPU Network Setup
Level

SA
Description
Use Program 10-12 : CPU Network Setup to setup the IP Address, Subnet-Mask, and Default Gateway addresses. Caution! If any IP Address or NIC settings are changed, the system must be reset for the changes to take affect. Program

10

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
IP Address

Input Data
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 128.0.0.0 240.0.0.0 254.0.0.0 255.192.0.0 255.248.0.0 255.255.0.0 255.255.224.0 255.255.252.0 255.255.255.128 255.255.255.240 255.255.255.254 192.0.0.0 248.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 255.224.0.0 255.252.0.0 255.255.128.0 255.255.240.0 255.255.254.0 255.255.255.192 255.255.255.248 255.255.255.255 224.0.0.0 252.0.0.0 255.128.0.0 255.240.0.0 255.254.0.0 255.255.192.0 255.255.248.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.224 255.255.255.252

Default
192.168.0.10

Description
Set for CPU.

02

Subnet Mask

255.255.255.0 The setting of Subnet Mask is invalid when all Host Addresses are 0. If the network section is: 0, 127, 128.0, 191.255, 192.0.0, 223.255.255 The setting of Subnet Mask is invalid. 0.0.0.0 IP Address for Router. Determine the offset from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) time. Then enter its respective value. For example, Eastern Time (US and Canada) has a GMT offset of -5. The program data would then be 7 (0 = - 12, 1 = - 11, 2 = - 10, 3 = - 9, 4 = - 8, 5 = - 7, 6 = - 6, 7 = - 5, : 24 = + 12)

03

Default Gateway Time Zone

0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 0~24 (0 = -12 Hours and 24 = +12 Hours)

04

12

Programming Manual

2-15

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item No.
05

Item
NIC Interface

Input Data
0 = Auto Detect 1 = 100Mbps, Full Duplex 2 = 100Mbps, Half Duplex 3 = 10Mbps, Full Duplex 4 = 10Mbps, Half Duplex 0 = No (Disable) 1 = Yes (Enable)

Default
0

Description
NIC Auto Negotiate (CPU)

06

Network Address Port Translation(NAPT) Router Setup

If using an external NAPT Router or not.

Program

07

10

NAPT Router IP 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 Address(De128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 fault Gateway 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 [WAN]) ICMP Redirect 0= (Enable) 1= (Disable)

0.0.0.0

Set the IP address on the WAN side of router. When receiving ICMP redirect message, this determines if the IP Routing Table updates automatically or not. Set for VoIPDB. Set for VoIPDB.

08

09

IP Address

0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 128.0.0.0 240.0.0.0 254.0.0.0 255.192.0.0 255.248.0.0 255.255.0.0 255.255.224.0 255.255.252.0 255.255.255.128 255.255.255.240 255.255.255.254 192.0.0.0 248.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 255.224.0.0 255.252.0.0 255.255.128.0 255.255.240.0 255.255.254.0 255.255.255.192 255.255.255.248 255.255.255.255 224.0.0.0 252.0.0.0 255.128.0.0 255.240.0.0 255.254.0.0 255.255.192.0 255.255.248.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.224 255.255.255.252

172.16.0.10

10

Subnet Mask

255.255.0.0

11

NIC Setup

0 = Auto Detect 1 = 100 Mbps, Full Duplex 2 = Not used 3 = 10 Mbps, Full Duplex 4 = Not used 5 = 1 Gbps, Full Duplex 6 = Not used

Set for VoIPDB.

Conditions
The system must be reset for these changes to take affect.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-16

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup
Level

SA
Description
Use Program 10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup to setup the DHCP Server built into the CPU. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01 02

Item
DHCP Server Mode Lease Time

Input Data
0 = Disable 1 = Enable Days 0 ~ 255 Hour 0 ~ 23 Minutes 0 ~ 59

Default
0 0 day 0 hour 30 minutes

Description
Enable or disable the use of the built-in DHCP Server. Lease Time of the IP address to a client.

10

Pressing the Hold Key increments to the next setting data.

If 101301 is enabled, this setting determines if DHCP resource is enabled or disabled.

05

Last DHCP Data

0 = Disable 1 = Enable

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-17

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-14 : Managed Network Setup
Level

SA
Description
Program Use Program 10-14 : Managed Network Setup to set up the range of the IP address which the DHCP Server leases to a client.

10

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
The Range of the IP address to Lease. When Maximum has not been entered, the maximum value equals the minimum value.

Input Data
Minimum : 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 Maximum : 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

Default
172.16.0.100

Related Program
10-13-04

172.16.5.254

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-18

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-15 : Client Information Setup
Level

SA
Description
Use Program 10-15 : Client Information Setup to set up the client information when the DHCP server needs to assign a fixed IP address to clients. Program

Input Data
Client Number 1 ~ 16

10
Default
00-00-00-00-00-00 0.0.0.0

Item No.
MAC Address 01

Item

Input Data
MAC : 00-00-00-00-00-00 ~ FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF 1.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

IP Address The IP address should be assigned out of the scope range set up in Program 10-14.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-19

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-16 : Option Information Setup
Level

SA
Description
Program Use Program 10-16 : Option Information Setup to set up the option given from the DHCP server to each client.

10

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Router Set the Router IP address.

Input Data
Code number 0 ~ 255 IP address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

Default
3 (Fixed) 0.0.0.0

02

DNS Server Set IP address of DNS Server.

Code number 0 ~ 255 IP address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

6 (Fixed) 0.0.0.0

03

TFTP Server Set the name for the TFTP Server. MGC

Code number 0 ~ 255 Maximum 64 character strings

66 (Fixed) No setting 129 (Fixed) 172.16.0.10

05

Code number 0 ~ 255 IP address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

06

Client Host Name Set the Client Host Name. DNS Domain Name Set the DNS Domain Name.

Code number 0 ~ 255 Maximum 64 character strings

12 (Fixed) No setting 15 (Fixed) No setting 43 (Fixed) 163 (Fixed) 1 43 (Fixed) 164 (Fixed) No setting 43 (Fixed) 141 0.0.0.0

07

Code number 0 ~ 255 Maximum 20 character strings

08

Download Protocol Code number 0 ~ 255 Set Download Protocol used for AutoConSub code number fig (for DR700 Series). 1 = FTP 2 = HTTP

09

Encryption Information Set an Encryption Information used for AutoConfig (for DR700 series).

Code number 0 ~ 255 Sub code number Maximum 128 character strings

10

FTP Server Address Set a FTP Server Address used for AutoConfig.

Code number 0 ~ 255 Sub code number IP address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

11

Config File Name Set a File Name used for AutoConfig.

Code number 0 ~ 255 Sub code number Maximum 15 character strings

43 (Fixed) 151 No setting

2-20

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
12 Vender Class ID

Item

Input Data
Code number 0 ~ 255 Maximum 256 character strings

Default
60 (Fixed) NEC DR700 69 (Fixed) 0.0.0.0

13

SNMP Server

Code number 0 ~ 255 IP address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

14

POP3 Server

Code number 0 ~ 255 IP address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

70 (Fixed) 0.0.0.0

Program

16

SIP Server (IP Address)

Code number 0 ~ 255 IP address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

120 (Fixed)

10

172.16.0.10

17

SIP Server (Domain Name) If there is setting in 10-16-16 this setting will be ignored FTP Server

Code number 0 ~ 255 Maximum 20 character strings Code number 0 ~ 255 IP address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

120 (Fixed) No setting 141 (Fixed)

18

0.0.0.0

19

Config File Name

Code number 0 ~ 255 Maximum 15 character strings

151 (Fixed) No setting 162 (Fixed)

20

LDS Server 1

Code number 0 ~ 255 IP address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

0.0.0.0

21

LDS Server 2

Code number 0 ~ 255 IP address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

162 (Fixed)

0.0.0.0

22

LDS Server 3

Code number 0 ~ 255 IP address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

162 (Fixed)

0.0.0.0

23

LDS Server 4

Code number 0 ~ 255 IP address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

162 (Fixed)

0.0.0.0

24

Next Server IP Address

IP address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 Code number 0 ~ 255 Port: 1 ~ 65535

0.0.0.0

27

SIP Server Receive Port

168 (Fixed) 5080

Programming Manual

2-21

SL1000 Conditions
None

ISSUE 1.0

Feature Cross Reference

None

Program

10

2-22

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-17 : H.323 Gatekeeper Setup
Level

SA
Description
Use Program 10-17 : H.323 Gatekeeper Setup to set the H.323 Gatekeeper information. Program

Input Data
Item
01

Name
Gatekeeper Mode Set IP Address either automatically or manually if using an external Gatekeeper. Gatekeeper IP Address When Program 10-17-01 is set to 2, use this to set the IP Address of the Gatekeeper Preferred Gatekeeper When Program 10-17-01 is set to 1, use this to set the preferred ID of multiple Gatekeepers.

Input Data
0 = No Gatekeeper 1 = Automatic 2 = Manual 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 Maximum 124 characters

Default
0

10

02

0.0.0.0

04

No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-23

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-18 : H.323 Alias Address Setup
Level

SA
Description
Program Use Program 10-18 : H.323 Alias Address Setup to set the alias address registered to the outside H.323 Gatekeeper.

10

Input Data
Number of Alias 1~6

Item
01

Name
Alias Address Set the telephone number (Alias Address) to external gatekeeper. Alias Address Type Set the Alias Address Type to external gatekeeper.

Input Data
Dial up to 12 digits (0 ~ 9, #) 0 = E164

Default

*,

No setting

02

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-24

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-19 : VoIPDB DSP Resource Selection
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 10-19 : VoIPDB DSP Resource Selection to define the criteria for each DSP resource on the VoIPDB unit. Program

Input Data
DSP Resource Number 01 ~ 16

10
Default

Item No.
01

Item
VoIPDB DSP Resource Selection

Input Data

0 = Common use for both IP extensions Resource 1 ~ 16 = 0 and trunks 1 = Use for IP extensions 2 = Use for SIP trunks 3 = Not Used 4 = Not Used 5 = Blocked 6 = Common without unicast paging 7 = Multicast paging 8 = Unicast paging

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-25

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment to define the TCP port/address/etc. for communicating to external equipment.

10

Input Data
Type of External Equipment 1 = CTI Server 2 = Not Used 4 = Not Used 5 = SMDR Output 6 = DIM Output 9 = 1st Party CTI 11 = O&M Server 12 = Traffic Report Output 13 = Room Data Output for Hotel Service 14 = Not Used

Item No.

Item

Input Data

Default
External Device 1 (CTI Server) = 0 External Device 2 (ACD MIS) = 0 External Device 4 (Networking System) = 0 External Device 5 (SMDR Output) = 0 External Device 6 (DIM Output) = 0 External Device 9 (1st Party CTI ) = 0 External Device 11 (O&M Server) = 8010 External Device 12 (Traffic Report Output) = 0 External Device 13 (Room Data Output for Hotel Service) = 0 30 seconds

01

TCP Port

0 ~ 65535

03

Keep Alive Time

1 ~ 255 seconds

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-26

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-23 : SIP System Interconnection Setup
Level

SA
Description
Use Program 10-23 : SIP System Interconnection Setup to determine if the system is interconnected and define the IP address of another system, call control port number and alias address for SL1000 system interconnection. Program

Input Data
System Number 001 ~ 1000

10
Item
System Interconnection IP Address 0 = No (Disable) 1 = Yes (Enable) 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 1 ~ 65535 Up to 12 digits (0 ~ 9)

Item No.
01 02

Input Data

Default
0 0.0.0.0

03 04

Call Control Port Dial Number

1720 Not Set

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-27

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-24 : Daylight Savings Setup
Level

SA
Description
Program Use Program 10-24 : Daylight Savings Setup to set the options for daylight savings. As the telephone system is used globally, these settings define when the system should automatically adjust for daylight savings as it applies to the region in which the system is installed.

10

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Daylight Savings Mode Enable (1) or disable (0) the system ability to adjust the time for daylight savings/standard time.

Input Data
0 = Disable 1 = Enable

Default
0

02

Time for Daylight Savings 00 : 00 ~ 23 : 59 Enter the time of day when the system should adjust for daylight savings time. Start Month (Summer Time) Enter the month when the system should adjust the time for daylight savings time (01 ~ 12). 1 ~ 12 (Jan = 1, 2 = Feb, etc.)

02 : 00

03

04

Start of Week 0 = Last Week of Month Enter the week of the month when the system 0 ~ 5 should adjust the time for daylight savings time. The week will start on the day listed in 10-24-05. Start of Week Day Enter the day of the week when the system should adjust the time for daylight savings time (01 = Sunday, 02 = Monday, etc.). End of Month Enter the month when the system should adjust the time for standard time (01 ~ 12). 1~7 (Sun = 1, Mon = 2, etc.)

05

06

1 ~ 12 (Jan = 1, 2 = Feb, etc.)

10

07

End of Week 0 = Last Week of Month Enter the week of the month when the system 0 ~ 5 should adjust the time for standard time. The week will start on the Day listed in 10-2408. End of Week Day Enter the day of the week when the system should adjust the time for daylight savings time (01 = Sunday, 02 = Monday, etc.). 1~7 (Sun = 1, Mon = 2, etc.)

08

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Clock/Calendar Display/Time and Date

2-28

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-25 : H.323 Gateway Prefix Setup
Level

SA
Description
Use Program 10-25 : H.323 Gateway Prefix Setup to set the gateway prefix registered to the outside gatekeeper. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01 02

Item
Gateway Prefix Entry Gateway Prefix Value When Program 10-25-01 is set as 1 (Off) this setting will be ignored. 0 = Off 1 = On

Input Data

Default
0

10

Up to 12 digits (0 ~ 9,

*, #)

No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-29

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-26 : IP System Operation Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 10-26 : IP System Operation Setup to enable or disable the Peer to Peer feature for SIP MLT and SIP IP stations.

10

Input Data
Item No.
02 03 04 05

Item
RTP Forwarding Mode SIP Peer to Peer Mode DR700 Peer to Peer Mode SIP CTI Mode When SIP CTI Mode is set as 1 (Mode1) it will ignore the setting at 10-26-03.

Input Data
0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Disable 1 = Mode1

Default
0 1 1 0

Note

Conditions
Disabling 10-26-04 results in SIP MLT Station-to-SIP MLT Station calls using a DSP resource. SIP-to-SIP MLT Station does not support Peer to Peer function and will result in using a DSP resource. Disabling 10-26-03 results in SIP IP Station-to-SIP IP Station calls using a DSP resource.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-30

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-28 : SIP System Information Setup
Level

SA
Description
Use Program 10-28 : SIP System Information Setup to set up basic SIP trunking. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Domain Name Set the domain name of the SIP-URL. Host Name Set the host name of the SIP-URL. Transport Protocol Set the protocol for the connection. UserID User ID in the SIP Invite Setup message. Use it for outbound caller ID information if no information is assigned in commands 21-17, 21-19, 15-16, 14-12 and 10-36. A call cannot be completed across the span if there is no outbound CID info. The reason for this is: the from and display portion of the invite message would be blank, and it would not know where the call originated from.

Input Data
Up to 64 Characters (ex. : [email protected]) Up to 48 Characters (ex. : [email protected]) 0 = UDP 1 = TCP Up to 32 Characters When assigning the User ID, the ID may contain only alpha characters. (A space and/or special characters are not allowed in the User ID field). (ex. : [email protected])

Default
None

10

02

None

03 04

0 None

05

Domain Assignment 0 = IP Address If the information from Telco was a domain name 1 = Domain Name ([email protected]) then set to domain. If the information for Telco was a IP address then set to IP Address. IP Trunk Port Binding 0 = Disable Trunk port binding is only used for SIP trunks to 1 = Enable the provider in Non-Registration Mode only. When this is disabled, an inbound call comes in and follows your DID routing but it comes in on the first available trunk. When enabled, the inbound call comes in and follows your normal DID routing but maps to that specified trunk. If that trunk is busy, it sends back a busy unless you build a hunt group. To build the hunt group, it references command 14-12-02 (pilot register ID). This then points you to command 10-36-02. All the numbers with the same pilot are in the same hunt group.

06

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-31

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-29 : SIP Server Information Setup
Level

SA
Description
Program Use Program 10-29 : SIP Server Information Setup to define the SIP Proxy setup for outbound/ inbound. The 10-29 commands are not used in non-registration mode. If entries are made in Program 10-29-xx for a SIP Server and the SIP Server is then removed or not used, the entries in Program 10-29-xx must be set back to their default settings. Even if 10-29-01 is set to 0 (off), the system still checks the settings in the remaining 10-29 programs.

10

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Default Proxy (Outbound) This sets whether the SIP message is always sent through the Default Proxy. Default Proxy (Inbound) Need to be registered in registration mode. This sets whether the SIP message is always received through the Default Proxy. 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On

Input Data

Default
0

Note

02

03

Default Proxy IP Address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 This is optional and used if the provider 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 gives you a proxy address that is different 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 than the registration address. If the provider is using domain names instead of IP addresses, leave this at default. Default Proxy Port Number The port number of the Default Proxy is set. Registrar Mode The mode registered in the registration server is set. Registrar IP Address IP address of the SIP registration server is set. Registrar Port Number The port number of the SIP registration server is set. DNS Server Mode This setting determines if the DNS server is used. DNS Server IP Address If 10-29-08 is 1, this is effective. This sets the IP address of the DNS server. DNS Port Number If 10-29-08 is 1, this is effective. This sets the port number of the DNS server. Registrar Domain Name This sets the domain name of the registration server. Domain Name This specifies the domain name of the SIP server. 0 ~ 65535

0.0.0.0

04

5060

05

0 = None 1 = Manual 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 0 ~ 65535

06

0.0.0.0

07

5060

08

0 = Off 1 = On 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 0 ~ 65535

09

0.0.0.0

10

53

11

Up to 128 Characters

None

12

Up to 64 Characters

None

2-32

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
13

Item
Proxy Host Name This specifies the host name of the SIP server. SIP Carrier Choice This selects the carrier type of the SIP server.

Input Data
Up to 48 Characters

Default
None

Note

14

0~7 0 = Standard 1 = Carrier A 2 = Carrier B 3 = Carrier C 4 = Carrier D 5 = Carrier E 6 = Carrier F 7 = Carrier G 120 ~ 65535 seconds

Program
3600

15

Registration Expiry (Expire) Time This sets the expiration time when the SIP trunk registers to the Sip server. When half the time set here passes, the registration update is automatically done. Register Sub Mode DNS Source Port (10-29-08 must be On) This sets the DNS source port number.

10
0 = Off 1 = On 0 ~ 65535 0 53 60

16 17

18

Registration Retry Interval 30 ~ 65535 seconds This sets interval time to re-send SIP Register once the SIP Register fails

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-33

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-30 : SIP Authentication Information Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 10-30 : SIP Authentication Information Setup to set the authentication options for SIP trunks.

10

Input Data
Item No.
02 03 04

Item
User Name This sets the user name of the SIP trunk. Password This sets the SIP trunk password. Authentication Trial This is how many times it will try an authenticate before timing out and not registering.

Input Data
Up to 64 Characters Up to 32 Characters 0~9

Default
None None 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-34

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-33 : SIP Registrar/Proxy Information Basic Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 10-33 : SIP Registrar/Proxy Information Basic Setup to set the registrar/proxy options for SIP extensions. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Registration Expire Time After this time expires, the UAs are forced to reregister with the CPU. This allows the CPU to keep a current location of the entire end UAs.

Input Data
60 ~ 65535

Default
3600

10

02

Authentication Mode 0 = Disable Check here if a password is desired for the IP 1 = Enable SIP phones to register. When checked, 1505-16 must have a password entered and also the SIP phone must have the same password. When using Authentication, the station number is the authorization name. Registrar/Proxy Domain Name Set the domain name of the SIP proxy. Registrar/Proxy Host Name Set the domain name of the SIP proxy. Up to 64 Characters Up to 48 Characters

03 04

None None

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-35

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-36 : SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 10-36 : SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup to set the SIP trunk registration information.

10

Input Data
Register ID 1 ~ 31

Item No.
01

Item
Registration This setting determines if the SIP trunk information is registered. User ID This sets the SIP trunk User ID. Authentication User ID This sets the SIP trunk Authentication User ID. Authentication Password This sets the SIP trunk authentication password.

Input Data
0 = Disable 1 = Enable Up to 32 Characters Up to 64 Characters

Default
0

02 03

None None

04

Up to 32 Characters

None

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-36

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-37 : UPnP Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 10-37 : UPnP Setup to set the UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) options for SIP trunks. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01 02

Item
UPnP Mode Router must support UPnP. Retry Time Set interval time to re-check the Router for the WAN IP address. When this set as 0 it will not retry.

Input Data
0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0, 60 ~ 3600 (1 ~ 59 cannot be input)

Default
0 60

10

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-37

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-39 : Fractional Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 10-39 : Fractional Setup to enable or disable the ability to use fractional T1 or PRI.

Input Data

10

Item No.
01 Fractional

Item

Input Data
0 = Disable 1 = Enable

Default
0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-38

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-40 : IP Trunk Availability
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 10-40 : IP Trunk Availability to enable or disable the ability to use SIP trunks and assign the number of ports if IP Trunk is enabled. Program

Input Data
Slot Number 0

10
Default
0 0

Item No.
01 02

Item
IP Trunk Availability Number of Ports 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 ~ 16 (Port) 0 = 0 Port 4 = 4 Port 8 = 8 Port : 16 = 16 Port

Input Data

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-39

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-42 : Virtual Loop Back Port Setting
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 10-42 : Virtual Loop Back Port Setting to set the data for the Virtual Loop Back Port.

Input Data

10

Item No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07

Item
Number of Loop Back Ports Logical Trunk Port Number Logical Station Port Number Layer 3 Timer Type Calling Party Number S-point DDI digits Call Busy Mode for S-point

Input Data
0 ~ 30 (0 = No setting) 1 ~ 126 1 ~ 128 1~5 0 = No 1 = Yes 0~4 0 = Alerting Message 1 = Disconnect Message

Default
0 0 0 1 1 0 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-40

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-45 : IP Routing Table Setup
Level

SA
Description
Use Program 10-45 : IP Routing Table Setup to set up the IP Routing Table. Program

Input Data
Routing Table Number 001 ~ 100

10
Default
0.0.0.0

Item No.
01

Item
Network Address Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.0 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.0 ~ 223.255.255.254 128.0.0.0 240.0.0.0 254.0.0.0 255.192.0.0 255.248.0.0 255.255.0.0 255.255.224.0 255.255.252.0 255.255.255.128 255.255.255.240 255.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

Input Data

02

192.0.0.0 248.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 255.224.0.0 255.252.0.0 255.255.128.0 255.255.240.0 255.255.254.0 255.255.255.192 255.255.255.248 255.255.255.255

224.0.0.0 252.0.0.0 255.128.0.0 255.240.0.0 255.254.0.0 255.255.192.0 255.255.248.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.224 255.255.255.252

0.0.0.0

03

Default Gateway

0.0.0.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-41

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-46 : DR700 Server Information Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 10-46 : DR700 Server Information Setup to set up the information of DR700 Server.

10

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item

Input Data

Default
0

Related Program

Register Mode 0 = Normal Normal: 1 = Auto When the phone boots up, it re2 = Manual ports the ext. assigned in the phone or chooses the next available extension in the system. Password is not required. Auto: If set to Auto, the SIP user name and password must be entered on the actual IP phone. These settings must match 84-22/15-05- 27, or the phone does not come on-line. Manual: When the phone boots up, it prompts user to enter a user ID and password before logging in. It checks this user ID/password against 84-22/15-05-27. If there is no match, the phone does not come online. Server Name Up to 32 characters Assign the Server name to be used in the SIP URL. Register Port Assign the port number in which the SIP messages are sent to on the VoIPDB. This same port number must be assigned in the SIP Multiline terminals. If this command is changed, it requires a CPU reset. Encryption Mode Encryption Type One Time Password Start Port 0 ~ 65535

04

sipphd

06

5080

07 08 09 10 11

0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Mode 1 Up to 10 characters (0 ~ 9, 1 ~ 128

0 0

*, #)

None 1 224.0.0.10

10-46-07 10-46-01

Multicast IP Address 224.0.0.0 ~ 239.255.255.255 This sets the Multicast IP address so that two or more main devices dont overlap on the same network, or if Multicast is used by other IP services. Multicast Port Subscribe Session Port 0 ~ 65535 0 ~ 65535

12 13

30000 5081

2-42

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
14

Item
NAT Mode When the system controls the SIP multiline terminal via the NAT router, this system data is set to On. 0 = Off 1 = On

Input Data

Default
0

Related Program

Conditions
None Program

Feature Cross Reference

None

10

Programming Manual

2-43

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-48 : License Activation
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 10-48 : License Activation to turn on the license issued from the license server.

Input Data

10

Item No.
01 02 03

Item
Software Key Code Activation Code Feature Code 20-digit character

Input Data

Default
None None None

8-digit hexadecimal number 7-digit number

Conditions
The Key Operation for input item 03 is as follows;
Hold Key Edit next feature code Up to 10 feature code is possible to input at once. Register the license when 10th feature code is edited. Edit previous feature code Register the license

Line Key1 Line Key2

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-44

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-49 : License File Activation
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 10-49 : License File Activation to enable the command to save the license file via CF Card which is issued from the license server. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Save License File on CF Card

Input Data
Dial 1 + Hold (Press Hold to cancel.)

10

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-45

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-50 : License Information
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 10-50 : License Information to confirm license information that is stored in a system.

Input Data

10

Item No.
01 02 03 04 License Name License Quantity

Item
None 0 ~ 32767 0 ~ 32767 0 ~ 9999

Read Data

Campaign License Quantity Campaign License Remaining Days

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-46

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-51 : PRI/T1/E1 Selection of PRI
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 10-51 : PRI/T1/E1 Selection of PRI to select whether the unit works as PRI, T1 or E1. Program

Input Data
Slot Number 01 ~ 12

10
Default
0 = PRI

Item No.
01

Item
PRI/T1/E1 Selection Chose whether the unit works as PRI, T1 or E1. 0 = PRI 1 = T1 2 = E1

Input Data

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-47

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-52 : Free/Demo License Information
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 10-52 : Free/Demo License Information to display information on free of charge/Demo license.

10

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Remaining days of Free/Demo License 0 ~ 9999

Read Data

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-48

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-61 : Relay Port Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 10-61 : Relay Port Setup to defines the relay port type on the 408M . Program

Input Data
Relay Port No. 1~8

10
Default
0

Item No.
01

Item
Relay Type

Input Data
0 = No setting 1 = External MOH 2 = BGM resource 3 = External Speaker 4 = Door Phone 10-61-01 = 1 or 2 : Not Use 10-61-01 = 3 : 1 ~ 3 External Speaker Message No. 10-61-01 = 4 : 1 ~ 8 Door Phone No.

02

Destination Selection

0 (Not Used)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-49

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-01 : System Numbering
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 11-01 : System Numbering to set the system numbering plan. The numbering plan assigns the first and second digits dialed and affects the digits an extension user must dial to access other extensions and features, such as service codes and trunk codes. If the default numbering plan does not meet the site requirements, use this program to tailor the system numbering to the site.
Caution! Improperly programming this option can adversely affect system operation. Make sure you thoroughly understand the default numbering plan before proceeding. If you must change the standard numbering, use the chart for Table 2-1 System Numbering Default Settings on the next page to keep careful and accurate records of your changes. Before changing your numbering plan, use PC Pro to make a backup copy of your system data.

11

Changing the numbering plan consists of three steps: Step1 : Enter the digit (s) you want to change You can make either single or two digit entries. In the Dialed Number column in the Table 2-1 System Numbering Default Settings on the next page, the nX rows (e.g., 1X) are for single digit codes. The remaining rows (e.g., 11, 12, etc.) are for two digit codes. Entering a single digit affects all the Dialed Number entries beginning with that digit. For example, entering 6 affects all number plan entries beginning with 6. The entries you make in step 2 and step 3 below affect the entire range of numbers beginning with 6. (For example, if you enter 3 in step 2 the entries affected are 600 ~ 699. If you enter 4 in step 2 below, the entries affected are 6000 ~ 6999.) Entering two digits lets you define codes based on the first two digits a user dials. For example, entering 60 allows you to define the function of all codes beginning with 60. In the default program, only and # use 2-digit codes. All the other codes are single digit. If you enter a two digit code between 0 and 9, be sure to make separate entries for all the other two digit codes within the range as well. This is because in the default program all the two digit codes between 0 and 9 are undefined.

Defining codes based on more than 2 digits require a secondary program (Program 11-20) to define the codes. Step 2 : Specify the length of the code you want to change After you specify a single or two digit code, you must tell the system how many digits comprise the code. This is the Number of Digits Required column in the Table 2-1 System Numbering Default Settings on the next page. Step 3: Assign a function to the code selected After entering a code and specifying its length, you must assign its function. This is the Dial Type column in the Table 2-1 System Numbering Default Settings on the next page. The choices are:
Dial Types
0 1

Dial Type Description

--- Not Used --Service Code

Related Program

11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) on page 2-60 11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) on page 2-63 11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) on page 2-66 11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel) on page 2-69 11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access) on page 2-71 11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup on page 2-72

2-50

Program 11 : System Numbering

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Dial Types
2

Dial Type Description

Extension Number

Related Program
11-02 : Extension Numbering on page 2-56 11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering on page 2-57 11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers on page 2-58 11-09-01 : Trunk Access Code 11-09-02 : Trunk Access Code 20-17 : Operator Extension on page 2-175 44-xx 11-20 : Dial Extension Analyze Table on page 2-74

3 4 5 6 9

Trunk Access Code Special Trunk Access Operator Access F-Route Access Dial Extension Analyze

Program Changing the Dial Type for a range of codes can have a dramatic affect on how your system operates. Assume, for example, the site is a hotel that has room numbers from 100 ~ 399. To make extension numbers correspond to room numbers, you should use Program 11-02 to reassign extension numbers on each floor from 100 to 399. (Other applications might also require you to change entries in Program 11-10 ~ 11-16.)

11

Default
See the following tables for default settings.

Table 2-1 System Numbering Default Settings

Dial Types : 1 = Service Code, 2 = Extension Number, 3 = Trunk Access, 4 = Special Trunk Access, 5 = Operator Access, 6 = Flexible Routing, 9 = Dial Extension Analyze, 0 = Not Used Dialed Number of Digits Required Default
1X 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 10 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Dial Type Default

2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

New

New

1#

2X 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Programming Manual

2-51

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Dial Types : 1 = Service Code, 2 = Extension Number, 3 = Trunk Access, 4 = Special Trunk Access, 5 = Operator Access, 6 = Flexible Routing, 9 = Dial Extension Analyze, 0 = Not Used Dialed Number of Digits Required Default
28 29 20 2 0 0 0 0 0

Dial Type Default

0 0 0 0 0

New

New

Program

2#

11

3X 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 3

3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3#

4X 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 40 4

3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

4#

5X 51 52 53

4 0 0 0

2 0 0 0

2-52

Program 11 : System Numbering

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Dial Types : 1 = Service Code, 2 = Extension Number, 3 = Trunk Access, 4 = Special Trunk Access, 5 = Operator Access, 6 = Flexible Routing, 9 = Dial Extension Analyze, 0 = Not Used Dialed Number of Digits Required Default
54 55 56 57 58 59 50 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Dial Type Default

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

New

New

Program

5#

11

6X 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 60 6

3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

6#

7X 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 70 7

3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7#

Programming Manual

2-53

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Dial Types : 1 = Service Code, 2 = Extension Number, 3 = Trunk Access, 4 = Special Trunk Access, 5 = Operator Access, 6 = Flexible Routing, 9 = Dial Extension Analyze, 0 = Not Used Dialed Number of Digits Required Default
8X 81 82 83 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Dial Type Default

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

New

New

Program

84 85 86 87 88 89 80 8

11

8#

9X 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 90 9

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

9#

0X 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2-54

Program 11 : System Numbering

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Dial Types : 1 = Service Code, 2 = Extension Number, 3 = Trunk Access, 4 = Special Trunk Access, 5 = Operator Access, 6 = Flexible Routing, 9 = Dial Extension Analyze, 0 = Not Used Dialed Number of Digits Required Default
00 0 0 0 0

Dial Type Default

0 0 0

New

New

0#

*X *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9 *0 ** *#
#X #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #0 #

4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Program

11

0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 2

0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

##

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Flexible System Numbering

Programming Manual

2-55

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-02 : Extension Numbering
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 11-02 : Extension Numbering to set the extension number. The extension number can have up to eight digits. The first/second digit (s) of the number should be assigned in Program 11-01 or Program 11-20. This allows an employee to move to a new location (port) and retain the same extension number.

11

Input Data
Extension Port Number 001 ~ 128

Item No.
01

Extension Number
Dial (Up to 4 digits)

Description
Set up extension numbers for multiline telephones, single line telephones and IP telephones.

Extension number assignments cannot be duplicated in Programs 11-02, and 11-07.

Default
Extension Port Number
001 ~ 128

Extension Number
200 ~ 327

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Department Calling Flexible System Numbering Intercom

2-56

Program 11 : System Numbering

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering to define the virtual extension numbers. The extension number can have up to four digits. The first/second digit (s) of the number should be assigned in Program 11-01 or Program 11-20. Program

Input Data
Virtual Extension Numbers 001 ~ 050

11
Virtual Extension Number
Dial (Up to 4 digits)

Item No.
01

Description
Set up Virtual Extension numbers.

The extension number cannot be duplicated in Programs 11-02 and 11-07.

Default
Virtual Port Number
1 ~ 50

Extension Number
No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Flexible System Numbering

Programming Manual

2-57

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers to assign a pilot number to each Department Group set up in Program 16-02. The pilot number is the number users dial for Department Calling and Department Step Calling. The pilot number can have up to four digits. The first and second digits of the number should be assigned in Program 11-01 or Program 11-20 as type 2.

11

Input Data
Department (Extension) Group Number 01 ~ 32

Item No.
01

Extension Group Pilot Number

Dial (Up to 4 digits)

Description
Use this program to assign department group pilot numbers. The number set up by Program 11-02 (Extension Numbering) cannot be used. The extension number cannot be duplicated in Programs 11-02 and 11-07.

Related Program
16-01 : Department (Extension) Group Basic Data Setup 16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions 16-03 : Secondary Department Group

Default
No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Department Calling Department Step Calling

2-58

Program 11 : System Numbering

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-09 : Trunk Access Code
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 11-09 : Trunk Access Code to assign the trunk access code. The trunk access code can be set from 1 ~ 8 digits which is defined to type 3 and 4 in Program 11-01. This is the code extension users dial to access Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route). The Individual Trunk Access Code is used when Trunk Group Routing is desired for an outgoing line.
Caution! The digit 9 is defined in Program 11-01 as Dial Type ( ) with the Number of Digits Required set to ( ). If you change the trunk access code in Program 11-09, you must make the corresponding changes in Program 11-01.

Program

11

Input Data
Item No.
01

Trunk Access Code

Dial (Up to four digits)

Description
Use this program to assign the trunk access code. This is the code extension users dial to access Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route).

Default
0

Related Program
11-01 : System Numbering 14-01 ~ 07 : Basic Trunk Data Setup 14-05 : Trunk Group 14-06 : Trunk Group Routing 21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions 11-01 : System Numbering 14-01 ~ 07: Basic Trunk Data Setup 14-05 : Trunk Group 14-06 : Trunk Group Routing 21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions 21-15 : Indiviidual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions

02

2nd Trunk Route Access Code

Use this program to define additional trunk access codes. When a user dials the Alternate Trunk Route Access Code, the system routes their call to the Alternate Trunk Route.

No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route) Central Office Calls, Placing Trunk Group Routing

Programming Manual

2-59

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator)
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) to customize the Service Codes for the System Administrator. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-11 ~ 11-16. The following chart shows: The number of each code (01 ~ 50). The function of the Service Code. The type of telephones that can use the Service Code. The default entry. For example, dialing item 26 allows users to force a trunk line to disconnect.

11

Input Data
Item No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 11 12 16

Item
Night Mode Switching Change of music on hold tone Setting the System Time Storing Common Speed Dialing Numbers Storing Group Speed Dialing Numbers Setting the Automatic Transfer for Each Trunk Line Canceling the Automatic Transfer for Each Trunk Line Setting the Destination for Automatic Trunk Transfer Charging Cost Display by the Supervisor Entry Credit for Toll Restriction Night Mode Switching for Other Group Leaving Message Waiting (Requires CPU to be licensed for Hotel/Motel) Dial Block by Supervisor Off-Premise Call Forward by Door Box VRS - Record/Erase Message Define Service Code for VRS message recording or erasing. VRS - General Message Playback VRS - Record or Erase General Message

Terminals
MLT, SLT MLT MLT MLT MLT MLT MLT MLT MLT MLT MLT MLT

Default
818 881 828 853 854 833 834 835 771 774 718 726

Related Program
12-xx 20-07-01 10-04

Note

24-04-01 24-04-01 24-04-01

12-xx 20-07-01 11-11-09

17 18 20

MLT MLT MLT, SLT

701 822 716

90-19 13-05 20-07-13

21 22

MLT, SLT MLT, SLT

711 712

20-07-14 20-07-15

2-60

Program 11 : System Numbering

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
23 24 25 26 27 32 33 34 35 41 42 43 44

Item
SMDR - Extension Accumulated Printout Code SMDR - Group Accumulated Printout Code Account Code Accumulated Printout Code Forced Trunk Disconnect Trunk Port Disable for Outgoing Calls Set Private Call Refuse Entry Caller ID Refuse Set Caller ID Refuse Dial-In Mode Switching Date Setting Maintenance Service VRS Incoming Cutting the telephone power Sets the Service Code for power cutting. (for Administrator) PRG11-10-44 Input dial is Max 4 digits. Room Monitor Permit Sets Service Code (SC) for Room monitor on/off to terminal. SC+1+Extension Number ; Room Monitor enable SC+0+Extension Number ; Room Monitor disable Watch Message Setting Service Code setting for Watching message recording to VRS Warning Message Setting Service Code setting for Warning message recording to VRS. Auto Dial Setting for Security Sensor Service Code setting for destination number when Warning mode detected. Auto Dial Setting for Remote Inspection Service Code setting for destination number when remote inspection detects no answer Night-mode Skip (Own Group)

Terminals
MLT MLT MLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT MLT MLT MLT, SLT

Default
721 722 723 724 745 746 747 748 709 789 743 878 831

Related Program
20-07-18 20-07-19 20-07-20 20-07-11 20-07-12 14-01-27 20-07-24 20-07-25 14-01-27 20-07-25 20-07-26 20-07-30

Note

Program

11

13-04 15-02-55

45

MLT, SLT

710

46

MLT, SLT

714

47

MLT, SLT

715

48

MLT

717

49

MLT

719

50

MLT, SLT

787

MLT = Multiline Terminal SLT = Single Line Telephone

Programming Manual

2-61

SL1000 Conditions
None

ISSUE 1.0

Feature Cross Reference

None

Program

11

2-62

Program 11 : System Numbering

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation)
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) to customize the Service Codes which are used for registration and setup. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10, and 11-12 ~ 11-16. The following chart shows: The number of each code (01 ~ 69 ). The function of the Service Code. What type of telephones can use the Service Code. The default entry. For example, users to turn on or turn off Background Music by dialing the number set at item 18. Program

11

Input Data
Item No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

Item
Call Forward - All Call Forward - Busy Call Forward - No Answer Call Forward - Busy/No Answer Call Forward - Both Ring --- Not Used --Call Forwarding - Follow-Me Do Not Disturb Answer Message Waiting Cancel All Messages Waiting Cancel Message Waiting Alarm Clock Display Language Selection for Multiline Terminal Text Message Setting Enable Handsfree Incoming Intercom Calls Force Ringing of Incoming Intercom Calls Programmable Function Key Programming (2-Digit Service Codes) BGM On/Off Key Touch Tone On/Off Change Incoming CO and ICM Ring Tones

Terminals
MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT

Default
848 #1 845 844 842

Related Program

Note

MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT MLT MLT MLT MLT

846 847

873 871 827 778 836 821 823 851 20-09-05 20-02-12 20-09-05 20-02-12 15-07 11-11-38 20-01-06 15-02

*0

11-10-16

18 19 20

MLT MLT MLT

825 824 820 15-02

Programming Manual

2-63

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item No.
21 22 23 24

Item
Check Incoming Ring Tones Extension Name Programming Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL Change Station Class of Service Allows an extension user to change the COS of another extension. Must be allowed in Program 20-13-28. Automatic Transfer Setup for Each Extension Group Automatic Transfer Cancellation for Each Extension Group Destination of Automatic Transfer Each Extension Group Delayed Transfer for Every Extension Group Delayed Transfer Cancellation for Each Extension Group DND Setup for Each Extension Group DND Cancellation for Each Extension Group --- Not Used --Dial Block Temporary Toll Restriction Override Pilot Group Withdrawing Toll Restriction Override Ring Volume Set Programmable Function Key Programming (3-Digit Service Codes) --- Not Used --Tandem Ringing Transfer Dial Setting for Out of Range Headset Mode Switching Set/Cancel Call Forward All (Split) Set/Cancel Call Forward Busy (Split) Set/Cancel Call Forward No Answer (Split) Set/Cancel Call Forward Busy No Answer (Split)

Terminals
MLT MLT MLT MLT

Default
811 800 779 777

Related Program

Note

15-01

20-13-28

Program

11

25 26

MLT, SLT MLT, SLT

702 703

20-11-17 24-05

27

MLT

704

20-11-17 24-05 20-11-17 24-05 24-02-08 20-11-17

28

MLT, SLT

705

29

MLT, SLT

706

30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

MLT, SLT MLT, SLT

707 708

MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT MLT

700 875 750 763 829 852 15-07 11-11-17 21-14 21-07

40 41 42 43 45 46 47 48

MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT

744 889 788 782 783 784 785

15-07 30-03 13-06

24-09 24-09 24-09 24-09

2-64

Program 11 : System Numbering

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
49 50 51 52 53 54

Item
Set/Cancel Call Forward Both Ring (Split) Set Message Waiting Indication Cancel Message Waiting Indication Set/Cancel Call Forward All Destination (No Split) Set/Cancel Call Forward Busy Destination (No Split) Set/Cancel Call Forward No Answer Destination (No Split) Call Forward Busy No Answer Destination (No Split) Call Forward with Personal Greeting Call Forward to Attendant except Busy Call Forward to Attendant/No Answer Headset Mode Switching Dial Control Key Operation Automatic SIP Trunk Transfer IntraMail Language Selection for own extension IntraMail Language Selection for specific extension

Terminals
MLT, SLT SLT SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT

Default
786 No setting No setting 791 792 793

Related Program
24-09

Note

24-09 24-09 24-09

Program

11

55 58 59 60 65 66 67 68 69

MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT MLT MLT, SLT MLT,SLT MLT,SLT

794 795 796 797 798 877 No setting 764 765

24-09

15-01-08 15-01-09

10-29-14 47-02-16 20-13-53 47-02-16

MLT = Multiline Terminal SLT = Single Line Telephone

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-65

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access)
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) to customize the Service Codes which are used for service access. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10, 11-11, and 11-14 through 11-16. The following chart shows: The number of each code (01 ~ 64). The function of the Service Code. The type of telephones that can use the Service Code. The default entry. For example, dialing (Item 05) cancels a previously set Camp- On. Programs that may be affected with the changing the code.

11

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Bypass Call Activating Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override. This code is available only if you disable the voice mail Single Digit dialing code in Program 11-16-09. Conference Override (Off-Hook Signaling) Set Camp-On Cancel Camp-On Switching of Voice Call and Signal Call Step Call Barge-In Change to STG (Department Group) All Ring Station Speed Dialing Group Speed Dialing Last Number Dial Saved Number Dial Trunk Group Access Specified Trunk Access Clear Last Number Dialing Data Clear Saved Number Dialing Data Internal Group Paging External Paging Meet-Me Answer to Specified Internal Paging Group

Terminals
MLT, SLT

Default
807

Related Program

Note

02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 20 21

MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT

826 809 850 870 812 808 810 780 #2 #4 #5 815 804 #9 876 885 801 803 864 31-02-01 31-01-01 16-02

2-66

Program 11 : System Numbering

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 51 52 53 54

Item
Meet-Me Answer to External Paging Meet-Me Answer in Same Paging Group Combined Paging Direct Call Pickup - Own Group Call Pickup for Specified Group Call Pickup Call Pickup for Another Group Direct Extension Call Pickup Specified Trunk Answer Park Hold Answer for Park Hold Group Hold Answer for Group Hold Station Park Hold Door Box Access Common Canceling Service Code General Purpose Indication Flash on Trunk lines Answer No-Ring Line (Universal Answer) Callback Test for SLT Enabled On Hook When Holding (SLT) Answer On Hook When Holding (SLT) Call Waiting Answer/Split Answer Splitting (switching) between calls Account Code VM Access Live Monitoring Live Recording at SLT VRS Routing for ANI/DNIS Use when setting up ANI/DNIS Routing to the VRS Automated Attendant. Using the Transfer feature, this also allows a call to be transferred to the VRS. E911 Alarm Shut Off Enter the Service Code that an extension user can dial to shut off the E911 Alarm Ring. Tandem Trunking

Terminals
MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT SLT MLT, SLT SLT SLT SLT SLT SLT MLT, SLT MLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT

Default
865 863

Related Program

Note

31-02-01 31-02-01 31-07

*1
856 868

23-02 23-02 23-02

Program

869

772 #6

**
24-03 24-03

11

832 862 773 802

*6

883 #3 #0 899 849 859 894 ##

*9

15-07-56 15-07-57

14-05 14-06

15-03-07 15-03-08 11-12-03

725 754 882

*8

56

MLT

886

21-01-13 21-01-14

57

MLT, SLT

#8

Programming Manual

2-67

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item No.
58

Item
Transfer Into Conference Assign the Service Code a user dials to Transfer a call to a Conference call. Trunk Drop Operation for SLT Directory Dialing Security Sensor Reset Service Code setting for cancel Warning message sending and emergency call. Watch Mode Start Service Code (SC) setting for on/off watch mode. SC+1;Watch mode start SC+0; Watch mode end. Security Sensor Mode Start Service Code (SC) setting for on/off security sensor. SC+1; Start sensor detection SC+0; Ignore sensor detection

Terminals
MLT, SLT

Default
884

Related Program

Note

59 60 62

SLT MLT MLT,SLT

760 887 816

Program

11

63

MLT,SLT

817

64

MLT,SLT

819

MLT = Multiline Terminal SLT = Single Line Telephone

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-68

Program 11 : System Numbering

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel)
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel) to customize the Service Codes which are used with the Hotel/Motel feature. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10 ~ 11-12, 11-15 and 11-16. The Service Codes can be used only at telephones registered as hotel terminals in Program 42-02. The following chart shows: The number of each code (01 ~ 19). The function of the Service Code. The type of telephones that can use the Service Code. The default entry. Program

11

Input Data
Item No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

Item
Set DND for Own Extension Cancel DND for Own Extension Set DND for Other Extension Cancel DND for Other Extension Set Wake Up Call for Own Extension Cancel Wake Up Call for Own Extension Set Wake Up Call for Other Extension Cancel Wake Up Call for Other Extension Set Room to Room Call Restriction Cancel Room to Room Call Restriction (Hotel) Change Toll Restriction Class for Other Extension Check-In Check-Out Room Status Change for Own Extension Room Status Change for Other Extension Room Status Output Hotel Room Monitor Set Hotel PMS Code Restriction Hotel Room Data Set

Terminals
MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT, SLT MLT MLT, SLT MLT MLT, SLT

Default
727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 770 766 No setting

MLT = Multiline Terminal SLT = Single Line Telephone

Conditions
None

Programming Manual

2-69

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Feature Cross Reference

Hotel/Motel

Program

11

2-70

Program 11 : System Numbering

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access)
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access) to customize the special access Service Codes which are used by the administrator in the Hotel/Motel feature. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10 ~ 11-14 and 11-16. The following chart shows: The number of each code (01 ~ 14). The function of the Service Code. What type of telephones can use the Service Code. The default entry. Programs that may be affected when changing the code. Program

11

Input Data
Item No.
01 05 09 11 12 13 14

Item
Remote Maintenance System Programming Mode, Log-On Transfer to Incoming Ring Group Ethernet Port Reset Extension Data Swap Remote Access from DISA Modem Access

Terminals

Default
830

Related Program

MLT

No setting No setting MLT No setting No setting 840 92-04 22-02

* #*

11-01

MLT = Multiline Terminal SLT = Single Line Telephone

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Hotel/Motel

Programming Manual

2-71

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup to customize the one-digit Service Codes used when a busy or ring back signal is heard. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10 ~ 11-15. The following chart shows: The number of each code (01 ~ 11). The function of the Service Code. The default entry. For example, dialing 1 (Item 03) when calling an extension switches the call from either a voice or signal call (depending on how it is currently defined). Programs that may be affected by changing these codes.

11

Input Data
Item No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 09 10 11 Step Call Barge-In Switching of Voice/Signal Call Intercom Off-Hook Signaling Camp-On DND/Call Forward Override Bypass Message Waiting Access to Voice Mail (Department) STG All Ring Mode Station Park Hold

Item

Default
4 No setting 1

Related Program

Note

*
# No setting 0 5 No setting No setting 16-01-05

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-72

Program 11 : System Numbering

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-19 : Remote Conference Pilot Number Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 11-19 : Remote Conference Pilot Number Setup to assign the pilot number to be used for the Remote Conference. This is the number that outside parties will call in order to connect to a conference. Program

Input Data
Conference Group Number 1~4

11
Remote Conference Group Pilot Number
Dial (Up to 4 digits)

Item No.
01

Default
Note

Related Program
20-13-46 20-34

No Remote Conference Pilot Numbers assigned to any Conference Group (1 ~ 4).

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Conference, Remote

Programming Manual

2-73

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-20 : Dial Extension Analyze Table
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 11-20 : Dial Extension Analyze Table to define the dial type based on three or more digits. This program is relevant only if digits in 11-01-01 are set to 9 (Dial Extension Analyze).

11

Input Data
Dial Extension Analyze Table 001 ~ 128

Item No.
01 02

Dial Extension Analyze Table

Dial (Up to four digits : 0, 1 ~ 9, #, Type of Dials : 0 = Not used 1 = Service Code 2 = Extension Number 5 = Operator Access 6 = F-Route Access

Default
No setting 0

Related Program
11-01 11-01

*, @)

Conditions
When the system uses the Dial Extension Analyze Table to determine the dial type, the lower table has priority. For example, if Table 1 has 211 defined and Table 2 has 2113 defined, Table 1 is used to determine the dial type.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-74

Program 11 : System Numbering

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup to set up the Night Mode options. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01 02

Item
Manual Night Mode Switching Automatic Night Mode Switching Night mode switch operating mode

Input Data
0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Not used 1 ~ 8 (Operation Mode1 - 8)

Default
1 0

Description
Allow/Prevent a sactivating Night Service by dialing a service code. According to a preset schedule, enable or disable Automatic Night Service for the system. Use this option to set the operation mode of the CPU Night Service mode switch sensors (external Night Mode Selector Switch). The Night Service mode affects trunk inbound and outbound routing.

Related Program
11-10-01 12-02 12-03

12

03

Even if the operation mode is changed manually, the operation mode changes according to the schedule set up.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Night Service

Programming Manual

2-75

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns
Level

SA
Description
Program Use Program 12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns to define the daily pattern of the Automatic Mode Switching. Each Mode Group has 10 patterns. These patterns are used in Programs 12-03 and 12-04. The daily pattern consists of 20 timer Settings.

12

Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number 01 ~ 04

Time Pattern Number

01 ~ 10

Set Time Number

01 ~ 20

Item
01 02 03

Description
Start Time End Time Operation Mode

Input Data
0000 ~ 2359 0000 ~ 2359 1~8

Example : Time Pattern 1

To make the above schedule, it is necessary to set the data as follows:

Time setting 01 : Time setting 02 : Time setting 03 : Time setting 04 : Time setting 05 : Time setting 06 : Time setting 07 : 00 : 00 to 09 : 00 09 : 00 to 12 : 00 12 : 00 to 13 : 00 13 : 00 to 17 : 00 17 : 00 to 18 : 00 18 : 00 to 22 : 00 22 : 00 to 00 : 00 Mode 3 (midnight) Mode 1 (day) Mode 4 (rest) Mode 1 (day) Mode 4 (rest) Mode 2 (night) Mode 3 (midnight)

Time Pattern 2
00 : 00 Mode 2 (night) 00 : 00

2-76

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

00 : 00 Time setting 01 :

00 : 00 00 : 00 to 00 : 00 Mode 2 (night)

Default
Time Pattern 1
Set Time Number
01 02 03 04 : 20

Start Time
0000 0800 1700 0000 : 0000

End Time
0800 1700 0000 0000 : 0000

Mode
2 1 2 1 : 1

Program

12

Time Pattern 2
Set Time Number
01 02 : 20

Start Time
0000 0000 : 0000

End Time
0000 0000 : 0000

Mode
2 1 : 1

Time Pattern 3 ~ 10
Set Time Number
01 : 20

Start Time
0000 : 0000

End Time
0000 : 0000

Mode
1 : 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Night Service

Programming Manual

2-77

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching
Level

SA
Description
Program Use Program 12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching to define a weekly schedule of night-switch settings. 21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions

12

Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number 01 ~ 04

Item No.
01 = Sunday 02 = Monday 03 = Tuesday 01 04 = Wednesday 05 = Thursday 06 = Friday 07 = Saturday

Day of the Week

Time Schedule Pattern Number

0 ~ 10

Default
Day of the Week
01 = Sunday 02 = Monday 03 = Tuesday 04 = Wednesday 05 = Thursday 06 = Friday 07 = Saturday

Time Schedule Pattern Number

2 1 1 1 1 1 2

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Night Service

2-78

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching
Level

SA
Description
Use Program 12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching to define a yearly schedule of holiday nightswitch settings. This schedule is used for the setting of special days when the company is expected to be closed, such as a national holiday. Program

Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number 01 ~ 04

12
Days and Months
0101 ~ 1231 (e.g. 0101 = Jan. 1, 1231 = Dec. 31)

Item No.
01

Time Pattern Number

0 ~ 10 (0 = No setting)

Default
No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Night Service

Programming Manual

2-79

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions to a assign Day/Night Mode Group for each extension.

12

Input Data
Extension Number Up to four digits

Item No.
01

Night Mode Service Group Number

01 ~ 04

Default
1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Night Service

2-80

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks to assign a Day/Night Mode Group for each trunk port. Program

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

12
1

Item No.
01

Night Mode Service Group Number

01 ~ 04

Default

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Night Service

Programming Manual

2-81

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode to make an original text message which is displayed on an LCD of Multiline telephone in each Mode.

12

Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number 01 ~ 04

Day/Night Mode

1~8

Item No.
01

Text Message
Maximum 12 Characters (alphabetic or numeric)

Default
Mode 1 = No setting Mode 2 = Night Mode 3 = M-Night Mode 4 = Rest Mode 5 = Day2 Mode 6 = Night2 Mode 7 = M-Night2 Mode 8 = Rest2

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Night Service

2-82

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

12-08 : Night Mode Service Range
Level

SA
Description
Use Program 12-08 : Night Mode Service Range to define the changing range of toggle key for each Day/Night Mode. Program

Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number 01 ~ 04

12

Item No.
01

Range
2 ~ 8 (default = 2)

Example : When Program 12-08 is set to 3 and the Mode Key is pressed, the following modes are switched : Press once = Night Press twice = Mid-night Press third = Day Default = 2

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Night Service

Programming Manual

2-83

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

13-01 : Speed Dialing Option Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 13-01 : Speed Dialing Option Setup to define the Speed Dialing functions.

Input Data

13

Item No.
01

Item
Speed Dialing Auto Outgoing Call Mode Set where the Speed Dial bins will use Trunk Routing (0) or dial the bin as though it is an Intercom number (1). Private Speed Dial Define use additional 20 Private speed dial bin beside 1000 Common speed dial bin or not.

Input Data
0 = Trunk Outgoing Mode 1 = Intercom Outgoing Mode

Default
0

Related Program
13-05

02

0 = Do not use 1 = Use

1306

03

Number of Common Speed 0 ~ 1000 Dialing Bins 0 = No Common Speed Dialing Assign the number of Speed Dial bins that are used for System Speed Dials.

900

13-04

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Abbreviated Dialing/Speed Dial

2-84

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

13-02 : Group Speed Dialing Bins
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 13-02 : Group Speed Dialing Bins to define the range of bin numbers to be used by each Speed Dialing group. (Refer to 13-03 : Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions on the next page.) Program

Input Data
Item No. Speed Dialing Group Number
01 ~ 32 Set the range of group speed dial bins

13
Start Address of Speed Dialing Bin
0 ~ 990

End Address of Speed Dialing Bin

0, 9 ~ 999

01

Default
No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Abbreviated Dialing/Speed Dial

Programming Manual

2-85

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

13-03 : Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 13-03 : Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions to assign Speed Dialing Group for each extension. There are 32 available Speed Dialing groups.

13

Input Data
Extension Number Up to 4 digits

Item No.
01

Group Number
01 ~ 32 Assign group number for extension

Default Value
1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Abbreviated Dialing/Speed Dial

2-86

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

13-04 : Speed Dialing Number and Name
Level

SB
Description
Use Program 13-04 : Speed Dialing Number and Name to store Speed Dialing data in the Speed Dialing areas. This program is also used to define the names assigned to the Speed Dialing numbers. Program

Input Data
Speed Dialing Bin Number 000 ~ 999

13
Note

Item No.
01

Item
Speed Dialing Data Assign dial number for 000999 bins

Input Data
1 ~ 9, 0, , #, Pause (Press line key 1), Recall/Flash (Press line key 2), @ = Code to wait for answer supervision in ISDN (Press line key 3) (Maximum 36 digits)

Default
No setting

Related Program

02

Name

Maximum 12 Characters (Use dial pad to enter name) 0 = Not Used 1 = Internal Dial 2 = Incoming Ring Group (IRG) 3 = Remote Monitor If Transfer mode is (Refer to 13-04-03) : 1 = Internal Dial Mode 1 ~ 9, 0, , #, P, R, @ (Maximum 36 Characters) 2 = Incoming Ring Group 0 ~ 25 (IRG Number) P = Pause R = Recall @ = Additional Digits when using ISDN functionality 3 = Remote Monitor Dial (Up to 4 digits)

No setting

03

Transfer Mode

04

Transfer Destination Number

No setting

13-04-03

05

Incoming Ring Pattern

Incoming Ring Pattern 0 = Normal Pattern 1 ~ 4 = Tone Pattern (1 ~ 4) 5 ~ 9 = Scale Pattern (1 ~ 5) 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 ~ 100 Maximum 28 digit Maximum 28 digit Maximum 28 digit

13-04-03

06 07 08 09 10

CR/PR feature VRS Message Number Memo1 Memo2 Memo3

0 0 No setting No setting No setting

14-05

15-02-58 15-02-58 15-02-58

Programming Manual

2-87

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item No.
11

Item
Mailbox Number

Input Data
0 ~ 544

Default
0

Related Program
40-02

Note

Conditions
None

Program

Feature Cross Reference

Abbreviated Dialing/Speed Dial

13

2-88

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

13-05 : Speed Dial Trunk Group
Level

SB
Description
Use Program 13-05 : Speed Dialing Trunk Group to define the trunk group to be seized for each Speed Dialing number. If this program has an entry of 0 (no setting), then seizing a line follows the trunk access group routing of the callers extension (refer to Program 14-06). This setting is available only in External Speed Dialing Mode (Program 13-01-01). Program

13

Input Data
Speed Dialing Bin Number 000 ~ 999

Item No.
01

Trunk Group Number

0 ~ 25

Default
No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Abbreviated Dialing/Speed Dial

Programming Manual

2-89

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

13-06 : Speed Dial Number and Name
Level

SB
Description
Program Use Program 13-06 : Speed Dial Number and Name to set up the dial number and name of each Speed Dial Number.

13

Input Data
Extension Number Up to 4 digits

Speed Dial Number

01 ~ 20

Item No.
01

Item
Speed Dialing Data

Input Data
1 ~ 9, 0, , #, Pause (Press line key 1), Recall/ Flash (Press line key 2), @ = Code to wait for answer supervision in ISDN (Press line key 3) (Maximum 36 digits)

Default
No setting

Name

Maximum 12 Characters (Use dial pad to enter name)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Abbreviated Dialing/Speed Dial

2-90

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

13-11 : Abbreviated Dial Group Name
Level

SB
Description
Use Program 13-11 : Abbreviated Dial Group Name to set the name of Abbreviated Dial Group Name. Program

Input Data
Group Number 01 ~ 32

13
Default
1 = ABB : GROUP01 : 32 = ABB : GROUP32

Item No.
01

Item
Group Name

Input Data
Up to 12 characters

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-91

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup to set the basic options for each trunk port. Refer to the chart below for a description of each option, its range and default setting.

14

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

Item No.
01

Item

Input Data

Default
Refer below

Related Program

Trunk Name Up to 12 characters Set the names for trunks. The trunk name displays on a multiline terminal for incoming and outgoing calls. Transmit Level Use this option to select the CODEC gain for the trunk. The option sets the gain (signal amplification) for the trunk you are programming. Receive Level Use this option to select the CODEC gain for the trunk. The option sets the gain (signal amplification) for the trunk you are programming. 1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB in 0.5 dB intervals)

02

32 (0 dB)

03

1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB in 0.5 dB intervals)

32 (0 dB)

04

Transmit Gain Level for Confer1 ~ 63 ence and Transfer Calls (- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB in Use this option to select the 0.5 dB intervals) CODEC gain type used by the trunk when it is part of an Unsupervised Conference. Receive Gain Level for Confer1 ~ 63 ence and Transfer Calls (- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB in Use this option to select the 0.5 dB intervals) CODEC gain type used by the trunk when it is part of an Unsupervised Conference. SMDR Printout 0 = No Print Out Use this option to have the system 1 = Prints Out include/exclude the trunk you are programming from the SMDR printout. Refer to Programs 35-01 and 35-02 for SMDR printout options. Outgoing Calls Use this option to allow/prevent outgoing calls on the trunk you are programming. Toll Restriction Use this option to enable/disabled Toll Restriction for the trunk. If enabled, the trunk follows Toll Restriction programming (example: Programs 21-05, 21-06). If disabled, the trunk is a toll free line. 0 = Deny (No) 1 = Allow (Yes)

32 (0 dB)

05

16 (- 8 dB)

06

07

08

0 = Restriction Disabled (No) 1 = Restriction Enabled (Yes)

21-04 21-05 21-06

2-92

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
09 Private Line

Item

Input Data
0 = Disable Private Line (Normal) 1 = Enable Private Line (Private Line)

Default
0

Related Program

10

DTMF Tones for Outgoing Calls 0 = Disable (No) Use this option to enable (1) or dis- 1 = Enable (Yes) able (0) DTMF tones for outgoing trunk calls. Account Code Required --- Not Used --Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer 0 = Disable (No) Use this option to enable (1) or dis- 1 = Enable (Yes) able (0) loop supervision for the trunk. This option is required for Call Forwarding Off-Premise and Tandem Trunking only. Long Conversation Cutoff 0 = Disable (No) Use this option to enable or disable 1 = Enable (Yes) the Long Conversation Cutoff feature for each trunk. Long Conversation Alarm Before 0 = Disable (No) Cutoff 1 = Enable (Yes) Use this option to enable or disable the Long Conversation Alarm for each trunk. Forced Release of Held Call Use this option to enable/disable forced release for calls on Hold. If enabled, the system disconnects a call if it is on Hold longer than a programmed interval (Program 2401-05). If disabled, forced disconnection does not occur. Program 24-01-01 also affects this option. 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes) 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes)

11 12 13

Program
0

14
20-21-03 20-21-04 20-21-01 20-21-02

14

15

16

24-01-01 24-01-05

17

Trunk to Trunk Warning Tone for 0 = Disable (No) Long Conversation Alarm 1 = Enable (Yes) Use this option to enable or disable the Warning Tone for Long Conversation feature for DISA callers. Warning Beep Tone Signaling 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes)

18 19

0 0

Privacy Mode Toggle Option 0 = Disable (No) Use this option to enable or disable 1 = Enable (Yes) a trunk ability to be switched from private to non-private mode by pressing the line key or Privacy Release function key. Block Outgoing Caller ID 0 = Prevent (No) Allow (1) or prevent (0) the system 1 = Allow (Yes) from automatically blocking outgoing Caller ID information when a user places a call. If allowed (i.e. block, enabled), the system automatically inserts the Caller ID block code (defined in 14-01-21) before the user dialed digits. Caller ID Block Code Enter the code, up to 8 digits, that should be used as the Caller ID Block Code. This code is automatically inserted before dialed digits if Program 14-01-20 is set to 1. Dial (up to eight digits)

20

14-01-21 20-08-15

21

No setting

14-01-20 20-08-15

Programming Manual

2-93

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item No.
22

Item

Input Data

Default
0

Related Program

Caller ID to Voice Mail 0 = Disable (No) Enable or disable the system ability 1 = Enable (Yes) to send the Caller ID digits (Remote Log-On Protocol) to voice mail. Least Cost Routing 0 = LCR Off 1 = LCR On 2 = LCR On (Cost Center Code only) 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes)

23

24

Program

14

Trunk-to-Trunk Outgoing Caller ID through Mode Enable (1) or Disable (0) the ability to send the original Caller ID through when the call is Forward Off-Premise. Continued/Discontinued Trunkto-Trunk Conversation Enable (1) or Disable (0) the ability to dial a service code code to continue or disconnect the Trunk-toTrunk conversation after the alert tone is heard.

25

0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes)

20-28-01 20-28-02 20-28-03 24-02-07 24-02-10 25-07-07 25-07-08 24-02-11 24-02-12

26

Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Trans- 0 = Normal Transfer (Norfer Mode mal) 1 = Step Transfer (Step) Caller ID Refuse Setup Effectivity of "Conversation Recording Destination for Extension" Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Anti-trombone Function 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes) 0 = No Effect (No) 1 = Available (Yes) 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes) 0 = No Effect (No) 1 = Available (Yes)

27 28

0 1 15-12

30 32 33

1 0 32 (0 dB)

13-04

APSU(VM00) Trunk Receive Gain 1 ~ 63 Additional PAD when a trunk call (- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB in connects to APSU Voice Mail. 0.5 dB intervals)

Default
Item01 : Trunk Name
Trunk Port Number
1 2 : 126

Name
Line 001 Line 002 : Line 126

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-94

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-02 : Analog Trunk Data Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 14-02 : Analog Trunk Data Setup to set the basic options for each analog trunk port. Refer to the table below for a description of each option, its range and default setting. Program

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

14
Item Input Data
0 = Dial Pulse (10 PPS) 2 = DTMF 0 = Normal/delayed 1 = Immediate Ringing

Item No.
01

Default
2

Related Program

Note

Signaling Type (DP/DTMF) This option sets the signaling type for the trunk. Ring Detect Type This option sets Extended Ring Detect or Immediate Ring Detect for the trunk. For T1 loop/ ground start trunks, this option must be set to 1 for the trunks to ring and light correctly. Flash Type This option selects the flash type (open loop flash or ground). Always set this option for open loop flash. Hooking Type This option lets you use Flash for Timed Flash (Program 8101-14) or Disconnect (Program 81-01-15). (A user implements Flash by pressing the FLASH key while on a trunk call.) Dial Tone Detection for Manually Accessed Trunks Use this option enable/disable dial tone detection for directly accessed trunks. If disabled, the system outdials on the trunks without monitoring for dial tone. Pause at 1st Digit after Line Seize in Manual Dial Mode

02

03

0 = Open Loop Flash 1 = Ground

04

0 = Timed Flash (Hooking) 1 = Disconnect (Cut)

81-01-14 81-01-15

05

0 = Dial Tone Detection Not Used 1 = Dial Tone Detection Used

21-01-04

06

0 = No Pause (No) 1 = Pause (Yes)

21-01-06

Programming Manual

2-95

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item No.
07

Item

Input Data

Default
2

Related Program
21-01-03

Note

Program

14

DP to DTMF Conversion Op0 = Automatic tions 1 = Automatic and Manual Determine how a user can con- 2 = Manual vert a Dial Pulse (DP) call to a DTMF call. For each trunk, set the type of DP to DTMF conversion required. There are three conversion options: Automatic (0), Automatic and Manual (1), or Manual (2). Automatic: DP to DTMF conversion occurs automatically if the extension user waits more than 10 seconds before dialing the next digit. Automatic and Manual: DP to DTMF conversion occurs automatically if the extension user waits more than 10 seconds before dialing the next digit. In addition, the user can dial # to switch a DP trunk to DTMF dialing. Manual: Users can dial # to switch a DP trunk to DTMF dialing. Answering Condition 0 = Polarity Reversing (Polarity) 1 = Polarity Reversing or Timer (Int Digit) 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes) 0 = No 1 = Yes

08

21-01-03

09 10

Busy Tone Detection Caller ID Enable or disable a trunk ability to receive Caller ID information. Next Trunk in Rotary if No Dial Tone Use this option to enable/ disable the system ability to skip over a trunk if dial tone is not detected. This option pertains to calls placed using Speed Dial, ARS, Last Number Redial or Save Number dialed. It does not pertain to line key or Direct Trunk Access calls. Detect Network Disconnect Signal Trunk-to-Trunk Limitation Loop Start/Ground Start

0 0

11

0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes)

12 13 14

0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes) 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes) 0 = Loop Start (Loop) 1 = Ground Start (Ground) 0 = FSK 1 = DTMF 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 ~ 255 0 ~ 64800 (x 100 ms) 0 = Disable 1 = Enable

0 0 0

16 18 19 20 22

Caller ID Type Busy Tone Detection on Talking Busy Tone Detection Frequency Busy Tone Detection Interval Deny Collect Call Receiving for CO Trunk

0 0 1 0 0 14-02-18 14-02-18

2-96

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

ISSUE 1.0 Conditions

None

SL1000

Feature Cross Reference

None

Program

14

Programming Manual

2-97

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-04 : Behind PBX Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 14-04 : Behind PBX Setup to indicate if the trunk is installed behind a PBX. There is one item for each mode.

14

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

Item No.
01

Day/Night Mode
1~8

Type of Connection
0 = Stand Alone (Trunk) 1 = Behind PBX (PBX) 2 = Not Used 3 = CTX assume 9

Default
0

Related Program
22-02

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Central Office Calls, Placing

2-98

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-05 : Trunk Group
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 14-05 : Trunk Group to assign trunks to Trunk Groups. You can also assign the outbound priority for trunks within the group. When users dial up the trunk group, they seize the trunks in the order you specify in the outbound priority entry. Program

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

14
Trunk Group Number
0 ~ 25

Item No.
01

Priority Number
001 ~ 126

Default
Trunk Port
1 : 126

Group
1 : 1

Priority
1 : 126

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Trunk Groups

Programming Manual

2-99

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-06 : Trunk Group Routing
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 14-06 : Trunk Group Routing to set up an outbound routing table for the trunk groups you assigned in Program 14-05. When a user dial 9, the system routes their calls in the order (priority) specified. For example, if a user dials 9 and all calls in the first group are busy, the system may route the call to another group. Trunk Access Map programming (Programs 14-07) may limit this option. The system contains 25 routing tables for trunk access. Each table has four priority orders for trunk access. There are 25 available Trunk Group Numbers. Example for setting: With less than four trunk groups, Route Number 1 : Order 1 - Trunk Group 1 : Order 2 - Trunk Group 2 For the above setting, if all the lines in trunk group 1 are busy, the system searches for an idle line in trunk group 2. With more than four trunk groups, Route Number 1 : Order 1 - Trunk Group 1 : Order 2 - Trunk Group 2 : Order 3 - Trunk Group 3 : Order 4 - 1002 (Jump To Route Number 2) Route Number 2 : Order 1 - Trunk Group 4 : Order 2 - Trunk Group 5 For the above setting, if all the lines in the trunk groups 1, 2 and 3 are busy, the system searches for an idle line in trunk groups 4 and 5.

14

Input Data
Route Table Number 001 ~ 025

Item No.
01

Priority Order Number

1~4

Input Data
0 = Not Set 001 ~ 025 = Trunk group No. 1001 ~ 1025 = 1000 + Route Table No.

Related Program
14-01-07 14-05 15-01-02 21-02

Default
Route 1, Order Number 1 = 1 (Trunk Group 1). Order Numbers 2, 3, 4 = 0 (Not Specified). All Other Routes (2 ~ 25) and Order Numbers (1 ~ 4) = 0 (Not Specified).

Conditions
None

2-100

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Feature Cross Reference

None

Program

14

Programming Manual

2-101

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup to set up the Trunk Access Maps. This sets an extension access options for trunks. For example, an extension can place only outgoing calls on trunks to which it has outgoing access. There are 126 Access Maps with all 126 trunk ports programmed in Map 1 with full access. An extension can use one of the maps you set up in this program. Use Program 15-06 to assign Trunk Access Maps to extensions. Each trunk can have one of eight access options for each Access Map. Emegerncy calls will override Program 14-07 settings.

14

Input Data
Access Map Number 001 ~ 126

Item No.
01

Trunk Port Number

001 ~ 126

Input Data
0 = No access 1 = Outgoing access only 2 = Incoming access only 3 = Access only when trunk on Hold 4 = Outgoing access and access when trunk on Hold 5 = Incoming access and access when trunk on Hold 6 = Incoming and Outgoing access 7 = Incoming access, outgoing access and access when trunk on Hold

Default
Access map No. Trunk Port No.
1 2 1 : 126 1 2 2 : 126 1 2 : : 126 1 2 126 : 126 : 0 (No access) : 0 (No access) 0 (No access) 0 (No access) : 0 (No access) 0 (No access) 0 (No access) : 7 (T, R, H) 0 (No access) 0 (No access)

Default
7 (T, R, H) 7 (T, R, H)

2-102

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

ISSUE 1.0 Conditions

None

SL1000

Feature Cross Reference

Central Office Calls, Answering Central Office Calls, Placing

Program

14

Programming Manual

2-103

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks to define a Music on Hold source for a trunk as COI port.

14

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

Item No.
01

Item

Input Data

Default
0

MOH Type 0 = Internal synthesized/external MOH Select a Music on Hold source for 1 = A customer-provided source connected to BGM port the trunk.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Music on Hold

2-104

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-09 : Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 14-09 : Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks to set the Conversation Recording destination for each trunk. If both Programs 14-09 and 15-12 define a destination, the destination in Program 15-12 is followed. Program

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

14

Item No.
01

Day/Night Mode
Recording Destination Extension Number Enter the extension number where the trunk calls should be recorded. Automatic Recording for Incoming Calls Determine if incoming trunk calls should be automatically recorded. Automatic Recording for Outgoing Call

Input Data
Maximum four digits

Default
No setting

02

0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On

04

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-105

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-11 : ID Setup for IP Trunk
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 14-11 : ID Setup for IP Trunk to set the ID of each IP Trunk. This program refers to incoming and outgoing IP Trunk calls. The ID is sent on an outgoing IP Trunk call. This program is used only for H.323.

14

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

Item No.
01 IP Trunk ID

Item

Input Data
0 ~ 65535 (0 = No setting)

Default
0

Conditions
This Data is referred to at IP trunk outgoing call, or IP trunk incoming call. This ID is notified at IP trunk outgoing call. It is not notified when ID is 0. Incoming Call arrives to the trunk port of the same ID as ID notified from the partner system.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-106

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-12 : SIP Register ID Setup for IP Trunk
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 14-12 : SIP Register ID Setup for IP Trunk to define the SIP Register ID for IP Trunks. Program

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

14
Default
0 0

Item No.
01 02 Register ID Pilot Register ID

Item
0 ~ 31 0 ~ 31

Input Data

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-107

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-15 : ISDN Call Forward Method
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 14-15 : ISDN Call Forward Method to assign the activation of Call Deflection/Call Rerouting feature.

14

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

Item No.
01 0 = Normal operation 1 = Call Rerouting 2 = Call Deflection

Input Data

Default
0

Related Program
13-04-06

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-108

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-16 : ISDN Call Transfer Method
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 14-16 : ISDN Call Transfer Method to assign the method of ECT supplementary service. This mode will control behavior of FLASH operation at the station which is being grab ISDN trunk. Program

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

14
Input Data
0 = Original 1 = Implicit 2 = ECT 3 = Explicit ECT

Item No.
01

Default
0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-109

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup
Level

SA
Description
Program Use Program 15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup to define the basic settings for each extension.

15

Input Data
Extension Number Maximum four digits

Item No.
01

Item
Extension Name Define the extension/virtual extension name.

Input Data
Up to 12 Characters

Default
Ext. 200 ~ 327 = No setting 0

Related Program

Note

02

Outgoing Trunk Line Pref- 0 = Off erence 1 = On Use this option to set the extension outgoing Trunk Line Preference. If enabled, the extension user receives trunk dial tone when they lift the handset. The user hears trunk dial tone only if allowed by Trunk Access Map programming (Programs 14-07 and 15-06). Refer to the Line Preference feature for more details. SMDR Printout Use this option to include or exclude the extension in the SMDR report. 0 = Do not print on SMDR report 1 = Include on SMDR report

14-06 21-02

03

04

ISDN Caller ID 0 = Disable If both Program 15-01-04 1 = Enable and 10-03-05 are enabled, the system includes Caller ID in the Setup message as Presentation Allowed. If these options are disabled, it is Presentation Restricted. Restriction for Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line Enable or disable supervised dial detection for an extension. Do-Not-Call Call Attendant Busy Message Call Attendant Answer Message 0 = Supervise dial detection 1 = Not supervise dial detection 0 = Off 1 = On 0 ~ 100 (0 = No setting) 0 ~ 100 (0 = No setting)

10-03-05 20-08-13

05

21-01-15 21-01-16 21-01-17 80-03-01 21-01-19 11-11-59 40-10-08 11-11-60 40-10-09

07 08 09

0 0 0

Conditions
None

2-110

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Feature Cross Reference

None

Program

15

Programming Manual

2-111

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-02 : Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 15-02 : Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup to set up various Multiline telephone options.

15

Input Data
Extension Number Maximum four digits

Item No.
01

Item
Display Language Selection (To select options 6 ~ 11, press either 6 or Help, then press line keys 1 ~ 6. To select options 12 ~ 16, press either 12 or Help, then press line keys 1 ~ 5.)

Input Data
0 = Not Used 1 = English 2 = German 3 = French 4 = Italian 5 = Spanish 6 = Dutch 7 = Portuguese 8 = Norwegian 9 = Danish 10 = Swedish 11 = Turkish 12 = Latin American Spanish 13 = Romanian 14 = Polish 15 = Latin American Portuguese 16 = Russian 1 = Tone pattern1 2 = Incoming external ring tone 3 = Tone pattern 3 4 = Tone pattern 4 5 = Tone pattern 5 6 = Tone pattern 6 7 = Tone pattern 7 8 = Tone pattern 2 1 = Tone pattern1 2 = Incoming external ring tone 3 = Tone pattern 3 4 = Tone pattern 4 5 = Tone pattern 5 6 = Tone pattern 6 7 = Tone pattern 7 8 = Tone pattern 2

Default
1

Related Program

Note

02

Trunk Ring Tone Use this option to set the tone (pitch) of the incoming trunk ring for the extension port you are programming.

22-03

03

Extension Ring Tone Use this option to set the tone (pitch) of the incoming extension call ring for the extension port you are programming. Also refer to Program 15-08.

04

Redial (Speed Dial) Control 0 = Common Abbreviated Dial Use this option to control the 1 = Group Speed Dialing function of the extension Redial 2 = Directory Dialing key when used with Speed Dialing. The Redial key can access either the Common/ Indivisual or Group Speed Dialing numbers. Transfer Key Operation Mode 0 = Transfer Use this option to set the oper- 1 = Call back ating mode of the extension 2 = Hook Transfer key. The keys can be for Call Transfer, Serial Calling or Flash. When selecting the Flash option (selection 2), refer also to Program 81-01-14.

05

2-112

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
06

Item
Hold Key Operating Mode Use this option to set the function of the Multiline Hold key. The Hold key can activate normal Hold or Exclusive Hold.

Input Data
0 = Normal (Common) 1 = Exclusive Hold 2 = Park Hold

Default
0

Related Program

Note

07

Automatic Hold for CO Lines 0 = Hold When talking on a CO call and 1 = Disconnect (Cut) another CO line key is pressed, the original trunk is placed on Hold (0) or Disconnected (1). Automatic Handsfree Use this option to set whether pressing a key accesses a One-Touch Key or if it preselects the key. Ringing Line Preference for Trunk Calls Use this option to select between Idle and Ringing Line Preference for trunk calls. 0 = Preselect 1 = One-Touch (Automatic Handsfree)

08

Program

10

0 = Idle (Off) 1 = Ringing (On)

15

11

Callback Automatic Answer 0 = Off Use this option to enable or 1 = On disable automatic answer of calls recalling to a station. For example, if a Transfer Recall or Hold Recall is ringing back to a station, the following happens: If Program 15-02-11 is enabled, the station will automatically answers the recall when it goes off-hook. If Program 15-02-11 is disabled, a station does not automatically answer the recall when it goes off-hook. The user must first press the line appearance of the recalling call or press the answer key. Off-Hook Ringing Use this option to set the telephone Off-hook signaling. Offhook signaling occurs when a telephone user receives a second call while busy on a handset call. To enable/disable Offhook signaling for an extension Class of Service, use Program 20-13-06. Redial List Mode Select whether the Redial List feature should store internal and external numbers (0), or only external numbers (1). Storage of Caller-ID for answered call Handsfree Operation Enable or disable an extension ability to use the speakerphone on outside calls. When disabled, users can hear the conversation, but cannot respond handsfree. 0 = Muted Off-Hook Ringing 1 = No Off-Hook Ringing 2 = Not Used 3 = Beep in Speaker (SP) 4 = Beep in Handset (HS) 5 = Speaker and Handset Beep

12

13

0 = ICM/Trunk (Extension/Trunk Mode) 1 = Trunk Mode

15 16

0 = Disable (Off) 1 = Enable (On) 0 = Disable (Off) 1 = Enable (On)

1 1

Programming Manual

2-113

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item No.
21

Item

Input Data

Default
2

Related Program

Note

Program

15
22

Virtual Extension Access 0 = DSS Mode (when idle Virtual Ex1 = Outgoing (OTG) tension key pressed) 2 = Ignore Determine whether a Virtual Extension (VE) should function as a DSS key or a Virtual Extension. When DSS (0) is selected, the key functions as a DSS key to the extension and for incoming calls to that extension. When Outgoing (1) is selected, the key functions as a virtual extension and can be used for incoming and outgoing calls. When Ignore (2) is selected, the key functions can receive incoming calls only. Multiple Incoming From Inter- 0 = Disable com and Trunk 1 = Enable If enabled, this affects how a Hotline key lights, based on the setting in Program 22-01-01. If 22-01-01 is set to 1 for trunk priority, the Hotline key lights solid when a trunk call rings in. If 22-01-01 is set to 0 for intercom priority, the Hotline key does not light for incoming trunk calls, but lights solid for intercom calls. If 15-02-22 is disabled, Hotline keys light solid for any incoming calls regardless of the setting in Program 22-01-01. Speed Dial Preview Mode This option defines how a speed dial key functions when pressed. If set to Preview (0), the speed dial number can be previewed before dialing. If set to Outgoing Immediate (1), the number is dialed immediately. Handset Volume Determine how an extension handset volume is set after it is adjusted during a call. 0 = Preview 1 = Outgoing Immediately

22-01-01

23

27

0 = Back to Default (Back) 1 = Stay at previous level (Stay)

29

PB Back Tone Level 1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB) This program allows adjustment of the PB Back Tone Level when you are calling an ISDN Line. Toll Restriction Class 0 = Vir. Ext. (Virtual Extension Class) Select the Toll Restriction Class 1 = Real Ext. (Real Extension Class) to use when placing a call from a virtual extension. Call Register Mode The Caller ID Scroll stores Trunk calls only (0), or both Internal and Trunk calls (1). 0 = Trunk Mode 1 = Extension/Trunk Mode

32 (0 dB)

30

15-02-21

34

40

Additional Dial for Caller ID Up to four digits (0, 1 ~ 9, #, Call Return Enter the digits to be dialed in front of the Caller ID when using the Caller ID Return function. Mute Lamp Status Change Menu Operation Mode 0 = normal 1 = Lamp Status Change 0 = Automatic Close 1 = Manual Close

*)

No setting

50 54

0 0

2-114

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
55 56 57 58

Item
VRS Message Number Screen Saver Timer Caller Log on busy Display mode of trunk incoming Soft Key/Navigation key Mode Caller ID shared groups 0 ~ 100

Input Data

Default
0 0 0 0

Related Program

Note

0 ~ 200 (0 ~ 2000 seconds) 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Caller ID 1 = Memo Information 0 = Standard Mode 1 = Advanced Mode1 0 = Personal 1 ~ 8 = Shared Group

15-02-34 13-04-08 13-04-09 13-04-10

60 67

1 0 20-49-01

Program

15
Modulation
16 Hz 16 Hz 16 Hz 8 Hz 8 Hz 8 Hz 16 Hz 16 Hz 16 Hz 8 Hz 8 Hz 8 Hz 8 Hz 8 Hz 8 Hz

Program 15-02 - Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns

Incoming Signal Frequency Pattern
External Incoming Signal Frequency (Pattern 1) External Incoming Signal Frequency (Pattern 2) External Incoming Signal Frequency (Pattern 3) External Incoming Signal Frequency (Pattern 4) Internal Incoming Signal Frequency

Type
High Middle Low High Middle Low High Middle Low High Middle Low High Middle Low

Frequency 1
1100 Hz 660 Hz 520 Hz 1100 Hz 660 Hz 520 Hz 2000 Hz 1400 Hz 1100 Hz 2000 Hz 1400 Hz 1100 Hz 1100 Hz 660 Hz 520 Hz

Frequency 2
1400 Hz 760 Hz 660 Hz 1400 Hz 760 Hz 660 Hz 760 Hz 660 Hz 540 Hz 760 Hz 660 Hz 540 Hz 1400 Hz 760 Hz 660 Hz

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-115

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup to set up various single line telephone options.

15

Input Data
Extension Number Maximum four digits

Item No.
01

Item

Input Data

Default
1

Related Program
15-03-03 45-01-01

Note

SLT Signaling Type 0 = DP Use this option to tell the system the 1 = DTMF type of dialing the connected telephone uses. For Analog Wireless telephones to function correctly, this must be set to 0 (dial pulse). If this option is set for DTMF, after an outside call is placed, the system cannot dial any additional digits. This program change is automatically performed when the Analog Wireless telephone is registered. When upgrading software from prior versions, the previous default of 1 is saved from the prior database so this option must be changed manually. Terminal Type Enter 1 for this option to allow a single line port to receive DTMF tones after the initial call setup. Enter 0 to have the port ignore DTMF tones after the initial call setup. For Voice Mail, always enter 1 (e.g., receive DTMF tones). Flashing Enables/disables Flash for single line telephones. Trunk Polarity Reverse Do Not Change Default Entry as DTMF issues may arise with voice mail. Extension Polarity Reverse Do Not Change Default Entry as DTMF issues may arise with voice mail. Enabled On-Hook When Holding (SLT) Answer On-Hook when Holding (SLT) 0 = Normal 1 = Special

03

15-03-01 45-01-01

04

0 = No 1 = Yes 0 = Off 1 = On

05

06

0 = Disable (Off) 1 = Enable (On)

07 08

0 = No 1 = Yes 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Yes (Enable)

1 1

11-12-45 11-12-46

2-116

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
09

Item
Caller ID Function - For External Module Enable (1) or disable (0) the Caller ID FSK signal for an external Caller ID module or a 3rd party vendor telephone with Caller ID display. Important: If voice mail is used, this setting must be disabled for the system integration codes to be correct.

Input Data
0 = Disable (Off) 1 = Enable (On)

Default
0

Related Program

Note

With a Single Line Telephone, this must be set to 0 for incoming callers to have a talk path.
10 Caller ID Name Determine if an extension user telephone should display the Caller ID name. Caller ID Type Determine whether the Caller ID type is FSK or DTMF. Fixed Cadence Forwarded Caller ID Display Mode Determine what the display shows when a multiline terminal receives a forwarded outside call. Disconnect without dial after hooking hold Determine whether or not to disconnect a held call when on-hook without any dialing after hooking-hold. Special DTMF Protocol Send Determine whether or not to send the extension number of the phone forwarded to the extension when Program 15-03-04 is set to Special (1) and not in the VM group. 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 15-03-09

Program

15

11

0 = FSK 1 = DTMF 0 = Normal 1 = Fixed 0 = Calling Extension Number (Calling) 1 = External Caller ID (Forward) 0 = Normal 1 = Disconnect

12 14

1 0

15

16

0 = No 1 = Yes

45-01-16

Programming Manual

2-117

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item No.
17

Item
Dial Tone Select When the function of MW has been set from another extension or VM, the dial tone upon off hook is selected.

Input Data
0 = Normal 1 = New DT

Default
0

Related Program

Note

Program

15

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Single Line Telephones

2-118

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-05 : IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 15-05 : IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup to set up the basic settings for an IP telephone. Program

Input Data
Extension Number Maximum four digits

15
Item Input Data
0 = NGT 1 = H.323 2 = SIP 3 = MEGACO 4 = SIP-MLT MAC address 00-00-00-00-00-00 ~ FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF

Item No.
01

Default
-

Description

Related Program

Note

Terminal Type

02

IP Phone Fixed Port Assignment

00-00-0000-00-00

MAC Address of registered SIP MLT phone is stored and/or can input the MAC address of an SIP MLT phone so when it comes online it is provided with the extension in which the MAC address matches. Nickname section on Invite message. Example : Extension 100 has a Nickname set to PAUL. Extension 101 has command 15-05-17 set to Nickname. The inbound call to extension 101, from 100, shows PAUL.

15-05-01

04

Nickname

Up to 48 characters

No setting

15-05-17

07 09 15

Using IP Address Call procedure port CODEC Type

0.0.0.0 ~ 255.255.255.255 0 ~ 65535 1 = Type 1 2 = Type 2 3 = Type 3 4 = Type 4 5 = Type 5 Up to 24 characters

1 Assign the CODEC Type of the SIP MLT.

15-05-01 15-05-01 84-24 84-11 15-05-01

16

Authentication Password

None

Assign the authentication password for SIP single line telephones.

15-05-01

Programming Manual

2-119

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item No.
18

Item
IP Duplication Allowed Group

Input Data
0 = Not Used 1 = Group 1 2 = Group 2 3 = Group 3 4 = Group 4 5 = Group 5 6 = Group 6 7 = Group 7 8 = Group 8 9 = Group 9 10 = Group 10 0 = No Option 1 = ADA 2 = BHA 3 = WHA

Default
0

Description
If there is an adapter that has one IP address coming into it but has multiple extensions off of it. Assign all the extensions to a group so that way the CPU knows that the one IP address is assigned to multiple extensions. Shows the type of adapter installed.

Related Program
15-05-01

Note

Program
20

15
26

Bottom Option Information

10-03-10

DR700 Terminal 0 = Not Set Type 1 = ITL-( )E-1D/IP-( )E-1 2 = ITL-()D-1D/ITL-12BT1D/ITL-12PA-1D (without 8LKI (LCD)-L) 2 = ITL-()D-1D/ITL-12BT1D/ITL-12PA-1D (without 8LKI (LCD)-L) 4 = ITL-320C-1 5 = Softphone 6 = CTI 7 = AGW 8 = IP3( )-8WV 9 = IP4WW-24TIXH Personal ID Index 0 ~ 128

27

Used when the SIP Multiline telephone is using manual/auto registration. Assign each phone a unique personal index. Then go to command 84-22 to assign the user name and password.

84-22

28

Addition Information Setup Select whether to inform of additional information or not.

0 = Do not inform 1 = Inform

15-01-01 15-02-13 15-02-15 15-02-34

29 30

Terminal WAN- 0.0.0.0 ~ side IP Address 255.255.255.255 DTMF Play dur- 0 = Do Not Play ing Conversa1 = Play tion at Receive Extension Alarm Tone during Conversation (RTP packet loss alarm) 0 = Off 1 = On

0.0.0.0 0

31

33

LAN Side IP 0.0.0.0 ~ Address of Ter- 255.255.255.255 minal Encription Mode On/Off DR700 Firmware Version 0 = Off 1 = On 00.00.00.00 ~ ff.ff.ff.ff

0.0.0.0.

35 36

0 00.00.00.00 Indicate a current firmware Version.

2-120

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
38

Item
Paging Protocol Mode CTI Override Mode Calling name display info via trunk for standard SIP Time Zone(hour) Time Zone(minute) Video Mode

Input Data
0 = Multicast 1 = Unicast 2 = Auto 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 = Both name and number 1 = Name only 2 = Number only 3 = None 0 ~ 24 (- 12 ~ + 12 hour) 0 ~ 120 (- 60 ~ + 60 minute) 0 = Disable 1 = Enable

Default
0

Description
Sets the protocol mode for the Paging function.

Related Program

Note

39 40

0 0

41 42 43

12 60 0

Program

15

Conditions
Program 15-05-04 - Nickname must be unique in the system.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-121

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions to define the trunk access map for each extension. An extension can place only outgoing calls on trunks to which it has outgoing access. Use Program 14-07 to define the available access maps.

15

Input Data
Extension Number Maximum four digits

Day/Night Mode

1~8

Item No.
01

Trunk Access Map Number

001 ~ 126

Default
1

Related Program
14-07

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Central Office Calls, Answering Central Office Calls, Placing

2-122

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-07 : Programmable Function Keys
Level

SA
Description
Use Program 15-07 : Programmable Function Keys to assign functions to a multiline terminal line keys. For certain functions, you can append data to the key basic function. For example, the function 26 appended by data 1 makes a Group Call Pickup key for Pickup Group 1. You can also program Function Keys using Service Codes. To clear any previously programmed key, press 000 to erase any displayed code. Program

15

Input Data
Extension Number Maximum four digits

Default Settings
Line Key
LK01 : LK12 LK13 : LK24

Function Number

Additional Data
1 : 12 0 : 0

*01 (Trunk Line Key)

:

*01 (Trunk Line Key)

0 (No setting) : 0 (No setting)

Item No.
01

Line Key Number

1 ~ 24

Function Number
0 ~ 99, #0 ~ #99 (Normal Function Code) (Service Code 851 by default) 00 ~ 99 (Appearance Function Code) (Service Code 852 by default)

Additional Data
Refer to Table 2-2 Function Number List on the next page.

Programming Manual

2-123

SL1000 Default

ISSUE 1.0

Programmable keys 1 ~ 8 are Trunk Line keys (key 1 = Trunk Line 1, key 2 = Trunk Line 2, etc.). All other programmable keys are undefined. Function Number List

Table 2-2 Function Number List

[1] Normal Function Code (00 ~ 99, #00 ~ #99) (Service Code 851 ) Program
Function Number
01

Function

15

Additional Data

LED Indication

Note

DSS/One-Touch

Extension number On (Red) : DSS Ext. Busy or any numbers Off : DSS Ext. Idle, DND External, DND Transfer, (up to 36 digits) CFW Busy, CFW Noans, CFW Busy/Noans, CFW Both, CFW FL ME Slow Blink (Red) : DND Intercom, DND All, CFW Imm On (Red) : Mic On Off : Mic Off On (Red) : DND Setup On (Red) : Active On (Red) : Headset Operating None On (Red) : Conference Operating Fast Blink (Red) : Existing New CID On (Red) : Existing Checked CID Off : No CID Mode number (1 ~ 8) (0 = toggle) On : While each mode Slow Blink (Red) : Setup Slow Blink (Red) : Setup Slow Blink (Red) : Setup Slow Blink (Red) : Setup Slow Blink (Red) : Setup Fast Blink (Red) : Setup Slow Blink : To be setup On (Red) : Setup On (Red) : Active

02 03 04 05 06 07 08

Microphone (Mute) Key (ON/OFF) DND Key BGM (ON/OFF) Headset Transfer Key Conference Key Incoming Call Log

09 10 11 12 13 14 15 18 19

Day/Night Mode Switch Call Forward - Immediate Call Forward - Busy Call Forward -No Answer Call Forward Busy/No Answer Call Forward - Both Ring Call Foward - Follow Me

Text Message Setup Message Numbers (01 ~ 20) External Group Pag- External Paging ing Number (1 ~ 6) External All Call Paging Internal Group Paging Internal All Call Paging Privacy Release Internal Paging Number (01 ~ 32)

20 21

On (Red) : Active On (Red) : Active

22 23

None None

2-124

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Function Number
24 25 26

Function

Additional Data
None None Call Pickup Group None Number (01 ~ 32) Speed Dial Number (Common / Private) Speed Dial Number (Group) None

LED Indication

Note

Call Pickup for own group Call Pickup for Another Group Call Pickup for Specified Group Speed Dial Common/Private Speed Dial - Group Repeat Redial Saved Number Redial Memo Dial Meet - Me Conference Override (Off-Hook Signaling) Break - In Camp On Step Call DND/FWD Override Call Message Waiting Room Monitoring Buzzer Boss - Secretary Call Series Call Common Hold Exclusive Hold Department Group Log Out Reverse Voice Over Voice Over Call Redirect Extension Number or Voice Mail Number Extension Number Extension Number Extension Number

27

Program

28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

None Fast Blink (Red) : Repeat Dialing None None None None None On (Red) : Active None None None Slow Blink (Red) : Monitoring Fast Blink (Red) : To be monitored On (Red) : Calling party Fast Blink (Red) : Called party On (Red) : Active None None None On (Red) : Withdrawing Same as DSS On (Red) : Responding Slow Blink (Red) : Listening None

15

50 52

Account Code Automatic Answer with Delay Message Setup Incoming Ring Group (01 ~ 25)

None On (Red) : Setup

Programming Manual

2-125

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Function Number
53

Function

Additional Data

LED Indication

Note

Automatic Answer with Delay Message Start External Call Forward by Door Box Extension Name Change General Purpose LED Operation General Purpose LED Indication Automatic Transfer at Department Group Call Delayed Transfer at Department Group Call DND at Department Group Call --- Not Used --Flash Key Outgoing Call Without Caller ID (ISDN) --- Not Used --CTI --- Not Used ----- Not Used ----- Not Used ----- Not Used ----- Not Used --Keypad Facility Key Keypad HOLD Key Keypad RETRIEVE Key Keypad Conference Key Application Key Voice Mail (In-Skin) Any dial data (8 digit) Extension Number or Pilot Number 001 ~ 100 : Off (Red) On 001 ~ 100 : (Red) On Off Extension Group Number (01 ~ 32) Extension Group Number (01 ~ 32) Extension Group Number (01 ~ 32)

On (Red) : Delay Message Answering

54 55

On (Red) : Setup None 001 ~ 100 : (Red) On Off

Program

56

15

57

001 ~ 100 : (Red) On Slow Blink (Red) : Set Off : Cancel Slow Blink (Red) : Set Off : Cancel Slow Blink (Red) : Set Off : Cancel

Off

58

59

60

61 62 63 64 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77

None On (Red) : Mode enabled

On (Red) : CTI active

None <InMail> Fast Blink (Green) : New Message (s) in own Mailbox. Slow Blink (Red) : New Message (s) in other Mailbox. <External VM> On (Red) : Access to Voice Mail Fast Blink (Green) : New Message (s) in own Mailbox. Slow Blink (Red) : New Message (s) in other Mailbox. Fast Blink : Recording

78

Conversation Recording - Voice Mail

2-126

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Function Number
79

Function

Additional Data
Extension Number or Pilot Number

LED Indication

Note

Automated Attendant (In-Skin)

On (Red) : Setup - All calls Slow Blink (Red) : Setup - No answer calls (875msec on/125msec off) : Setup busy calls (125msec on/125msec off/125msec on/625msec off) (Red) : Setup busy/noans calls

80

Tandem Ringing

1 = Set On (Red) : Master Side 0 = Cancel Exten- Slow Blink : Slave Side sion Number to Tandem Ring Trunk Line No. (001-126) 0 = Pause 1 = Re-recording 2 = Address 3 = Erase 4 = Urgent Page Off : Cancel Slow Blink (Red) : Set

Program

81 83

Automatic Transfer to Transfer Key Conversation Recording Function (VMSU)

15

85 86 87 88

Directory Dialing Private Call Refuse Caller ID Refuse Dial-In Mode Switching None None Program 22-17 Table No. (1 ~ 100) Off : Cancel Slow Blink (Red) : Set Off : Cancel Slow Blink (Red) : Set Off : Pattern 1, Pattern 5 ~ 8 On (Red) : Pattern 2 Slow Blink (Red) : Pattern 3 Fast Blink (Red) : Pattern 4

89 90 94

--- Not Used ----- Not Used --Call Attendant Fast Blink (Red) : Setup - No answer calls Slow Blink (Red) : Setup - Busy calls On (Red) : Setup - Busy/No answer calls Door Box Number On (Red) : Doorphone Busy (1-8) Off : Doorphone Idle Fast Blink (Red) : Doorphone Incoming

97

Door Box Access Key --- Not Used ---- Cutting the telephone power --- Remote Monitor Permit --

98~99 #02 #03

Package Number (2-16)

On (Red) : Set Off : Cancel Slow Blink (Red) : Remote Monitor Permit Off : Remote Monitor Deny

Table 2-3 Function Number List

[2] Appearance Function Level ( 00 ~

*99) (Service Code 852 )

LED Indication Note

Function Number

Function

Additional Data
None Trunk Number (001 ~ 126)

*00 *01

ICM Key Trunk Key

Fast Blink (Green) : Incoming(own)/ Transferring(own)/Recall(own) Fast Blink (Red) : Incoming(other) (125msec:on / 125msec:off / 125msec:on / 625msec:off) (Green) : Speaking(own) On (Red) : Speaking(other)/Transferring(other) Slow Blink (Green) : Holding(own) Slow Blink (Red) : Holding(other)/Recall(other)

Programming Manual

2-127

SL1000
Function Number

ISSUE 1.0

Function
Trunk Group

Additional Data
Trunk Group Number (001 ~ 025)

LED Indication
Fast Blink (Red) : Incoming (own/other)

Note

*02 *03
Program

Virtual Extension Key

Extension NumFast Blink (Green) : Transferring(own)/Recall(own) ber or Department Fast Blink (Red) : Incoming(own/other) Group Number (125msec:on / 125msec:off / 125msec:on / 625msec:off) (Green) : Speaking(own) On (Red) : Speaking(other)/Transferring(other) Slow Blink (Green) : Holding(own) Slow Blink (Red) : Holding(other)/Recall(other) Park Number (01 ~ 64) 0 = Incoming 1 = Outgoing 2 = Both Slow Blink (Green) : Holding(own) Fast Blink (Green) : Recall(own) Slow Blink (Red) : Holding(other)/Recall(other) None

15

*04 *05 *07 *08 *32 *33

Park Key

Loop Keys Use Programs 1513-01 or 15-13-02 to assign the loop key to a trunk group. Station Park Hold --- Not Used --Warning Message Sensor Mode

None

Slow Blink (Green) : Holding(own) Fast Blink (Green) : Recall(own)

On (Red) : play warning message Off : stop warning message On (Red) : Security Sensor On Off : Security Sensor Off

2-128

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 1.0
0 200 1 0 400 1 600 0 800 1 1000 0 1200 1 1400 0 1600 1 1800 0

SL1000
2000 ms

pattern #0 pattern #1 pattern #2 pattern #3 pattern #4 pattern #5 pattern #6 pattern #7

000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111

Program

15

LED Indication Reference : Slow Blink (General Function Level) = LED pattern 1. Slow Blink (Appearance Function Level) = LED pattern 1. Fast Blink = LED pattern 0. 1200msec on/200msec off/200msec on/200msec off/200msec on = LED pattern 7.

Conditions
When a key is programmed using service code 852 , it cannot be programmed with a function using the 851 code until the key is undefined (000). For example with a Park Key programmed by dialing 852 + 04 must be undefined by dialing 852 + 000 before it can be programmed as a Voice Over key by dialing 851 + 48.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-129

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup to assign a ring tone range (0 ~ 4) to incoming virtual extensions assigned to a Virtual Extension key (Program 15-07). If you enable ringing for the key in Program 15-09, the key rings with the tone you set in this program. Also see Program 22-03. The chart below shows the available tones. There are 126 available extension ports.

15

Input Data
Extension Number Maximum four digits

Item No.
01

Incoming Ring Pattern

0 = Tone Pattern 1 1 = Tone Pattern 2 2 = Tone Pattern 3 3 = Tone Pattern 4 4 = Incoming Ring Tone Extension 5 = Tone pattern 5 6 = Tone pattern 6 7 = Tone pattern 7

Default
0 = Tone Pattern 1

Description
When an extension or a virtual extension is assigned to the function key on the key telephone, select the ring tone when receiving a call on that key.

Program 15-08 - Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns

Incoming Signal Frequency Pattern
Pattern 1

Type
High Middle Low High Middle Low High Middle Low High Middle Low High Middle Low

Frequency 1
1100 Hz 660 Hz 520 Hz 1100 Hz 660 Hz 520 Hz 2000 Hz 1400 Hz 1100 Hz 2000 Hz 1400 Hz 1100 Hz 1100 Hz 660 Hz 520 Hz

Frequency 2
1400 Hz 760 Hz 660 Hz 1400 Hz 760 Hz 660 Hz 760 Hz 660 Hz 540 Hz 760 Hz 660 Hz 540 Hz 1400 Hz 760 Hz 660 Hz

Modulation
16 Hz 16 Hz 16 Hz 8 Hz 8 Hz 8 Hz 16 Hz 16 Hz 16 Hz 8 Hz 8 Hz 8 Hz 8 Hz 8 Hz 8 Hz

Pattern 2

Pattern 3

Pattern 4

Internal Incoming Signal Frequency

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-130

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment
Level

SA
Description
Use Program 15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment to assign the ringing options for an extension Virtual Extension Key or Virtual Extension Group Answer Key which is defined in Program 15-07. You make an assignment for each Night Service Mode. Assign extension numbers and names to virtual extension ports in Program 15-01. Program Virtual Extension keys in Program 15-07 (code 03). There are 50 Virtual Extension Ports. Program

15

Input Data
Extension Number Maximum four digits

Key Number

01 ~ 24

Item No.
01

Day/Night Mode
1~8

Ringing
0 = No Ringing 1 = Ring

Default
0

Conditions
Program the Multiple Directory Number function keys NOT to ring before removing the key from telephone programming.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-131

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup
Level

SA
Description
Program Use Program 15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup to set the priority (1 ~ 4) for the Virtual Extension Ring Tones set in Program 15-08. When Virtual Extension calls ring an extension simultaneously, the tone with the highest order number (e.g., 1) rings. The other keys only flash. There are 50 Virtual Extension ports.

15

Input Data
Extension Number Maximum four digits

Item No.
01

Priority Order
1~4

Data
0 = Tone Pattern 1 1 = Tone Pattern 2 2 = Tone Pattern 3 3 = Tone Pattern 4 4 = Incoming Extension Ring Tone 5 = Tone pattern 5 6 = Tone pattern 6 7 = Tone pattern 7

Description
When two or more virtual extensions are set on a function key on the telephone, and the tone pattern by which the sound of each extension differs, the priority of ring sound is set up.

Related Program
15-08

Default
By default, Virtual Extension ring tones have the following order :
Priority Order
1 2 3 4

Ring Tone (Set in Program 15-08)

0 (Tone Pattern 1) 1 (Tone Pattern 2) 2 (Tone Pattern 3) 3 (Tone Pattern 4)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-132

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment
Level

SA
Description
Use Program 15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment to assign the delayed ringing options for an extension Virtual Extension or Virtual Extension Group Answer keys (defined in Program 15-09). You make an assignment for each Night Service Mode. There are 50 Virtual Extension Ports. Assign extension numbers (Program 11-04) and names (Program 15-01) to virtual extension ports. Program Multiple Directory Number (virtual extension) keys in Program 15-07 (code 03). Program

15

Input Data
Extension Number Maximum four digits

Key Number

01 ~ 24

Item No.
01

Day/Night Mode
1~8

Ringing
0 = Immediate Ring 1 = Delayed Ring

Default
0

Related Program
20-04-03 15-09-01

Conditions
Program the Virtual Extension keys NOT to ring before removing the key from telephone programming. Program 15-09-01 has to be assigned to Ring Immediately before assigning the VE key to Delay Ring.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-133

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions to set the Conversation Recording destination for each extension. If both Programs 14-09 and 15-12 define a destination, the destination in Program 15-12 is followed.

15

Input Data
Extension Number Maximum four digits

Item Number
01

Item

Input Data

Default
No setting

Note

Recording Destination Extension Number Maximum four digits Enter the extension number to which the trunk calls should be recorded. Automatic Recording for Incoming Calls Determine if an extension incoming calls should be automatically recorded. Automatic Recording for Outgoing Calls Determine if an extension outgoing calls should be automatically recorded. 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On

02

04

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-134

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-13 : Loop Keys
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 15-13 : Loop Keys to assign the Loop Key data for each keyset terminal. Loop Keys can be incoming, outgoing or both ways. Outgoing Loop Keys use the entry in item 1. Incoming Loop Keys use the entry in item 2. Both Way Loop Keys follow the entries in both item 1 and 2. Program

Input Data
Extension Number Maximum four digits

15
Key Number 01 ~ 24

Item No.
01

Item
Outgoing Option

Input Data
0 ~ 25 (0 = Assigns the Loop Key for ARS, 1 ~ 25 = Assigns the Loop Key to the trunk group specified) 0 ~ 25 (0 = Assigns the Loop Key to all trunk groups, 1 ~ 25 = Assigns the Loop key to the trunk group specified)

Default
0 (Programming Function Key No. 01 ~ 24) 0 (Programming Function Key No. 01 ~ 24)

02

Incoming Option

Conditions
Please set Loop Key at Program 15-07 before setting Program 15-13.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-135

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-16 : SIP Register ID Setup for Extension
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 15-16 : SIP Register ID Setup for Extension to define the SIP Register ID for Extensions.

15

Input Data
Extension Number Maximum four digits

Item No.
01 Register ID

Item

Input Data
None, 0 ~ 31

Default
None

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-136

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-17 : CO Message Waiting Indication
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 15-17 : CO Message Waiting Indication to set the message waiting LED Flash assignment on each CO line. Program

Input Data
Extension Number including Virtual Extensions Up to four digits

15
Default
0

Trunk Port Number

001 ~ 126

Item No.
01

Item
LED Flash Assignment

Input Data
0 = LED Off 1 = LED On

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-137

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-18 : Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 15-18 : Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options to define the operation when a Virtual Extension Key is pressed.

15

Input Data
Extension Number including Virtual Extensions Up to four digits

Item No.
01

Item
Virtual Extension Key Operation Mode Define if calls to a Virtual Extension Key land on the Virtual or on the extension/CO appearance.

Input Data
0 = Release 1 = Land on the key

Default
0

Related Program
20-04-01

This is assigned for the Virtual Extension Key, not the extension it resides on.
02 Display mode when placing a call on Virtual Extension Key Defines if calls to or from a Virtual Extension Key display the Virtual Extension Key name or the name of the extension it resides on. 0 = Secondary Extension Name 1 = Actual Station Name 0

Default Settings
If a DIL rings a Virtual Extension, the Virtual Extension Key Operation Mode must be set to 1.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-138

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-22 : Mobile Extension Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 15-22 : Mobile Extension Setup to set the system information for the Mobile Extension feature. Program

Input Data
Extension Number Up to four digits

15
Default
0 0

Item No.
01

Item
Mobile Extension Target Setup Set which Speed Dial bin is used to call when the Mobile extension is called. Connect Confirmation Select when a confirmation (dial ) is required to allow the call to cut over to the called mobile number.

Input Data
0 ~ 999 (0 = No setting/1 ~ 999 = target of mobile extension) 0 = Always 1 = On Analog Line 2 = Never 0 = Use normal trunk access code (Program 11-09-01) 1 = Use individual trunk access code (Program 11-09-02) 0 = Disable 1 = Enable

02

03

Trunk Access Code Select if the Normal (0) or Individual (1) Trunk access is used when making the call to the mobile number. Call Back

04

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-139

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 16 : Department Group Setup

16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup to set the function mode for each department group. There are 32 available Department Groups.

16

Input Data
Department Group Number 1 ~ 32

Item No.
01 02

Item
Department Name

Input Data
Maximum 12 characters

Default
No setting 0

Related Program
11-07 16-02

Department Calling Cycle 0 = Normal Routing (Priority) Use this option to set the call routing 1 = Easy - UCD Routing (Circular) for Department Calling. Routing can be either circular (cycles to all phones in group) or priority (cycles to highest priority extensions first). Department Routing when Busy (Auto Step Call) se this option to set how the system routes an Intercom call to a busy Department Group member. Intercom callers to the extension can either hear busy or route to the first available department number. This only occurs for calls to the extension directly, not the department number assigned in Program 11-07. 0 = Normal (Intercom caller to busy department member hears busy) 1 = Circular (Intercom callers to busy department member routes to idle member)

03

16-02

04

Hunting Mode 0 = Last extension is called and Use this option to set the action taken hunting is stopped when a call reaches the last extension 1 = Circular in the Department Group (0 = hunting stopped, 1 = hunting repeats with circular routing through the Department Group). 0 = Manual (Service Code) Extension Group All Ring Mode 1 = Automatic Operation Determine whether calls ringing a Department Group should ring all extensions in the group simultaneously automatically or manually when using the service code defined in Program 11-12-09.

05

11-16-10

When set to (1) Automatic, only ICM Calls and DID Calls will ring all the stations in the Department Group.
06 07 STG Withdraw Mode Call Recall Restriction for STG Determine whether or not an unanswered call transferred to a Department Group should recall the extension from which it was transferred. 0 = Disable (Camp On) 1 = Enable (Overflow Mode) 0 = Disable (Recall) 1 = Enable (No Recall) 0 0

2-140

Program 16 : Department Group Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
08

Item
Maximum Queuing number for Department Group Call To have Department Group calls queue when busy, set this entry to maximum queuing number. Department Hunting No Answer Time Set how long a call rings a Department group extension before hunting occurs. Enhanced Hunt Type Set the type of hunting for each Extension (Department) Group.

Input Data
0 ~ 32 ( 0 = No Queuing)

Default
0

Related Program

09

0 ~ 64800 seconds

15

10

0 = No hunting 1 = Hunting When Busy 2 = Hunting When Not Answered 3 = Hunting When Busy or No Answer

Program

16

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Department Calling

Programming Manual

2-141

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 16 : Department Group Setup

16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions to set the Department Groups. The system uses these groups (32 Department Groups) for Department Calling. Assign pilot numbers to Department Groups you set up in Program 11-07. This lets system users place calls to the departments. Use Program 16-01 to set the priority of each extension in each Department Group. When a call comes to the group, the extensions ring in order of their priority.

16

Input Data
Extension Number Maximum four digits

Item No.
01

Group Number
1 ~ 32

Priority
1 ~ 999

Default
1 - xxx (See Note)

Description
Set up the Department Group called by the pilot number and the extension priority when a group is called.Call Pickup Groups are set up in 23-02.

Related Program
11-07 16-01

The initial value of a priority becomes the ports numerical order assigned in Programs 11-02 and 11-04. (Extension ports are 1 ~ 128 Virtual extension ports are 1 ~ 50.)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Department Calling

2-142

Program 16 : Department Group Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 16 : Department Group Setup

16-03 : Secondary Department Group
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 16-03 : Secondary Department Group to set a second Department Group for extensions. Up to 16 extensions can be assigned per a Department Group. There are 32 available Department Groups. Program

Input Data
Department (Extension) Group Number 01 ~ 32

16
Extension Number
Maximum 4 digits

Item No.
01

Secondary Extension Number

1 ~ 16

Priority Order
0 ~ 999

Description
This program is set up when placing telephones in two or more groups.

Default
All extension groups : No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Department Calling

Programming Manual

2-143

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 16 : Department Group Setup

16-04 : Call Restriction Between Department Groups
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 16-04 : Call Restriction Between Department Groups to set internal calls between members of different Department (Station) groups that can be restricted on a per group basis. Each department group can restrict calls to up to 8 department groups in Department Group - Departmental Call Restriction.

16

Input Data
Extension (Department) Group Number 1 ~ 32

Restricted Group Index

1~8

Restrict Department Group Number

0 ~ 32

Description
Calls between members of different Department (Station) groups can be restricted on a per group basis.

Default
0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-144

Program 16 : Department Group Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-01 : System Options
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 20-01 : System Options to set various system options.

Input Data
Item No.
01

Program
Item Input Data
0 = Step Call 1 = Circular

Default
0

Description
Use this program to set up priority of a call when calling an operator telephone. Use this program to select the mode when calling the telephone which set up the text message. For OPXs, analog telephones and certain analog trunks (like DISA), the system attaches a DTMF receiver to the port for this time. The system releases the receiver after the time expires. This time sets the duration of the alarm signal. Callback rings an extension for this time. Trunk Queuing callback rings an extension for this time. The system cancels an extension Callback or Trunk Queueing request after this time. The amount of time the system waits to seize the next outside line after the system releases an outside line. The system automatically logs out of a Telephone/Web Pro session after inactivity lasting this time. The amount of time the system waits to until system ends the call back. Sets the operation mode for 15-07 (Code 09) Day/Night Mode Switch.

Related Program
20-17

Operator Access Mode

20

02

Text Message Mode 0 = Call mode 1 = No Answer/ Busy mode DTMF Receive Active Time 0 ~ 64800 seconds

11-11-14 15-07-08

05

10 seconds

25-07-01

06 07 08 09

Alarm Duration

0 ~ 64800 seconds

30 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 64800 seconds

11-11-12 11-12-05 15-07-35 11-12-05 15-07-35 11-12-05 15-07-35

Callback Ring Dura- 0 ~ 64800 seconds tion Time Trunk Queuing Call- 0 ~ 64800 seconds back Time Callback/Trunk Queuing Cancel Time Trunk Guard Timer 0 ~ 64800 seconds

10

0 ~ 64800 seconds

1 seconds

12

Telephone/Web Pro Logout Time

1 ~ 86400 (86400 seconds = 1 day) 1 ~ 64800 seconds

900 seconds (15 min.)

16

Mobile Extension Callback time Day/Night Change Key Mode

15 seconds

15-22-04

17

0 = Toggle 1 = Skip

15-07

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-145

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-02 : System Options for Multiline Telephones
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 20-02 : System Options for Multiline Telephones to set various system options for multiline telephones.

20

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Trunk Loop Key Operation Mode 0 = Keep Lamp 1 = Extinction Mode Incoming : Talking : Holding :

Input Data

Default
0

Related Program

Note

0 = Keep Lamp

1 = LED Off

300 IPM Red blink Green Lighting (on Talking TEL) 60 IPM Green blink (on hold-ing TEL) LED Off LED Off

02

Trunk Group Access Key 0 = Outgoing / Incoming Operating Mode 1 = Outgoing Use this option to set the 2 = Incoming operating mode of the extension trunk group keys. The keys are for incoming access, outgoing access, or both. Retrieve the Line After Transfer Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension ability to answer a call after it has been transferred, but before it is answered. 0 = Not Holding (No Keep) 1 = Holding (Keep)

04

05

Headset Busy Mode 0 = No (Disable) Set the conditions under 1 = Yes (Enable) which a headset extension is busy to incoming callers. Preselection Time 0 ~ 64800 seconds When a multiline terminal user preselects a line key, the system remembers the preselection for this time. Time and Date Display Mode Set how the Time and Date appear on display telephones. There are eight display modes. 1 ~ 10 Type 1 = (12 hour) TUE 10 3 : 15 PM Type 2 = (12 hour) 3-10 TUE 3 : 15 Type 3 = (12 hour) 10-3 TUE 3 : 15 Type 4 = (12 hour) MAR 10 TUE 3 : 15 Type 5 = (24 hour) TUE 10 3 15 : 15 Type 6 = (24 hour) 3-10 TUE 15 : 15 Type 7 = (24 hour) 10-3 TUE 15 : 15 Type 8 = (24 hour) MAR 10 TUE 15 : 15 Type 9 = (12 hour) 10 MAR TUE 3 : 15 Type 10 = (24 hour) 10 MAR TUE 15 : 15 0 ~ 64800 seconds

20-09-07

06

07

08

LCD Display Holding Time

2-146

Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
09

Item
Disconnect Supervision Use this option to enable or disable disconnect supervision for the system trunks. 0 = Disable (Off) 1 = Enable (On)

Input Data

Default
1

Related Program

Note

11

Handsfree Microphone 0 = Off 1 = On Control Use this option to control the setting for Multiline Terminal Handsfree microphone after being disconnected and reconnected. If set to 0, the microphone is always off when the terminal is reconnected. If set to 1, the microphone remains in the same state it was in when the terminal is reconnected. Forced Intercom Ring (ICM Call Type) Use this option to enable or disable Forced Intercom Ringing. If enabled, incoming Intercom calls normally ring. If disabled, Intercom calls voiceannounce. Caller ID Display Mode 0 = Disable (Voice) 1 = Enable (Signal)

Program

20
1

12

15

0 = Name and Number (Both) 1 = Name 2 = Number 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0 = No 1 = Yes

18 19

Dialing Record Display Time DSS Key - Virtual Extension Mode Sets the mode of a virtual extension key that appears on a DSS console.

30 seconds 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-147

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-03 : System Options for Single Line Telephones
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 20-03 : System Options for Single Line Telephones to set up various options for single line telephones.

20

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
SLT Call Waiting Answer Mode For a busy single line telephone, set the mode used to answer a camped-on trunk call. Ignore Received DP Dial on DTMF SLT Port Use this option to define whether the system should receive dial pulse and DTMF signals (0) or ignore dial pulse and only accept DTMF signals (1). SLT DTMF Dial to Trunk Lines Type 0 : The system keeps the digits dialed by the single line telephone on a trunk in a buffer. After all the digits are received, the system sends all the digits to the trunk. If the time space between digits is longer than the time in Item 4, the system considers all digits received. Type 1 : The system passes the received digits from the single line telephone to the trunk immediately. If the single line telephone has a Last Number Dial key without a pause, this key may not be able to use the Last Number Dial key with the Type 1 setting. When using a third-party external paging device, set this option to 1. In addition, set Program 20-03-04 to 1

Input Data
0 = Hookflash (Hooking) 1 = Hookflash + Service Code 894 0 = Do Not Ignore (No) 1 = Ignore (Yes)

Default
0

Related Program
11-12-47

02

15-03-01

03

0 = Receive all dialed data, before sending (All) 1 = Direct through out (Direct)

20-03-04

04

Dial Sending Start Time for SLT 0 ~ 64800 seconds or ARS When ARS or an analog extension user accesses a trunk and dials an outside call, the system waits this time before outdialing the first digit. When using a third-party external paging device, set this option to 1. In addition, set Program 20-03-03 to 1. SLT Operation Mode 0 = Normal Mode 1 = Extended Mode 1 2 = Extended Mode 2

20-03-03

05

2-148

Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
06

Item
Headset Ringing Start Time (for SLT) Define the headset ringing start time. After this time expires from the time when a single line telephone is off-hook, the system sets the single line telephone to headset ringing mode. Trunk Call Dial Forced Sending Start Time (Forced Dial)

Input Data
0 ~ 64800 seconds

Default
5

Related Program
20-13-38

07

0 ~ 64800 seconds

20-03-03 20-03-04

Program

Conditions
None

20

Feature Cross Reference

Single Line Telephones

Programming Manual

2-149

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions to set up various system options for Virtual Extensions. There are 50 available Virtual Extension ports.

20

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Virtual Extension Key Operation Mode With an entry of 0, after answering a call on a virtual extension key, once the call is picked up, the call comes off the virtual extension key and appears on the line or loop key. With an entry of 1, after answering a call on a virtual extension key, once the call is picked up, the call will remain on the virtual extension key.

Input Data
0 = Release Virtual Extension Key 1 = Hold Virtual Extension Key

Default
0

Related Program
15-18-01

Note

03

Virtual Extension Delay In- 0 ~ 64800 seconds terval Virtual Extensions set for Delayed Ringing (see Program 15-11) ring the extension after this time. Virtual Extension Key Seize 0 = Normal Mode 1 = Enhanced Option When set to Enhanced, the BLF will not show as being busy when the station is on a trunk call. When set to Normal, the BLF will show as being busy when on a trunk call.

10

04

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Virtual Extensions

2-150

Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-05 : System Options for Charging Cost Service
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 20-05 : System Options for Charging Cost Service to defines the system options for Charging Cost Service. Program

Input Data
Item No.
04 06

Item
Setting of Charge Cost per Unit Advice of Charge for Telephone Display 0 ~ 65535

Input Data

Default
0 1

Related Program

20

0 = No decimal point 1 = Decimal point's character is period 2 = Decimal point's character is comma 0 = No decimal point 1 = Decimal point's character is period 2 = Decimal point's character is comma

07

Advice of Charge for SMDR

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-151

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions to assign a Class of Service (COS) to an extension. There are 15 Classes of Service that can be assigned. To specify the options in each Class of Service, refer to Programs 20-07 through 20-13. You make eight entries for Program 20-06, one for each Night Service Mode.

20

Input Data
Extension Number Maximum four digits

Item No.
01

Day/NightMode
1~8

Class of Service for Extensions

1 ~ 15

Default
All extension numbers are set as Class 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Class of Service

2-152

Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level)
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) to define the administrator service availability for each extension Class of Service (COS). Program

Input Data
Class of Service Number 01 ~ 15

20
Related Program Note
11-10-01

Item No.
01

Default Item
Manual Night Service Enabled Turns off or on an extension for manual Night Service Switching. Changing the Music on Hold Tone Turns off or on an extension to change the Music on Hold tone. Time Setting Turns off or on an extension to set the Time via Service Code 828 . Storing Speed Dialing Entries Turns off or on an extension to store System or Group Speed Dialing numbers. Set/Cancel Automatic Trunk-toTrunk Transfer Turns off or on an extension user ability to use the Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding service codes. Charging Cost Display Programmable Function Key Programming (Appearance Level) Turns off or on the ability for an extension user abillity to program the Appearance function keys using Service Code 852 . Forced Trunk Disconnect (analog trunk only) Turns off or on an extension user abillity to use Forced Trunk Disconnect. Trunk Port Disable

Input Data COS 1 ~ 15

0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 1

02

11-10-02

03

0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On

11-10-03

04

11-10-04

05

0 = Off 1 = On 1

11-10-06 11-10-07 11-10-08

06 10

0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On

11-10-09

11-11-38

11

0 = Off 1 = On 1 11-10-26

12 13

0 = Off 1 = On

11-10-27

VRS Record (VRS Msg Opera0 = Off tion) 1 = On Turns off or on an extension user ability to record, erase and listen to VRS messages. VRS General Message Play 0 = Off Turns an extension off or on to dial 1 = On 4 or Service Code 711 to listen to the General Message.

11-10-20

14

11-10-21

Programming Manual

2-153

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item No.
15

Default Item
VRS General Message Record/ Delete Turns off or on an extension user ability to dial Service Code 712 and record, listen to, or erase the General Message. SMDR Printout Accumulated Extension Data SMDR Printout Department Group (STG) Data SMDR Printout Accumulated Account Code Data Register and delete DECTPP

Input Data COS 1 ~ 15

0 = Off 1 = On 1

Related Program

Note

11-10-22

18 19 20 21 23

0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On

1 1 1 1

11-10-23 11-10-24 11-10-25

Program

20

CO MSG Waiting Indication Call- 0 = Off back Number Programming 1 = On Enable or Disable an extension ability to receive CO Message Waiting Indication. Set/Cancel Private Call Refuse Enable or Disable an extension ability to set or cancel Private Call Refuse. Set/Cancel Caller ID Refuse Enable or Disable an extension ability to set or cancel Caller ID Refuse. Dial-In Mode Switch Do-Not-Call Administrator 0 = Off 1 = On

24

11-10-32

25

0 = Off 1 = On

11-10-33 11-10-34

26 27

0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On

11-10-35 25-01-07 15-07-89 20-01-19 11-10-41

30

Date Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Class of Service

2-154

Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service)
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) to define the outgoing call feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS). Program
Class of Service Number 01 ~ 15

Input Data

20
Note

Item No.
01

Default Item Input Data COS 01 ~ 15

Intercom Calls 0 = Off Turns off or on Intercom call- 1 = On ing for the extension. Trunk Outgoing Calls Turns off or on outgoing trunk calling for the extension. System Speed Dialing Turns off or on an extension ability to make outbound calls using system speed dial numbers. Group Speed Dialing Turns off or on an extension ability to make outbound calls using group speed dial numbers. Dial Number Preview (Preset Dial) Turns off or on an extension for using Dial Number Preview. Toll Restriction Override Turns off or on Toll Restricting Override (Service Code 763 ). Repeat Redial Turns off or on an extension to use Repeat Redial. Toll Restriction Dial Block Turns off or on an extension to use Dial Block. Hotline/Extension Ringdown Turns off or on Ringdown Extension for extensions with this COS. Signal/Voice Call Turns off or on an extension allowing it to force Handsfree Answerback or Forced Intercom Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls. Protect for the Call Mode Switching from Caller (Internal Call) 0 = Off 1 = On 1

Related Program

02

03

0 = Off 1 = On 1

04

0 = Off 1 = On 1

05

0 = Off 1 = On 1

06

0 = Off 1 = On

21-01-07 21-07

07

0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On

08

09

10

0 = Off 1 = On 1

11

0 = Off 1 = On

Programming Manual

2-155

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item No.
12

Default Item
Department Group Step Calling Turns off or on an extension to use Department Group Step Calling. ISDN CLIP Determines if the ISDN calling line identity presentation and screening indicators are allowed. Call Address Information

Input Data COS 01 ~ 15

0 = Off 1 = On 1

Related Program

Note

13

0 = Off 1 = On 1

10-03-05 15-01-04

Program
14

20

0 = Off 1 = On

15

Block Outgoing Caller ID 0 = Off Turns off or on the system 1 = On ability to automatically block outgoing Caller ID information when a user places a call. If this option is on, the system automatically inserts the Caller ID block code (defined in Program 14-01-21) before the user-dialed digits. ARS Override of Trunk Access Map Turns off or on an extension ability to override the trunk access map programming for outgoing calls. 0 = Off 1 = On

14-01-20 14-01-21

17

19

Hotline for SPK 0 = Off The ability of an extension to 1 = On have Hotline activated or deactivated when going off hook via the speaker key. Hot Key Pad 0 = Off The ability of an extension to 1 = On make a call by just dialing the number without first going off hook. Automatic Trunk Seizing 0 = Off by Pressing SPK Key 1 = On The ability of an extension to automatically access Trunk Route when going off hook via the speaker key.

20-08-09

20

21

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Class of Service

2-156

Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service)
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) to define the incoming call feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS). Program

Input Data
Class of Service Number 01 ~ 15

20
Note

Item No.
01

Default Item Input Data COS 01 ~ 15

Second Call for DID/DISA/ 0 = Off DIL/E&M Override 1 = On Turns off or on the extension ability to receive a second call from a DID, DISA, DIL, or tie line caller.

Related Program

With this option set to 1, the destination extension must be busy for a second DNIS caller to ring through. If the destination extension does not have a trunk key available for the second call and a previous call is ringing the extension but has not yet been answered, the second caller hears busy regardless of this program setting.
02 Caller ID Display Turns off or on the Caller ID display at an extension. 0 = Off 1 = On

03

Sub Address Identification 0 = Off Defines whether or not an 1 = On extension displays the Caller Sub-Address. Notification for Incoming Call List Existence Determines whether or not an extension display shows Check List when an incoming call is missed by a user. Signal/Voice Call Turn off or on an extension ability to enable Handsfree Answerback or Forced Intercom Ringing for their incoming Intercom calls. Incoming Time Display 0 = Off 1 = On

04

05

0 = Off 1 = On 1 11-11-15 11-11-16

06

0 = Off 1 = On

Programming Manual

2-157

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item No.
07

Default Item Input Data COS 01 ~ 15

Call Queuing 0 = Off Turn off or on an extension 1 = On ability to have calls queued if a call rings the extension when it is busy. Deny Collect Call Receiving Deny Collect Call Receiving for CO Trunk 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On

Related Program

Note

20-13-06

09 12

0 0

Program

20

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Class of Service

2-158

Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service)
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) to define the answer feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS). Program

Input Data
Class of Service Number 01 ~ 15

20
Default COS 01 ~ 15
1

Item No.
01

Item
Group Call Pickup (Within Group) Turns off or on Group Call Pickup for calls ringing an extension Pickup Group and ringing group calls (Service Code #). Group Call Pickup (Another Group) Turns off or on Group Call Pickup for calls ringing outside a group (Service Code 869 ). Group Call Pickup for Specific Group Turns off or on Group Call Pickup for a specific group (Service Code 868 ). Telephone Call Pickup Turns off or on an extension to be picked up by a call pickup Directed Call Pickup for Own Group Turns off or on Directed Call Pickup for calls ringing an extension Pickup Group (Service Code 856 ). Meet-Me Conference and Paging Turns off or on an extension to use Meet-Me Conference and Paging. Automatic Off-Hook Answer Turns off or on an extension to use Universal Auto Answer (no service code required). Virtual Extension Off-Hook Answer Turns off or on an extension to answer an incoming call on a Virtual Extension simply by lifting the handset. Call Pickup Callback Turn off or on an extension ability to use Call Pickup to pick up Callback calls. Answer Preset 0 = Off 1 = On

Input Data

02

0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On

03

04

05

06

0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On

07

08

09

0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On

10

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-159

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service)
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) to define the Hold and Transfer feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).

20

Input Data
Class of Service Number 01 ~ 15

Default Item No.

01

Item
Call Forward All Turns off or on an extension ability to initiate Call Forwarding All. 0 = Off 1 = On

Input Data COS 01 ~ 15

1

02

Call Forward When Busy 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension ability to use Call 1 = On Forward when Busy. Call Forwarding When Unanswered 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension ability to use Call 1 = On Forward when Unanswered. Call Forwarding (Both Ringing) Turns off or on an extension ability to activate Call Forwarding with Both Ringing. Call Forwarding with Follow Me Turns off or on an extension ability to initiate Call Forwarding with Follow Me. Unscreened Transfer (Ring Inward Transfer) Turns off or on an extension ability to use Unscreened Transfer. Transfer Without Holding Turns off or on an extension ability to use Transfer Without Holding. Transfer Information Display Turns off or on an extension ability for incoming Transfer preanswer display. 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On

03

04

05

06

07

0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On

08

09

Group Hold Initiate 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension ability to initiate a 1 = On Group Hold. Group Hold Answer Turns off or on an extension ability to pick up a call on Group Hold. Automatic On-Hook Transfer Turns off or on an extension ability to use Automatic On Hook Transfer. Call Forwarding Off Premise (External Call Forwarding) Turns off or on an extension ability to set up Call Forwarding Off-Premise for their telephone. Operator Transfer After Hold Callback Turns off or on an extension ability to have a call which recalls from hold transfer to the operator. 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On

10

11

12

13

0 = Off 1 = On

2-160

Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Default Item No.

14

Item
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Restriction Turns off or on the Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Restriction. If enabled, Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer is not possible. VRS Personal Greeting (Message Greeting) Turns off or on a Service Code to record, listen to, or erase the Personal Greeting Message. Call Redirect Turns off or on a multiline terminal user ability to transfer a call to a predefined destination (such as an operator, voice mail, or another extension) without answering the call. 0 = Off 1 = On

Input Data COS 01 ~ 15

15

0 = Off 1 = On 1

16

0 = Off 1 = On 1

Program

17

Department Group Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer 0 = Off (Each Telephone Group Transfer) 1 = On Turns off or on an extension user ability to set Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding for a Department Group. No Recall 0 = Off No Recall set to "Allow" (1) will not stop trans- 1 = On ferred calls from recalling from a virtual extension. Hold/Extended Park Determine if an extension Class of Service should allow either a normal or extended Park. No Callback Turns off or on an extension to receive callbacks. 0 = Off 1 = On

20

18

19

20

0 = Off 1 = On

21

Restriction for Tandem Trunking on Hang 0 = Allow Up 1 = Deny Allow (0) or Deny (1) an extension user ability to set up a tandem/conference call automatically when they hang up. Restricted Unsupervised Conference Allow (0) or Deny (1) an extension ability to initiate an unsupervised conference. VE Call Forward Set/Cancel Turn on or off an extension ability to set or cancel call forwarding for a virtual extension. Trunk Park Hold Mode Set the hold type when a trunk call is put on hold by an extension. 0 = Allow 1 = Deny 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Non Exclusive Hold (Off) 1 = Exclusive Hold (On)

22

23

24

25

Transfer Park Call 0 = Off Turn off or on an extension ability to transfer a 1 = On parked call. Station Park Hold mode Call Park Automatically Search Both Ring Enhancement 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Normal 1 = Enhanced

26 27 28

0 1 0

Conditions
None

Programming Manual

2-161

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Feature Cross Reference

Class of Service

Program

20

2-162

Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-12 : Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service)
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 20-12 : Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service) to define the Charging Cost service availability for each extension service class. Program

Input Data
Class of Service Number 01 ~ 15

20
Default COS 01~15
1 0

Item No.
02 03 Advice of Charge ISDN-AOC

Item
0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On

Input Data

Cost Display (TTU)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Class of Service

Programming Manual

2-163

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service)
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) to define the supplementary feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).

20

Input Data
Class of Service Number 01 ~ 15

Default Item No.

01

Item
Long Conversation Alarm Turns off or on the Warning Tone for Long Conversation (not for single line telephones). Long Conversation Cutoff (Incoming) Turns off or on an extension ability to use Long Conversation Cutoff for incoming calls. Long Conversation Cutoff (Outgoing) Turns off or on an extension ability to use Long Conversation Cutoff for outgoing calls. Call Forward/DND Override (Bypass Call) Turns off or on an extension ability to use Call Forwarding/DND Override. Intercom Off-Hook Signaling Turns off or on an extension ability to receive off-hook signals. Automatic Off-Hook Signaling (Automatic Override) Allows a busy extension ability to manually (0) or automatically (1) receive off-hook signals. Message Waiting Turns off or on an extension ability to leave Message Waiting. Conference Turns off or on an extension user ability to initiate a conference or Meet-Me Conference. Privacy Release Turns off or on an extension user ability to initiate a Voice Call Conference. Barge-In Monitor Enables the extension Barge-In Mode to be Speech mode (0) or Monitor mode (1).

Input Data COS 01 ~ 15

0 = Off 1 = On

Related Program

02

0 = Off 1 = On 0

03

0 = Off 1 = On 0

04

0 = Off 1 = On 1

05

0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On

06

07

0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On

08

09

0 = Off 1 = On

10

0 = Speech 1 = Monitor

20-13-45

2-164

Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Default Item No.

11

Item
Room Monitor, Initiating Extension Turns off or on an extension user ability to Room Monitor other extensions. Room Monitor, Extension Being Monitored Turn off or on an extension ability to be monitored by other extensions.

Input Data COS 01 ~ 15

0 = Off 1 = On 0

Related Program

12

0 = Off 1 = On 0

Program

13

Continued Dialing (DTMF) Signal 0 = Off on ICM Call 1 = On Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Continued Dialing, which allows DTMF signal sending while talking on extension. Department Calling (PLT No Called Extension) Turns off or on an extension user ability to call a Department Group Pilot. Barge-In, Initiate Turns off or on an extension user ability to barge-in on other's calls. Barge-In, Receive Turns off or on an extension ability to have other extensions barge-in on calls. 0 = Off 1 = On

20

14

15

0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On

16

17

Barge-in Tone/Display (Intrusion 0 = Off Tone) 1 = On Turns off or on the Barge-In tone. If on, callers hear an alert tone and their display indicates the Barge-In when another extension barges into their conversation. If off, there is no alert tone or display indication. Programmable Function Key Programming (General Level) Turns off or on an extension user ability to program General function keys using Service Code 851 (by default). (Refer to Program 2007-10 for Service Code 852 .) Selectable Display Messaging (Text Messaging) Turns off or on an extension user ability to use Selectable Display Messaging. Account Code/Toll Restriction Operator Alert (Restricted Operation Transfer) Turns off or on operator alert when an extension user improperly enters an Account Code or violates Toll Restriction. Extension Name Turns off or on an extension user ability to program its name. Busy Status Display (Called Party Status) Turns off or on the ability to display the detailed state of the called party. 0 = Off 1 = On

18

19

0 = Off 1 = On 1

20

0 = Off 1 = On 1

21

0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On

22

20-13-06

Programming Manual

2-165

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Default Item No.

23

Item
Display the Reason for Transfer Select whether an extension should display the reason a call is being transferred to their extension (Call Forward Busy, Call Forward No Answer, DND). Privacy Release by Pressing Line Key Turns off or on a user ability to press a line key to barge into an outside call. The Barge-In feature must be enabled if this option is to be used. Group Listen Turns off or on an extension user ability to use Group Listen. Busy on Seizing Virtual Extension If set to 1, you can call a busy extension which is talking on a virtual extension key. Program 20-13-06 (Call Waiting) must be set to 0 for this option to work. Allow Class of Service to be Changed Turns off or on the ability of an extension Class of Service to be changed via Service Code 777 . Paging Display Turns off or on an extension user ability to display paging information. Background Music Allow or Deny an extension user to turn Background Music on and off. Connected Line Identification (COLP)

Input Data COS 01 ~ 15

0 = Off 1 = On 0

Related Program

24

0 = Off 1 = On 0

Program

20

26

0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On

27

28

0 = Off 1 = On 0

29

0 = Off 1 = On

30

0 = Deny 1 = Allow 0 = Off 1 = On

31 32

Deny Multiple Barge-Ins 0 = Off Allows or Denies an extension from 1 = On having multiple users Barge into their conversation. ACD Supervisors Position Enhancement This option must be set 1 for the operator to use service codes in Programs 11-13-10 ~ 11-13-13. Block Manual Off-Hook Signaling Turns off or on an extension user ability to block off-hook signals manually sent from a co-worker. Block Camp On Turns off or on an extension user ability to block callers from dialing to Camp On. 0 = Off 1 = On

33

11-13-10 11-13-11 11-13-12 11-13-13

34

0 = Off 1 = On 0

35

0 = Off 1 = On

36

Call Duration Timer Display 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension dis1 = On play of the Call Duration Time. The system waits until the interdigit time (Program 21-01-01) expires before beginning this timer. Headset Ringing for SLT Turn off or on an extension user ability to use the Headset ringing 0 = Off 1 = On

38

2-166

Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Default Item No.

40

Item
Do Not Disturb Turn off or on an extension user ability to set or cancel Do Not Disturb.

Input Data COS 01 ~ 15

0 = Off 1 = On

Related Program

11-11-08 15-07-03

41

Voice Mail Message Indication 0 = Off on DSS 1 = On Turn off or on the Voice Mail Message Indication for an extension on a DSS console. Extension Data Swap Enabling 0 = Off Turn off or on an extension user 1 = On ability to use Extension Data Swap. Live Monitor Enabling Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Live Monitor. Mute Key Mode while Call Monitoring Set per class of service, when in Call Monitoring Mode determines if the monitored parties receive the barge in alert tone when Coaching Mode is enabled. Remote Conference Station Number Display Determine if a station Number will be displayed (On) or not displayed (Off) in the LCD when the phone is in an idle state. Station Name Display Determine if a station Number will be displayed (On) or not displayed (Off) in the LCD when the phone is in an idle state. BLF Indication on CO Incoming State Determine if a BLF of the station will light when a Normal CO call is ringing the phone. Number and Name appear in the Directory Determine if an extension name and number will be listed (On) or unlisted (Off) in the directory. VoIPDB All DSP Busy Display Set whether All DSP Busy alarm displays on LCD when the caller makes an IP call and there is no VoIPDB DSP resource. Language Selection for specific extension Call waiting for standard SIP terminal 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On

42

Program
1 11-15-12

44

20
20-13-10

45

46 47

0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On

11-19 20-34

48

0 = Off 1 = On 1

49

0 = Off 1 = On 0

51

0 = Off 1 = On 1

52

0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1

53

0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 = Disable 1 = Enable

11-11-68 15-02-01 47-02-16 20-13-05 20-13-06 20-09-01 20-09-07

54

55

Intercom Call to Room Monitor

0 = Off 1 = On

Conditions
None

Programming Manual

2-167

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Feature Cross Reference

Class of Service

Program

20

2-168

Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M to enable/disable DISA and tie line Class of Service options. You assign a DISA Class of Service to DISA users in Program 25-09. Assign tie line Classes of Service in 34-02. Up to 15 DISA/E&M Classes of Service can be defined. Analog trunk-to-analog trunk and ISDN trunk-to-ISDN trunk calls are supported by this program. However, analog trunk-to-ISDN trunk and ISDN trunk-to-analog trunk calls are NOT supported by this program. Program

20

Input Data
Class of Service Number 01 ~ 15

Default Item No.

01

Item
First Digit Absorbtion (Delete First Digit Di0 = Off aled) 1 = On For tie lines, enable or disable the ability to absorb (ignore) the first incoming digit. Use this to make the tie trunk compatible with 3- and 4-digit tie line service. This option does not apply to DISA. Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access 0 = Off This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk 1 = On caller ability to dial 9 for Trunk Group Routing or Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route). Trunk Group Access 0 = Off This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk 1 = On caller ability to access trunk groups for outside calls (Service Code 804 ). Outgoing System Speed Dial 0 = Off This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk 1 = On caller ability to use the System Speed Dialing. Operator Calling 0 = Off This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk 1 = On caller ability to dial 0 for the telephone system operator. Internal Paging 0 = Off This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk 1 = On caller ability to use the telephone system Internal Paging. External Paging 0 = Off This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk 1 = On caller ability to use the telephone system External Paging. Direct Trunk Access 0 = Off This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk 1 = On caller ability to use Direct Trunk Access (Service Code #9 ). Forced Trunk Disconnect <Not for ISDN T-point> This option enables or disables a tie trunk caller ability to use Forced Trunk Disconnect (Service Code 724 ). This option is not available to DISA callers. 0 = Off 1 = On

Input Data COS 01 ~ 15

0

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

Programming Manual

2-169

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Default Item No.

10

Item
Call Forward Setting by Remote via DISA Enable or disable a DISA caller ability to use the Call Forward service codes (Programs 11-11-01 ~ 11-11-05). 0 = Off 1 = On

Input Data COS 01 ~ 15

0

11

DISA/Tie Trunk Barge-In 0 = Off This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk 1 = On caller ability to use the Barge-In. Retrieve Park Hold 0 = Off This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk 1 = On caller ability to retrieve a Park Hold call.

12

Program

20

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Class of Service Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

2-170

Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup to define the ringing cycles for each ring type. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11

Incoming Signal Type

Normal Incoming Call on Trunk PBX, CES Incoming Call Incoming Internal Call DID/DISA/VRS DID/DDI Dial-In in the E&M Tie Line Door Box Ringing for SLT Virtual Extension Ring Callback Alarm for SLT VRS Waiting Message Incoming Call

Ringing Cycle

Default
3 8 8 8 8

20

1 ~ 13

8 2 8 4 5 6

Table 2-4 Ringing Cycles

Number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 On On : 2.0 / Off : 4.0 On : 1.0 / Off : 2.0 On : 0.5 / Off : 0.5 On : 0.25 / Off : 0.25 On : 0.5 / Off : 0.5 / On : 0.5 / Off : 1.5 On : 0.25 / Off : 0.25 / On : 0.25 / Off : 5.25 On : 0.375 / Off : 0.25 / On : 0.375 / Off : 2.0 On : 0.25 / Off : 0.125 / On : 0.25 / Off : 0.125 / On : 0.25 / Off : 2.0 On : 1.0 / Off : 4.0 On : 0.25 / Off : 0.25 / On : 0.25 / Off : 4.25 On : 1.0 / Off : 3.0 On : 0.25 / Off : 0.25 / On : 0.25 / Off : 2.25

Ringing Cycle

Conditions
None

Programming Manual

2-171

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Feature Cross Reference

None

Program

20

2-172

Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-16 : Selectable Display Messages
Level

SA
Description
Use Program 20-16 : Selectable Display Messages to enter the Selectable Display Messages. There are 20 alphanumeric messages, with up to 16 characters. Use the following chart when programming messages.
Use this keypad digit ...
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

Program

When you want to ...

Enter characters: 1 @ [ ] ^ _ ` { | } Enter characters : A-C, a-c, 2. Enter characters : D-F, d-f, 3. Enter characters : G-I, g-i, 4. Enter characters : J-L, j-l, 5. Enter characters : M-O, m-o, 6. Enter characters : P-S, p-s, 7. Enter characters : T-V, t-v, 8. Enter characters : W-Z, w-z, 9. Enter characters : 0 ! # $ % & ( ) Enter characters : 0

20

*
# Clear/Back Flash

# = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex : TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use the right arrow soft key instead to accept and/or add a space.) Clear the character entry one character at a time. Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.

*+,-./:;<=>?

When using DTP or DTU style telephones on the SL1000 system, not all the same characters are available.

Input Data
Selectable Display Message Number 01 ~ 20

Item No.
01

Input Data
16 characters

Default
Number
1 2 3 4 IN MEETING UNTIL ## : ## MEETING ROOM - ######## COME BACK ## : ## PLEASE CALL ###########

Message

Programming Manual

2-173

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Number
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 BUSY CALL AFTER ## : ## OUT FOR LUNCH BACK ## : ## BUSINESS TRIP BACK ## / ## BUSINESS TRIP ########## GONE FOR THE DAY ON VACATION UNTIL ## / ## MESSAGE 11 MESSAGE 12 MESSAGE 13 MESSAGE 14 MESSAGE 15 MESSAGE 16 MESSAGE 17 MESSAGE 18 MESSAGE 19 MESSAGE 20

Message

Program

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

20

Conditions
Time value ## : ## must be followed by two spaces.

Feature Cross Reference

Selectable Display Messages

2-174

Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-17 : Operator Extension
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 20-17 : Operator Extension to designate an operator. When an extension user dials 0 or 9 (defined by Program 11-01 Type 5), calls go to the operator selected in this program. If you do not assign an extension in Program 90-11-01, system alarms appear on the extension assigned in this option. Program

20

Input Data
Operator Number 1~8

Item No.
01

Item

Input Data

Default
200

Related Program
11-01 20-01-01

Note

Operators Extension Up to four digits Number Define the extension numbers which are to be used by operators.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Intercom

Programming Manual

2-175

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-18 : Service Tone Timers
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 20-18 : Service Tone Timers to set the values for the system service tone timers. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting.

20

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Extension Dial Tone Time

Input Data
0 ~ 64800 seconds

Default
30

Description
After getting Intercom dial tone, a telephone user has this time to dial the first digit of the Intercom call.

Related Program

02 03

Busy Tone Timer Congestion Tone

0 ~ 64800 seconds 0 ~ 64800 seconds

15 10 A Busy Tone when system resources run short. (such as DTMF receiver resources). This option sets the time between Call Waiting tones. This timer also sets the time between Off-Hook Signaling alerts.

04

Call Waiting Tone Timer

0 ~ 64800 seconds

10

05 06 07

Multiline Confirmation Tone Interval of Call Waiting Tone Intrusion Tone Repeat Time

0 ~ 64800 seconds 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0 ~ 64800 seconds

10 10 0 After a call is interrupted (such as Barge-In, Voice Mail Conversation Recording, or Voice Over), the system repeats the Intrusion Tone after this time. Normally, you should enter 0 to disable this time.

08 09

Conference Tone Interval Warning Beep Tone Signaling Interval

0 ~ 64800 seconds 0 ~ 64800 seconds

0 60 14-01-18

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Distinctive Ringing, Tones, and Flash Patterns

2-176

Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-19 : System Options for Caller ID
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 20-19 : System Options for Caller ID to define the system options for the Caller ID feature. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item

Input Data

Default
0

Note

20

Caller ID Displaying Format 0 = First 10 digits (if displaying digits are more than (Upper) 12 digits) 1 = Last 10 digits (Lower) Caller ID Wait Timer When an incoming CO call is received, the SL1000 starts the timer. It will wait the programmed time for Caller ID information from telco before connecting the CO call. 0 ~ 30 seconds

02

03

Caller ID Edit Mode 0 = Off If Caller ID Edit Mode is disabled 1 = On (0), no trunk access code will be added to the Caller ID. If this option is enabled (1), the trunk access code entered in Program 10-02-05 will be added to the beginning of the Caller ID. Wait Facility IE Timer This timer is used with ISDN trunks to determine how long the system waits for the Caller ID name from the Telco. Caller ID Sender Queing Time (Sender Wait) Long Distance Code Area Code 0 ~ 64800 seconds

04

10

05 07 08

0 ~ 64800 seconds Up to two digits Up to six digits

0 No setting No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Caller ID

Programming Manual

2-177

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data to define the messages which are displayed when no Caller ID information is received.

20

Input Data
Item No.
01 02 03 Private Call Call from Out of Service Area Call Information with Error

Item

Input Data
24 Alphanumeric Characters

Default
UNAVAILABLE INFO OUT-OF-STATE NO CALLER INFO

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Caller ID

2-178

Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation to define the system options for the Long Conversation feature. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Long Conversation Alarm 1 The warning tone for long toll calls sounds after this time.

Input Data
0 ~ 64800 seconds

Default
170

Related Program
14-01-15

20

02

Long Conversation Alarm 2 0 ~ 64800 seconds After the initial long toll call warning tone, additional warning tones sound after this time. Long Conversation Cutoff for 0 ~ 64800 seconds Incoming Call This timer determines how long the system waits before disconnecting an incoming call. Long Conversation Cutoff for 0 ~ 64800 seconds Outgoing Call This timer determines how long the system waits before disconnecting an outgoing call. Conversation cutoff for remote monitor 0 ~ 64800 seconds

180

14-01-15

03

14-01-14

04

14-01-14

05

180

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Long Conversation Cutoff

Programming Manual

2-179

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-22 : System Options for Wireless - DECT Service
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 20-22 : System Options for Wireless - DECT Service to define the time the system waits before determining the Wireless - DECT phone is out of range. For incoming calls, the timer begins when the call is received. If the time defined here expires before the Wireless - DECT phone starts to ring, the system determines the phone is out of range and provides the out-of-range services (indicates out-of range, transfers the call to voice mail or to another extension).

20

Input Data
Item No.
05 06

Item
Out of Area Judging Time Out of Area Talkie Number

Input Data
0 ~ 64800 seconds 0 ~ 100

Default
0 0

Note

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-180

Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-23 : System Options for CTI
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 20-23 : System Options for CTI to define the system options for the CTI feature. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01 02 03

Item
Delayed ring timer for CTI ALERT replay time (CTI)

Input Data
0 ~ 64800 seconds 0 ~ 64800 seconds

Default
30 second 8 second 0

20

Trunk Virtual Bridge - TSP Driver 0 = Disable (No) Enable or disable the system to send trunk or 1 = Enable (Yes) virtual extension information to the TSP driver. The Timer that waits for an off-hook for Single Line Telephone 0 ~ 64800 seconds

04

30 second

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-181

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-25 : ISDN Options
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 20-25 : ISDN Options to define the ISDN system options. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01 02 03 04

20

Item
Send the Release Message After Subscriber Hangs Up

Input Data
0 = Service Off 1 = Service On

Default
1 1 0 0

Progress Indicate Information Element De- 0 = Service Off tect 1 = Service On Bearer Capability Select from SLT Outgoing Send DT until user dials first digit (Local Dial Tone) With Overlap Sending Mode, if the network side stops dial tone when CLI is included in the SETUP message, the system sends dial tone until the user dials the first digit instead of the network. 0 = 3.1 KHz Audio 1 = Speech 0 = Service Off 1 = Service On

05 06 07

T305 Timer Start After Sending Disconnect 0 = Service Off Message 1 = Service On Call Proceeding Send Mode Local Busy Tone Mode Set When Disconnect Message Received 0 = Service Off 1 = Service On 0 = Local Busy Tone Off 1 = Busy Tone from NT (network side)

1 1 0

08

Use of Lower Layer Compatibility (LLC) 0 = Disable (Off) This Program must be set to (0 = Disable) for 1 = Enable (On) International Dialing when using Calling Number Presentation (CPN) from station. High Layer Compatibility (HLC) Sending S-Point Terminal Seizes Analog Trunk Automatic Changing System Clock When Date/Time Information Element Received Call Forward Options (Auto Connect Send) Incoming Calls Forwarded Out Automatically Return Connect Message When Outgoing Call Receives Alerting Message. Local Busy Tone (Release) Busy tone send when T-point receiving a RELEASE message from Network. No Response Release Send Operation mode setting for when second T303 timer expires. Call Reference selection for PRI 2B-Ch Transfer 0 = Disable (Off) 1 = Enable (On) 0 = Disable (Off) 1 = Enable (On) 0 = Disable (Off) 1 = Enable (On) 0 = Normal - No Message (Off) 1 = Normal - No Message (On) 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On

09 10 11 12

1 0 1 0

13

14

15

Conditions
None

2-182

Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Feature Cross Reference

ISDN Compatibility

Program

20

Programming Manual

2-183

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-26 : Multiplier for Charging Cost
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 20-26 : Multiplier for Charging Cost to define the Multiplier for charging cost to each extension service class.

20

Input Data
Service Class 01 ~ 15

Item No.
01 Value (%)

Item

Input Data
100 ~ 500

Default
100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-184

Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-28 : Trunk to Trunk Conversation
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 20-28 : Trunk to Trunk Conversationto define system options for Trunk to Trunk Conversation. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item

Input Data

Default
No setting

Related Programming
14-01-25 20-28-03 24-02-07 24-02-10 25-07-07 25-07-08 14-01-25 24-02-07 24-02-10 25-07-07 25-07-08 14-01-25 20-28-01 24-02-07 24-02-10 25-07-07 25-07-08

20

Conversation Continue Code 0 ~ 9, , # Input the code that can be dialed to (Set for one digit only) continue the conversation after the Trunk-to-Trunk Release Warning Tone is heard.

02

Conversation Disconnect Code 0 ~ 9, , # Input the code that can be dialed to (Set for one digit only) disconnect the conversation after the Trunk-to-Trunk Release Warning Tone is heard.

No setting

03

Conversation Continue Time Input how long the conversation extends when the Conversation Continue Code is dialed.

0 ~ 64800 seconds

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-185

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-29 : Timer Class for Extension
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 20-29 : Timer Class for Extension to assign the timer class to each extension. There are 16 Classes that can be assigned. You make eight entries for this Program, one for each Night Service Mode. This entry includes virtual extension numbers. The details of classes are assigned by Program 20-31.

20

Input Data
Extension Number Up to four digits

Item No.
01

Item
Day/Night Mode 1 ~ 8

Input Data
0 ~ 15 0 = Not assigned

Default
0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-186

Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-30 : Timer Class for Trunks
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 20-30 : Timer Class for Trunks to assign the timer class to each trunk. There are 16 Classes that can be assigned. You make eight entries for this Program, one for each Night Service Mode. The details of classes are assigned by Program 20-31. Program

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

20
Item
Day/Night Mode 1 ~ 8

Item No.
01

Input Data
0 ~ 15, #, 0 = Not assigned

Default
0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-187

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-31 : Timer Class Timer Assignment
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 20-31 : Timer Class Timer Assignment to assign values to the timers on a class of service basis.

20

Input Data
Timer Class Number 0 ~ 15

Item No.
01

Item
Trunk Queuing Callback Duration Time Trunk Queuing Callback rings an extension for this amount of time Callback / Trunk Queuing Cancel Time The system cancels an extension Callback or Trunk Queueing request after this amount of time.

Input Data
0 ~ 64800 seconds

Default
15 seconds

Related Program
20-01-08

02

0 ~ 64800 seconds

64800 seconds

20-01-09

03

0 ~ 64800 seconds Virtual Extension Delay Interval Virtual Extensions set for Delayed Ringing (refer to 15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment) on page 2-133 ring the extension after this time. Intercom Interdigits Time (Intercom 0 ~ 64800 seconds I/D Timer) When placing Intercom calls, extension users must dial each digit in this time. Trunk Interdigits Time (Trunk I/D Timer) The system waits for this time to expire before placing the call in a talk state (Call Timer starts after time expires, Voice Over and Barge-In are not allowed until after time expires). Hotline Time Start Time (Hotline Start) A Ringdown extension automatically calls the programmed destination after this time. Ring No Answer Alarm Time If a trunk rings a multiline telephone longer than this time, the system changes the ring cadence. This indicates to the user that the call has been ringing too long. 0 ~ 64800 seconds

10 seconds

20-04-03

04

10 seconds

21-01-02

05

10 seconds

21-01-03

06

0 ~ 64800 seconds

5 seconds

21-01-09

07

0 ~ 64800 seconds

60 seconds

22-01-03

08

DIL/Incoming Ring Group No An0 ~ 64800 seconds swer Time A DIL that rings its programmed destination longer than this time diverts to the DIL No Answer Ring Group (set in Program 22-08).

0 second

22-01-04

2-188

Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
09

Item
DID Ring-No-Answer Time In systems with DID Ring-No-Answer Intercept, this time sets the Ring-NoAnswer time. This time is how long a DID call rings the destination extension before rerouting to the intercept ring group. Hold Recall Time (Non Exclusive Hold) A call on Hold recalls the extension that placed it on Hold after this time. This time works with the Hold Recall Callback Time (Program 24-01-02 ).

Input Data
0 ~ 64800 seconds

Default
20 seconds

Related Program
22-01-06

10

0 ~ 64800 seconds

90 seconds

24-01-01

Program
30 seconds 24-01-02

11

Hold Recall CallBack Time (Non 0 ~ 64800 seconds Exclusive Hold) A trunk recalling from Hold or Park rings an extension for this time. This time works with Hold Recall Time or Park Hold Time. After this time, the system invokes the Hold Recall Time again. Cycling between time Program 24-01-01 and 24-01-02 and Program 24-01-06 and 24-01-07 continues until a user answers the call. Exclusive Hold Recall Time A call left on Exclusive Hold recalls the extension that placed it on Hold after this time. Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time An Exclusive Hold Recall rings an extension for this time. If not picked up, the call goes back on System Hold. 0 ~ 64800 seconds

20

12

90 seconds

24-01-03

13

0 ~ 64800 seconds

30 seconds

24-01-04

14

Park Hold Time - Normal 0 ~ 64800 seconds A call left parked longer than this time interval recalls the extension that initially parked it. Delayed Call Forwarding Time (Call 0 ~ 64800 seconds Forward No Answer) If activated at an extension, Delayed Call Forwarding occurs after this time. This also sets how long a Transferred call waits at an extension forwarded to Voice Mail before routing to the called extension mailbox. Transfer Recall Time An unanswered transferred call recalls after this time to the extension that initially transferred it. 0 ~ 64800 seconds

90 seconds

24-01-06

15

10 seconds

24-02-03

16

30 seconds

24-02-04

17

DID/DISA No Answer Time (Discon- 0 ~ 64800 seconds nect or IRG or VM) A VRS/DISA caller can ring an extension for this time before the system sets the call as a Ring No Answer. After this time expires, the call follows the programmed Ring No Answer routing (set in Program 25-03 and 25-04). Disconnect after Re-transfer to IRG 0 ~ 64800 seconds Long Conversation Warning Tone Time (Trunk to Trunk) Determine the time a DISA caller or any trunk-to-trunk (such as Tandem Trunking) conversation can last before the Long Conversation tone is heard 0 ~ 64800 seconds

10 seconds

25-07-02

18 19

60 seconds 30 seconds

25-07-03 25-07-07

Programming Manual

2-189

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item No.
20

Item

Input Data

Default
15 seconds

Related Program
25-07-08

Long Conversation Disconnect 0 ~ 64800 seconds (Trunk to Trunk) This time determines how long the system waits before disconnecting a DISA caller or any trunk-to-trunk (such as Tandem Trunking) conversation call after the Long Conversation tone is heard. DISA Internal Paging Time 0 ~ 64800 seconds This is the maximum length of an Internal Page placed by a DISA caller. If the Page continues longer than this time, the system terminates the DISA call. DISA External Paging Time 0 ~ 64800 seconds This is the maximum length of an External Page placed by a DISA caller. If the Page continues longer than this time, the system terminates the DISA call. Page Announcement Duration This timer sets the maximum length of Page announcements. (Affects External Paging only) Mobile Extention answer time Mobile Extention callback time 0 ~ 64800 seconds

21

30 seconds

25-07-09

Program

20

22

30 seconds

25-07-10

23

1200 seconds

31-01-02

24 25

1 ~ 64800 seconds 1 ~ 64800 seconds

3 seconds 15 seconds

22-01-12 20-01-16

Conditions
These timers are used when an extension or trunk is assigned to a class from 1 to 16 in 20-29-01 or 20-30-01. When the timer class is set to 0, the system-wide timer is used. All defaults are the same as the system-wide timers.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-190

Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-34 : Remote Conference Group Setup
Level

SA
Description
Use Program 20-34 : Remote Conference Group Setup to define the Remote Conference options. Program

Input Data
Remote Conference Group Number 1~4

20
Default
Group1 = Conf1 Group2 = Conf2 Group3 = Conf3 Group4 = Conf4 Group1 = 1111 Group2 = 2222 Group3 = 3333 Group4 = 4444 8 7200 seconds

Item No.
01

Item
Conference Name Enter the name displayed at the time of a Remote Conference. This entry will display on the keyset LCD. Password Define the password of a Remote Conference. Define the maximum number of participants of a Remote Conference. Max Conference Duration Define the maximum duration of a Remote Conference. When this time passes, the conference is disconnected by the SL1000 .

Input Data
Up to 12 characters

02

4 digits Fixed (0 ~ 9, @ = wild character)

03 04

0 ~ 32 0 ~ 64800 seconds

05

End Tone Alert Time 0 ~ 64800 seconds Determine how long prior disconnecting a Remote Conference call (based on the maximum conference duration above) the SL1000 should send out a beep. This is used to warn the conference participants of the pending disconnect.

300 seconds

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Conference, Remote

Programming Manual

2-191

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-35 : Extension's Operator Setting
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 20-35 : Extensions Operator Setting to assign an extension to an operator group.

Input Data

20
Item No.
01

Extension Number

Up to four digits

Item
Extensions Operator Setting

Input Data
0 ~ 15 ( 0 = Not Set)

Default
0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-192

Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-36 : Trunk's Operator Setting
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 20-36 : Trunks Operator Setting to assign a trunk to an operator group. Program

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

20
Default
0

Item No.
01

Item
Trunks Operator Setting Allows the user to select Operator Group per trunk.

Input Data
0 ~ 15 (0 = Not assigned)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-193

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-37 : Operator Extension Group Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 20-37 : Operator Extension Group Setup to define the operator(s) in the operator group.

20

Input Data
Operator Group 1 ~ 15

Operator Number

1~8

Item No.
01

Item
Operator Extension Group Setup

Input Data
Up to four digits

Default
None

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-194

Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-38 : Operator Group Setting
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 20-38 : Operator Group Setting to set up priority of a call when calling an operator telephone. Program

Input Data
Operator Group 1 ~ 15

20
Default
0

Item No.
01

Item
Operator Access Mode Assign if the operator is called, starting with the first operator, every time (0) or a different operator is tried first (1)

Input Data
0 = Step 1 = Circular

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-195

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-39 : Shortcut Operation Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 20-39 : Shortcut Operation Setup to defines the function for shortcut opeartion .

Input Data

20
Item No.
01

Operator Group

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0,

*, #

Item
Shortcut Operation

Input Data
00 ~ 99, #00 ~ #04 00 ~ 99 : Function Code of Program 15-07 #00 : System Information #01 : Function Key Setup #02 : Expand Function Setup #03 : Incoming Melody Setup #04 : Outgoing History

Default
Number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 40 85 #00 27 28 16 17 #03 35 38 #01 #02

Message

*
#

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-196

Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-40 : Function Key List Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 20-40 : Function Key List Setup to defines the function List used with function key setting. Program

Input Data
Data No. 1 ~ 10

20

Item No.
01

Item
Function Key List

Input Data
00 ~ 99, 00 ~ 99 (Function Code of Program 15-07)

Default
Number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 04 16 17 18 20 27 40 50 85

Message

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-197

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-41 : Service Code Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 20-41 : Service Code Setup to set up feature key from Dial Key.

Input Data

20
Item No.
01

Dial

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0,

*, #

Item
Service Code Setup

Input Data
0 = None 1 = Call Forward - All 2 = Night-mode switching (Own Group) 3 = BGM On/Off 4 = Common canceling service code 5 = Walking Toll Restriction 6 = Direct call pickup - own group 7 = Answer message waiting 8 = Dial Block 9 = Entry Common Abbreviated Dial

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-198

Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-42 : Night Mode for each package
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 20-42 : Night Mode for each package to assigns the Night Mode to each package. This Program uses ecology function (Program 20-43). Program

Input Data
PKG Number 02 ~ 16

20
Related Program
12-02

Item No.
01

Item
Ecology Mode group No Assign Night mode group number per each package (slot)

Input Data
1~4

Default
1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-199

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-43 : Power supply for each package
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 20-43 : Power supply for each package to assigns the Night Mode to each package. This Program uses ecology function (Program 20-43).

20

Input Data
PKG Number 02 ~ 16

Operation Mode

01 ~ 08

Item No.
01

Item
Ecology Mode Assigns the power supply mode to each package base

Input Data
0 = Cut the power 1 = Power Supply

Default
1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-200

Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-44 : Watch Mode Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 20-44 : Watch Mode Setup to defines the watch mode. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01 02 03 04

Item
Internal Paging Group for Watch Message Define Internal paging group number for Watching message. External Paging Group for Watch Message Define External paging group number for Watching message VRS Message for Watch Mode Define VRS number used for Watching message Interval Timer for Watch Message Define interval time for sending Watching message.

Input Data
0 ~ 32 0~8 0 ~ 100 0 ~ 60

Default
0 0 0 0

20

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-201

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-45 : Remote Watch Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 20-45 : Remote Watch Setup to defines the remote watch.

Input Data

20
Item No.
01 02 03 04

Terminal Number

1~6

Item
Ring Terminal for Remote Inspection Extension number for Remote Inspection Ring Time Setting Ringing starttime for Inspected Extension Ring Timer Ringing continue time for inspected extension Auto Dial Number Area Setting Speed dial number when detect no answer at extension and make emergency call VRS Message for Answer VRS message number when inspected extension answered VRS Message for Auto Dial VRS message number when emergency call destination answered. Time of Repeat Auto Dial Repeat number for making emergency call. Auto Dial Calling Time Ccalling continue time when making emergency call. Interval of Auto Dial

Input Data
Extension Number (Up to 4 digits) 0000 ~ 2359 0 ~ 60 0 ~ 999

Default
No setting 0000 0 0

05 06

0 ~ 100 0 ~ 100

0 0

07 08 09

0 ~ 255 0 ~ 3600 0 ~ 3600

0 0 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-202

Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-46 : Security Sensor Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 20-46 : Security Sensor Setup to defines the security sensor. Program

Input Data
Security Sensor Number 1~8

20
Default
0 0 0 0 0 0

Item No.
01 02 03 04 05 06

Item
Sensor Mode Define door port (408M 6,7 ) to use as Sensor. Internal Paging Group for Warning Message Define Internal paging group number for Warning message Ring Timer Define External paging group number for Warning message. VRS Message for Warning Define VRS number used for Warning message. Auto Dial Number Area Setting Define Speed dial number when sensor detects warning. VRS Message for Answer Define VRS message number when emergency call destination answered. Auto Dial Wait Timer Define wait time before making emergency auto dial. Time of Repeat Auto Dial Define repeat number for making emergency call. Auto Dial Calling Time Define calling continue time when making emergency call. Monitered Terminal Define extension number for monitor from outside Interval of Auto Dial

Input Data
0 = Off 1 = On 0 ~ 32 0~8 0 ~ 100 0 ~ 999 0 ~ 100

07 08 09 10 11

0 ~ 64800 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 64800 Extension Number (Up to 4 digits) 0 ~ 3600

30 3 30 No setting 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-203

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-47 : Time pattern setting for Watch Mode
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 20-47 : Time pattern setting for Watch Mode to defines the watch mode time pattern.

Input Data

20
Item No.
01

Time Pattern

01 ~ 08

Item
Watch Mode Time Pattern Define watch mode on/off against time pattern 1-8

Input Data
0 = Off 1 = On

Default
0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-204

Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-48 : Time pattern setting for Security Sensor
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 20-48 : Time pattern setting for Security Sensor to defines the Security Sensor time pattern. Program

Input Data
Time Pattern 01 ~ 08

20
Default
0

Item No.
01

Item
Security Sensor Time Pattern Define security senser on/off against time pattern 1-8

Input Data
0 = Off 1 = On

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-205

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-49 : Caller ID Shared Group Basic Data Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 20-49 : Caller ID Shared Group Basic Data Setup to defines the function mode for each Caller ID shared group.

20

Input Data
Caller ID shared group Number 01 ~ 08

Item No.
01

Item
Group Name Caller ID shared group Name

Input Data
Maximum 12 characters

Related Program
15-02-67

Default
Group
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Group1 Group2 Group3 Group4 Group5 Group6 Group7 Group8

Group Name

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-206

Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls to set the system options for Outgoing Call Service. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01

21
Item Input Data
0 = Priority Route 1 = Circular Route

Default
0

Related Program
14-05 14-06

Seizure Trunk Line Mode Select the trunk based off the Trunk Route Priority (0) or based off the trunk that has not been used in the longest time (1). Intercom Interdigit Time When placing Intercom calls, extension users must dial each digit in this time. Trunk Interdigit Time (External) The system waits for this time to expire before placing the call in a talk state (Call Timer starts after time expires, Voice Over and Barge-In are not allowed until after time expires).

02

0 ~ 64800 seconds

10 seconds

03

0 ~ 64800 seconds

10

14-02-08

04

Dial Tone Detection Time 0 ~ 64800 seconds If dial tone detection is enabled, the system waits this time for the Telco to return dial tone. When the time expires, the system assumes dial tone is not present. To disable this time (and have the system wait continuously), enter 0. Disconnect Time when Dial Tone 0 ~ 64800 seconds not Detected If 14-02-11 is enabled, the system skips over a trunk if dial tone is not detected. This option pertains to calls placed using Speed Dial, ARS, Last Number Redial or Save Number dialed. It does not pertain to line key or Direct Trunk Access calls. Dial Pause at First Digit Toll Restriction Override Time After dialing the Toll Restriction Override codes, the system removes Toll Restriction from the extension for this time. Preset Dial Display Hold Time Ringdown Extension Timer (Hotline Start) A Ringdown extension automatically calls its programmed destination after this time. 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0 ~ 64800 seconds

5 seconds

14-02-05

05

06 07

3 10 seconds 20-08-06 21-07

08 09

0 ~ 64800 seconds 0 ~ 64800 seconds

5 5 seconds 20-08-09 21-11

Programming Manual

2-207

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item No.
10

Item
Dial Digits for Toll Restriction 0 ~ 36 Path If this option is programmed with an entry other than 0, a call does not have a talk path unless the user dials at least the number of digits entered in this option when placing an outgoing call. This means that an entry of 4 or higher in this program causes a problem when dialing 911 (USA only). Since it is only a 3-digit number, the call does not have a talk path, preventing the emergency dispatcher from hearing the caller. This option should be kept at its default setting of 0 to prevent any problems with dialing 911 (USA only). Inter-Digit Time for Toll Restriction Path Control Dial E911 Routing Without Trunk Access If enabled (1), an extension user can dial 911 (USA only) without first dialing a trunk access code or pressing a line key. If disabled (0), an extension user must dial a trunk access code (e.g., 9) or press a line key before dialing 911 (USA only).

Input Data

Default
0

Related Program

Program

21
11 12

0 ~ 60 seconds 0 = Trunk Access Code Required 1 = Trunk Access Code Not Required

10 1

13

Alarm Ring Timer (E911) 0, 1~ 64800 seconds Use this option to set the duration (0 = Off) of the E911 Alarm Ring Time. If set for 0, the E911 Alarm does not ring. Forced Account Code Inter-digit Timer The system waits this time for a user to enter a Forced Account code. Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line (Toll Restriction) Enable or disable the Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line feature. Supervise Dial Detection Timer With the Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line feature, if dial tone is not detected after the extension answers an incoming line, the system determines the call is unable to complete and releases the DTMF receiver. 0 ~ 64800 seconds

11-12-56 20-08-16

14

3 seconds

15

0 = Disable (Off) 1 = Enable (On)

15-01-05 21-01-16 21-01-17 80-03-01 15-01-05 21-01-16 21-01-17 80-03-01

16

0 ~ 64800 seconds

20 seconds

17

Restriction Digit in Outgoing Digits 1 ~ 9 Disable on Incoming Line With the Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line feature, determine the number of digits to be dialed before the call should be disconnected. Reset Dial After Failure of Trunk 0 = Disable (Off) Access 1 = Enable (On) Enable (1) or Disable (0) the ability to continue to dial codes or extensions after receiving Trunk Busy. This needs to be set to Enabled (1) for the Forced Trunk Disconnect feature to work.

15-01-05 21-01-15 21-01-16 80-03-01

18

2-208

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
19

Item
Do-Not-Call-Setup

Input Data
0 = No service 1 = Extented common restriction

Default
0

Related Program
15-01-07

Conditions
None Program

Feature Cross Reference

Central Office Calls, Placing

21

Programming Manual

2-209

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions to assign Program 14-06 routes to extensions.

21

Input Data
Extension Number Maximum four digits

Item No.
01

Day/Night Mode
1~8

Route Table Number

0 ~ 25 (0 = No setting)

Default
1

Related Program
14-06 14-01-07

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-210

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks to set the Trunk Route Table for Automatic External Call Forward. The Route Table is set in Program 14-06. Program

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

21
Related Program
14-06 14-07-01

Item No.
01

Day/Night Mode
1~8

Route Table Number

0 ~ 25 (0 = No setting)

Default
0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Trunk Group Routing

Programming Manual

2-211

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-04 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 21-04 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions to assign a Toll Restriction class to an extension. The details of Toll Restriction are defined in Program 21-05 and 21-06. A telephone and a trunk will have a Restriction Class. The higher class applies for outgoing calls.

21

Input Data
Extension Number Maximum four digits

Item No.
01

Day/Night Mode
1~8

Restriction Class
1 ~ 15

Default
2

Related Program
14-01-08 21-05

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-212

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-05 : Toll Restriction Class
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 21-05 : Toll Restriction Class to set the system Toll Restriction classes (1 ~ 15).

Input Data
Toll Restriction Class Number 1 ~ 15

Program

Item No.
01

Item

Input Data

Default
0

Related Program
21-06-01

Note

21

International Call Restriction Table 0 = Unassigned (No) This option assigns/unassigns the 1 = Assigned (Yes) International Call Restrict Table for the Toll Restriction Class you are programming. Enter International Call Restrict Table data in Program 21-0601. International Call Permit Code 0 = Unassigned (No) Table 1 = Assigned (Yes) This option assigns/unassigns the International Call Permit Table for the Toll Restriction Class you are programming. Enter International Call Permit Table data in Program 21-0602. Maximum Number of Digits Table 1 ~ 4 = Table Assignment 0 = Disable (None) Select the table (defined in 21-06-03) to be used to determine the maximum number of digits allowed for outgoing calls. Common Permit Code Table It chooses whether the table set up by 21-06-04 is referred to, or not referred to. Common Restriction Table It chooses whether the table set up by 21-06-05 is referred to, or not referred to. 0 = Unassigned (No) 1 = Assigned (Yes)

02

21-06-02

04

21-06-03

05

21-06-04

06

0 = Unassigned (No) 1 = Assigned (Yes)

21-06-05

07

Permit Code Table 1 ~ 4 = Table Set the tables 1 ~ 4 when referring to 0 = Disable (None) the table set up by 21-06-06. Restriction Table 1 ~ 4 = Table Set the tables 1 ~ 4 when referring to 0 = Disable (None) the table set up by 21-06-07. Restriction for Common Speed Dials Use this option to enable/disable Toll Restriction for Common Speed Dialing numbers. If enabled, System Speed Dialing numbers have the same restrictions as manually dialed numbers. Restriction for Group Speed Dials Use this option to enable/disable Toll Restriction for Group Speed Dialing numbers. If enabled, Group Speed Dialing numbers have the same restrictions as manually dialed numbers. 0 = Does Not Restrict 1 = Following Restriction Check

21-06-06

08

21-06-07

09

10

0 = Does Not Restrict 1 = Following Restriction Check

Programming Manual

2-213

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item No.
11

Item
Intercom Call Restriction Determines if incoming and outgoing intercom calls are allowed.

Input Data
0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes)

Default
0

Related Program

Note

12

Program

21
13 14

PBX Call Restriction 0 = Disable (No) Use this option to set how the system 1 = Enable (Yes) Toll Restricts calls over PBX trunks. If you enable PBX Toll Restriction, the system begins Toll Restriction after the PBX access code. The user cannot dial a PBX extension. If you disable PBX Toll Restriction, the system only restricts calls that contain the PBX access code. The system does not restrict calls to PBX extensions. Refer to the PBX compatibility feature. Make sure Program 21-05-04 (Maximum Number of Digits Table Assignment) allows for PBX Toll Call Dialing (normally 12 digits). Restriction of Tie Line Calls It chooses whether the toll restriction of the dial set up by 34-08 is enabled or disabled. Trunk Transfer Restriction on Incomplete Dial If this program is set to 1, you can transfer the outgoing trunk which you dialed incompletely. Common Hold Restriction on Incomplete Dial If this program is set to 1, you can hold the outgoing trunk which you dialed in restriction check. 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes)

34-08

0 = Not allow 1 = Allow

15

0 = Not allow 1 = Allow

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-214

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup to set the system Toll Restriction data. Dial 1 ~ 9, 0, , # can be entered in each table. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01

21
Item Table
1 ~ 10

Input Data
Dial (Up to four digits)

Default
Tables 1 ~ 10 = No setting

International Call Restriction Table This option lets you program the Restrict Table for international calls. The system has 10 International Call Restrict Tables. Each entry can have up to four digits. International Call Permit Code Table This option lets you program the Permit Table for international calls. The system has 20 International Call Permit Tables. Each entry can have up to six digits. Maximum Number Digits Table Assignment This option selects the maximum number of digits allowed in outgoing calls for each table. Common Permit Code Table This option lets you program the Common Permit Code Table. This table contains up to 10 codes you commonly allow users to dial. Common Restriction Table This option lets you program the Common Restrict Code Table. This table contains up to 10 codes you commonly prevent users from dialing. Permit Code Table This option lets you program the Permit Code Tables. If the system has Toll Restriction enabled, users can dial numbers only if permitted by these tables and the Common Permit Table (21-06-04). There are four Permit Code Tables, with up to 200 entries in each table. The system permits calls exactly as you enter the code. Deny Restriction Table This option lets you program the Restrict Code Tables. If the system has Toll Restriction enabled, users cannot dial numbers listed in these tables. There are four Restrict Code Tables, with up to 200 entries in each table. The system restricts calls exactly as you enter the code.

02

1 ~ 20

Dial (Up to six digits)

Tables 1 ~ 20 = No setting

03

1~4

4 ~ 30

Tables 1 ~ 4 = 30

04

1 ~ 10

Dial (Up to four digits)

Tables 1 ~ 10 = No setting

05

1 ~ 10

Dial (Up to 12 digits)

No setting

06

1 ~ 4 (table) 001 ~ 200 (Entry)

Dial (Up to 12 digits)

Tables 1 ~ 4 = No setting

07

1 ~ 4 (table) 1 ~ 60 (Entry)

Dial (Up to 12 digits)

Tables 1 ~ 4 = No setting

Programming Manual

2-215

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item No.
08

Item
PBX Access Code Use this option to enter the PBX Access Code. When the system is behind a PBX, this is the code users dial to access a PBX trunk. Toll Restriction begins after the PBX access code. For PBX trunks (Program 14-04) the system only Toll Restricts calls that contain the access code. Always program this option when the system is behind a PBX, even if you dont want to use Toll Restriction. PBX Access Codes can have up to two digits, using 0-9, #, and LINE KEY 1 (dont care). When using Account Codes, do not use an asterisk in a PBX access code. Otherwise, after the , the trunk stops sending digits to the central office. Entries 1~4 correspond to the 4 PBX Access Codes. Each code can have up to two digits.

Table
1~4

Input Data
Dial (Up to two digits)

Default
Tables 1 ~ 4 = No setting

Program

21
09 10

Specific Dial Outgoing Code Outgoing Call Code Setup

1 ~ 20 1 ~ 20

Dial (Up to eight digits) Dial (Up to four digits)

Tables 1 ~ 20 = No setting Tables 1 ~ 20 = No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-216

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup
Level

SA
Description
Use Program 21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup to assign Toll Restriction Override codes to extension ports. Each code must have four digits, using any combination of 0 ~ 9, # and . Each extension can have a separate code, or many extensions can share the same override code.

Program

Input Data
Extension Number Maximum four digits

21
Password
Four Digits (Fixed)

Item No.
01

Default
No setting

Related Program
21-01-07 20-08-06

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-217

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup to define the automatic Repeat Dial data.

Input Data

21

Item No.
01

Item
Repeat Redial Count Sets how many times a Repeat Redial automatically repeats if the call does not go through. Repeat Redial Interval Time Set the time between Repeat Redial attempts. Repeat Dial Calling Timer After dialing the trunk call, Repeat Redial maintains the call after this time. After this time, the system terminates the call, waits the Repeat Redial Time (Timer 02) and tries again. Time for Send Busy Tone for ISDN Trunk Sets the time (sec) to send out Busy Tone with an ISDN line, when called party is busy.

Input Data
0 ~ 255

Default
3

02

0 ~ 64800 seconds

60 seconds

03

0 ~ 64800 seconds

30 seconds

04

0 ~ 64800 seconds

0 second

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-218

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-09 : Dial Block Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 21-09 : Dial Block Setup to define the Dial Blocking Toll Restriction Class and Dial Block Password to be used by the Supervisor extension. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Toll Restriction Class With Dial Block Assign a Toll Restriction Class of Service when the Dial Block feature is used. Supervisor Password Assign a 4-digit password to be used by the supervisor to enable or disable Dial Block for other extensions. 1 ~ 15

Input Data

Default
1

21

02

0 ~ 9, , # (4-digit fixed)

No setting

Conditions
This function works by password and Class of Service control (the supervisor is not an assigned extension). If Dial Block is available for all Classes of Service, everyone may become a supervisor if they know the Dial Block password.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-219

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension to define the Toll Restriction Class to each extension when the extension is set for Dial Block Restriction. If this data is 0, Toll Restriction Class follows Program 21-09-01.

21

Input Data
Extension Number Maximum four digits

Item No.
01

Toll Restriction Class

0, 1 ~ 15 (0 = No setting)

Default
0 (No setting)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-220

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment to define the Hotline destination number for each extension number. Program

Input Data
Extension Number Maximum four digits

21
20-08-09 21-01-09

Item No.
01

Hotline Destination Number

1 ~ 0, , #, Pause, Hook Flash, @ (Code to wait for answer supervision) (maximum 36 digits)

Default
No setting

Related Program

Conditions
The @ code is used to make an outbound call automatically to a DISA Trunk or to VM Auto Attendant. This code can only be used on ISDN outbound calls. Internal calls and analog outbound calls are not supported.

Feature Cross Reference

Ringdown Extension (Hotline), Internal/External

Programming Manual

2-221

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks to assign Calling Party Numbers for each trunk (maximum 16 digits per entry). When a call is made by an extension which does not have an Extension Calling Number assigned (Program 21-13), the system sends the calling number for the ISDN trunk defined in 21-12. If the Calling Party Number is assigned in both Programs 21-12 and 21-13, the system sends the data in Program 21-13.

21

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

Item No.
01

Calling Party Number Data

1 ~ 0,

Default
No setting

*, # (maximum 16 digits)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

ISDN Compatibility

2-222

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions to assign each extension a Calling Party Number (maximum 16 digits per entry). The calling number is the subscriber number of the dial-in number. When a call is made by an extension which does not have an Extension Calling Number assigned (Program 21-13), the system sends the calling number for the ISDN trunk defined in Program 21-12. If a Calling Party Number is assigned in both Programs 21-12 and 21-13, the system sends the data in Program 21-13. Program

21

Input Data
Extension Number Maximum four digits

Item No.
01

Calling Party Number Data

1 ~ 0,

Default
No setting

*, # (maximum 16 digits)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

ISDN Compatibility

Programming Manual

2-223

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup
Level

SA
Description
Program Use Program 21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup to assign the password and Toll Restriction Class for Walking Toll Restriction. Each code has six digits, using any combination of 0 ~ 9, # and .

21

Input Data
ID Table Number 1 ~ 100

Item No.
01 02 User ID

Item

Input Data
Dial (Six digits) 1 ~ 15

Default
No setting 15

Walking Toll Restriction Class Number

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Code Restriction/Toll Restriction

2-224

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions to designate the alternate trunk access route accessed when a user dials the Alternate Trunk Route Access Code. Refer to Program 11-09 : Trunk Access Code on page 2-59 when setting up alternate trunk codes. Refer to 14-06 : Trunk Group Routing on page 2-100 to set up the trunk routes. When entering data for this option, enter the route number or 0 to prevent routing. Program

21

Input Data
Extension Number Maximum four digits

Item No.
01

Day/Night Mode
1~8

Route Table Number

0 ~ 25 (0 = No setting)

Default
0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Central Office Calls, Placing

Programming Manual

2-225

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-17 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 21-17 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk set the SIP calling party number for individual trunks.

21

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

Item No.
01

Description
IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk

Input Data
Up to 16 digits (1 ~ 0, , #)

Default
No setting

Related Program
15-01-04 20-08-13

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-226

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-18 : IP Trunk (H.323) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 21-18 : IP Trunk (H.323) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension to assign the Calling Party Number for each extension. The assigned number is sent to the exchange when the caller places an outgoing call. When the Calling Party Number is assigned by Programs 21-17, 21-18 and 21-19, the system uses the data in Programs 21-18 and 21-19. Program

21

Input Data
Extension Number Up to four digits

Item No.
01

Description
IP Trunk (H.323) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension

Input Data
Up to 16 digits (1 ~ 0, , #)

Default
No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-227

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-19 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension
Level

IN
Description
Program

21

Use Program 21-19 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension to set the SIP calling party number for an individual extension.

Input Data
Extension Number Up to four digits

Item No.
01

Description

Input Data

Default
No setting

Related Program
15-01-04 20-08-13

IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Num- Up to 16 Digits ber Setup for Extension (1 ~ 0, , #)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-228

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-20 : SIP Trunk Call Discernment Setup for Extension
Level

SB
Description
Use Program 21-20 : SIP Trunk Call Discernment Setup for Extension to set the SIP Trunk Call Discernment. Program

Input Data
Extension Number Up to four digits

21
Default
1

Item No.
01 Discernment Tone

Item
0 = Off 1 = On

Input Data

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-229

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-21 : Toll Restriction for Trunks (Seized Trunk Basis Setting)
Level

IN
Description
Program

21

Use Program 21-21 : Toll Restriction for Trunks (Seized Trunk Basis Setting) to define the toll restriction class to each trunk. The details of toll restriction are defined by Programs 21-05 and 21-06. This program is compared to Station Restriction Class. The higher class is applied.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

Day/Night Mode

1 ~ 9 (9 = Power Failure mode)

Item No.
01

Description
Restriction Class Enter the Toll Restriction Class for the selected trunk.

Input Data
1 ~ 15

Default
1

Related Program
14-01-08 21-05

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-230

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-22 : CO Message Waiting Indication - Call Back Settings
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 21-22 : CO Message Waiting Indication - Call Back Settings to define the settings of CO Message Waiting Indication. Program

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

21
Default
0 999

Item No.
01 02

Description
CO MWI Call Back Enabling Enable or Disable CO MWI Call Back. CO MWI Call Back Number Area Setting Define the Speed Dial Bin number for MWI Call Back.

Input Data
0 = No VMWI Service 1 = Enable VMWI Service 0 ~ 999

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-231

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-24 : Forced Access Dial Data
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 21-24 : Forced Access Dial Data to set for Emergency number data. First digit of dialing data should be same as trunk access code.

21

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Define the Emergency Number Data

Input Data
1 ~ 0, , # (maximum 16 digits)

Default
No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-232

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls to define the system options for incoming calls. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01

22
Item Input Data
0 = Intercom Call Priority 1 = Trunk Call Priority

Default
1

Related Program
15-02-22

Incoming Call Priority Use this option to determine if Intercom calls or trunk calls have answer priority when both are ringing simultaneously. Incoming Call Ring No Answer Alarm If enabled, an incoming call that rings longer than the Ring No Answer Alarm interval (22-01-03), changes to a unique ring cadence to indicate that the call has been ringing too long. If disabled, this does not occur. Ring No Answer Alarm Time If a trunk rings a multiline telephone longer than this interval, the system changes the ring cadence. This indicates to the user that the call has been ringing too long. DIL No Answer Recall Time A DIL that rings its programmed destination longer than this interval diverts to the DIL No Answer Ring Group (set in Program 22-08). DID Ring-No-Answer Time In systems with DID Ring-No-Answer Intercept, this sets the Ring-NoAnswer time. This time is how long a DID call rings the destination extension before rerouting to the intercept ring group. DID Incoming Ring Group No Answer Time DID Pilot Call No Answer Time DID to Trunk to Trunk no answer timer VRS Waiting Message Operation Set up the operation mode for Auto Attendant and Queuing Message.

02

0 = Disable (Off) 1 = Enable (On)

22-01-03 22-01-04

03

0 ~ 64800 seconds

60 seconds

22-01-02

04

0 ~ 64800 seconds

0 second

06

0 ~ 64800 seconds

20 seconds

22-12

07 08 09 10

0 ~ 64800 seconds 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0 = Enable Always 1 = Change by Manual Operation

20 seconds 60 seconds 20 seconds 0 22-14 22-15 22-08 22-04 22-01-04 20-15-11 15-07 22-14-06 22-15-06 41-11-06

11

VRS Waiting Message Interval Time Setup the sending duration time of the Auto - Attendant & Queuing. The message is repeatedly sent out during the specified time.

0 ~ 64800 seconds

20 seconds

Programming Manual

2-233

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item No.
12

Item
Mobile Extention answer time

Input Data
0~ 64800 seconds

Default
3 seconds

Related Program
15-22-04

Conditions
None

Program

Feature Cross Reference

Central Office Calls, Answering

22

2-234

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup to assign the incoming trunk type for each trunk. There is one item for each Night Service Mode. Program

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

22
Related Program
14-04

Item No.
01

Day/Night Mode
1~8

Incoming Type
0 = Normal 1 = VRS (second dial tone if no VRS installed) 2 = DISA 3 = DID 4 = DIL 5 = E&M Tie line 6 = Delayed VRS 7 = ANI/DNIS 8 = DID (DDI) Mode Switching

Default
0

Description
Use this option to set the feature type for the trunk you are programming.

Conditions
When connecting to T1 trunks, after changing Program 22-02-01 to match the Telco connected T1 service type, the T1 cable or the T1 unit must be unplugged and then reconnected for the T1 unit to sync. When the trunk type is set to 3 (DID), the DID Transfer to Destination in 22-11-04 for each DID feature is not supported. This feature is supported only for DID trunks when assigned as VRS. When the trunk type is set to 3 (DID), the DID Intercept Destination feature for each DID is not supported. This feature is supported only for DID trunks assigned as VRS.

Feature Cross Reference

Central Office Calls, Answering

Programming Manual

2-235

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range to select the ring tone range for the trunk. The trunk uses a ring tone in the range selected when it rings an extension. Eight ring tones are available. Customize the Trunk Ring Tones in Program 82-01.

22

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

Item No.
01

Ring Tone Pattern

0= Ring Tone Pattern 1 (1) 1= Ring Tone Pattern 2 (2) 2= Ring Tone Pattern 3 (3) 3= Ring Tone Pattern 4 (1) 4= Ring Tone Pattern 5(2) 5= Ring Tone Pattern 6(3) 6= Ring Tone Pattern 7(3) 7= Not Used 8= Not Used

Default
0

Description
Use this program to select the ring tone range for the trunk. The trunk uses a ring tone in the range selected when it rings an extension. Eight ring tones are available.

Related Program
15-02

Table 2-5 Program 22-03 - Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns

Incoming Signal Frequency Pattern
Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Pattern 3 Pattern 4 Pattern 5 Pattern 6 Pattern 7

Tone Type
600/450/16 Hz FM 450/16 Hz AM 600 Hz 1100/1400/16 Hz FM 660/760/16 Hz FM 1100/1400/8 Hz FM 660/760/8 Hz FM

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Selectable Ring Tones

2-236

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment
Level

SA
Description
Use Program 22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment to assign extensions to Ring Groups. Calls ring extensions according to Ring Group programming. Use Program 22-05 to assign trunks to Ring Groups and use Program 22-06 to set the ringing for the phones. An Incoming Ring Group (IRG) can have up to 32 extension numbers assigned. There are 25 available Ring Groups. Program

22

Input Data
Incoming Ring Group Number 01 ~ 25

Item No.
01

Extension Number
Maximum four Digits

Description
Use this program to assign extensions (up to 32) to Ring Groups. Calls ring extensions according to Ring Group programming.

Related Program
22-02 22-05 22-06

Default
Only Group01 has 200.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Ring Groups

Programming Manual

2-237

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment to assign trunks to incoming Ring Groups. There are 25 available Ring Groups.

22

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

Item No.
01

Day/Night Mode
1~8

Incoming Group Number

0 = No setting 01 ~ 25 =Incoming Group 101 = Not Used 102 = VMI 103 = Not Used

Default
1

Description
Use this program to assign Normal Ring Trunks (22-02) to Incoming Ring Groups (22-04).

Related Program
22-04 22-06

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Ring Groups

2-238

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode to define whether or not an extension should ring for the Normal Incoming Ring Mode. Program

Input Data
Extension Number Maximum four digits

22
22-04 22-05

Item No.
01

Day/Night Mode
1~8

Incoming Group Number

0 = No Ring 1 = Ring

Default
1

Related Program

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Central Office Calls, Answering

Programming Manual

2-239

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-07 : DIL Assignment
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 22-07 : DIL Assignment to assign the destination extension or Department Calling Group for each DIL Incoming trunk. A DIL rings an extension directly, without any other Access Map or Ring Group programming. If an extension has a line key, the DIL rings the line key. Use Program 22-02 to designate a trunk as a DIL. You can make eight DIL assignments, one for each Night Service mode.

22

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

Item No.
01

Day/Night Mode
1~8

Number of Transferring Destination

Assign extension or department group number for DIL trunk Extension Number (maximum four digits )

Default
No setting

Conditions
Program 22-02 must be set to four for the trunk.

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward Line (DIL)

2-240

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination
Level

IN
Description
For DIL Delayed Ringing, use Program 22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination to assign the DIL No Answer Ring Group. An unanswered DIL rings this group after the DIL No Answer Time expires (Program 22-01-04). DIL Delayed Ringing can also reroute outside calls ringing a Ring Group. Make eight assignments, one for each Night Service mode. Program

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

22

Item No.
01

Day/Night Mode
1~8

Incoming Group Number

0 = No setting 01~25 = Incoming Group 101 = Not Used 102 = VMI 103 = Not Used

Default
0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward Line (DIL) Ring Group

Programming Manual

2-241

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup to define the basic setting of Dial-In incoming calls for each trunk group.

22

Input Data
Trunk Group Number 01 ~ 25

Item No.
01

Item
Expected Number of Digits 1~8 Enter the number of digits the table expects to receive from the telco. Use this program to make the system compatible with 3and 4-digit DID service. If ISDN trunks, we analyze the last digits that are set here. If it is T-1 or analog DID, it analyzes the first digits that are assigned here. Received Vacant Number Operation Use this option to enable or disable Vacant Number Intercept. Sub-Addressing Mode DID Receiving Mode for ISDN Local Code Digits (Only Overlap Receiving Mode) Local Code (Only Overlap Receiving Mode) Pilot Code (Only Overlap Receiving Mode) T302 Time-out Operation (Only Overlap Receiving Mode)

Input Data

Default
2

02

0 = Disconnect (Cut) 1 = Transfer (Refer to Program 22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group. on page 2-247) 0 = Extension # Specify (Intercom) 1 = DID Conversion Table 0 = Enbloc Receiving 1 = Overlap Receiving 0 ~ 15 (0 = No Local Code) Dial (maximum 16 digits) Dial (1 digit : 0 ~ 9) 0 = Disconnect (Cut) 1 = Transfer (Refer to Program 22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group. on page 2-247)

03 04 05 06 07 08

0 0 0 No setting No setting 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

2-242

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup to specify the size of the DID Translation Tables. There are 2000 Translation Table entries that you can allocate among 20 Translation Tables. Program

Input Data
Conversion Table Area Number 01 ~ 20

22

Item No.
01

Item
1st Area Setup (Start Address) 1st Area Setup (End Address) 2nd Area Setup (Start Address) 2nd Area Setup (End Address) 0 ~ 800 (0 = No setting)

Input Data

Default Table
Conversion Table Area
1 2 3 4 5 : 20

1st Start Table

1 201 401 601 0 : 0

2nd End Table

200 400 600 800 0 : 0

Start Table
0 0 0 0 0 : 0

End Table
0 0 0 0 0 : 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

Programming Manual

2-243

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion
Level

SA
Description
Program Use Program 22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion to specify for each Translation Table entry (800). The digits received by the system (eight maximum) The extension the system dials after translation (36 digits maximum) The name that should show on the dialed extension display when it rings (12 characters maximum) The Transfer Target - 1 and 2 If the Transfer Targets are busy or receive no answer, those calls are transferred to the final transfer destination (Program 22-10). Operation Mode Use the following chart when entering and editing text for names. Press the key once for the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press 2 three times.
Key for Entering Names When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can have up to 12 digits. Use this keypad digit . . .
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

22

Use this keypad digit . . .

Enter characters: 1 @ [ ] ^ _ ` { | } Enter characters: A-C, a-c, 2. Enter characters: D-F, d-f, 3. Enter characters: G-I, g-i, 4. Enter characters: J-L, j-l, 5. Enter characters: M-O, m-o, 6. Enter characters: P-S, p-s, 7. Enter characters: T-V, t-v, 8. Enter characters: W-Z, w-z, 9. Enter characters: 0 ! # $ % & ( ) Enter characters: 0

*
# Clear/Back Flash

# = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex : TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use the right arrow soft key instead to accept and/or add a space.) Clear the character entry one character at a time. Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.

*+,-./:;<=>?

Input Data
Conversion Table Number 001 ~ 800

Item No.
01

Input Data
Received Number This is the received DID digits.

Description
Maximum eight digits (0 ~ 9, , #)

Default
See Default Value

2-244

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
02

Input Data
Target Number Enter the destination number to which the DID number is sent.

Description
Maximum 36 digits (0 ~ 9, , #, @)

Default
See Default Value

03

DID Name Maximum 12 characters This is the name that is assigned to the DID digits when it rings the extension. Transfer Operation Mode 0 = No Transfer 1 = Busy 2 = No Answer 3 = Busy/No Answer

No setting

04

Program
0 0

05 06

Transfer Destination Number 1 0 = No set 01 ~ 25 = Incoming Rin Group Transfer Destination Number 2 101 = Not used 400 - Allow the outside party to 102 = VMI dial a different extension number 103 = Not used in the translation table (for ex201 ~ 232 = Department Group ample, ring no answer to a di400 = DUD aled number, the caller then 401 = DISA hears a dial tone, allowing them 501 ~ 599 = DISA to enter another Valid Extension (VRS Message No.) Number). 1000 ~ 1999 = 401 - Provide the caller with Common ABB Dial (000 ~ 999) DISA dialing options (requires using the DISA password).

22

This applies to 22-11-05 and 22-11-06.

07 Call Waiting Program 20-09-07 overrides this setting. 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes) 0

08 09 10 11

Maximum Number of DID Calls 0 ~ 126 (0 = No limit) Music on Hold Source Not Used Incoming Ring Group Transfer 0 = Disable (Caller will hear Ringback) Enable (1) or disable (0) each 1 = Enabled (Go to normal ring) conversation tables ability to follow the Ring Group programming defined in Program 2212-01 : DID Intercept Ring Group. If Program 22-11-05 : DID Translation Number Conversion, Transfer Destination Number 1 and Program 22-11-06 : DID Translation Number Conversion, Transfer Destination Number 2 are set, the priority of transferring is in this order: Program 2211-05 then Program 22-11-06 then if Program 22-11-11 is enabled, Program 22-12-01. 0 = IC/MOH Port 1 = BGM Port

0 0

Default
The default value of Programs 22-11-01 and 22-11-02 is shown as below.
Conversion Table
1 2 : 100

Received number
00 01 : 99

Target number
200 201 : 299

Programming Manual

2-245

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Conversion Table
: 800

Received number
: No setting

Target number
: No setting

Conditions
When the trunk type is set to 3 (DID) in 22-02-01, the DID Transfer Destination for each DID feature is not supported. This feature is supported only for DID trunks when assigned as VRS. Program

22

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

2-246

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group
Level

IN
Description
For each DID Translation Table, use Program 22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group to define the first destination group for DID calls. Depending on the entry in Programs 22-09-02 and 22-11-04, the incoming calls route to the first destination group by the following: Vacant number intercept (vacant number means that no phone is connected, no station unit is installed, or the extension number is not defined in Program 11-02) Busy intercept Ring-no-answer intercept If the destination is 0, the calls are forwarded to the trunk ring group defined in Program 22-11 based on the table assigned to the DID trunk. If Programs 22-11-05 and 22-11-06 are set, the priority of transferring is in this order: Program 22-11-05 + Program 22-11-06 + Program 22-12. For busy and no-answer calls, if the first and third destinations are programmed, but the second destination is not, the incoming call goes to the third destination after the first destination. If the first and second destinations are not defined, but the third destination is, the call goes directly to the third destination. Program

22

Input Data
Conversion Table Area Number 01 ~ 20

Item No.
01

Day/Night Mode
1~8

Incoming Group Number

0 = No setting 1 ~ 25 = Incoming Ring Group 101 = Not Used 102 =VMI 103 = Not Used

Default
1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

Programming Manual

2-247

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment to assign the DID Trunk Groups to DID Translation Tables. DID trunks should be in their own group. If you have more than one type of DID trunk, put each type in a separate Trunk Group. For each Trunk Group, you make a Translation Table entry for each Night Service mode.

22

Input Data
Trunk Group Number 1 ~ 25

Item No.
01

Day/Night Mode
1~8

Conversion Table Area Number

0 ~ 20 (0 = No setting)

Default
1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

2-248

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-14 : VRS Delayed Message for IRG
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 22-14 : VRS Delayed Message for IRG (Incoming Group Ring) to define for each incoming ring group the timers, VRS message number and type of tone for VRS Waiting Message. Program

Input Data
Incoming Ring Group Number 1 ~ 25

22
Default
0 0

Item No.
01

Item
1st Delayed Message Start Time Time before the VRS Delay Message is played for IRG. 1st Delayed Message Number VRS message that is used for the 1st Delayed Message. 1st Delayed Message Sending Count This is the number of times the 1st Delay Message is played. If set to 0, the 1st Delay Message is not played. 2nd Delayed Message Number VRS message that is used for the 2nd Delayed Message. 2nd Delayed Message Sending Count This is the number of times the 2nd Delay Message is played. If set to 0, the 2nd Delay Message is not played. Tone Kind at Message Interval What is heard between the Delay Message. Disconnect Time After the End of VRS Delayed Message Time, after all 2nd Delay Messages are played, before the caller is disconnected.

Input Data
0 ~ 64800 seconds

02

0 ~ 101 0 = No Message 101 = Fixed Message 0 ~ 255 (time)

03

04

0 ~ 101 0 = No Message 101 = Fixed Message 0 ~ 255 (time)

05

06

0 = Ring Back Tone 1 = MOH Tone 2 = BGM Source 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0 = No Disconnect

07

60

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-249

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-15 : VRS Delayed Message for Department Group
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 22-15 : VRS Delayed Message for Department Group to define for each Department (Extension) Group the timers, VRS message number and tone kind for VRS Delayed Message. There are 64 available Department Groups.

22

Input Data
Extension Group Number 01 ~ 32

Item No.
01

Item
1st Delayed Message Start Time Time before the VRS Delay Message is played for Department Group. 1st Delayed Message Number VRS message that is used for the 1st Delayed Message. 1st Delayed Message Sending Count This is the number of times the 1st Delay Message is played. If set to 0, the 1st Delay Message is not played. 2nd Delayed Message Number VRS message that is used for the 2nd Delayed Message. 2nd Delayed Message Sending Count This is the number of times the 2nd Delay Message is played. If set to 0, the 2nd Delay Message is not played. Tone Kind at Message Interval What is heard between the Delay Message. Disconnect Time After the End of VRS Delayed Message Time, after all 2nd Delay Messages are played, before the caller is disconnected.

Input Data
0 ~ 64800 seconds

Default
0

02

0 ~ 101 0 = No Message 101 = Fixed Message 0~255 (time)

101

03

04

0 ~ 101 0 = No Message 101 = Fixed Message 0 ~ 255 (time)

101

05

06

0 = Ring Back Tone 1 = MOH Tone 2 = BGM Source 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0 = No Disconnect

07

60

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Department Group

2-250

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-16 : Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 22-16 : Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup to define Speed Dial group number for Private Call Refuse. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Speed Dial Group Number 0 ~ 32

Input Data

Default
0

22

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Department Group

Programming Manual

2-251

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-17 : Dial-In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern
Level

SA
Description
Program

22

Use Program 22-17: Dial-In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern to define Time Zone and Dial-In Conversion Table (Program 22-11) for Time Pattern.

Input Data
Conversion Table Number 001 ~ 100

Time Pattern Number

1~8

Item No.
01 02 03 04 Received Dial Start of Time End of Time

Item

Input Data
Up to eight digits 0000 ~ 2359 (Time) 0000 ~ 2359 (Time) 0 ~ 800

Default
No setting 0000 0000 0

Dial-In Conversion Table Number

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-252

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-18 : Private Call Assignment Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 22-18: Private Call Assignment Setup to define assignment and incoming ring pattern for Private Calls. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Transfer Mode

Input Data
0 = Not defined 1 = Internal dial 2 = Incoming Ring Group 1 = Internal Dial (up to 36 digits) 0 ~ 9, , #, P, R, @ 2 = Incoming Ring Group 0 ~ 25

Default
0

Related Rrogram
14-01-27 15-02-02 40-10-06

22

02

Destination Number

No setting

03

Incoming Ring Pattern

Incoming Ring Pattern (0 ~ 9) 0 = Normal pattern 1 ~ 3 = Tone pattern (1 ~ 3) 4 ~ 5 = Scale pattern (1 ~ 2) 6~9 = Not Used

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-253

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-19 : DID MFC Dialing Options
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 22-19 : DID MFC Dialing Options to define the MFC Dialing for each DID table entry. This option is used for Latin America only.

22

Input Data
Conversion Table Number 1 ~ 800

Item No.
01

Item
DID MFC Dialing Category

Input Data
0 = Normal 1 = Without Charge 2 = Called Party Release

Default
0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-254

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-20 : Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 22-20: Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Setup to set flexible ringing by Caller ID per timer pattern mode. Program

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

22
Related Program
13-04 14-01-30

Day/Night Mode

01 ~ 08

Item No.
01

Item
Flexible Ringing

Input Data
0 = Disable 1 = Enable

Default
1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-255

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 23 : Answer Features Setup

23-02 : Call Pickup Groups
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 23-02 : Call Pickup Groups to assign extensions to Call Pickup Groups. This program also lets you assign an extension Call Pickup Group priority. If two extensions in a group are ringing at the same time, Group Call Pickup intercepts the highest priority extension first. There are 32 available Call Pickup Groups.

23

Input Data
Extension Number Maximum four digits

Item No.
01

Group Number
1 ~ 32

Priority
1 ~ 999

Default
1 - xxx

Description
Use this program to assign extensions to Call Pickup Groups other than the extension group set up by a Program 16-02.

Related Program
11-12-26 11-12-27 11-12-28 15-07-24 15-07-25 15-07-26

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Group Call Pickup

2-256

Program 23 : Answer Features Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 23 : Answer Features Setup

23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer to assign trunk routes (set in Program 14-06) to extensions for Universal Answer. If the call ringing the paging system is in an extension assigned route, the user can dial the Universal Answer code (#0) to pick up the call. You can also use this program to let an extension user automatically answer trunk calls that ring other extensions (not their own). When the user lifts the handset, they automatically answer the ringing calls based on Trunk Group Routing programming (defined in Program 14-06). The extension user ringing calls, however, always have priority over calls ringing other co-worker extensions. Refer to the Line Preference feature in the SL1000 Features and Specifications Manual for more information. Make one entry for each Night Service mode. Program

23

Input Data
Extension Number Maximum four digits

Item No.
01

Day/Night Mode
1~8

Route Table Number

0 ~ 25

Default
0

Description
Use this program to let an extension user automatically answer trunk calls that ring other extensions. When the user lifts the handset, they automatically answer the ringing calls based on Trunk Group Routing programming (defined in Program 14-06).

Related Program
14-06

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Line Preference Night Service

Programming Manual

2-257

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 23 : Answer Features Setup

23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions to set the off-hook automatic response priority for calls ringing virtual extension keys on a telephone. There are 50 available Virtual Extension Ports.

23

Input Data
Extension Number Maximum four digits

Item No.
01

Priority Order
1~4

Extension Group Number

0 ~ 32 (0 = No setting)

Default
0

Description
When an extension has a virtual extension assigned to a Programmable Function Key, this program determines the priority for automatically answering the ringing calls when the handset is lifted. If 0 or 00 is selected, when the user lifts the handset, the user answers a ringing call from any group.

Related Program
16-02

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Virtual Extensions

2-258

Program 23 : Answer Features Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

24-01 : System Options for Hold
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 24-01 : System Options for Hold to define the system options for the Hold feature. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Hold Recall Time A call on Hold recalls the extension that placed it on Hold after this time. This time works with the Hold Recall Callback Time (Item 2). Hold Recall Callback Time A trunk recalling from Hold or Park rings an extension for this time. This time works with Hold Recall Time or Park Hold Time. After this time, the system invokes the Hold recall time again. Cycling between time 01 and 02 and 06 and 07 continues until a user answers the call. Exclusive Hold Recall Time A call left on Exclusive Hold recalls the extension that placed it on Hold after this time. Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time An Exclusive Hold Recall rings an extension for this time. If not picked up, the call goes back on System Hold. Forced Release of Held Call Depending on the setting of Program 14-0116, the system disconnects calls on Hold longer than this time. Park Hold Time - Normal A call left parked longer than this time recalls the extension that initially parked it. Park Hold Time - Extended (Recall) A call left parked longer than this time recalls the extension that initially parked it.

Input Data
0 ~ 64800 seconds

Default
90 seconds

Related Program

24

02

0 ~ 64800 seconds

30 seconds

03

0 ~ 64800 seconds

90 seconds

04

0 ~ 64800 seconds

30 seconds

05

0 ~ 64800 seconds

64800 seconds

14-01-16

06

0 ~ 64800 seconds

90 seconds

20-31-14

07

0 ~ 64800 seconds

300 seconds

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Hold Park

Programming Manual

2-259

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

24-02 : System Options for Transfer
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 24-02 : System Options for Transfer to define the system options for the Transfer feature.

24

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Busy Transfer Use this option to prevent or allow extensions to Transfer calls to busy extensions. If disabled, calls transferred to busy extensions recall immediately. MOH or Ringback on Transferred Calls Use this option to enable or disable MOH on Transfer. If enabled (0), a transferred caller hears MOH while their call rings the destination extension. If disabled (1), a transferred caller hears ringback while their call rings the destination extension. Delayed Call Forwarding Time If activated at an extension, Delayed Call Forwarding occurs after this time. This also sets how long a Transferred call waits at an extension forwarded to Voice Mail before routing to the called extension mailbox. Transfer Recall Time An unanswered transferred call recalls to the extension that initially transferred it after this time.

Input Data
0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes)

Default
0

Related Program

02

0 = Hold Tone 1 = Ring Back Tone

20-03-02

03

0 ~ 64800 seconds

10 seconds

20-31-15

04

0 ~ 64800 seconds

30 seconds

20-31-16

05

Message Wait Ring Interval Time 0 ~ 64800 seconds For Single Line Telephones (SLTs) without message waiting lamps, this is the time between intermittent ringing. If this value is set to 0, the system rings once. Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Release Warning 0 ~ 64800 seconds Tone Time starts when a trunk begins talking with another trunk (for example : trunk-to-trunk transfer, outgoing from trunk, Tandem Trunking). When this time expires, a warning tone is heard. If Program 24-02-10 is set, the conversation disconnects after time expires. This time is set again when the external digit timer expires. One of the trunks used must be an analog trunk (or leased line). Delayed Transfer Time for all Department Groups Two B-Channel Transfer Retry Timer Disconnect Trunk-to-Trunk 0 ~ 64800 seconds

30 seconds

07

1800 seconds

14-01-25 20-28-01 20-28-02 20-28-03 24-02-10

08

10 seconds

11-11-28 11-11-29 15-07-59 10-03-16 (PRI) 14-01-25 20-28-01 20-28-02 20-28-03 24-02-07 14-01-26

09 10

0 ~ 30 seconds 0 ~ 64800 seconds

10 seconds 0

11

No Answer Step Transfer

0 ~ 64800 seconds

10 seconds

2-260

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
12 13

Item
No Answer Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Hook Flash Sending Timer When the System Answers Automatically Time before sending the hook flash for Call Forward Centrex.

Input Data
0 ~ 64800 seconds 0 ~ 64800 seconds

Default
0 2 seconds

Related Program
14-01-26

Conditions
None Program

Feature Cross Reference

Transfer

24

Programming Manual

2-261

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

24-03 : Park Group
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 24-03 : Park Group to assign an extension to a Park Group. The system allows a total of 64 Park Groups. An extension user can pick up only a call parked in orbit by an extension users in their own group.

24

Input Data
Extension Number Maximum four digits

Item No.
01

Park Group Number

1 ~ 64

Default
1

Description
Assign an extension to a Park Group. The system allows a total of 64 Park Groups.

Related Program
15-07-01

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Park

2-262

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup to assign the Speed Dialing number bin which should be used as the destination of the Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer. Program

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

24
Related Program
11-10-08 13-04 24-05

Item No.
01

Day/Night Mode
1~8

Speed Dial Area Number

0 ~ 999

Default
999

Description
The destination telephone number of the Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer uses the number registered into the Speed Dial. Use this program to setup the Speed Dial Bin Number.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Call Forwarding, Off-Premise

Programming Manual

2-263

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup to assign the Speed Dialing bin which is used as the destination of the extension for the Extension Group. There are 32 available Department Groups.

24

Input Data
Extension Group Number 01 ~ 32

Item No.
01

Day/Night Mode
1~8

Speed Dial Area Number

0 ~ 999

Default
999

Description
The Speed Dialing area is used to program the destination number of the transferred telephone number when a Department Group call is transferred using the Trunkto-Trunk Forwarding feature.

Related Program
11-11-27 13-04 24-04

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Transfer

2-264

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

24-09 : Call Forward Split Settings
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 24-09 : Call Forward Split Settings to assign Call Forwarding Type and the destination number for each extension/virtual extension. The destination can have up to 24 digits, using 0 ~ 9, , #, and @. Be sure to include the trunk access code (e.g., 9) in the number if the destination is offpremise.

Program

Only ISDN uses the @ symbol. Pause can be set by LK 1.

24

Input Data
Extension Number Maximum four digits

Item No.
01

Input Data
Call Forwarding Type : 0~5 0 = Call Forwarding Off 1 = Call Forwarding with both ring 2 = Call Forwarding when no answer 3 = Call Forwarding all calls 4 = Call Forwarding busy or no answer 5 = Call Forwarding when busy CO Call Forwarding Destination for Both Ring, All Call, No Answer : 1 ~ 9, 0, #, , R, @ (Up to 24 digits)

Default
0

02

None

Only ISDN uses the @ symbol

03 Intercom Call Forwarding Destination for Both ring, All Call, No Answer : 1 ~ 9, 0, #, , R, @ (Up to 24 digits) None

* * * * *

04

CO Call Forwarding Busy Destination : 1 ~ 9, 0, #, , R, @ (Up to 24 digits) Intercom Call Forwarding Busy Destination : 1 ~ 9, 0, #, , R, @ (Up to 24 digits) Call Forwarding Destination for CTX/PBX for All Call, No Answer : 1 ~ 9, 0, #, , R, @ (Up to 24 digits) Call Forwarding Destination for CTX/PBX for Busy: 1 ~ 9, 0, #, , R, @ (Up to 24 digits)

None

05

None

06

None

07

None

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Call Forwarding, Off-Premise

Programming Manual

2-265

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-01 : VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 25-01 : VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup to define the basic setting of each VRS/ DISA line.

25

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

Item No.
01

Item
VRS/DISA Dial - In Mode

Input Data
0 = Extension Number Service Code Specify (Intercom) 1 = Use Dial Conversion Table 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Normal (Off) 1 = Alarm (On)

Default
0

Related Program
22-11

02 03

DISA User ID VRS/DISA Transfer Alarm

1 0

25-08

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

2-266

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-02 : DID/DISA VRS Message
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 25-02 : DID/DISA VRS Message to assign the VRS message number to be used as the Automated Attendant Message for each trunk which is assigned as a VRS/DISA. Program

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

25
Default

Item No.
01

Day/Night Mode
1~8

Message (Talkie) Source

0 = No Talkie 1 = VRS 2 = Not Used 3 = SLT

Additional Data
1 = 01 ~ 100 (VRS Message Number) 3 = 01 ~ 32 (Station Group Number)

Talkie Type = 1 Additional Data = 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Programming Manual

2-267

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing
Level

IN
Description
Program

25

Use Program 25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing to set what happens to a call when the DISA or Automated Attendant caller dials incorrectly or waits too long to dial. The call can either disconnect (0) or Transfer to an alternate destination (a ring group or voice mail). When setting the DISA and DID Operating Mode, make an entry for each Night Service mode.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

Item No.
01

Day/Night Mode
1~8

Incoming Group Number

0 = Disconnect 01 ~ 25 = Incoming Ring Group 101 = Not Used 102 = VMI 103 = Not Used

Default
0

Related Program
22-04

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

2-268

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy to set the operating mode of each DISA trunk. This sets what happens to the call when the DISA or Automated Attendant caller calls a busy or unanswered extension. The call can either disconnect (0) or Transfer to an alternate destination (a ring group or voice mail). When setting the DISA and DID Operating Mode, make an entry for each Night Service mode. Program

25

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

Item No.
01

Day/Night Mode
1~8

Incoming Group Number

0 = Disconnect 01 ~ 25 = Incoming Ring Group 101 = Not Used 102 = VMI 103 = Not Used

Default
0

Related Program
22-04

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Programming Manual

2-269

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-05 : VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 25-05 : VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment to assign the VRS message number to be used as the Automated Attendant error message. For each VRS/DISA trunk that the VRS answers, enter the VRS message (1 ~ 100) the outside caller hears if they dial incorrectly. If you enter 0 (i.e., no error message), the call reroutes according to Programs 25-03 and 25-04. For each trunk, make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.

25

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

Item No.
01

Day/Night Mode
1~8

VRS Message Number

0 ~ 100 (0 = No setting)

Default
0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

2-270

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-06 : VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 25-06 : VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup to set up single digit dialing through the VRS. This gives VRS callers single key access to extensions, the company operator, Department Calling Groups and Voice Mail. For each VRS message set to answer outside calls (refer to Programs 25-04 and 25-05), you specify: The digit the VRS caller dials (0 ~ 9, , #). Keep in mind that if you assign destinations to digits, outside callers cannot dial system extensions. The destination reached (Maximum four digits ) when the caller dials the specified digit. Program

25

The destination can be an extension, a Department Calling pilot number or the Voice Mail master number. A one-digit code can be assigned for each Automated Attendant message. Example: Message Number = 01, Destination = 2, Next Message Number = 0, Dial = 399 In this example, when 2 is dialed by an outside caller, the system transfers the call to 399. This means that extension 200~299 cannot receive calls from VRS/DISA users during/after VRS Message 01.

Input Data
Attendant Message Number 01 ~ 100

Received Dial

1 ~ 9, 0,

*, #
Default
0

Item No.
01

Item
Next Attendant Message Number Defines the next attendant message number or destination number for each 1-digit access code in Automated Attendant service

Input Data
0 ~ 100 (0 = No setting) 101 = Voice Mail answers 104 = Refer to 25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy on page 2-269 105 = Dial the other extension 106 =record VRS Up to four digits

02

Destination Number

No setting

Conditions
Outside caller may not be able to dial individual extensions or lines if the same first digit is defined here.

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Voice Response System (VRS)

Programming Manual

2-271

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-07 : System Timers for VRS/DISA
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 25-07 : System Timers for VRS/DISA to set the value for the system timers which affect DID and DISA. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting.

25

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item

Input Data

Default
10 seconds

Related Program
25-04

VRS/DISA Dial Tone Time 0 ~ 64800 seconds After answering a DISA trunk, the system waits this time for the caller to dial the first digit of the DISA password. If the caller fails to dial during this time, the system drops the call. VRS/DISA No Answer Time A VRS/DISA caller can ring an extension for this time before the system sets the call as a Ring No Answer. After this time expires, the call follows the programmed Ring No Answer routing (set in Programs 25-03 and 25-04). Disconnect after VRS/DISA retransfer to IRG From DISA trunk, when the call may go to Incoming Ring Group of Programs 25-03 and 25-04. This setting determines how long the call is ringing in the IRG. Calling Time to Automatic Answering Telephone Set Set the answering waiting time of the automatic answering extension when an incoming DID trunk call is received. Duration Time for Guidance Message by Automatic Answering Telephone Set Set the announcement time of the automatic answering extension after which an incoming DID trunk caller is disconnected. Long Conversation Warning Tone Time Determine the time a DISA caller or any trunkto-trunk (such as Tandem Trunking) conversation can talk before the Long Conversation tone is heard. Long Conversation Disconnect Time This time determines how long the system waits before disconnecting a DISA caller or any trunk-to-trunk (such as Tandem Trunking) conversation call after the Long Conversation tone is heard. 0 ~ 64800 seconds

02

10 seconds

25-04 20-31-17

03

0 ~ 64800 seconds

60 seconds

20-31-18

04

0 ~ 64800 seconds

10 seconds

05

0 ~ 64800 seconds

10 seconds

07

0 ~ 64800 seconds

30 seconds

14-01-25 20-28-01 20-28-02 20-28-03 20-31-19 14-01-25 20-28-01 20-28-02 20-28-03

08

0 ~ 64800 seconds

15 seconds

09

DISA Internal Paging Time 0 ~ 64800 seconds This is the maximum length of an Internal Page placed by a DISA caller. If the Page continues longer than this time, the system terminates the DISA call. DISA External Paging Time 0 ~ 64800 seconds This is the maximum length of an External Page placed by a DISA caller. If the Page continues longer than this time, the system terminates the DISA call.

30 seconds

20-31-21

10

30 seconds

20-31-22

2-272

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
11

Item

Input Data

Default
0 second

Related Program

VRS/DISA Answer Delay Time 0 ~ 64800 seconds Sets up the time the system waits after receiving an incoming VRS/DISA call before the system automatically answers the call. VRS/DISA Busy Tone Interval If a DISA caller dials a busy extension (and Program 25-04 = 0), the system plays busy tone for this time before disconnecting. Delayed VRS Answer Time Assign the delay time from switching from a normal incoming status to DID mode. If this time is set to 0, the call switches to DID mode immediately. 0 ~ 64800 seconds

13

5 seconds

14

0 ~ 64800 seconds

10 seconds

Program

25

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Programming Manual

2-273

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-08 : DISA User ID Setup
Level

SA
Description
Program Use Program 25-08 : DISA User ID Setup to set the 6-digit DISA password for each user. There are 15 users each with one 6-digit password.

25

Input Data
DISA User Number 01 ~ 15

Item No.
01

Password
Dial (Fixed - six digits) 0 ~ 9, , #

Default
No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

2-274

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users to set the DISA Class of Service for each user. When a DISA caller enters a password (defined in Program 25-08), the system identifies the user and associates the appropriate DISA Class of Service with the call. Assign the DISA Class of Service options in Program 20-14. When programming DISA Class of Service, make one entry for each Night Service mode. Program

25

Input Data
DISA User Number 1 ~ 15

Item No.
01

Day/Night Mode
1~8

Function Class
1 ~ 15

Default
1

Conditions
DISA Class of Service cannot be 0. Program 20-06 cannot be used to assign Class of Service to DISA trunks.

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Programming Manual

2-275

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA to assign the Trunk Group route chosen when a user places a DISA call to the system and dials 9. Set Trunk Group Routing in Program 14-06. Enable or disable the DISA caller ability to dial 9 in Program 20-14-02. Assign a route to each DISA Class of Service (1 ~ 15). The system assigns a DISA Class of Service to a call based on the password the DISA caller dials. When programming, make a separate entry for each Night Service Mode.

25

Input Data
DISA User Number 1 ~ 15

Item No.
01

Day/Night Mode
1~8

Route Table Number

0 ~ 25 (0 = No setting)

Default
1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

2-276

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction Class
Level

IN
Description
For systems that use Toll Restriction, use Program 25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction Class to assign a Toll Restriction Class (1-15) to each DISA user (1~15). The system uses the Toll Restriction Class you enter in Programs 21-05 and 21-06. The Toll Restriction Class assigned to a DISA call is based on the DISA Class of Service and user, which is determined by the password the caller dials. When programming, make a separate entry for each Night Service mode. Program

25

Input Data
DISA User Number 1 ~ 15

Item No.
01

Day/Night Mode
1~8

Toll Restriction Class

1 ~ 15

Default
2

Conditions
Program 21-05 cannot be used to assign Toll Restriction to DISA trunks.

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Programming Manual

2-277

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA to define the trunk route selected when a DISA caller dials the Alternate Trunk Access Code. The route selected is based on the DISA caller Class of Service, which in turn is determined by the password the caller dials. When programming, make a separate entry for each Night Service Mode. Use Program 11-09-02 to set the Alternate Trunk Access Code. Use Program 14-06 to set trunk routes.

25

Input Data
DISA User Number 1 ~ 15

Item No.
01

Day/Night Mode
1~8

Route Table Number

0 ~ 25 (0 = No setting)

Default
0

Conditions
You cannot use Program 21-15 to assign alternate trunk routing to DISA trunks.

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Trunk Group Routing

2-278

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-13 : System Option for DISA
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 25-13 : System Option for DISA to enter the password DISA callers must dial before the system allows them to record, listen to and or erase the VRS messages. This program also is used to define additional DISA call options. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01

25
Item Input Data
1 ~ 9, 0, , # (Fixed six digits)

Default
000000

VRS Message Access Password Enter the password DISA callers must dial before the system allows them to record, listen to and/or erase the VRS messages.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Voice Response System (VRS)

Programming Manual

2-279

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-15 : DUD/DISA Transfer Target Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 25-15 : DUD/DISA Transfer Target Setup to assign a Speed Dial number when a dial tone times-out, or when the wrong number is received and the target extension does not answer or is busy.

25

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

Day/Night Mode

1~8

Item No.
01 02

Item
DISA Transfer Target Area At Wrong Dial DISA Transfer Target Area At No Answer or Busy

Input Data
Speed Dial bin number 0 ~ 999 Speed Dial bin number 0 ~ 999

Default
999 999

Related Program
25-03-01 25-04-01

Conditions
Related to Programs 25-03-01 25-04-01.

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Voice Response System (VRS)

2-280

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

26-01 : Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route) Service
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 26-01 : Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route) Service to define the system options for Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route).

Input Data
Item No.
01

26

Item
ARS Service Enable or disable ARS. Network Outgoing InterDigit ARS Time With Networking, this time replaces 20-03-04 when determining if all network protocol digits have been received. If ARS is enabled at Site B, this time can be programmed for 5 (500 ms) at Site A. If ARS is disabled and Site B is using F-Route for outbound dialing, this time should be programmed for 30 (three seconds) at Site A. ARS Misdialed Number Handling If a user dials a number not programmed in ARS, this option determines if the system should route over Trunk Group 1 or play error tone. LCR Mode Option

Input Data
0 = Disable (Off) 1 = Enable (On) 0 ~ 64800 seconds

Default
0

Related Programming
26-02 26-03 26-04 20-03-04

Note

02

30 seconds

03

0 = Route to Trunk Group 1 1 = Play Warning Tone to Dialer 0 = UK style 1 = Not UK style

21-02

04

26-02 26-05 26-06 26-07 26-08 26-09 26-02 26-02 44-05

06 07

Class of Service Match Access F-Route Access COS Reference

0 = Disable (Off) 1 = Enable (On) 0 = F-Route 1 = ARS

0 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)

Programming Manual

2-281

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR
Level

IN
Description
Program

26

Use Program 26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR to set pre-transaction tables for selecting Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route). Service Type 1 (Route to Trunk Group Number) - The number routes to a trunk group. Service Type 2 (F-Route Selected) - The number is controlled by the F-Route table.

Input Data
Dial Analysis Table Number 1 ~ 400

Item No.
01 02 Dial

Item

Input Data
Dial Digits (maximum 16 digits) 0 ~ 9, , #, or for wild character (Press line key 1) 0 = No Service (None) 1 = Route to Trunk Group 2 = Select F-Route Access If Service Type 1 (in 26-02) : Select Trunk Group Number 0 ~ 25 (Trunk Grpup Number 0 = No Route) If Service Type 2 (in 26-02) : F-Route Time Schedule Not Used = 0 ~ 100 (F-Route Table Number). Refer to Program 44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table on page 2-356. F-Route Time Schedule Used = 0 ~ 100 (F-Route Selection Number). Refer to Program 44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule on page 2-355. 0 ~ 16 0 ~ 15 0 ~ 25 0 ~ 16

Default
No setting 0

Related Program

ARS Service Type

03

Additional Data/ Service Number

44-04 44-05

04 05 06 07

ARS Class of Service Dial Treatment for ARS LCR Carrier Table Network Specified Parameter Table

0 0 0 0 26-12

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)

2-282

Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments to assign the 15 Dial Treatments for automatic ARS dialing translation. Assign Dial Treatments to Service Numbers (Trunk Groups) in Program 26-02. The ARS Dial Treatment options are: An - For Alternate Carrier Access (n = 1 ~ 4). The numeric digit instructs the system to insert a Transit Network Selection information element in the SETUP message and also identifies which code in Program 26-11 will be included in the information element. This function is valid only for outbound calls by ISDN trunks. DNN - Outdial the NN number of digits or execute the code that follows. For example, D041234 outdials 1234. Valid entries are 0 ~ 9, #, , Wnn (wait nn seconds) and P (pause). Each digits code counts as a digit. So, for example, if a P was added for a pause, the entry would look like : D05P1234. Wnn - Wait nn seconds. P - Pause in analog trunk. R - Redial the initially dialed number, including any modifications. E - End of Dial Treatment. All Dial Treatments must end with the E code. X - When ARS is enabled, X must be entered in the Dial Treatment for the system to output the extension number of the call originator to the black box for the E911 feature.

26

Input Data
Dial Treatment Table Number 1 ~ 15

Item No.
01

Item
Treatment Code

Input Data
Maximum 36 characters

Default
No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)

Programming Manual

2-283

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

26-04 : ARS Class of Service
Level

IN
Description
Program

26

Use Program 26-04 : ARS Class of Service to set the ARS Class of Service for an extension. Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route) uses ARS Class of Service when determining how to route extension calls.

Input Data
Extension Number Up to four digits

Item No.
01

Day/Night Mode
1~8

Class
0 ~ 16

Default
0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)

2-284

Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

26-05 : LCR Carrier Table
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 26-05 : LCR Carrier Table to define the LCR Access Codes and routing options. These options include Authorisation codes and Cost Centre

26
Default
0 No setting

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Delete Digits Enter the quantity of leading digits that need to be deleted Access Code Enter the Access Code and Option to route to the Indirect Carrier 0 - 16

Input Data

02

Maximum 16 digits (0 ~ 9, , #, P, @) P = Pause @ = Change to DTMF or wait for Connect

03

Authorization Code Table Enter the table number that contains the correct Authorization code. Cost Centre Code Optionally enter a cost centre code.

0 ~ 10 (0 = No Authorization code) 0 = Not Used 1 = Used

04

Conditions
The settings must comply with the requirements of the Indirect Carrier. The operation of the @ symbol within the Access Code depend on the type of trunk. For analogue trunk set as Dial Pulse the @ symbol defines change to DTMF dialling. For ISDN trunks the @ symbol defines that a Connect Message is received and then DTMF digits are sent in the B-Channel.

Feature Cross Reference

LCR-Least Cost Routing

Programming Manual

2-285

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

26-06 : LCR Authorisation Code Table
Level

IN
Description
Program

26

Use Program 26-06 : LCR Authorization Code Table to define the optional Authorization code (or PIN code) required by the Indirect Carrier. The Authorization code is inserted if set in Program 26-0503.

Input Data
Authorization Table Number 1 ~ 10

Item
Authorization Code

Input Data
Up to 10 digits

Default
No setting

Conditions
The settings must comply with the requirements of the Indirect Carrier. The Authorization Code is used by the Indirect Carrier to identify the customer for billing purposes.

Feature Cross Reference

LCR-Least Cost Routing

2-286

Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

26-07 : LCR Cost Centre Code Table
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 26-07 : LCR Cost Centre Code Table to define the optional cost centre code required by the Indirect Carrier. The cost centre code is set for each extension. The cost centre code is inserted if set in Program 26-05-04.

26

Input Data
Extension Number Up to four digits

Input Data
Cost Centre Code Up to 8 digits

Default
Extension Number

Conditions
The settings must comply with the requirements of the Indirect Carrier. The cost Centre code is used by the Indirect Carrier to identify the individual user for billing purposes.

Feature Cross Reference

LCR-Least Cost Routing

Programming Manual

2-287

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

26-08 : LCR Manual Override Access Code Table
Level

IN
Description
Program

26

Use Program 26-08 : LCR Manual Override Access Code Table to define the access codes that the users can dial to select an indirect carrier i.e. bypass the automatic selection of Program 26-02.

Input Data
Manual Override Access Code Table Number 1 ~ 10

Item No.
01

Item
Manual Override Code This code is dialled by the user to bypass the automatic selection. Carrier Table No The carrier table number of Program 26-05.

Input Data
Maximum 4 digits (0 ~ 9, , #)

Default
No setting

02

Carrier Table number 0 ~ 25

Conditions
The override code must begin with a digit 1 or it will not be checked against this table. There can are also exemptions to this table in Program 26-09.

Feature Cross Reference

LCR-Least Cost Routing

2-288

Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

26-09 : LCR Manual Override Exemption Table
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 26-09 : LCR Manual Override Exemption Table to define the numbers that must not be sent via an indirect carrier when the user dials a Manual Override Access Code. The exemptions are normally Emergency Services that may not be supported by the indirect carrier.

26

Input Data
Manual Override Exemption Table Number 1 ~ 25

Item No.
01

Item
Exemption Number

Input Data
Maximum 4 digits (0 ~ 9, , #) Do not include the Access Code.

Default
Table 1 = 999 Table 2 = 112 Table 3 ~ 25 = No setting

Conditions
If the number dialled by the user corresponds to an entry in Program 26-09 the Aspire will delete the Manual Access code (Program 26-08) and route the call to the direct carrier. If the number specifies an Emergency Service you must ensure that the direct carrier will accept the call

Feature Cross Reference

LCR-Least Cost Routing

Programming Manual

2-289

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

26-11 : Transit Network ID Table
Level

IN
Description
Program

26

Use Program 26-11 : Transit Network ID Table to define Transit Network ID for Alternate carrier access, which is referred from Program 26-03.

Input Data
Transit Network ID Table 1~4

Item No.
01

Item
Transit Network ID (Carrier ID)

Input Data
0000 ~ 9999 (Fixed four digits or No setting)

Default
Table No. 1 ~ 4 = No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-290

Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

26-12 : Network Specific Parameter Table for ARS
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 26-12 : Network Specific Parameter Table for ARS to define the Network Specific Parameter Table.

Input Data
Network Specific Parameter Table 1 ~ 16

26

Item No.
01

Item
Called Party Number - Type of Number Selection This setting is used by Programs 26-02-07 and 44-05-11 to determine ISDN element.

Input Data
0 = System Default 1 = Unknown 2 = International No. 3 = National No. 4 = Network Specific No. 5 = Subscriber No. 6 = Abbreviated No. 0 = System Default 1 = Unknown 2 = ISDN Plan 3 = Data Plan 4 = Telex Plan 5 = National Standard Plan 6 = Private Plan

Default
0

02

Called Party number - Numbering Plan Identification Selection This setting is used by Programs 26-02-07 and 44-05-11 to determine ISDN element.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-291

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode to set the mode of the system DSS Consoles. The entry for this option applies to all the system DSS Consoles. The available options are: Regular (Business) Mode (0) Hotel Mode (1)

30

Input Data
DSS Console Number 01 ~ 12

Item No.
01

DSS Operation Mode

0 = Business Mode 1 = Hotel Mode

Default
0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console Hotel/Motel

2-292

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment to identify which extensions have DSS Consoles connected. Up to 12 different extensions with DSS Consoles can be set up. A single extension can have up to four 60-button DSS Consoles (12 is the maximum allowed per system). When programming, each extension/DSS Console(s) combination is called a Console Number. There are 12 Console Numbers (01 ~ 12). Console Numbers can be assigned to extensions. When entering data, the assignment for Console Number 1 is normally made first. Program

30

Input Data
60-button DSS Console Number 01 ~ 12

Item No.
01

Item
Extension Number The extension number for the multiline terminal connected with the DSS console (up to four digits) .

Default
No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console

Programming Manual

2-293

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment
Level

SA
Description
Program Use Program 30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment to customize the key assignments for 60button DSS Consoles. A DSS Console key can have any function with up to four digits (e.g., extension number or Service Code). To prevent lamp problems when reassigning DSS Console keys, clearing an extension programmed key before reassigning it is recommended [Enter key to be cleared + 00 or 00 (If using WebPro or PC Programming, delete the key assignments and upload the change to the system before proceeding.)] Without clearing an extension key first, the DSS Console may not show the correct lamp display, although the DSS function works correctly.

30

If you are programming the system from the extension to which the DSS Console is connected, either by phone or using the WebPro or PC Program, you may need to unplug the DSS and plug it back in to reset the console lamping.

Input Data
Index 1
DSS Console Number 01 ~ 12

Index 2
Item No.
01

Key Number
001 ~ 060

Function Number
0 ~ 99, #0 ~ #99 (General Functional Level) 00 ~ 99 (Appearance Functional Level)

Additional Data
Refer to Table 2-6 Function Number List on this page.

Table 2-6 Function Number List [1] General functional level (00 ~ 99, #00 ~ #99)
Function Number
01

Function
DSS/One-Touch

Additional Data
Extension Number or any Numbers (up to 36 digits)

LED Indication
On (Red) : DSS Ext. Busy Off : DSS Ext. Idle, DND External, DND Transfer, CFW Busy, CFW Noans, CFW Busy/Noans, CFW Both, CFW FL ME Slow Blink (Red) : DND Intercom, DND All, CFW Imm On (Red) : Mic On Off : Mic Off On (Red) : DND Setup On (Red) : Active On (Red) : Headset Operation

Note

02 03 04 05

Microphone Key (ON/OFF) DND Key BGM (ON/OFF) Headset

2-294

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Function Number
06 07 08

Function
Transfer Key Conference Key Incoming Call ID List

Additional Data

LED Indication
None On (Red) : Conference Operation Fast Blink (Red) : Existing New CID On (Red) : Existing Checked CID Off : No CID

Note

09 10 11 12 13 14 15

Day/Night Mode Switch Call Forward - Immediate Call Forward - Busy Call Forward - No Answer Call Forward - Busy/No Answer Call Forward - Both Ring Follow Me

Mode Number (1 ~ 8)

On : While each mode Slow Blink (Red) : Setup Slow Blink (Red) : Setup Slow Blink (Red) : Setup Slow Blink (Red) : Setup Slow Blink (Red) : Setup Fast Blink (Red) : Setup Slow Blink (Red) : To be setup

Program

30

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

Text Message Setup External Group Paging External All Call Paging Internal Group Paging Internal All Call Paging Meet-Me Answer to Internal Paging Call Pickup Call Pickup for Another Group Call Pickup for Specified Group Speed Dial - System/Private

Message Numbers (01 ~ 20) External Paging Number (1 ~ 6)

On (Red) : Setup On (Red) : Active On (Red) : Active

Internal Paging Number On (Red) : Active (01 ~ 32) None None None None Call Pickup Group Number (1 ~ 32) None or Speed Dial Number (00 ~ 99 or 000 ~ 999) None or Speed Dial Number (00 ~ 99 or 000 ~ 999) None None

28

Speed Dial - Group

None

29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

Repeat Redial Saved Number Redial Memo Dial Meet-me Conference Override (Off-Hook Signaling) Barge-In Camp On Department Step Call

Fast Blink (Red) : Repeat Dialing None None None None None On (Red) : Active None

Programming Manual

2-295

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Function Number
37 38 39

Function
DND/FWD Override Call Message Waiting Room Monitoring

Additional Data

LED Indication
None None Slow Blink (Red) : Monitoring Fast Blink (Red) : To be monitored

Note

41

Secretary Buzzer

Extension Number (4 digits)

Program

On (Red) : Calling party Fast Blink : Called party On (Red) : Active None None None On (Red) : Withdrawing

30

42 43 44 45 46 49

Boss - Secretary Call Pickup Series Call Common Hold Exclusive Hold Department Group Log Out Call Redirect

Extension Number (4 digits)

Extension Number or Voice Mail Number ( 4 digits)

None

50 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 62 63 66 72 73 74 75 76 77

Account Code Automatic Answer with Delay Message Setup Automatic Answer with Delay Message Starting External Call Forward by Door Box Setup Extension Name Edit General Purpose LED Operation General Purpose LED Indication 001 ~ 100 : 001 ~ 100 : Incoming Group Number (01 ~ 25)

None On (Red) : Setup On (Red) : Delay Message Answering On (Red) : Setup None (Red) On (Red) On Off Off

Department Incoming Call - Immedi- Extension Group Numate ber (01 ~ 32) Department Incoming Call - Delay Department Incoming Call - DND Flash Key Outgoing Call Without Caller ID (ISDN) CTI Keypad Facility Key Keypad Hold Key Keypad Retrieve Key Keypad Conference Key Application Key Voice Mail (In-Skin) Extension Number or Pilot Number (4 digits) Extension Group Number (01 ~ 32) Extension Group Number (01 ~ 32)

Slow Blink (Red) : Set Off : Cancel Slow Blink (Red) : Set Off : Cancel Slow Blink (Red) : Set Off : Cancel None On (Red) : Mode enabled On (Red) : CTI active

None Fast Blink (Red) : Existing new message

2-296

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Function Number
78

Function
Conversation Recording (In0skin VM)

Additional Data
0 = Conversation recording 1 = Delete, Rerecording 2 = Delete Extension Number or Pilot Number (4 digits)

LED Indication
Fast Blink (Red) : Recording

Note

79

Automated Attendant (In-Skin)

On (Red) : Setup - All calls Slow Blink (Red) : Setup - No answer calls (875msec on/ 125msec off) (Red) : Setup - busy calls (125msec on/ 125msec off/125msec on/625msec off) (Red) : Setup busy/noans calls On (Red) : Master Side Slow Blink (Red) : Slave Side Off : Cancel Slow Blink (Red) : Set

Program

30

80

Tandem Ringing Set Up Key

0 = Cancel 1 = Set Extension Number to Tandem Ring (4 digits) Trunk Line No. 001 ~ 126 0 = Pause 1 = Re-record 2 = Address 3 = Erase 4 = Urgent Page

81

Automatic Transfer to Transfer Key

83

Conversation Recording Function

85 86

Directory Dialing Private Call Refuse None Off : Cancel Slow Blink (Red) : Set Off : Cancel Slow Blink (Red) : Set Off : pattern 1, pattern 5~8 On (Red) : pattern 2 Slow Blink (Red) : pattern 3 Fast Blink (Red) : pattern 4 Fast Blink (Red) : Setup - No answer calls Slow Blink (Red) : Setup - Busy calls On (Red) : Setup Busy/No answer calls Doorphone No. (1 ~ 8) On (Red) : Door Box Busy Off : Door Box Idle Fast Blink (Red) : Door Box Incoming

87

Caller ID Refuse

None

88

Dial-In Mode Switching

Program 22-17, Table No. 1 ~ 100

94

Call Attendant

97

Door Box Access Key

Programming Manual

2-297

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Table 2-7 Function Number List [2] Appearance Function Level ( 00 - 99) (Service Code 852 )

Function Number

Function
Trunk Key

Additional Data
Trunk Line No. 001 ~ 126

LED Indication
Fast Blink (Red) : Incoming/ Recall On (Red) : Speaking/ Transferring Slow Blink (Red) : Holding Slow Blink (Red) : Holding Fast Blink (Red) : Recall Slow Blink (Red) : Holding Fast Blink (Red) : Recall

*01 *04 *07

Default

Park Key Station Park Hold

Park Number (01 ~ 64)

Program

30

The DSS keys 001 ~ 060 of all DSS consoles = DSS/One-Touch key 200 ~ 259.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console

2-298

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

30-04 : DSS Console Alternate Answer
Level

SA
Description
Use Program 30-04 : DSS Console Alternate Answer to assign the alternate DSS console station in case off-duty mode is set (by pressing the ALT key on the DSS console). Program

Input Data
Index 1
DSS Console Number 01 ~ 12

30
Item Name
DSS Console Alternate Answer

Index 2
Item No.
01

Input Data
Alternate DSS No. 01 ~ 12 (0 = No setting)

Default
0 = No setting

Conditions
Related extension is assigned in Program 30-02. Alternate answer key (ALT key) is assigned at Program 30-03.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-299

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table to define the LED patterns for functions on the DSS consoles.

30

Input Data
Item No.
02 03 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Busy Extension DND Extension Hotel Status Code 1 (Hotel DSS) Hotel Status Code 2 (Hotel DSS) Hotel Status Code 3 (Hotel DSS) Hotel Status Code 4 (Hotel DSS) Hotel Status Code 5 (Hotel DSS) Hotel Status Code 6 (Hotel DSS) Hotel Status Code 7 (Hotel DSS) Hotel Status Code 8 (Hotel DSS) Hotel Status Code 9 (Hotel DSS) Hotel Status Code 0 (Hotel DSS) Hotel Status Code (Hotel DSS) Hotel Status Code # (Hotel DSS) VM Message Indication

Item

Lamp Pattern Data

0~7 0~7 0~7 0~7 0~7 0~7 0~7 0~7 0~7 0~7 0~7 0~7 0~7 0~7 0~7

Default
7 3 7 1 2 3 5 3 6 4 3 0 4 5 6

Note

2-300

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

ISSUE 1.0
0 200 1 0 400 1 600 0 800 1 1000 0 1200 1 1400 0 1600 1 1800 0

SL1000
2000 ms

pattern #0

000

pattern #1

001

pattern #2

010
Program

pattern #3

011

pattern #4

100

30

pattern #5

101

pattern #6

110

pattern #7

111

LED Patterns for DSS Console

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console

Programming Manual

2-301

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging to define the system options for Internal/External Paging. The system shows the name you program on the telephone display. Use the following chart when entering and editing text. When using the keypad digits, press the key once for the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter C, press 2 three times. Press 2 six times to display the lower case letter.
Key for Entering Names When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can have up to 12 digits. Use this keypad digit ...
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

31

When you want to ...

Enter characters : 1 @ [ ] ^ _ ` { | } Enter characters : A-C, a-c, 2. Enter characters : D-F, d-f, 3. Enter characters : G-I, g-i, 4. Enter characters : J-L, j-l, 5. Enter characters : M-O, m-o, 6. Enter characters : P-S, p-s, 7. Enter characters : T-V, t-v, 8. Enter characters : W-Z, w-z, 9. Enter characters : 0 ! # $ % & ( ) Enter characters : 0

*
# Clear/Back Flash

# = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex : TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use the right arrow soft key instead to accept and/or add a space.) Clear the character entry one character at a time. Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.

*+,-./:;<=>?

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item Name
All Call Paging Zone Name Assign a name to each All Call Internal Paging zone. The name shows on the display of the telephone making the announcement. Page Announcement Duration This timer sets the maximum length of Page announcements. (Affects External Paging only)

Input Data
Up to 12 Characters

Default
GRP ALL

Related Program
11-12-19 31-02-02

02

0 ~ 64800 seconds

1200 seconds

2-302

Program 31 : Paging Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
04

Item Name

Input Data

Default
90 seconds

Related Program

Privacy Release Time 0 ~ 64800 seconds Once the user initiates a Meet-Me Conference or Voice Call Conference, the system waits this time for the Paged party to join the call.

Conditions
None Program

Feature Cross Reference

Paging, External Paging, Internal

31

Programming Manual

2-303

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment to assign extensions to Internal Paging Groups (i.e., Page Zones). The setting in this program also determines if the Internal Page Group can receive Internal All Call Paging. The system can have up to 32 paging groups. An extension can be in only one Internal Paging Group.

31

Input Data
Extension Number Maximum four digits

Item No.
01

Item
Internal Paging Group Number Assign extensions to Internal Paging Groups (i.e., Page Zones). The system allows up to 32 Internal Paging Groups. An extension can be in only one Internal Paging Group.

Input Data
0 ~ 32 (0 = No setting)

Default
All stations: = 0

02

0 = Off Internal All Call Paging Receiving Allow or prevent All Call Internal Paging for 1 = On each extension. If allowed, extension can place and receive All Call Internal Paging announcements. If prevented, extensions can only make (not receive) All Call Internal Paging announcements. If combined, Paging zones should be restricted as well, change the internal page zone group in Program 31-07-01 to 0.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Paging, Internal

2-304

Program 31 : Paging Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings to assign names to Internal Paging Groups (i.e., Page Zones) and to define the splash tone for Internal Paging. The system shows the names you program on the telephone display. Use the following chart when entering and editing text. When using the keypad digits, press the key once for the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press 2 three times. Press 2 six times to display the lower case letter.
Key for Entering Names When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can have up to 12 digits. Use this keypad digit ...
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

Program

31

When you want to ...

Enter characters : 1 @ [ ] ^ _ ` { | } Enter characters : A-C, a-c, 2. Enter characters : D-F, d-f, 3. Enter characters : G-I, g-i, 4. Enter characters : J-L, j-l, 5. Enter characters : M-O, m-o, 6. Enter characters : P-S, p-s, 7. Enter characters : T-V, t-v, 8. Enter characters : W-Z, w-z, 9. Enter characters : 0 ! # $ % & ( ) Enter characters : 0

*
# Clear/Back Flash

# = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex : TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use the right arrow soft key instead to accept and/or add a space.) Clear the character entry one character at a time. Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.

*+,-./:;<=>?

Input Data
Internal Paging Group Number 01 ~ 32

Item No.
01

Item
Internal Paging Group Name Assign name to Internal Paging Groups (i.e., Page Zones). The system shows the name you program on the telephone display.

Input Data
Up to 12 Characters

Default
Refer to default table.

Note

02

Internal Paging Splash tone type 0 = Ordinary volume Allow an extension to have normal 1 = Mute (0), muted (1) or no (2) Internal 2 = No tone Paging alert beeps before a Paging announcement.

Programming Manual

2-305

SL1000 Default
Item 01 : Internal Paging Group Name
Extension Paging Group
01 02 : 32

ISSUE 1.0

Name
Group 1 Group 2 : Group 32

Program

31

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Paging, Internal

2-306

Program 31 : Paging Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-04 : External Paging Zone Group
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 31-04 : External Paging Zone Group to assign each External Paging zone to an External Paging group. Users call the External Paging group when broadcasting announcements to the external zone. To simplify programming and troubleshooting, always make the External Paging Zone Group the same number as the External Paging zone (i.e., 1 = 1, 2 = 2, etc.). Program

31

Input Data
External Speaker Number 1~3

Item No.
01

Paging Group Number

0 ~ 3 (0 = No setting)

Default
Speaker 1 (Basic) = 1 (Group 1) Speaker 2 (Expansion1) = 2 (Group 2) Speaker 3 (Expansion2) = 3 (Group 3)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Paging, External

Programming Manual

2-307

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-05 : Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Page
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 31-05 : Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Page to assign Universal Night Answer ringing to each External Paging zone. For each trunk port, make a separate entry for each External Paging zone. For UNA ringing, make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.

31

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

External Speaker Number

1~3

Item No.
01

Day/Night Mode
1~8

Input Data
0 = No Ringing (No) 1 = Ringing (Yes)

Default
0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Night Service Paging, External

2-308

Program 31 : Paging Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-06 : External Speaker Control
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 31-06 : External Speaker Control to define the settings for the external speaker using an amplifier. Program

Input Data
External Speaker Number 1~3

31
Default
2

Item No.
01

Item
Broadcast Splash Tone Before Paging (Paging Start Tone) Use this option to enable or disable splash tone before Paging over an external zone. If enabled, the system broadcasts a splash tone before the External Paging announcement. Broadcast Splash Tone After Paging (Paging End Time) Use this option to enable or disable splash tone after Paging over an external zone. If enabled, the system broadcasts a splash tone at the end of an External Paging announcement. Speech Path Determine if the external speaker will be used for talkback (As this option is not available with the CPU external page zone, speaker 9 should be left at 1). CODEC Transmit Gain Setup CODEC Receive Gain Setup

Input Data
0 = No Tone (None) 1 = Splash Tone 2 = Chime Tone

02

0 = No Tone (None) 1 = Splash Tone 2 = Chime Tone

03

0 = Both Way (Duplex) 1 = One Way (Simplex)

04 05

1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 ~ + 15.5 dB) 1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 ~ + 15.5 dB)

32 (0 dB) 32 (0 dB)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Paging, External

Programming Manual

2-309

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments to assign an External Paging Group (0 ~ 8) to an Internal Paging Zone (0 ~ 32) for Combined Paging. When an extension user makes a Combined Page, they simultaneously broadcast into both the External and Internal Zone. Use Program 31-04-01 to assign an External Paging Zone (1 ~ 3) to an External Page Group (0 ~ 8).

31

Input Data
External Paging Group Number 0 ~ 8 (0 = All External Paging)

Item No.
01

Internal Paging Group Number

0 ~ 32 (0 = All Internal Paging)

Default
1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Paging, External Paging, Internal

2-310

Program 31 : Paging Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-08 : BGM on External Paging
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 31-08 : BGM on External Paging to set the Background Music option for each External Paging zone. If enabled, the system plays Background Music over the zone when it is idle. Program

Input Data
External Speaker Number 1~3

31
Default
0

Item No.
01

Item
BGM

Item

Input Data

Use this option to allow or prevent the Exter- 0 = BGM Prevented (No) nal Paging zone you select from broadcast- 1 = BGM allowed (Yes) ing Background Music when it is idle.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Background Music Paging, External

Programming Manual

2-311

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-10 : External Paging Group Basic Setting
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 31-10 : External Paging Group Basic Setting assigns the name of external paging group and defines the splash tone for external paging.

31

Input Data
External Speaker Number 01 ~ 03

Item No.
01

Item
External Speaker Name

Input Data
Up to 12 Characters

Default
External Speaker Number 01 = Group 1 External Speaker Number 02 = Group 2 External Speaker Number 03 = Group 3

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-312

Program 31 : Paging Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup

32-01 : Door Box Timers Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 32-01 : Door Box Timers Setup to assign the timers used for the Door Box. The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and using a multiline terminal. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01

32
Item Input Data
0 ~ 64800 seconds

Default
30 seconds

Door Box Answer Time A multiline terminal user must answer Door Box chimes during this time. Door Lock Cancel Time When a single line telephone user hook flashes or a multiline user presses the Recall key while talking to a Door Box, the strike stays open for this time. Off-Premise Call Forward by Door Box Disconnect Timer Define the conversation period for an Off-Premise Call Forward by Door Box call. When this timer expires, the caller hears busy tone for three seconds (fixed time), and the call is then disconnected.

02

0 ~ 64800 seconds

10 seconds

03

0 ~ 64800 seconds

60 seconds

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Door Box

Programming Manual

2-313

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup

32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignment
Level

SA
Description
Program Use Program 32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignment to assign the extension which rings when a caller presses the associated Door Box call button. The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and using a multiline terminal.

32

Input Data
Door Box Number 1~8

Day/Night Mode

1~8

Item No.
01

Door Box Ring Group Number

01 ~ 32

Extension Number
Maximum four digits

Default
Door Box Ringing Member 1 = 200 Other : No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Door Box

2-314

Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup

32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup to select the chime pattern and gain level for each Door Box. There are six distinctive chime patterns. The chime tones are defined in 80-01 : Service Tone Setup. on page 2-406 The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and using a multiline terminal. Program

32

Input Data
Door Box Number 1~8

Item No.
01 Chime Pattern

Item

Input Data
0 = None 1 = Door Box Ring 1 2 = Door Box Ring 2 3 = Door Box Ring 3 4 = Door Box Ring 4 5 = Door Box Ring 5 6 = Door Box Ring 6 7 = Door Box Ring 7 8 = Door Box Ring 8 1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB) 1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB)

Default
Door Box 1 = 1 Door Box 2 = 2 Door Box 3 = 3 Door Box 4 = 4 Door Box 5 = 5 Door Box 6 = 6 Door Box 7 = 1 Door Box 8 = 1 32 (0 dB) 32 (0 dB)

02 03

CODEC Transmit Gain Setup (System to Door Box) CODEC Receive Gain Setup (Door Box to System)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Door Box

Programming Manual

2-315

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup

32-04 : Door Box Name Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 32-04 : Door Box Name Setup to define the name of each Door Box. The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and using a multiline terminal.

32

Input Data
Door Box Number 1~8

Item No.
01

Item
Door Box Name

Input Data
Up to 12 characters

Default
Door Box Name 1 = DOOR-1 Door Box Name 2 = DOOR-2 Door Box Name 3 = DOOR-3 Door Box Name 4 = DOOR-4 Door Box Name 5 = DOOR-5 Door Box Name 6 = DOOR-6 Door Box Name 7 = DOOR-7 Door Box Name 8 = DOOR-8

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Door Box

2-316

Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup to define the basic settings for each E&M Tie line. Program

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

34
Related Program
22-02

Item No.
01

Item
DID/E&M Start Signaling

Input Data
0 = 2nd Dial Tone 1 = Wink 2 = Immediate 3 = Delay 0 = DP 1 = DTMF 0 = Specify Extension Number (Intercom) 1 = Use Conversion Table (NTT) 0 = Disable (No) 1 = Enable (Yes)

Default
0

Description
Set the start signaling mode for DID and Tie trunks. DID and Tie trunks can use either immediate start or wink start signaling.

02 03

Receive Dial Type for E&M Tie Line E&M Dial-In Mode

1 0 Determine if the incoming Tie Line call should be directed as an intercom call or if it should follow the DID Translation Table in Program 22-11. Enter 1 if the Tie Line should send dial tone to the calling system after the call is set up. Enter 0 if the Tie Line should not send dial tone. Determine if an incoming Tie Line call should be subject to Toll Restriction. If it is set to 0 then it will use the Program 21-05-13, if it is set to 1 then it will used Programs 21-05-01 ~ 21-05-13.

10-09 22-11

04

E&M Line Dial Tone

05

System Toll Restriction

0 = System 1 = Each Extension

21-05

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-317

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service to assign a Class of Service to a Tie line (there are 15 Tie line Classes of Service). The Class of Service options are defined in Program 20-14. For each Tie line, make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.

34

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

Item No.
01

Day/Night Mode
1~8

Class
1 ~ 15

Default
1

Related Program
20-14

Conditions
Program 20-06 cannot be used to assign Class of Service to Tie lines.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-318

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines to assign the trunk group route 01 ~ 25) chosen when a user seizes a Tie Line and dials 9. (Set Trunk Group Routing in Program 14-07.) If the system has Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route), dialing 9 accesses ARS. Make a separate entry for each Tie Line - for each Night Service Mode. Program

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

34

Item No.
01

Day/Night Mode
1~8

Route Table Number

00 ~ 25 (0 = No setting)

Default
1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-319

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class to enter a Toll Restriction Class for each Tie Line. There are 15 Toll Restriction Classes which are defined in Programs 21-05 and 21-06. For each Tie Line, you make a separate Toll Restriction Class entry for each Night Service mode.

34

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

Item No.
01

Day/Night Mode
1~8

Toll Restriction Class

1 ~ 15

Default
1

Related Program
21-05 14-01-08

Conditions
Program 20-06 cannot be used to assign Toll Restriction to Tie Lines.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-320

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction to build a restriction matrix for outgoing trunk calls placed from an inbound trunk (e.g., dialed from a Tie Line). For each inbound trunk group, enable or disable access to each CO trunk group. Program

Input Data
Incoming Trunk Group Number 01 ~ 25

34
Input Data
0 = Enable (Y-Tandem) 1 = Restricted (N-Tandem)

Outgoing Trunk Group Number

01 ~ 25

Default
0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-321

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-06 : Add/Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 34-06 : Add/Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line to set digits that the system should add or delete for Tie Lines. Delete Digit Some Tie Line networks pass the location number and extension number to the remote side. This program allows the system to ignore such numbers for a call. If individual extension users do not want to receive an incoming call, they could delete all digits including the extension number. Add Digit If a Tie Line network requires additional digits to reroute the call to a location, the digits for the location can be added to the received digits.

34

Input Data
Incoming Trunk Group Number 01 ~ 25

Item No.
01 02 Delete Digit

Item

Input Data
0 ~ 255 (255 = delete all digits) Up to four digits (0 ~ 9,

Default
0 No setting

Additional Dial Digits

*, #)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-322

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-07 : E&M Tie Line Timer
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 34-07 : E&M Tie Line Timer to define the system service tone timers. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01 02 03 04 05

Item
First Digit Pause (E&M Immediate Start) First Digit Pause (E&M Wink Start) First Digit Pause (LD Trunk) LD Trunk Guard Time Trunk Answer Detect Timer for E&M

Input Data
0 ~ 64800 seconds 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0 ~ 64800 seconds

Default
3 seconds 0 3 seconds 0 30 seconds

34

Conditions
If Program 34-07-05 is left at default (30) the transferred call recalls to the station that performed the transfer when not answered.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-323

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-08 : Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 34-08 : Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines to define the toll restriction data for E&M Tie Lines. This data should be defined if Tie Line Toll Restriction is enabled in Program 21-05-13.

34

Input Data
Class of Service 01 ~ 15

Item No.
01

Table No.
01 ~ 20

Dial Data
Up to 10 Digits (0 ~ 9,

Default

Related Program
21-05-13

*, #)

No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-324

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options to define the ANI/DNIS service option setup for E&M Class of Service. Program

Input Data
Class of Service 01 ~ 15

34
Default Item Input Data COS 01 COS 02 ~ 15
0 0 = Address 1 = ANI 2 = DNIS 3 = ANI Address 4 = ANI DNIS 5 = DNIS ANI ( = Delimiter Code) 0

Item No.
01

Default

Related Program
34-01-02 34-09-02

Receive Format Use this option to specify the format of the ANI/DNIS data received from the telco. Make sure your entry is compatible with the service the telco provides. The character indicates a delimiter.

* * * * * * ** * * ** * *

If Program 34-01-02 is selected to 2 (MF), this Program works only as 4 = ANI DNIS .

* *

02

Delimiter Dial Code This option defines the character Telco uses as a delimiter (see entries 1 ~ 5 in Item 1 above). Valid entries are 0 ~ 9, #, and . Route Setup of Receive Dial This option specifies the source of the data the system uses to route incoming ANI/DNIS calls. If option 2 is selected, refer to Program 34-09-04.

1 ~ 9, 0, #,

*
0 0

34-09-01

03

0 = Fixed Route (Item 08) (No Routing) 1 = Routes on Received DNIS or Address Data 2 = Routes on Received ANI Data

22-09-01 22-11-01 34-09-04 34-09-08

Programming Manual

2-325

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item No.
04

Default Item
Route Table Setup of Target Dial The option sets how the system uses the route data (gathered in Item 3) to route incoming ANI/DNIS calls. If option 2 is selected, and the call is to be routed using the DID table (1), up to eight digits can be matched. The number of expected digits set in Program 22-09-01 must match the ANI digits defined in Program 22-11-01. For example, if an ANI/ DNIS number received was 2035551234 3001 and Program 22-09- 01 = 4, the entry in 22-11-01 must be 1234 with the defined target extension. If the call is to be routed using the ABB table (0), up to 36 digits can be matched. Define the range of the ABB table to be used in Program 34-09-06. The data is compared to the entries in Program 13-04-01 and then routed according to Program 13-04-03.

Default COS 02 ~ 15
0

Input Data COS 01

0 = SPD Table (Program 13-03) 1 = DID Table (Program 22-11) 0

Related Program
13-04 22-11-03 34-09-05

Program

34

* *

05

ANI/DNIS Display as Target Dial Name Use this option to set whether or not ANI data should appear on telephone displays as part of Caller ID display.

0 = Display Off 1 = Display On

13-04 20-09-02 22-11-03 23-09-04

06

Routing SPD Table Setup Start = 0, 100 ~ 900 Use this option to define which End = 0, 99 ~ 999 part of the ABB Table set up in Program 13-04 the system uses for ANI/DNIS Caller ID look-ups and ANI/DNIS routing. This is required if Items 4 and 5 above are 1 (Caller ID on). When you specify a starting and end address, the system uses the part of the table for look-ups. When you specify a starting address and length, the system uses that part of the table for routing. If the incoming ANI/ DNIS number data matches the Number entry in the table, the system routes according to the associated Name data. That data can be an extension, Department Group pilot number, the voice mail master number or a trunk ring group. Routing on ANI/DNIS Error This option lets you determine how the system handles an ANI/DNIS call if a data error is detected in the incoming data string. Routing When Destination Busy or No Answer This option lets you determine how the system handles an ANI/DNIS call if destination is busy or does not answer. 0 = Play Busy Tone to Caller 1 = Route Caller to Ring Group Specified in Program 25-03 (Transfer) 0 = Play Busy or Ringback Tone to Caller (Busy/ NoAns) 1 = Route Caller to Ring Group Specified in Program 25-04 (Transfer)

Start = 900 End = 999

Start = 0 End = 0

13-04

07

25-03

08

25-04

2-326

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
09

Default Item
Calling Number Address Length When Item 01 = 0 (ANI/DNIS receive format is the address), use this option to specify the address length. The choices are from 1 ~ 8 digits. 1~8

Default COS 02 ~ 15
7

Input Data COS 01

7

Related Program
34-09-01

Conditions
None

Program

34

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-327

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-11 : E1 Trunk Basic Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 34-11 : E1 Trunk Basic Setup to define the basic setting of each E1 Trunk.

Input Data

34
Item No.
01

Trunk Port Number

001 ~ 126

Name
E1 Trunk Type Use this option to specify the E1 Signal type (0 ~ 8). Set this option for compatibility with the connected telco.

Input Data
0 = Standard Trunk 1 = Argentine Pulsed Clear Back Trunk 2 = Argentine Pulsed Answer Trunk 3 = Brazil With seizure acknowledge Trunk 4 = Brazil Without seizure acknowledge Trunk 5 = Brazil E&M Signal A (Idle = 0) Trunk 6 = Brazil E&M Signal A (Idle = 1) Trunk 7 = Brazil E&M Signal B (Idle = 0) Trunk 8 = Brazil Code for collect call blocking Trunk 0 = MFC Dialing not used 1 = NEC Standard 2 = Argentina 3 = Brazil 4 = Chile 5 = Colombia 6 = Mexico 7 = Venezuela 0 = Disable 1 = Enable

Default
0

02

MFC Dialing Type Use this option to specify the MFC Dialing Type. The following table shows the available MFC Dialing Type choices, By default, this option is 0 (MFC Dialing not used).

03

MFC Group B Use this option to enable (1) or disable (0) the MFC Dialing Group B supervisory signaling. Since not all central offices provide Group B signaling, set this option for compatibility with the connected telco. By default, this option is Disable (0). Expected Number of MFC Digits Use this option to specify the number of digits in the ANI number. This is required for ANI since delimiters do not mark the beginning and end of the data string. The system must know how many digits of incoming ANI Caller ID data to interpret.

04

0 ~ 20

Conditions
After set Progrma 34-11-01, System needs to be re-start.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-328

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

35-01 : SMDR Options
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 35-01 : SMDR Options to set the SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) options for each of the eight SMDR ports. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting. Program

Input Data
SMDR Port Number 1~2

35
Item Input Data
0 = None 1 = --Reserve-2 = --Reserve-3 = LAN 4 = --Reserve-Up to four digits

Item No.
01

Default
3

Output Port Type This option specifies the type of connection used for SMDR. The baud rate for the COM port should be set in Program 10-21-02 or 15-02-19. Output Destination Number This option specifies the SMDR printer output extension. Header Language Specify the language in which the SMDR header should be printed.

02

No setting

03

0 = English 1 = German 2 = French 3 = Italian 4 = Spanish 0 ~ 24 (0 = Not applied)

04

Omit Digits The number of digits entered in this option do not print on the SMDR report. For example, if the entry is 10, the first 10 digits a user dials do not appear on the SMDR report. Minimum Digits Outgoing calls must be at least this number of digits for inclusion in the SMDR report. Minimum Call Duration The duration of the call must be at least this time to be included on the SMDR report. Minimum Ring Time (For Incoming Calls) A call must ring for at least this time to be included on the SMDR report. Format Selection

05

0 ~ 24 (0 = Not applied)

06

0 ~ 65535 seconds (0 = All)

07

0 ~ 65535 seconds (0 = All)

08

0 = Format1 Type (North America) 1 = Format2 Type (Overseas)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Station Message Detail Recording

Programming Manual

2-329

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

35-02 : SMDR Output Options
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 35-02 : SMDR Output Options to set the SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) output options for each of the eight SMDR ports. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting.

35

Input Data
SMDR Port Number 1~2

Item No.
01

Item
Toll Restricted Call SMDR can include or exclude calls blocked by Toll Restriction. PBX Calls When the system is behind a PBX, SMDR can include all calls (1) or just calls dialed using the PBX trunk access code (0). Trunk Number or Name Select whether the system should display the trunk name (0) or the number (1) on SMDR reports.

Input Data
0 = Not Displayed 1 = Displayed 0 = Not Displayed 1 = Displayed

Default
1

02

03

0 = Name 1 = Number

If this option is set to 1, Program 3502-14 must be set to 0.

04 Summary (Daily) Set this option to (1) to have the SMDR report provide a daily summary (at midnight every night). Summary (Weekly) Set this option to (1) to have the SMDR report provide a weekly summary (every Saturday at midnight). Summary (Monthly) Set this option to (1) to have the SMDR report provide a monthly summary (at midnight on the last day of the month). Toll Charge Cost Set this option to (1) have the SMDR report include toll charges. Incoming Call Enable this option (1) to have the SMDR report include incoming calls. If you disable this option (0), incoming calls do not print. Extension Number or Name Set this option (1) to have the SMDR report include extension numbers. Set this option (0) to have the SMDR report include extension names. All Lines Busy (ALB) Output Determine if the All Lines Busy (ALB) indication should be displayed. Walking Toll Restriction Table Number 0 = Not Displayed 1 = Displayed 1

05

0 = Not Displayed 1 = Displayed

06

0 = Not Displayed 1 = Displayed

07

0 = Not Displayed 1 = Displayed 0 = Not Displayed 1 = Displayed

08

09

0 = Name 1 = Number

10

0 = Not Displayed 1 = Displayed 0 = Not Output 1 = Output

11

2-330

Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
12

Item
DID Table Name Output Determine if the DID table name should be displayed. CLI Output When DID to Trunk Determine if the CLI output should be displayed for DID. Date Determine whether or not the date should be displayed on SMDR reports.

Input Data
0 = Not Displayed 1 = Displayed 0 = Not Displayed 1 = Displayed 0 = Not Displayed 1 = Displayed

Default
0

13

14

This option must be set to 0 if the trunk name is set to be displayed in Program 35-02-03.
15 CLI/DID Number Switching Determine whether or not the CLI/DID Number Switching should be displayed. Trunk Name or Received Dialed Number Determine how the SMDR should print incoming calls on ANI/DNIS or DID trunks. If set to (1), ANI/DNIS trunks can print DNIS digits. If set to (0) trunk names are printed instead. Print Account Code or Caller Name of Incoming Call Determine if SMDR should print Account Code or Caller Name of Incoming Call. Print Mode for Caller Name of Incoming Call Determine how SMDR should print Caller Name of Incoming Call. Dialed Number Output Format Determine if the dialed number should display from the first digits or from the last digits. This option is only available for outgoing calls. External Information CFW Mode Determine which information is displayed in the "STATION" area for a transferred call when the extension has Call Forward set with an Abbreviated Dial number as the destination. Selecting "0" (Transfer Info) will display the extension number which called the extension with external Call Forward set. Selecting "1" (Incoming Info) will display the extension number which has the external Call Forward set. This option only applies when Call Forward is set using a service code (Programs 11-11-01 ~ 1111-07) and the destination uses an Abbreviated Dial bin. It does not include Off-Premise or Centrex transfers. S-Point Terminal Number Security Auto Dialing Emergency call from Watch Mode. Define SMDR output on/off. Output is SAD(Security auto dialing). Watch Auto Dialing Emergency call from Remote Inspection. Define SMDR output on/off. Output is WAD(Watch auto dialing ) 0 = CLI (CLIP) 1 = DID Calling Number 2 = Calling Party Name 0 = Trunk Port Name 1 = Received Dialed Number 2 = Both 0

Program

35

16

17

0 = ACC 1 = CNAME

18

0 = Normal 1 = Line Feed 0 = Display from the first digit 1 = Display from the last digit

19

20

0 = Transfer Information 1 = Incoming Information

21 22

0 = MSN Number 1 = Extension Number 0 = Not Output 1 = Output

0 1

23

0 = Not Output 1 = Output

Conditions
None

Programming Manual

2-331

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Feature Cross Reference

Station Message Detail Recording

Program

35

2-332

Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

35-03 : SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 35-03 : SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group to assign the SMDR port for each trunk group. For each Trunk Group, select the SMDR port where the incoming SMDR information should be sent. Program

Input Data
Trunk Group Number 01 ~ 25

35
SMDR Port No.
1~2

Item No.
01

Default
1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Station Message Detail Recording Trunk Group Routing

Programming Manual

2-333

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

35-04 : SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 35-04 : SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups to assign the SMDR port for each Department Group. For each Department Group, select the SMDR port where the outgoing SMDR information should be sent. There are 32available Department Groups.

35

Input Data
Department Group Number 01 ~ 32

Item No.
01

SMDR Port No.

1~2

Default
1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Station Message Detail Recording

2-334

Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

35-05 : Account Code Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 35-05 : Account Code Setup to set various Account Code options for an extension Class of Service. Assign a Class of Service to extensions in Program 20-06. Program

Input Data
Class of Service Number 01 ~ 15

35
Default
0 0

Item No.
01

Item
Account Code Mode Use this option to select the Account Code Mode (0 ~ 3). Forced Account Code Toll Call Setup Use this option enable Account Codes for all calls or just toll calls (for mode 2 or 3 in Item 01 above).

Input Data
0 = Account Codes Disabled (None) 1 = Account Codes optional 2 = Account Codes Required but not verified (No verify) 3 = Account Codes Required and Verified (Verify) 0 = Account Codes for toll and local calls (All) 1 = Account Codes just for toll calls (STD)

02

03

Account Codes for Incoming Calls 0 = Account Codes for incoming calls disabled (No) Use this option to allow users to enter 1 = Account Codes for incoming calls enabled (Yes) Account Codes for incoming calls. If disabled, any codes entered dial out on the connected trunk. Hiding Account Codes Use this option to either hide or show the Account codes on a telephone display. 0 = Account Codes displayed 1 = Account Codes not displayed

04

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Account Code Forced/Verified/Unverified

Programming Manual

2-335

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

35-06 : Verified Account Code Table
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 35-06 : Verified Account Code Table to enter Account Codes into the Verified Account Code list. You can enter up to 800 codes with 3 ~ 6 digits, using the characters 0 ~ 9 or #. Use the LK1 to enter a wild card. For example, the entry @234 means the user can enter 0234-9234.

35

Input Data
Verified Account Code Bin Number 1 ~ 800

Item No.
01

Verified Account Code

1 ~ 9, 0, #, @ (@ = Wild card) (Up to 16 digits)

Default
No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Account Codes - Forced/Verified/Unverified

2-336

Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 40 : Voice Recording System

40-01 : Voice Mail Basic Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 40-01 : Voice Mail Basic Setup to set the Basic setting of Voice Mail. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 10

Item
Fixed Channel for Voice Mail Time Stamp Conversation recording mode after Transfer Automated Attendant Maintenance Time Automatic Erase Mail Escape from DSPDB-VM while Attendant Message Display caller ID while recording message playing 0 ~ 16

Input Data

Default
0 1 1 1 0000 0 0 1 0

Note

40

0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 = Stop 1 = Continue 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0000 ~ 2359 (0000 = No setting) 0 ~ 180 (Day) 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 = Disable 1 = Enable

Department group call when the auto- 0 = Disable mated attendant is activate 1 = Enable

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-337

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 40 : Voice Recording System

40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS to specify the language to be used for the VRS prompts.

40

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS

Input Data
01 = US English 02 = UK English 03 = Australian English 04 = French Canadian 05 = Dutch 06 = Mexican Spanish 07 = Latin America Spanish 08 = Italian 09 = German 10 = Madrid Spanish 11 = Norwegian 12 = Parisian French 13 = Brazilian Portuguese 14 = Japanese 15 = Mandarin Chinese 16 = Korean 17 = Iberian Portuguese 18 = Greek 19 = Danish 20 = Swedish 21 = Thai 22 = Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan) 23 = Flemish 24 = Turkish

Default
2

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Mail Integration (Analog)

2-338

Program 40 : Voice Recording System

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 40 : Voice Recording System

40-10 : Voice Announcement Service Option
Level

IN
Description
In Program 40-10 : Voice Announcement Service Option define the system options for the Voice Announcement feature. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01

40
Item Input Data
0 = Not Used 1 = Used

Default
1

Related Program

VRS Fixed Message Enable (1) or disable (0) the system ability to play the fixed VRS messages (such as You have a message). General Message Number This item assigns the VRS message number to use for the General Message.

02

0 ~ 100 (0 = No General Message Service)

03

VRS No Answer Destination 0 ~ 25 This item assigns the transferred Ring (Incoming Ring Group NumGroup when the VRS is unanswered after ber) Call Forwarding with Personal Greeting Message. VRS No Answer Time If an extension has Personal Greeting enabled and all VRS ports are busy, a DIL or DISA call to the extension waits this time for a VRS port to become free. Park and Page Repeat Timer (VRS Msg Resend) If a Park and Page is not picked up during this time, the Paging announcement repeats. Set VRS Message for Private Call Refuse (VRS Msg Private Call) This item assigns the VRS Message number to be used as Private Call Refuse. When Fixed message is set, VRS message guidance is: Your call cannot go through. Set VRS Message for Caller ID Refuse (VRS Msg CID) This item assigns the VRS Message number to be used as Caller ID Refuse. When Fixed Message is set, VRS message guidance is: Your call cannot go through. Call Attendant Busy Message Call Attendant No Answer Message 0 ~ 64800 seconds

0 (No setting)

04

05

0 ~ 64800 seconds

06

0 ~ 101 (0 = No message) (101 = Fixed message)

14-01-27

07

0 ~ 101 (0 = No message) (101 = Fixed message)

14-01-27

08 09

0 ~ 100 (0 = No message) 0 ~ 100 (0 = No message)

0 0

15-01-08 15-01-09

Conditions
None

Programming Manual

2-339

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Response System (VRS)

Program

40

2-340

Program 40 : Voice Recording System

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 40 : Voice Recording System

40-11 : Preamble Message Assignment
Level

IN
Description
In Program 40-11 : Preamble Message Assignment to assign the VRS message number to be used as the Preamble Message for each trunk. When the extension user answers the incoming call, the assigned VRS message is sent to the outside caller. Program

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

40
Day/Night Mode
1~8

Item No.
01

VRS Message Number

0 ~ 100 (0 = No Service)

Default
0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Response System (VRS)

Programming Manual

2-341

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

42-01 : System Options for Hotel/Motel
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 42-01 : System Options for Hotel/Motel to assign the system options for Hotel/Motel Service.

42

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Answering Message Mode for Wake Up Call (Hotel Mode) Wake Up Call Message Assignment VAU Message for Wake Up Calls. You must make an entry for this program if you have selected 1 or 2 in Item 01 above. Wake Up Call No Answer Setup Message Mode for Wake Up Call (Hotel Mode) Wake Up Call Message Assignment

Input Data
0 = MOH (Hold Time) 1 = VAU Message 2 = VAU Message + Time 0 ~ 100 (0 = No setting)

Default
0

02

03 04

0 = No Transfer 1 = Transfer to the Operator 0 = Confirmation Tone 1 = VAU Message 2 = Time Stamp + VAU Message 0 ~ 100 (0 = No setting)

0 0

05

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Hotel/Motel

2-342

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup to define the basic operation of the Hotel/Motel extensions. Program

Input Data
Extension Number Up to four digits

42
Default
0 1

Item No.
01

Item
Hotel Mode If you want an extension to operate in the Hotel/Motel mode, enter 1. If you want the telephone to operate in the business mode, enter 0.

Input Data
0 = Normal 1 = Hotel

02

Toll Restriction Class When Check In 1 ~ 15 Assign an extension Toll Restriction Class when it is checked in. The system has 15 Toll Restriction Classes (1 ~ 15). The entry you make in this option affects the telephone in all Night Service modes. (Refer to Programs 21-05 and 21-06 to set up the Toll Restriction dialing options.) When the extension is checked out, it uses the Toll Restriction Class set in Program 21-04.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Hotel/Motel

Programming Manual

2-343

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel)
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel) to set the Hotel/Motel Class of Service (COS) options. Assign Class of Service to extensions in Program 42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup. There are 15 Classes of Service. Refer to the following chart for a description of each COS option, its range and default setting. For additional Class of Service options, refer to Programs 20-06.

42

Input Data
Class of Service Number 01 ~ 15

Default Item No.

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 Check-In Operation Check-Out Operation Room Status Output DND Setting for Other Extension Wake up Call Setting for Other Extension Room Status Change for Other Extension Restriction Class Changing for Other Extension Room to Room Call Restriction DND Setting for Own Extension Wake Up Call Setting for Own Extension Change Room Status for Own Extension

Item

Input Data Class 01 ~ 15

0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

SLT Room Monitor 0 = Off Enable (1) or disable (0) a single line telephone ability to 1 = On use Room Monitor. PMS Restriction Level 0 = Off 1 = On

13

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Class of Service Hotel/Motel

2-344

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

42-04 : Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 42-04 : Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes to set up the Hotel Mode one-digit service codes which are assigned in 42-02-01. For each Department Calling Group (01 ~ 32), you enter the destination for each single digit code (1 ~ 9, 0, , #). The destination can be any code with up to four digits , such as an extension number or access code. Program

Input Data
Department (Extension) Group Number 01 ~ 32

42

Item No.
01

Received Dial
1 ~ 9, 0,

Destination Number
Up to four digits

Default
No setting

*, #

Conditions
The one-digit service codes you assign in this program wait until the interdigit time expires before executing.

Feature Cross Reference

Hotel/Motel

Programming Manual

2-345

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

42-05 : Hotel Room Status Printer
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 42-05 : Hotel Room Status Printer to set the LAN port to output the Hotel Data (Check-Out sheet, Room Status, etc.) and the output options for the Hotel/ Motel feature.

42

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Output Port Type 0 = No setting 1 = Not Used 3 = LAN 0 = Not Output 1 = Output 0 = Not Output 1 = Output 0 = Normal 1 = Fidelio

Input Data

Default
0

03 04 05

Wake Up Call No Answer Data Check-Out Sheet Protocol type

0 0 0

Conditions
Room Status Reports can be output via LAN port.

Feature Cross Reference

Hotel/Motel

2-346

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

42-06 : PMS Service Setting (Not Used)
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 42-06 : PMS Service Setting to set the PMS integration settings when using PMS-U13 and PMS feature. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01 02 PMS Port Number 3 : 00 AM Auto Room Scan At 3 : 00 AM sets maid required status for all checked-in rooms. CheckIn Message Type CheckOut Auto Status Change AREYUTHERE/LINETEST Send Timing AREYUTHERE/LINETEST Send Count

Item

Input Data
0 ~ 65535 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 1 ~ 128 seconds 0 ~ 20 (times)

Default
5129 0

42

03 04 05 06

0 0 10 3

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Hotel/Motel

Programming Manual

2-347

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

42-07 : PMS Restriction Level Conversion Table (Not Used)
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 42-07 : PMS Restriction Level Conversion Table to change the default Toll Restriction class on check in for a room (Program 42-02-02).

42

Input Data
Restriction Level 0~3

Item No.
01

Item
PMS Restriction Level Conversion Table 1 ~ 15

Input Data

Default
Level 0 = 10 Level 1 = 11 Level 2 = 12 Level 3 = 13

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Hotel/Motel

2-348

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

42-08 : Text Message Setup for Hotel Room Status
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 42-08 : Text Message Setup for Hotel Room Status to define the text message for Hotel Room Status. Program

Input Data
Room Status Number 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, #,

42
Default

Room Status

0 = Check In 1 = Check Out

Item No.
01 02

Item
Fedelio Room Status Number Text Message Data 0~

Input Data

Maximum 32 characters

Refer to Default value. Refer to Default value.

Default Value
No.
1

Room Status
Check In Check Out 6 5 2 1 2 1 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 6 5

Fidelio Code

alphanumeric 12345678901234567890123456789012

Check In Check Out

Check In Check Out

Check In Check Out

Check In Check Out

Check In Check Out

Check In Check Out

Check In Check Out

Check In Check Out

Check In Check Out

Programming Manual

2-349

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

No.

Room Status
Check In Check Out Check In Check Out 4 3 4 3

Fidelio Code

alphanumeric 12345678901234567890123456789012

*
#

Program

Conditions
None

42

Feature Cross Reference

Hotel/Motel

2-350

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route to define the system options for the ARS/FRoute feature. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
ARS/F-Route Time Schedule If this option is set to 0, the F-Route table selected is determined only by the digits dialed without any relation to the day or time of the call. If this option is set to 1, the system first refers to Program 44-10. If there is a match, the pattern defined in that program is used. If not, the F-Route pattern in Program 44-09 and time setting in 44-08 are used.

Input Data
0 = Not Used 1 = Used

Default
0

44

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)

Programming Manual

2-351

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access to set the Pre-Transaction Table for selecting ARS/F-Route.

44

Input Data
Dial Analysis Table Number 001 ~ 120

Item No.
01

Item

Input Data

Default
No setting

Dial Up to four digits Set the number of digits to be analyzed by the system for ARS (Use line key 1 for a Dont routing. Care digit, @) Service Type Service Type 1 (Extension Number) The number goes to an extension after deleting the front digit(s). Additional Data Assign the digit(s) to be deleted on top of the number for extension number usage. At least one digit must be deleted. Service Type 2 (ARS/F-Route) The number is controlled by ARS/F-Route table. Additional Data: If the ARS/F-Route Time Schedule is not used, assign the ARS/F-Route table number for Program 44-05. If the ARS/F-Route Time Schedule is used, assign the ARS/F-Route selection number for Program 44-04. Service Type 3 (Dial Extension Analyze Table) The total length of the number exceeds more than 8 digits. Additional Data: Assign the Dial Extension Analysis Table number to be used in Program 44-03. Additional Data For the Service Type selected in 44-02-02, enter the additional data required. 1 : Delete Digit = 0 ~ 255 (255 = Delete All Digits) 2 : [Program 44-01 : 0] ARS/F-Route Table Number = 0 ~ 100 (0 = No setting) Refer to Program 44-05. [Program 44-01 : 1] ARS/F-Route Select Table Number = 0 ~ 100 (0 = No setting) Refer to Program 44-04. 3 : Dial Extension Analyze Table Number = 0 ~ 4 (0 = No setting) Refer to Program 44-03. Dial Tone Simulation If enabled, this option sends dial tone to the calling party after the routing is determined. This may be required if the central office at the destination does not send dial tone. 0 = No setting (None) 1 = Extension Call (Own) 2 = ARS/F-Route Table (F-Route) 3 = Dial Extension Analyze Table (Option)

02

03

1 = Delete Digit = 0 ~ 255 (255 = Delete All Digits) 2 = 0 ~ 100 (0 = No setting) 3 = Dial Extension Analyze Table Number = 0 ~ 4 (0 = No setting)

04

0 = Off 1 = On

Conditions
None

2-352

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)

Program

44

Programming Manual

2-353

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table
Level

IN
Description
Program When Program 44-02-02 is set to type 3, use Program 44-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table to set the dial extension analysis table. These tables are used when the analyzed digits must be more than eight digits. If the received digits do not match the digits set in tables 1 ~ 250, table number 252 is used to refer to the next Extension Table Area (1 ~ 4) to be searched. If the received digits are not identified in tables 1 ~ 250, the F-Route selection table number defined in table 251 is used.

44

Input Data
Extension Table Area Number 1~4

Dial Analysis Table Number

1 ~ 252

Dial Analysis Table Number : 1 ~ 250

Item No.
01 Dial

Item

Input Data
Up to 36 digits Digits = 1 ~ 9, 0, , #, @ (Press Line Key 1 for wild character @)

Default
No setting

02

ARS/F-Route Select Table Number

0 ~ 100 (ARS/F-Route Table Number) With Program 44-01 set to 0, Program 44-05 is checked. With Program 44-01 set to 1, Program 44-04 is checked.

Dial Analysis Table Number : 251

Item No.
03

Item
ARS/F-Route Select Table Number

Input Data
0 ~ 100 (ARS/F-Route Table Number) With Program 44-01 set to 0, Program 44-05 is checked. With Program 44-01 set to 1, Program 44-04 is checked.

Default
0

Dial Analysis Table Number : 252

Item No.
04

Item
Next Table Area Number 0~4

Input Data

Default
0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)

2-354

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule to assign each ARS/ F-Route Selection number to an ARS/F-Route table number for each ARS/F-Route time mode. There are eight time modes for ARS/F-Route Access. Program

Input Data
ARS/F-Route Selection Number 001 ~ 100

44
ARS/F-Route Time Mode
1~8

Item No.
01

ARS/F-Route Table Number

0 ~ 100 (0 = No Service)

Default
0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)

Programming Manual

2-355

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table to set the ARS/F-Route table. There are four kinds of order. If the higher priority trunk groups are busy, the next order group is used. If a lower priority route is selected, the caller may be notified with a beep tone.

44

Input Data
ARS/F-Route Table Number 001 ~ 100

Priority Number

1~4

Item No.
01

Item
Trunk Group Number Select the trunk group number to use for the outgoing ARS call.

Input Data
0 = No setting 1 ~ 25 = Trunk Group 255 = Extension Call

Default
0

02

Delete Digits 0 ~ 255 Enter the number of digits to be deleted from the dialed (255 = Delete All) number. Additional Dial Number Table Enter the table number (defined in Program 44-06) for additional digits to be dialed. 0 ~ 100

03

04

Beep Tone 0 = Off Select whether or not a beep is heard if a lower priority 1 = On trunk group is used to dial out. Gain Table Number for Internal Calls 0 ~ 100 Select the gain table number to use for the internal call 0 = No setting (defined in Program 44-07). Gain Table Number for Tandem Connections 0 ~ 100 Select the gain table number to use for the tandem call 0 = No setting (defined in Program 44-07). ARS Class of Service Select the ARS Class of Service to use for the table. An extension ARS COS is determined in Program 2604-01. Dial Treatment Select the Dial Treatment to use for the table. If a Dial Treatment is selected, Programs 44-05-02 and 4405-03 are ignored and the Dial Treatment defined in Program 26-03-01 is used instead. Maximum Digit Input the maximum number of digits to send when using the F-Route. Network Specified Parameter Table Enter a table number from Program 26-12. 0 ~ 16

05

06

07

08

0 ~ 15

09

0 ~ 24

11

0 ~ 16

Conditions
None

2-356

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)

Program

44

Programming Manual

2-357

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-06 : Additional Dial Table
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 44-06 : Additional Dial Table to set the additional dial table to add prior to the dialed ARS/F-Route number. The Additional Dial Table used is determined in Program 44-05-03.

44

Input Data
Additional Dial Table Number 001 ~ 100

Item No.
01 Up to 36 digits Enter : 1 ~ 9, 0,

Additional Dial

Default
No setting

, #, Pause (press LK 1 to enter a pause)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)

2-358

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access to set the gain/PAD table. If an extension dials ARS/F-Route number: The Extension Dial Gain Table, assigned in Program 44-05, is activated. The Extension Dial Gain Table follows Outgoing transmit and Outgoing receive settings. If the incoming call is transferred to another line using ARS/F-Route: The Tandem Gain Table, assigned in Program 44-05, is activated. The Tandem Gain Table follows the Incoming transmit and Incoming receive settings for incoming line, and Outgoing transmit and Outgoing receive settings for the outgoing line. For ARS/F-Route calls, the CODEC gains defined in Programs 14-01-02 and 14-01-03 are not activated. Program

44

Input Data
Gain Table Number 001 ~ 100

Item No.
01 02 03 04

Item
Incoming Transmit Incoming Receive Outgoing Transmit Outgoing Receive

Input Data
1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB) 1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB) 1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB) 1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB)

Default
32 (0 dB) 32 (0 dB) 32 (0 dB) 32 (0 dB)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)

Programming Manual

2-359

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route to define the daily pattern of the ARS/F-Route feature. ARS/F-Route has 10 time patterns. These patterns are used in Programs 44-09 and 44-10. The daily pattern consists of 20 time settings.

44

Input Data
Schedule Pattern Number 01 ~ 10

Item No.
01

Time Number
01 ~ 20

Start Time
0000 ~ 2359

End Time
0000 ~ 2359

Mode
1~8

Default
All Schedule Patterns = 0 : 00 - 0 : 00, Mode 1 Example : Pattern 1

Time Number 01 = 00 : 00 - 08 : 00 Mode 3 Time Number 02 = 08 : 00 - 18 : 00 Mode 1 Time Number 03 = 18 : 00 - 22 : 00 Mode 2 Time Number 04 = 22 : 00 - 00 : 00 Mode 3 Pattern 2

Time Number 01 = 00 : 00 - 00 : 00 Mode 2

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)

2-360

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route to define a weekly schedule for using ARS/ F-Route. The pattern number is defined in Program 44-08-01. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01 1 = Sunday 2 = Monday 3 = Tuesday 4 = Wednesday 5 = Thursday 6 = Friday 7 = Saturday

Day Number

Schedule Pattern Number

0 ~ 10 (0 = No setting)

Default
Pattern 1

44

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)

Programming Manual

2-361

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route to define a yearly schedule for ARS/FRoute. This schedule is used for setting special days such as national holidays. The pattern number is defined in Program 44-08-01.

44

Input Data
Item No.
01

Date
0101 ~ 1231

Schedule Pattern Number

0 ~ 10 (0 = No setting)

Default
0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)

2-362

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration

45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options to customize certain voice mail integration options. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item

Input Data

Default
0

Related Program

45

Voice Mail Department Group Number 0 ~ 32 Assign which Extension (Department) Group num- 0 = No Voice Mail ber is to be assigned as the voice mail group. Voice Mail Master Name Enter the Voice Mail Master Name. Up to 12 Characters

02 03

V.M. 1 45-01-11

Voice Mail Call Screening 0 = Off Enable/disable the ability to process the Call 1 = On Screening commands (1 + extension number) sent from the Voice Mail.you should normally enable this option to allow for Voice Mail Call Screening. Disable this option if your system has been modified so that extensions begin with the digit 1(e.g., 101, 102, etc.). Also see the Flexible System Numbering feature. Park and Page Enable/disable the system ability to process the Voice Mail Park and Page ( ) commands. You should normally enable this option. 0 = Off 1 = On

04

45-01-12

05

Message Wait Enable/disable the system ability to process the Voice Mail Message Wait (#) commands. You should normally enable this option. If enabled, be sure that the programmed Message Notification strings dont contain the code for trunk access. Record Alert Tone Interval Time This time sets the interval between Voice Mail Conversation Record alerts. New NSL Protocol support Prefix for Call Screening Prefix for Park and Page Prefix for Message Wait Analog Voice Mail Protocol Selection Assigns whether fixed codes are used or the codes used in Program 45-04 are used for analog voice mail protocol. Voice Mail Fax Digit Add Assignment Assign up to four digits in front of the station number sent to the SLT port when a call is forwarded. Reply Mailbox Number Whether or not to include the mailbox number in the analog voice mail protocol. Trunk Number Mapping Assign the digits of trunk number mapping.

0 = Off 1 = On

45-01-13

06

0 ~ 64800 seconds

30 seconds

10 11 12 13 15

0 = Off 1 = On Dial (One digit) Dial (One digit) Dial (One digit) 0 = Fixed 1 = Program

0 1 45-01-03 45-01-04 45-01-05 45-04 11-11-50/51

*
# 0

16

Up to four digits

No setting

15-03-16

17

0 = No 1 = Yes 2~3

45-04

18

Programming Manual

2-363

SL1000 Conditions
None

ISSUE 1.0

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Mail Integration (Analog)

Program

45

2-364

Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration

45-02 : NSL Option Setup
Level

SA
Description
Use Program 45-02 : NSL Option Setup to setup the NSL options for Voice Mail integration. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01 03 05

Item
Send DTMF tone or 6KD message Send 51A Message Send 4PM message

Input Data
0 = Send DTMF tone to SLT-VM port 1 = Send 6KD message to Serial port 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On

Default
1 1 0

Note

45

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-365

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration

45-04 : Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 45-04 : Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment to define the digits to add.

Input Data

45

Item No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09

Item
Remote Logon (Internal) Direct Logon Transfer Message Forward-All Forward-Busy Forward RNA Remote Logon Conversation Recording Clear Down String

Input Data
Up to four digits Up to four digits Up to four digits Up to four digits Up to four digits Up to four digits Up to four digits Up to four digits Up to four digits

Default
None None None None None None None None None

Related Program
45-01-15 45-01-15 45-01-15 45-01-15 45-01-15 45-01-15 45-01-15 45-01-15 45-01-15

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-366

Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration

45-05 : Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Additional Digits
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 45-05 : Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Additional Digits to send trunk number and/or station number information if integrating to Voice Mail when Program 45-04-XX is left blank and 45-01-15 is set to "Program". Program

Input Data
Item No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09

45

Item
Remote Log-On Internal Direct Log-On Transfer Message/QVM Forward-All Forward-Busy Forward RNA Remote Log-On Conversation Recording Clear Down String

Input Data
0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On

Default
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Related Program
45-01-15 45-04-01 45-01-15 45-04-02 45-01-15 45-04-03 45-01-15 45-04-04 45-01-15 45-04-05 45-01-15 45-04-06 45-01-15 45-04-07 45-01-15 45-04-08 45-01-15 45-04-09

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-367

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-01 : InMail System Options
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 47-01 : InMail System Options to set up the InMail system-wide options.

47

Input Data
Item No.
02

Item

Input Data

Default
InMail ## (The system substitutes the port number for the # when calling the port.)

InMail Master Name Up to 12 characters (MasterName) The CPU must be reset for a change to this program to take effect. Use this option to modify the name for all InMail ports. The system briefly displays this name when a display multiline terminal user calls a Voice Mail port (either by pressing Message, their voice mail key, or by dialing the master number). You should always end the name with the ## characters. The system substitutes the port number for the last #. Using the default name InMail ##, for example, the telephone display shows InMail #1 when calling port 1. 1 ~ 4095 seconds Subscriber Message Length (Subs Msg Length) Use this option to set the maximum length of recorded messages for: Subscriber Mailbox users dialing RS to record and send a message. Extension users leaving a message in a Subscriber Mailbox. Outside Automated Attendant callers accessing a mailbox via a GOTO command and then dialing RS to record and send a message. Subscriber Mailbox Greetings. Announcement Messages. Call Routing Mailbox Instruction Menus.

03

120 seconds

The length of a Conversation Record is 10 times the Subscriber Message Length. Since the Conversation Record time cannot exceed 4095 seconds, any setting in Subscriber Message Length larger than 409 has no effect on the length of recorded conversations.
04 Non-Subscriber Message Length (Mbox Msg Length) Use this option to set the maximum length of recorded messages for: Automated Attendant callers leaving a message or Quick Message in a Subscriber Mailbox. Outside callers transferred by an extension user to a Subscriber Mailbox. Message Backup/Go Ahead Time (Msg Bkup/Adv Time) Use this option to set the backup/ go ahead time. This time sets how far InMail backs up when a user dials B while listening to a message. This interval also sets how far InMail jumps ahead when a user dials G while listening to a message. 1 ~ 4095 seconds 120 seconds

05

1 ~ 6015 seconds

5 seconds

2-368

Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
07

Item
Digital Pager Callback Number (Pager CBack) Use this option to set the Digital Pager Callback Number portion of the Message Notification callout number for a digital pager. This is the portion of the callout number that is appended to the pager service telephone number. Normally, this option should be X M#, where: X is the number of the extension that generated the notification. is a visual delimiter (to make the pager dis play easier to read). M is the number of new messages in the extension mailbox. # is the digit normally used by the pager service for positive disconnect.

Input Data
Digits (12 maximum, using 0 ~ 9, # and ) M (Number of messages - entered by pressing LK1) X (Extension number - entered by pressing LK2) InMail automatically replaces the X command with the number of the extension that initially received the message.

Default
X M#

Program

08

Delay in Dialing Digital Pager Callback Number 0 ~ 99 seconds (Pager Dial Delay) Use this option to set the delay (0 ~ 99 seconds) that occurs just before InMail dials the Digital Pager Callback Number portion of the Message Notification callout number for a digital pager. Set this delay so the pager service has enough time to connect to the digital pager before sending the callback number. Your pager service may be able to help you determine the best value for this option (0 ~ 99 seconds). By default, this option is 9 seconds. When placing a digital pager notification, the system: Seizes the trunk specified. Dials the user-entered notification number (in Message + OP + N). Waits the 47-01-08: Delay in Dialing Digital Pager Callback Number interval. Dials the number entered in 47-01-07: Digital Pager Callback Number. The system assumes that the notification number completes dialing approximately 4 seconds after trunk seizure. This means that, by default, the Digital Pager Callback Number is dialed into the pager service about 13 seconds after trunk seizure. Wait Between Digital Pager Callout Attempts 1 ~ 255 minutes (Notify Pager Intvl) Use this option to set the minimum time (1 ~ 255 minutes) between unacknowledged or unanswered digital pager Message Notification callouts. (A subscriber acknowledges a digital pager notification by logging onto their mailbox.) After this time expires, InMail tries the callout again (for up to the number of times set in 47-01-14: Number of Callout Attempts). If the system dials the callout number and the pager service is busy, it retries the number in one minute. Wait Between Non-Pager Callout Attempts (Notify N-Pgr Intvl) Use this option to set the minimum time (1 ~ 255 minutes) between non-pager Message Notification callouts in which the destination answers, says Hello, dials 1 to acknowledge and then enters the wrong security code. 1 ~ 255 minutes

30 seconds

47

09

15 minutes

10

20 minutes

11

Wait Between Busy Non-Pager Callout At1 ~ 255 minutes tempts (Notify Busy Intvl) Use this option to set how long InMail waits (1 ~ 255 minutes) after it dials a busy non-pager callout destination, before retrying the callout number.

15 minutes

Programming Manual

2-369

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item No.
12

Item

Input Data

Default
30 minutes

Program

47
13

Wait Between RNA Non-Pager Callout Attempts 1 ~ 255 minutes (Notify RNA Intvl) Use this option to set how long InMail waits (1 ~ 255 minutes), after it dials an unanswered nonpager callout destination, before retrying the callout number. There are 3 types of unanswered non-pager callouts: If the callout rings the destination longer than the 47-01-13: Wait for Answer Non-Pager Callout Attempts option. If the destination answers, says Hello (or the system detects answer supervision) and then hangs up without dialing 1 to log onto their mailbox. This typically happens if someone unfamiliar with notification answers the callout, or if the callout is picked up by an answering machine. If the destination answers and then hangs up without saying Hello. This typically happens if someone unfamiliar with the notification answers the callout (like the above example), or if the call is picked up by an answering machine with insufficient outgoing message volume. Wait for Answer Non-Pager Callout Attempts (Notify RNA Rings) If a non-pager callout rings the destination longer than this interval (1 ~ 99 rings), InMail marks the call as unanswered (Ring No Answer) and hangs up. 1 ~ 99 rings

5 rings

14

Number of Callout Attempts 1 ~ 99 rings (Notify Call Attmpt) Use this option to set how many times (1 ~ 99 rings) InMail retries an incomplete Message Notification callout. This total includes unacknowledged callouts, callouts to a busy destination, and callouts to an unanswered destination. This option applies to pager and non-pager callouts. Send Pager Callout Until Acknowledged 0 = No (Disabled) (Retry Until Ack) 1 = Yes (Enabled) When this option is enabled (1), InMail continues to retry a digital pager Message Notification callout until the notification is acknowledged. If this option is disabled (0), InMail retries a digital pager Message Notification the number of times specified in 47-01-14 Number of Callout Attempts. This option does not apply to Message Notification callouts to telephone numbers. A digital pager notification is considered acknowledged when the recipient logs onto the mailbox. Name Format Specify if names are displayed in First-Last format or Last-First. InMail Port Specify the port number of the first InMail Port. 0 = First-Last 1 = Last-First 0 ~ 113 The first port of InMail must start with one of the following ports: 1, 5, 9, 12, 16, ...... 237, 241, 245, 249 and uses the first port assigned + next three consecutive ports. 1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 dBm ~ + 15.5 dBm) 1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 dBm ~ + 15.5 dBm)

1 ring

15

16

17

18 19

Play PAD Control Record PAD Control (for Networking)

32 32

Conditions
When changing 47-01-01 or 47-01-02, a system reset is required for the new setting to take effect.

2-370

Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Feature Cross Reference

None

Program

47

Programming Manual

2-371

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-02 : InMail Station Mailbox Options
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 47-02 : InMail Station Mailbox Options to set up a station/extension mailbox. Station mailboxes are automatically assigned as Subscriber Mailboxes. Normally, InMail Station Mailbox numbers 1 ~ 64 should correspond to extensions 200~263 . Station Mailboxes are one of three mailbox categories: Station, Routing, or Master. You can also set up Master Mailboxes as Subscriber Mailboxes.

47

Input Data
Station Mailbox Number 001 ~ 128

Item No.
01

Item
Mailbox Type Use this option to enable or disable the mailbox. An extension mailbox is not accessible when it is disabled (even though its stored messages and configuration are retained in memory.) If disabled, a user pressing Message initiates a remote logon and is asked to enter their mailbox number. A voice prompt then announces: That mailbox does not exist. To make programming easier, consider associating a mailbox number with a station port. For example, mailbox 1 could correspond to port 1, which in turn corresponds to extension 200 .

Input Data
0 = None 1 = Personal 2 = Group

Default
Mailbox 1 ~ 64 : 1 Mialbox 65 ~ : 0

02

Mailbox Number Up to four digits Use this option to select the extension number associated with the mailbox you are programming. Normally, mailbox 1 should use Mailbox Number 200 , mailbox 2 should use Mailbox Number 201, 101 etc. To make programming easier, consider associating a mailbox number with a station port. For example, mailbox 1 could correspond to port 1, which in turn corresponds to extension 200 . Number of Messages Use this option to set the maximum number of messages that can be left in the Subscriber Mailbox. If a caller tries to leave a message after this limit is reached, they hear : That mailbox is full. InMail then hangs up. Message Playback Order Use this option to set the Subscriber Mailbox message playback order. When a subscriber listens to their messages, InMail can play the oldest messages first (first-in/first-out, or FIFO), or the newest messages first (last-in/first-out, or LIFO). Auto Erase/Save of Messages Use this option to determine what happens when a Subscriber Mailbox user completely listens to a new message and then exits the mailbox without either saving (SA) or erasing (E) the message. Depending on the setting of this option, InMail either automatically saves or erases the message. If the mailbox user hangs up before listening to the entire new message, InMail retains the message as a new message. 0 ~ 99 messages To conserve storage space, enter 0 for all unused mailboxes.

Mailbox 1 = 200 Mailbox 2 ~ 64 = 201 ~ 263 Mailbox 65 ~ = No setting

03

Mailbox 1 = 99 Mailbox 2 ~ = 20

04

0 (FIFO = first-in/ first-out, or oldest messages first). 1 (LIFO = last-in/ first-out, or newest messages first)

05

0 = Erase After the subscriber listens to the entire new message and hangs up, InMail erases the message. 1 = Save After the subscriber listens to the entire new message and hangs up, InMail saves the message.

2-372

Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
06

Item
Message Retention Use this option to determine how long a Subscriber Mailbox retains held and saved messages. If a message is left in a Subscriber Mailbox longer than this interval, InMail deletes it.

Input Data
0 ~ 99 Days (0 = Indefinite)

Default
0

07

Recording Conversation Beep 0 = No (Disabled) (Rec Conv Beep) 1 = Yes (Enabled) Use this option to enable or disable the Conversation Record beep. If enabled, all parties on a call hear the voice prompt Recording, followed by a single beep when the extension user initiates Conversation Record. If disabled, the voice prompt and beep do not occur. When you disable the Conversation Record beep, the following voice prompts do not occur while InMail records the conversation: Recording (followed by a beep) That mailbox is full (if the mailbox message storage capacity is reached) You have reached the recording limit (if the recorded message is too long) Provides an additional Conversation Record beep. This beep repeats according to the setting of Program 45-01-06 : Voice Mail Integration Options : Record Alert Tone Interval Time (0 ~ 64800 seconds). To disable the Conversation Record beep, enter 0 for this option. Message Waiting Lamp (Update MW Lamp) Use this option to enable or disable Message Waiting lamping at the extension associated with the Subscriber mailbox. For Subscriber Mailboxes, you should leave this option enabled. For Guest Mailboxes, you should leave this option disabled. 0 = No (Disabled) 1 = Yes (Enabled)

Program

47

08

09

Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail 0 = No (Disabled) (Auto-ATT DND) 1 = Yes (Enabled) Use this option to enable or disable Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb. When a subscriber enables Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb, an Automated Attendant caller routes directly to the mailbox, hears the greeting, and is asked to leave a message. A subscriber can also enable Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb while recording their mailbox greeting. Forced Unscreened Transfer (Forced UTRF) Use this option to enable or disable Automated Attendant Forced Unscreened Transfer for the Subscriber Mailbox. If enabled, each Screened Transfer (TRF) to the extension is converted to an Unscreened Transfer (UTRF). If disabled, Screened Transfers from the Automated Attendant occur normally. Auto Time Stamp Use this option to enable or disable Auto Time Stamp for the Subscriber Mailbox. If enabled, after the subscriber listens to a message InMail announces the time and date the message was left. Auto Time Stamp also announces the message sender (if known). A subscriber can also enable Auto Time Stamp from their mailbox. System Administrator Use this option to designate the Subscriber Mailbox as a System Administrator. This allows the subscriber to use the SA options after logging onto their mailbox. 0 = No (Disabled) 1 = Yes (Enabled)

10

11

0 = No (Disabled) 1 = Yes (Enabled)

12

0 = No (Disabled) 1 = Yes (Enabled)

Mailbox 1 (200) = 1 Mailbox 2 ~= 0

Programming Manual

2-373

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item No.
13

Item
Dialing Option Dialing Option provides additional dialing options for Next Call Routing Mailbox calls (see Next Call Routing Mailbox below). If enabled, a caller who accesses the Subscriber Mailbox to leave a message can dial any of the options in the Next Call Routing Mailbox Dial Action Table. If disabled, the caller can dial only 0 (to use the Next Call Routing Mailbox 0 action). Next Call Routing Mailbox (Next CR Mbox) Use this option to assign a Next Call Routing Mailbox to the Subscriber Mailbox. This provides callers with additional dialing options while listening to a Subscriber Mailbox recorded or default greeting. The digits the caller can dial depends on the setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox and Alternate Next Call Routing Mailbox options. Directory List Number

Input Data
0 = No (Disabled) 1 = Yes (Enabled)

Default
0

14

Program

Call Routing Mailbox Number (1 ~ 3 digits, 00 ~ 32) (00 = Undefined) No entry (Entered by pressing CLEAR)

47
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

Voice Prompt Language

Refer to Table 2-8 47-02-16 Default Table on the next page. 0 = No (Disabled) 1 = Yes (Enabled) 0 = RNA 1 = Immediately 0 = Numeric 1 = Mnemonic 0 = No 1 = Yes Up to 48 characters 0 = No 1 = Yes 0 = No 1 = Yes 0 = No 1 = Yes 0 = Always 1 = Remote Logon only

0 = None 1 ~ 8 = List Number = All

Station MailBox Number 2 0 0 0 0 No setting 1 1 0 0

Enable Paging Paging Option Telephone User Interface Type Enable E-mail Notification E-mail Address Include Message as Attachment All Message Notification Enabled All Find-Me Follow-Me Enabled Security Code Option

2-374

Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Table 2-8 47-02-16 Default Table

Item
47-02-16

Name
Voice Prompt Language 01 = US English 02 = UK English

Input Data

03 = Australian English 04 = French Canadian 05 = Dutch 06 = Mexican Spanish 07 = Latin American Spanish 08 = Italian 09 = German 10 = Madrid Spanish 11 = Norwegian 12 = Parisian French 13 = Brazilian Portuguese 14 = Japanese 15 = Mandarin Chinese 16 = Korean 17 = Iberian Portuguese 18 = Greek 19 = Danish 20 = Swedish 21 = Thai 22 = Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan) 23 = Flemish 24 = Turkish

Program

47

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-375

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-03 : InMail Group Mailbox Options
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 47-03 : InMail Group Mailbox Options to set up the 32 Group Mailboxes (01 ~ 32). A Group Mailbox is used for Department Group overflow and can be a Subscriber or Call Routing.

47

Input Data
Group Mailbox Number 01 ~ 32

Item No.
02

Item
Mailbox Number (Mailbox Number) The Group Mailbox Number is the same as the Department Group master (pilot) number. Use this option to select the Department Group master (pilot) number associated with the Group Mailbox you are programming.

Input Data
Up to four digits No setting (entered by pressing Hold)

Default
No setting

03

Mailbox Type 0 = None (Mailbox Type) 1 = Subscriber Use this option to set the Group Mailbox type. 2 = Routing There are three types of InMail mailboxes : None (0), Subscriber (1) and Routing (2). Routing Mailbox Number 01 ~ 32

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-376

Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 47 : InMail
47-06 : Group Mailbox Subscriber Options
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 47-06 : Group Mailbox Subscriber Options to set up a Master Mailbox assigned as a Subscriber Mailbox in 47-03-03 : Master Mailbox Type. Program

Input Data
Group Mailbox Number 01 ~ 32

47
Item Input Data Default
20 Number of Messages 00 ~ 99 messages Use this option to set the maximum number of mes- To conserve storage space, enter 0 sages that can be left in the Subscriber Mailbox. If a for all unused mailboxes. caller tries to leave a message after this limit is reached, they hear, That mailbox is full. InMail then hangs up. Message Playback Order Use this option to set the Subscriber Mailbox message playback order. When a subscriber listens to their messages, InMail can play the oldest messages first (first-in/first-out, or FIFO), or the newest messages first (last-in/first-out, or LIFO). Auto Erase/Save of Messages Use this option to determine what happens when a Subscriber Mailbox user completely listens to a new message and then exits the mailbox without either saving (SA) or erasing (E) the message. Depending on the setting of this option, InMail either automatically saves or erases the message. If the mailbox user hangs up before listening to the entire new message, InMail retains the message as a new message. 0 (FIFO = first-in/ first-out, or oldest messages first). 1 (LIFO = last-in/ first-out, or newest messages first).

Item No.
01

02

03

0 = Erase After the subscriber listens to the entire new message and hangs up, InMail erases the message. 1 = Save After the subscriber listens to the entire new message and hangs up, InMail saves the message.

04

Message Retention 0 ~ 90 days Use this option to determine how long a Subscriber (0 = Indefinite) Mailbox retains held and saved messages. If a message is left in a Subscriber Mailbox longer than this interval, InMail deletes it. Recording Conversation Beep 0 = No (Disabled) (Rec Conv Beep) 1 = Yes (Enabled) Use this option to enable or disable the Conversation Record beep. If enabled, all parties on a call hear the voice prompt Recording, followed by a single beep when the extension user initiates Conversation Record. If disabled, the voice prompt and beep do not occur. When you disable the Conversation Record beep, the following voice prompts do not occur while InMail records the conversation: Recording (followed by a beep) That mailbox is full (if the mailbox message storage capacity is reached) You have reached the recording limit (if the recorded message is too long) Provides an additional Conversation Record beep. This beep repeats according to the setting of Program 45-01-06 : Voice Mail Integration Options : Record Alert Tone Interval Time (0 ~ 64800 seconds). To disable Conversation Record beep, enter 0 for this option.

05

Programming Manual

2-377

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item No.
06

Item
Message Waiting Lamp (Update MW Lamp) Use this option to enable or disable Message Waiting light at the extension associated with the Subscriber mailbox. For Subscriber Mailboxes, you should leave this option enabled. For Guest Mailboxes, you should leave this option disabled.

Input Data
0 = No (Disabled) 1 = Yes (Enabled)

Default
1

07

Program

47

Auto Attendant Direct to VoiceMail 0 = No (Disabled) Use this option to enable or disable Auto Attendant 1 = Yes (Enabled) Direct to VM. When a subscriber enables Auto Attendant Direct to VM, an Automated Attendant caller routes directly to the mailbox, hears the greeting, and is asked to leave a message. A subscriber can also enable Auto Attendant Direct to VM while recording their mailbox greeting. Forced Unscreened Transfer (Forced UTRF) Use this option to enable or disable Automated Attendant Forced Unscreened Transfer for the Subscriber Mailbox. If enabled, each Screened Transfer (TRF) to the extension is converted to an Unscreened Transfer (UTRF). If disabled, Screened Transfers from the Automated Attendant occur normally. 0 = No (Disabled) 1 = Yes (Enabled)

08

09

Auto Time Stamp 0 = No (Disabled) Use this option to enable or disable Auto Time 1 = Yes (Enabled) Stamp for the Subscriber Mailbox. If enabled, after the subscriber listens to a message InMail announces the time and date the message was left. Auto Time Stamp also announces the message sender (if known). A subscriber can also enable Auto Time Stamp from their mailbox. System Administrator (System Admin) Use this option to designate the Subscriber Mailbox as a System Administrator. This allows the subscriber to use the options after logging onto their mailbox. 0 = No (Disabled) 1 = Yes (Enabled)

10

11

Dialing Option 0 = No (Disabled) Dialing Option provides additional dialing options for 1 = Yes (Enabled) Next Call Routing Mailbox calls (see Next Call Routing Mailbox below). If enabled, a caller who accesses the Subscriber Mailbox to leave a message can dial any option in the Next Call Routing Mailbox Dial Action Table. If disabled, the caller can dial only 0 (to use the Next Call Routing Mailbox 0 action). Next Call Routing Mailbox (Next CR Mbox) Use this option to assign a Next Call Routing Mailbox to the Subscriber Mailbox. This provides callers with additional dialing options while listening to a Subscriber Mailbox recorded or default greeting. The digits the caller can dial depends on the setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox and Alternate Next Call Routing Mailbox options. Directory List Number Specify the Directory List number to which the Group Mailbox belongs. Voice Prompt Language Enable Paging Paging Option Telephone User Interface 0 ~ 32 (0 = Undefined)

12

1 (Call Routing Mailbox 01) By default, Call Routing Mailbox numbers are 01 = 16.

13

14 15 16 17

Refer to Table 2-9 47-06-14 Default Table on the next page. 0 = No 1 = Yes 0 = RNA 1 = Immediate 0 = Numeric interface 1 = Mnemonic interface 2 = Octel (future)

0 = None 1 ~ 8 = List Number = All

2 0 0 0

2-378

Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
18 19 20 21 22 23

Item
Enable Email Notification Email Address Include Msg as Attachment All Message Notification Enabled All Find-Me Follow-Me Enabled Security Code Option 0 = No 1 = Yes

Input Data

Default
0 No setting 1 1 0

Up to 48 characters 0 = No 1 = Yes 0 = No 1 = Yes 0 = No 1 = Yes 0 = Always 1 = Remote Logon only

Program
0

47
Table 2-9 47-06-14 Default Table
Item
47-06-14

Name
Voice Prompt Language 01 = US English 02 = UK English

Input Data

03 = Australian English 04 = French Canadian 05 = Dutch 06 = Mexican Spanish 07 = Latin American Spanish 08 = Italian 09 = German 10 = Madrid Spanish 11 = Norwegian 12 = Parisian French 13 = Brazilian Portuguese 14 = Japanese 15 = Mandarin Chinese 16 = Korean 17 = Iberian Portuguese 18 = Greek 19 = Danish 20 = Swedish 21 = Thai 22 = Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan) 23 = Flemish 24 = Turkish

Conditions
None

Programming Manual

2-379

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Feature Cross Reference

None

Program

47

2-380

Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 47 : InMail
47-07 : InMail Routing Mailbox Options
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 47-07 : InMail Routing Mailbox Options to set up the 32 Routing Mailboxes. Routing Mailboxes can be either Announcement or Call Routing Mailboxes. Program

Input Data
Routing Mailbox Number 01 ~ 32

47
Item
Routing Mailbox Type (Mailbox Type) Use this option to set the Routing Mailbox type. Prompt Language

Item No.
02

Input Data
0 = None 1 = Call Routing 2 = Announcement 3 = Directory 4 = Distribution Refer to Table 2-10 47-07-03 Default Table on the next page. 0 = Numeric interface 1 = Mnemonic interface 2 = Octel (future)

Default
Mailboxes 01 ~ 08 = 1 (Call Routing) Mailboxes 09 ~ 32 = 2 (Announcement) 2

03

04

Telephone User Interface

Programming Manual

2-381

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Table 2-10 47-07-03 Default Table

Item
47-07-03

Name
Voice Prompt Language 01 = US English 02 = UK English

Input Data

03 = Australian English 04 = French Canadian 05 = Dutch

Program

06 = Mexican Spanish 07 = Latin American Spanish

47

08 = Italian 09 = German 10 = Madrid Spanish 11 = Norwegian 12 = Parisian French 13 = Brazilian Portuguese 14 = Japanese 15 = Mandarin Chinese 16 = Korean 17 = Iberian Portuguese 18 = Greek 19 = Danish 20 = Swedish 21 = Thai 22 = Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan) 23 = Flemish 24 = Turkish

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-382

Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 47 : InMail
47-08 : Call Routing Mailbox Options
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 47-08 : Call Routing Mailbox Options to set the options for mailboxes assigned as Call Routing Mailboxes in 47-07-02 : Routing Mailbox Type. Program

Input Data
Routing Mailbox Number 01 ~ 32

47
Item Input Data Default
1 (Dial Action Table 1) Dial Action Table 1 ~ 16 Use this option to assign the Dial Action Table (Dial Action Table 1 ~ 16) to the Call Routing Mailbox. The Dial Action Table defines the dialing options for the call Routing Mailbox. Screened Transfer Timeout (Scrn Trf Timeout) Use this option to set how long a Screened Transfer (TRF) from the Automated Attendant rings an unanswered extension before recalling. This option has a similar function as Customize: Mailbox Options: Call Routing: [Call Handling] Options: Delay Rings Before Redirect Transfer in InMail. Time Limit for Dialing Commands (Dialing Timeout) This option determines how long InMail waits for an Automated Attendant caller to dial before routing the call to the Timeout destination. Be sure your Dial Action Tables have a Timeout action programmed. If the caller waits too long to dial: When the associated Dial Action Table has a Timeout action programmed, the caller routes to that destination. When the associated Dial Action Table does not have a Timeout action programmed, the Instruction Menu repeats three times and then InMail hangs up. 0 ~ 255 seconds Entering 0 causes immediate recall.

Item No.
01

02

15 seconds

03

0 ~ 99 seconds Entering 0 causes the Automated Attendant to immediately route callers to the Timeout destination programmed in the active Dial Action Table.

5 seconds

04

Fax Detection 0 = No (Disabled) Use this option to enable or disable Fax De1 = Yes (Enabled) tection for the Call Routing Mailbox. In enabled, the InMail Automated Attendant (when using this Call Routing Mailbox) detects incoming fax CNG tone. The fax call then routes to the company fax machine according to the setting of 47-01-06 : Fax Extension. If disabled, the Automated Attendant does not detect incoming fax calls. Fax Extension Up to four digits

05

No setting

Conditions
None

Programming Manual

2-383

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Feature Cross Reference

None

Program

47

2-384

Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 47 : InMail
47-09 : Announcement Mailbox Options
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 47-09 : Announcement Mailbox Options to set the options for mailboxes assigned as Announcement Mailboxes in 47-07-02 : Routing Mailbox Type. Program

Input Data
Routing Mailbox Number 01 ~ 32

47
Default
0

Item No.
01

Item
Next Call Routing Mailbox (Next CR Mbox) If you set up an Announcement Mailbox to answer Automated Attendant calls, use this option to provide additional routing options to the Automated Attendant callers. This option interacts with Repeat Count and Hang Up After below. For more detail on this interaction, refer to Direct Announcement Mailbox Routing and Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing in the InMail System Guide.

Input Data
Call Routing Mailbox Number (01 ~ 32) Next Call Routing Mailbox 00 ~ 32 00 = Undefined

02

Repeat Count 0 ~ 10 (Announcement repeats 1 ~ Enter the number of times you want the Announce10 times) ment Mailbox message to repeat to callers. After an (0 = No Repeats) Announcement Mailbox caller initially listens to the message, it repeats the number of times specified in this option. This option interacts with Next Call Routing Mailbox and Hang Up After when providing routing options. For more detail on this interaction, refer to Direct Announcement Mailbox Routing and Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing in the InMail System Guide. Hang Up After (HangUp) Use this option along with Next Call Routing Mailbox and Repeat Count above to provide additional routing options to Automated Attendant callers. For more detail on this interaction, refer to Direct Announcement Mailbox Routing and Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing in the InMail System Guide. 0 = None 1 = Goodbye 2 = Silent

03

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-385

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-10 : InMail Trunk Options
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 47-10 : InMail Trunk Options to assign InMail options for each trunk. Currently, only 47-10-01 : Answer Table Assignment is available.

47

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

Item No.
01

Item
Answer Table Assignment (Answer Table) Use this option to assign an InMail Answer Table to each Direct Inward Line (DIL) the Automated Attendant should answer. The Automated Attendant follows the routing specified by the selected Answer Table. Record PAD Control Voice Prompt Language Telephone User Interface

Input Data
Answer Table (1 ~ 8)

Default
1

02 03 04

1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 dBm ~ + 15.5 dBm) Refer to Table 2-11 47-10-03 Default Table on the next page. 0 = Numeric interface 1 = Mnemonic interface

32 2 0

2-386

Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Table 2-11 47-10-03 Default Table

Item
47-10-03

Name
Voice Prompt Language 01 = US English 02 = UK English

Input Data

03 = Australian English 04 = French Canadian 05 = Dutch 06 = Mexican Spanish 07 = Latin American Spanish 08 = Italian 09 = German 10 = Madrid Spanish 11 = Norwegian 12 = Parisian French 13 = Brazilian Portuguese 14 = Japanese 15 = Mandarin Chinese 16 = Korean 17 = Iberian Portuguese 18 = Greek 19 = Danish 20 = Swedish 21 = Thai 22 = Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan) 23 = Flemish 24 = Turkish

Program

47

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-387

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-11 : InMail Answer Table Options
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 47-11 : InMail Answer Table Options to set options for the Answer Tables. InMail provides eight Answer Tables (1 ~ 8). To set up the schedules for each Answer Table, go to 47-12 : InMail Answer Table Schedule.

47

Input Data
Answer Table Number 1~8

Item No.
01

Item
Answer Schedule Override (Schedule Override) Use this option to enable or disable Answer Schedule Override for the selected Answer Table. If enabled (and you make an entry for Override Mailbox below), the active Answer Table routes calls to the Override Mailbox.

Input Data
0 = No (Disabled) 1 = Yes (Enabled)

Default
0

Description

2-388

Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
02

Item
Override Mailbox Category (Override MB Ctg) Use this option to specify the category of the mailbox where Automated Attendant calls should route when you enable Answer Schedule Override. If the Override Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox, the outside caller hears the mailbox greeting (if recorded) and can leave a message. If the Override Mailbox is a Master Mailbox, the outside caller shears the recorded announcement. Depending on how the Announcement Mailbox is programmed, InMail then hangs up, reroutes the call, or provides additional dialing options. If the Override Mailbox is a Routing Mailbox, the outside caller hears the instruction menu and can dial any option allowed by the associated Dial Action Table.

Input Data
0 = Undefined 1 = Subscriber Mailbox - STA 2 = Master Mailbox 3 = Routing Mailbox

Default
0

Description
Category 0 = Skip Mailbox No. setting Category 1 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 128. refer to <47-02 : InMail Station Mailbox Options on page 2-372> Category 2 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 32. refer to <47-03 : InMail Group Mailbox Options on page 2-376> Category 3 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 32. refer to <47-07 : InMail Routing Mailbox Options on page 2-381>

Program

47

If any of the Input Data values are entered, the terminal displays the Override Mailbox Number selection (below).
Override Mailbox Number (Override MB Num) Use this option to specify the mailbox where Automated Attendant calls should route when you enable Answer Schedule Override. The mailbox number you select in this option should match the mailbox category specified in 47-11-02 : Override Mailbox Categoryabove. Up to 3 digits (using 0 ~ 9) No setting Category 0 = Skip Mailbox No. setting Category 1 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 128. refer to <47-02 : InMail Station Mailbox Options on page 2-372> Category 2 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 32. refer to <47-03 : InMail Group Mailbox Options on page 2-376> Category 3 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 32. refer to <47-07 : InMail Routing Mailbox Options on page 2-381>

Programming Manual

2-389

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item No.
03

Item
Default Mailbox Category (Default MB Ctg) Use this option to specify the category of mailbox used as the Default Mailbox. If the Default Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox, the outside caller hears the mailbox greeting (if recorded) and can leave a message. If the Default Mailbox is a Master Mailbox, the outside caller hears the recorded announcement. Depending on how the Announcement Mailbox is programmed, InMail then hangs up, reroutes the call, or provides additional dialing options. If the Default Mailbox is a Routing Mailbox, the outside caller hears the instruction menu and can dial any option allowed by the associated Dial Action Table.

Input Data
0 = Undefined 1 = Subscriber Mailbox - STA 2 = Master Mailbox 3 = Routing Mailbox

Default
Answer Table 1=3 Answer Table 2~8=0

Description
Category 0 = Skip Mailbox No. setting Category 1 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 128. refer to <47-02 : InMail Station Mailbox Options on page 2-372> Category 2 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 32. refer to <47-03 : InMail Group Mailbox Options on page 2-376> Category 3 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 32. refer to <47-07 : InMail Routing Mailbox Options on page 2-381>

Program

47

If any of the Input Data values are entered, the terminal displays the Override Mailbox Number selection (below). If any of the Input Data values are entered, the terminal displays the Override Mailbox Number selection (below).
Default Mailbox Number Up to 3 digits (using 0 ~ (Default MB Num) 9) Use this option to set the Answer Table Default Mailbox number. InMail uses the Default Mailbox when an Answer Schedule is not in effect. By default, this occurs at all times other than Monday through Friday from 8:30 AM to 5:00 PM. Answer Table 1=1 Answer Table 2 ~ 8 = No setting Category 0 = Skip Mailbox No. setting Category 1 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 128. refer to <47-02 : InMail Station Mailbox Options on page 2-372> Category 2 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 32. refer to <47-03 : InMail Group Mailbox Options on page 2-376> Category 3 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 32. refer to <47-07 : InMail Routing Mailbox Options on page 2-381>

04

Next Answer Table When 10 Answer Schedules in an Answer Table are not sufficient, use this option to link two Answer Tables together. InMail treats the two linked tables as a single 20 entry Answer Table.

Answer Table (0 ~ 8) 0 = Undefined

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-390

Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 47 : InMail
47-12 : InMail Answer Schedules
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 47-12 : InMail Answer Schedules to set up the InMail Automated Attendant Answer Schedules. There are eight Answer Tables, with up to 10 Answer Schedules in each Answer Table. Program

Input Data
Answer Table Number 1~8

47
Schedule Entry Number 1 ~ 10

Programming Manual

2-391

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item No.
01

Item
Schedule Type

Input Data
0 = Undefined 1 = Day of the Week 2 = Range of Days 3 = Date

Default
Answer Table 1/ Schedule 1 = 2 All other schedules = 0

Description
(Entryxx Schedule Type) Use this option to assign a Schedule Type to the selected Answer Schedule. The Schedule Type determines how the Answer Schedule answers calls. The schedule can be one of the following types: 1. Day of the Week A Type 1 Answer Schedule runs on a specific day of the week. For this type of schedule, you select: The day of the week the schedule should run: The schedule start time. The schedule end time. The Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox used to answer calls. 2. Range of Days A Type 2 Answer Schedule runs for a range of days. For this type of schedule, you select: The day of the week the schedule should start. The day of the week the schedule should stop. The time on the start day the schedule should start. The time on the stop day the schedule should stop. The Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox used to answer the calls. 3. Date A type 3 Answer Schedule runs only on a specific day of the year. For this type of schedule, you select: The specific date the schedule should run. On the selected date, the time the schedule should start. On the selected date, the time the schedule should stop. The Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox used to answer the calls.

Program

47

2-392

Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
02

Item
Answering Mailbox Category (Entryxx MB Ctg) Use this option to specify the category of mailbox to which Automated Attendant calls should route when the schedule is in effect. If the Answering Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox, the outside caller hears the mailbox greeting (if recorded) and can leave a message. If the Answering Mailbox is a Master Mailbox, the outside caller hears the recorded announcement. Depending on how the Announcement Mailbox is programmed, InMail then hangs up, reroutes the call, or provides additional dialing options. If the Answering Mailbox is a Routing Mailbox, the outside caller hears the instruction menu and can dial any option allowed by the associated Dial Action Table.

Input Data
0 = Undefined 1 = Subscriber Mailbox - STA 2 = Master Mailbox 3 = Routing Mailbox

Default
Answer Table 1/ Schedule 1 = 3 All Other Schedules =0

Description
Category 0 = Skip Mailbox No. setting Category 1 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 128. refer to <47-02 : InMail Station Mailbox Options on page 2-372> Category 2 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 32. refer to <47-03 : InMail Group Mailbox Options on page 2-376> Category 3 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 32. refer to <47-07 : InMail Routing Mailbox Options on page 2-381>

Program

47

Answering Mailbox Number Up to 3 digits (using 0 ~ (Entryxx MB Num) 9) Use this option to set the number of the Answering Mailbox the Automated Attendant uses when the selected schedule is in effect. This mailbox is defined in 47-12-02 : Answering Mailbox Category.

Answer Table 1/ Schedule 1 = 1 All Other Answer Schedules = No setting

Category 0 = Skip Mailbox No. setting Category 1 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 128. refer to <47-02 : InMail Station Mailbox Options on page 2-372> Category 2 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 32. refer to <47-03 : InMail Group Mailbox Options on page 2-376> Category 3 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 32. refer to <47-07 : InMail Routing Mailbox Options on page 2-381>

03

Day of the Week (Entryxx Day) For Day of the Week (Type 1) Answer Schedules, use this option to select the day of the week the Answer Schedule should be active. Start Day (Entryxx Start Day) For Range of Days (Type 2) Answer Schedules, use this option to select the day of the week the Answer Schedule should start. End Day (Entryxx End Day) For Range of Days (Type 2) Answer Schedules, use this option to select the day of the week the Answer Schedule should end. Date (Entryxx Date) For Date (Type 3) Answer Schedules, use this option to select the date the Answer Schedule should be active.

1 = Sunday 2 = Monday 3 = Tuesday 4 = Wednesday 5 = Thursday 6 = Friday 7 = Saturday 1 = Sunday 2 = Monday 3 = Tuesday 4 = Wednesday 5 = Thursday 6 = Friday 7 = Saturday 1 = Sunday 2 = Monday 3 = Tuesday 4 = Wednesday 5 = Thursday 6 = Friday 7 = Saturday MMDD For example : - 0101 = January 1 - 1231 = December 31 (0000 = Undefined)

All Schedules = 1

04

Answer Table 1/ Schedule 1 = 2 All Other Schedules =1

05

Answer Table 1/ Schedule 1 = 6 All Other Answer Schedules = 1

06

All Shedule = 0000

Programming Manual

2-393

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item No.
07

Item
Schedule Start Time (Entryxx Start Time) Use this option to specify the time the Answer Schedule should start. It applies to Day of the Week (Type 1), Range of Days (Type 2), and Date (Type 3) schedules. (To make a schedule run continuously, make the same entry for 4712-07 : Schedule Start Time and 47-12-08 : Schedule End Time.) Schedule End Time (Entryxx End Time) Use this option to specify the time the Answer Schedule should end. It applies to Day of the Week (Type 1), Range of Days (Type 2), and Date (Type 3) schedules. (To make a schedule run continuously, make the same entry for 4712-07 : Schedule Start Time and 47-12-08 : Schedule End Time.)

Input Data
HHMM (24-hour clock) For example : - 0130 = 1 : 30 AM - 1700 = 5 : 00 PM (0000 = Undefined)

Default
Answer Table 1/ Schedule 1 = 0830 All other schedules are 0000.

Description

Program

47

08

HHMM (24-hour clock) For example : - 0130 = 1 : 30 AM - 1700 = 5 : 00 PM (0000 = Undefined)

Answer Table 1/ Schedule 1 = 1700 All Other Schedules = 0000

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-394

Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 47 : InMail
47-13 : InMail Dial Action Tables
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 47-13 : InMail Dial Action Tables to set up the InMail Dial Action Tables. The Dial Action Table defines the options than an Automated Attendant caller can dial. A Dial Action Table is associated with a Call Routing Mailbox, which is in turn associated with an Answer Table. When an Answer Table is active, its associated Call Routing Mailbox selects the Dial Action Table which provides dialing options to callers. The illustration below shows how this works in a default InMail system. There are 16 Dial Action Tables. Program

47

Input Data
Dial Action Table Number 01 ~ 16

Key Number

0 ~ 9,

*, #, TIMEOUT

Programming Manual

2-395

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item No.
01

Name
Action

Input Data
0 = UND (Undefined) 1 = TRF (Transfer) 2 = UTRF (Unscreened Transfer) 3 = REC1 4 = REC2 5 = LOGON 6 = Hang Up 7 = GOTO

Description
TRF Action - Screened Transfer (1) (TRF) UTRF Action - Unscreened Transfer (2) (UTRF) REC1 Action - Quick Message With Greeting (3) (REC1) REC2 Action - Quick Message Without Greeting (4) (REC2) LOGON Action - Log Onto Voice Mail (5) (LOGON) Hang Up Action (6) (HNGUP) GOTO Action - Go to Mailbox (7) (GOTO) UND Action - Undefined Routing (0) (UND)

Data

Program

47

Up to 8 digits (0 ~ 9, , #) X = Caller Dialed Digits I = Ignore Digits N = No Routing P = Pause

Digits Entry : 0 ~ 9, #, and (8 digits max.) Use Dial Action Table digits to route an Automated Attendant call to a specific location (such as an extension). For example, to set up a TRF Action to route to extension 305, for 3 enter TRF for the Action and 305 for the corresponding Number. Caller Dialed Digits Entry : X(Entered by pressing LK2) Use the X option to route an Automated Attendant call based on digits the caller dials. Each X entry represents one callerdialed digit. For example, to set up a TRF Action to route to any caller dialed extension in the 301 ~ 399 range, for 3 enter TRF for the Action and XXX for the corresponding Number. Ignore Digits Entry : I(Entered by pressing LK3) Use the I option to represent any digit dialed by the Automated Attendant caller that PZ-VM21 InMail ignores for routing. An example of this is REC action assigned to the key in Dial Action Table 1 by default. The Action is REC2 and the Number is IXXX. This means that a caller can dial + any mailbox number to leave a Quick Message in that mailbox. InMail ignores the first digit dialed by the caller ( ), and routes according to the next 3 digits dialed. No Routing Entry : N(Entered by pressing LK1) Use the N option when you want no Automated Attendant routing to automatically occur. This can be used with the LOGON action when you want to prompt the caller to enter a mailbox number. To do this for the # key (for example), for the # key enter LOGON for the Action and N for the corresponding Number. When the caller dials #, they hear, Please enter the mailbox number. Or, to exit, press the pound key. Pause Entry : P(Entered by pressing LK4) Use the P option when you want the Automated Attendant to pause while dialing.

Defaults
Dial Action Table Default Settings Dial Action Table 1 Key Action
1 2 3 4 5 6 0 (UND) 2 (UTRF) 2 (UTRF) 0 (UND) 0 (UND) 0 (UND)

Dial Action Table 2 ~ 16 Action

0 (UND) 0 (UND) 0 (UND) 0 (UND) 0 (UND) 0 (UND)

Data
0 XXX XXX 0 0 0

Data
0 0 0 0 0 0

2-396

Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Dial Action Table Default Settings Dial Action Table 1 Key Action
7 8 9 0 0 (UND) 0 (UND) 6 (Hang Up) 2 (UTRF) 3 (REC1) 5 (LOGON) 2 (UTRF)

Dial Action Table 2 ~ 16 Action

0 (UND) 0 (UND) 0 (UND) 0 (UND) 0 (UND) 0 (UND) 0 (UND)

Data
0 0 0 200 IXXX IXXX 200

Data
0 0 0 0 0 0 0

*
# TIMEOUT

Program

TIMEOUT provides the routing for rotary dial callers.

Note
If Action is set 0 or 6 skip Data setting. "XXX"= change as it fit The Data data needs to follow these rules below. 0 (UND) = none 1 (TRF) = dial data (any), X, I, N, or P 2 (UTRF) = dial data (any), X, I, N, or P 3 (REC1) = mailbox number (subscriber or group) 4 (REC2) = mailbox number (subscriber or group) 5 (LOGON) = mailbox number (subscriber or group) 6 (HANGUP) = none 7 (GOTO) = routing mailbox number index (1 ~ 32) Otherwise it will not be routed properly.

47

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-397

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-15 : Routing Directory Mailbox Options
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 47-15 : Routing Directory Mailbox Options to define the Routing Directory Mailbox Options. This data is referred if Program 47-07-02 (Routing Master Mailbox Type) was set to Type 4 (Directory).

47

Input Data
Master Mailbox Number 01 ~ 32

Item No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09

Item
Minimum Number of Letters Required Directory List Number to Use Name Match Transfer Option Screened Transfer Timeout Time Limit for Dialing Commands Fax Detection Next Call Routing Mailbox Fax Extension 1~3 1~8 0 = First 1 = Last

Input Data

Default
1 1 0 0 15 5 0 0 No setting

0 = TRF 1 = UTRF 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 99 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 ~ 32 Up to eight digits

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-398

Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 47 : InMail
47-17 : Routing Distribution Mailbox Options
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 47-17 : Routing Distribution Mailbox Options to assign data when Program 47-07-02 is set to 4 (Distribution). Program

Input Data
Routing Mailbox Number 01 ~ 32

47
Default
0

Entry Number

01 ~ 20

Item No.
01

Item
Distribution Mailbox Category Use Undefined (0) to skip Mailbox Number setting. Use Station Mailbox (1) for setting Mailbox Number to 1 ~ 512 (Program 47-02). Use Group Number (2) for setting Group Mailbox (1 ~ 32) (Program 47-03). Distribution Mailbox Number

Input Data
0 = Undefined 1 = Station Mailbox 2 = Group Mailbox

This Program is ..
Category 1 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 128. refer to <47-02 : InMail Station Mailbox Options on page 2-372> Category 2 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 32. refer to <47-03 : InMail Group Mailbox Options on page 2-376> Category 1 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 128. refer to <47-02 : InMail Station Mailbox Options on page 2-372> Category 2 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 32. refer to <47-03 : InMail Group Mailbox Options on page 2-376>

Up to 3 digits

No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-399

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-18 : InMail SMTP Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 47-18 InMail SMTP Setup to set the SNMP e-mail notification.

Input Data

47

Item No.
01 02 03 04 05 SMTP Enabled Server Name SMTP Port Encryption Authentication

Item
0 = No 1 = Yes

Input Data

Default
0 No setting 25 0 0

Up to 48 characters 0 ~ 65535 0 = No 1 = Yes 0 = No 1 = Yes 2 = POP3 Up to 48 characters Up to 48 characters Up to 48 characters Up to 48 characters

06 07 08 09

User Name Password E-mail Address Reply to Address

No setting No setting No setting No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-400

Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 47 : InMail
47-19 : InMail POP3 Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 47-19 : InMail POP3 Setup to set the InMail e-mail notification. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01 02 03 04 05 Server Name POP3 Port Encryption User Name Password

Item

Input Data
Up to 48 characters 0 ~ 65535 0 = No 1 = Yes Up to 48 characters Up to 48 characters

Default
No setting 110 0 No setting No setting

47

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-401

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-20 : Station Mailbox Message Notification Options
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 47-20 : Station Mailbox Message Notification Options to define the IntraMail Station Mailbox Message Notification Options.

47

Input Data
Station Mailbox Number 001 ~ 128

Index Number

1~5

Item No.
01 02 03 04 Notification

Item
0 = Off 1 = On

Input Data
0 00 00 1

Default

Notification Begin Hour Notification End Hour Notification Type

00 ~ 23 (00 (12 : 00 AM) ~ 23 (11 : 00 PM)) 00 ~ 23 (00 (12 : 00 AM) ~ 23 (11 : 00 PM)) 0 = Undefined 1 = Voice 2 = Pager Up to 16 digits 1 ~ 99 (attempts) 1 ~ 99 (attempts) 0 = Off 1 = On

05 06 07 08

Notification Number Notification Busy Attempts Notification RNA Attempts Notification Security

No setting 5 5 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-402

Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 47 : InMail
47-21 : Station Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 47-21 : Station Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options to define the IntraMail Station Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options. Program

Input Data
Station Mailbox Number 001 ~ 128

47
Default
0 00 00 No setting

Index Number

1~3

Item No.
01 02 03 04 Find-Me Follow-Me

Item
0 = Off 1 = On

Input Data

Find-Me Follow-Me Begin Hour Find-Me Follow-Me End Hour Find-Me Follow-Me Number

00 ~ 23 (00 (12 : 00 AM) ~ 23 (11 : 00 PM)) 00 ~ 23 (00 (12 : 00 AM) ~ 23 (11 : 00 PM)) Up to 16 digits

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-403

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-22 : Group Mailbox Message Notification Options
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 47-22 : Group Mailbox Message Notification Options to define the IntraMail Group Mailbox Message Notification Options.

47

Input Data
Group Mailbox Number 01 ~ 32

Index Number

1~5

Item No.
01 02 03 04 Notification

Item
0 = Off 1 = On

Input Data

Default
0 00 00 1

Notification Begin Hour Notification End Hour Notification Type

00 ~ 23 (00 (12 : 00 AM) ~ 23 (11 : 00 PM)) 00 ~ 23 (00 (12 : 00 AM) ~ 23 (11 : 00 PM)) 0 = Undefined 1 = Voice 2 = Pager Up to 16 digits 1 ~ 99 (attempts) 1 ~ 99 (attempts) 0 = Off 1 = On

05 06 07 08

Notification Number Notification Busy Attempts Notification RNA Attempts Notification Security

No setting 5 5 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-404

Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 47 : InMail
47-23 : Group Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 47-23 : Group Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options to define the IntraMail Group Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options. Program

Input Data
Group Mailbox Number 01 ~ 32

47
Default
0 00 00 No setting

Index Number

1~3

Item No.
01 02 03 04

Item
Find-Me Follow-Me Find-Me Follow-Me Begin Hour Find-Me Follow-Me End Hour Find-Me Follow-Me Number 0 = Off 1 = On

Input Data

00 ~ 23 (00 (12 : 00 AM) ~ 23 (11 : 00 PM)) 00 ~ 23 (00 (12 : 00 AM) ~ 23 (11 : 00 PM)) Up to 16 digits

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-405

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-01 : Service Tone Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 80-01 : Service Tone Setup to define up to 64 Service Tones. Each service tone is defined by the combination of 32 Basic Tones.

80

Input Data
Service Tone Number 01 ~ 64

Item No.
01 Repeat Count

Item

Input Data
0 ~ 255 (0 = Endless)

Unit Number

1~8

Item No.
02 Basic Tone Number

Item

Input Data
0 ~ 33 (0 = No Tone) (33 = Default Time Slot) 0 ~ 255 (0, 100 ~ 25500 ms) 0 ~ 63 (- 15.5 ~ + 15.5)

03 04

Duration Count Gain Level (dB)

Table 2-12 Basic Tones

Basic Tone No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

Frequency (Hz)
420 520 580 660 700 800 880 1050 430 440 / 480 480 / 620 440 -- Reserve -520 / 650 650 / 780 780 / 1040 520 / 650

Level (dB)
- 13 - 13 - 13 - 13 - 13 - 13 - 13 - 13 - 13 - 13 / - 13 - 13 / - 13 -16 -19 / -13 -19 / -13 -19 / -13 -13 / -19

2-406

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Basic Tone No.

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

Frequency (Hz)
650 / 780 780 / 1040 1040 450 950 1800 400 / 450 400 350 / 440 420 (Amplitude Modulated) -- Reserve --- Reserve --- Reserve --- Reserve --- Reserve --

Level (dB)
-13 / -19 -13 / -19 -13 -13 -13 -13 -13/-13 - 13 - 13/- 13 - 13 -

Program

80

Default
Service Tone No.
1 2 3 4 5

Service Tone Name

Repeat Count
0 0 0 0 0

Unit Count

Basic Tone No.

0 1 24 24 21 0 21 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0

Duration

Gain Level (dB)

No tone Internal Dial Tone Stutter Dial Tone (Special Dial Tone) Internal Recall Dial Tone (Transfer Dial Tone) Trunk Dial Tone

1 1 1 1 4

10 10 10 10 6 10 2 2 5 5 2 2 5 5 2 2 2 2 5 1 0 0 10 40

32 (0 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 35 (+ 1.5 dB) 35 (+ 1.5 dB) 45 (0 dB) 45 (0 dB) 45 (0 dB) 45 (0 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 32 (0 dB) 32 (0 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB)

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Internal Busy Tone (Busy Tone) DND Busy Tone B-busy Tone Internal Reorder Tone (Congestion Tone) Internal Interrupt Tone (Warning Tone) Internal Confirmation Tone (Confirmation Tone) Internal Hold Tone External Hold Tone Internal Ring-back Tone (Internal Audible Ring) (Ring Back Tone)

0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

2 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 2

Programming Manual

2-407

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Service Tone No.

15 16 17

Service Tone Name

Repeat Count
1 0 0

Unit Count

Basic Tone No.

0 1 23 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 4 4 2 2 2 0 7 7 5 5 5 0 8 8 6 6 6 0 4 4 2 2 2 0 7 7 5 5 5 0 8 8 6 6 6 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

Duration

Gain Level (dB)

Override Tone Lock-out Tone Clock alarm tone

2 2 8

1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 13 0 2 2 3 4 6 5 2 2 3 4 6 5 2 2 3 4 6 5 1 1 2 2 3 2 1 1 2 2 3 2 1 1 2 2 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 32 (0 dB) 32 (0 dB) 39 (+ 3.5 dB) 39 (+ 3.5 dB) 39 (+ 3.5 dB) 39 (+ 3.5 dB) 39 (+ 3.5 dB) 39 (+ 3.5 dB) 39 (+ 3.5 dB) 39 (+ 3.5 dB) 32 (0 dB) 38 (+ 3 dB) 26 (- 3 dB) 38 (+ 3 dB) 26 (- 3 dB) 14 (- 9 dB) 32 (0 dB) 38 (+ 3 dB) 26 (- 3 dB) 38 (+ 3 dB) 26 (- 3 dB) 14 (- 9 dB) 32 (0 dB) 38 (+ 3 dB) 26 (- 3 dB) 38 (+ 3 dB 26 (- 3 dB) 14 (- 9 dB) 32 (0 dB) 38 (+ 3 dB) 26 (- 3 dB) 38 (+ 3 dB) 26 (- 3 dB) 14 (- 9 dB) 32 (0 dB) 38 (+ 3 dB) 26 (- 3 dB) 38 (+ 3 dB) 26 (- 3 dB) 14 (- 9 dB) 32 (0 dB) 38 (+ 3 dB) 26 (- 3 dB) 38 (+ 3 dB) 26 (- 3 dB) 14 (- 9 dB) 32 (0 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB)

Program

80

18 19

BGM Doorphone chime 1

0 3

0 6

20

Doorphone chime 2

21

Doorphone chime 3

22

Doorphone chime 4

23

Doorphone chime 5

24

Doorphone chime 6

25 26 27 28 29 30

Service Set Tone Service Clear Tone Talk-Back Tone Speaker Monitor Tone Door Relay Tone Doorphone Call Tone

1 1 2 1 1 1

2 2 2 2 2 2

2-408

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Service Tone No.

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

Service Tone Name

Repeat Count
2 1 2 3 1 0 0 0 0

Unit Count

Basic Tone No.

0 1 0 23 0 23 0 23 0 22 1 0 1 0 1 0 24 0 24 0 22 0 22 0 22 0 0 21 0 21 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 22 1 0 1 0 22 22 0

Duration

Gain Level (dB)

Paging Tone Splash Tone 1 Splash Tone 2 Splash Tone 3 1 Sec Signal Tone External audible ring tone External reorder tone External busy tone Special audible ring-busy tone

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 40 2 2 5 5 2 2 2 20 1 1 8 8 8 8 0 6 10 2 2 10 40 5 5 2 2 2 2 0 10 40 10 3 3 10 10 10 8 8

42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 32 (0 dB) 32 (0 dB) 32 (0 dB) 32 (0 dB) 32 (0 dB) 32 (0 dB) 32 (0 dB) 32 (0 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 35 (+ 1.5 dB) 35 (+ 1.5 dB) 35 (+ 1.5 dB) 35 (+ 1.5 dB) 32 (0 dB) 32 (0 dB) 32 (0 dB) 32 (0 dB) 32 (0 dB) 32 (0 dB) 32 (0 dB) 45 (- 3 dB) 45 (- 3 dB) 45 (- 3 dB) 45 (- 3 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 32 (0 dB) 42 (0 dB) 42 (0 dB) 32 (0 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 32 (0 dB) 32 (0 dB) 32 (0 dB)

Program

80

40

Internal Call Waiting Tone (Transfer, Call Waiting Tone) Intrusion tone Conference tone Intrusion tone 2 External Dial Tone (DUD, DISA Dial Tone)

41 42 43 44

1 1 0 0

2 2 0 4

45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 55 56

External Ring Back Tone (Ring Tone DDI) External Busy Tone (Busy Tone DDI) Number unobtainable tone VM message indication tone --Not Used -External special audible ring tone External intercept tone External call waiting tone External executive override tone Generate tone for TAPI2.1 Warning Beep Tone Signaling

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1

2 2 2 2 0 2 1 2 2 1 1

Programming Manual

2-409

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Service Tone No.

57

Service Tone Name

Repeat Count
0

Unit Count

Basic Tone No.

24 0 24 0 2 2 14 14 15 15 16 16 20 20 19 19 18 18 17 17 0 1 0 1 0 1 24 0 24 0 24 0

Duration

Gain Level (dB)

Headset Ear Piece Ringing Tone

2 2 2 20 2 2 2 2 2 2 6 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 6 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 40 2 2 2 20

35 (+ 1.5 dB) 35 (+ 1.5 dB) 35 (+ 1.5 dB) 35 (+ 1.5 dB) 32 (0 dB) 26 (- 3 dB) 32 (0 dB) 26 (- 3 dB) 32 (0 dB) 26 (- 3 dB) 32 (0 dB) 26 (- 3 dB) 32 (0 dB) 26 (- 3 dB) 32 (0 dB) 26 (- 3 dB) 32 (0 dB) 26 (- 3 dB) 32 (0 dB) 26 (- 3 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 42 (+ 5 dB) 35 (+ 1.5 dB) 35 (+ 1.5 dB) 35 (+ 1.5 dB) 35 (+ 1.5 dB) 35 (+ 1.5 dB) 35 (+ 1.5 dB)

58

Opening Chime tone

Program

80

59

Ending Chime tone

60 61 62 63 64

Splash tone 1 (Mute) Splash tone 2 (Mute) Splash tone 3 (Mute) EXT SPK Ring-back Tone Special Hold Tone

0 1 3 0 0

2 2 2 2 4

Conditions
The system must be reset for any changes to these items to take affect.

Feature Cross Reference

Selectable Ring Tones

2-410

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-02 : DTMF Tone Setup
Level

MF
Description
Use Program 80-02 : DTMF Tone Setup to define the duration (On time) and pause (Off time) for DTMF dialing. This option affects all trunk line calls system wide. Make separate entries for duration and pause. It is also possible to adjust the level of both high and low frequency tone. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01 02 03 04 Duration Pause Tone Level (Low) (dB) Tone Level (High)

80
Item
1 ~ 255 1 ~ 255 1 ~ 97 (- 45.0 ~ 0 = + 3) 1 ~ 97 (- 45.0 ~ 0 = + 3)

Input Data

Default
5 (100 ms) 5 (100 ms) 73 (- 9 dB) 77 (- 7 dB)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-411

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup to define the various levels and timers for the DTMF Tone Receiver. DTMF Tone Receiver Type : 1 = DTMF Receiver for Extension 2 = DTMF Receiver for Trunk 3 ~ 5 = Reserved

80

Input Data
DTMF Tone Receiver Type Number 1 = DTMF Receiver for Extension 2 = DTMF Receiver for Trunk 3 = --- Reserved --4 = --- Reserved --5 = --- Reserved ---

Item No
01 Detect Level

Item

Input Data
0 = 0 dBm ~ - 25 dBm 1 = - 5 dBm ~ - 30 dBm 2 = - 10 dBm ~ - 35 dBm 3 = - 15 dBm ~ - 40 dBm 4 = - 20 dBm ~ - 45 dBm 5 = - 25 dBm ~ - 50 dBm 6 = - 30 dBm ~ - 55 dBm 0 ~ 255 (0.25 ms ~ 64 ms) 0 ~ 15 DTMF Tone 0 = - 10 dBm (0) to - 25 dBm (15) DTMF Tone 1 = - 15 dBm (0) to - 30 dBm (15) DTMF Tone 2 = - 20 dBm (0) to - 35 dBm (15) DTMF Tone 3 = - 25 dBm (0) to - 40 dBm (15) DTMF Tone 4 = - 30 dBm (0) to - 45 dBm (15) DTMF Tone 5 = - 35 dBm (0) to - 50 dBm (15) DTMF Tone 6 = - 40 dBm (0) to - 55 dBm (15) 0 ~ 15 DTMF Tone 0 = 0 dBm (0) to - 15 dBm (15) DTMF Tone 1 = - 5 dBm (0) to - 20 dBm (15) DTMF Tone 2 = - 10 dBm (0) to - 25 dBm (15) DTMF Tone 3 = - 15 dBm (0) to - 30 dBm (15) DTMF Tone 4 = - 20 dBm (0) to - 35 dBm (15) DTMF Tone 5 = - 25 dBm (0) to - 40 dBm (15) DTMF Tone 6 = - 30 dBm (0) to - 45 dBm (15) 0 ~ 9 (1 dB ~ 10 dB)

02 03

Start Delay Time Min. Detect Level

04

Max. Detect Level

05

Forward Twist Level

2-412

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No
06 07 08 09 Backward Twist Level ON Detect Time OFF Detect Time Area Type

Item

Input Data
0 ~ 9 (1 dB ~ 10 dB) 1 ~ 255 (15 + 15 ms ~ 3825 ms) 1 ~ 255 (15 + 15 ms ~ 3825 ms) 0 = Other 1 = Aust

Default
Program
Item No
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09

Item
Detect Level Start delay time Min. detect level Max. detect level Forward twist level Backward twist level ON detect time OFF detect time Area Type

Type 1
0 0 10 (- 20 dBm) 2 (- 2 dBm) 5 (6 dBm) 0 (1 dBm) 1 (30 ms) 1 (30 ms) 0

Type 2
0 0 15 (- 25 dBm) 2 (- 2 dBm) 5 (6 dBm) 0 (1 dBm) 1 (30 ms) 1 (30 ms) 0

Type 3
0 0 10 (- 20 dBm) 2 (- 2 dBm) 5 (6 dBm) 0 (1 dBm) 1 (30 ms) 1 (30 ms) 0

Type 4
0 0 10 (- 20 dBm) 2 (- 2 dBm) 5 (6 dBm) 0 (1 dBm) 1 (30 ms) 1 (30 ms) 0

Type 5
0 0 10 (- 20 dBm) 2 (- 2 dBm) 5 (6 dBm) 0 (1 dBm) 1 (30 ms) 1 (30 ms) 0

80

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-413

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup to define the various levels and timers for the Call Progress Tone Detector. Tone Detector Type : 1 = Dial Tone for Trunk 2 = Busy Tone for Trunk 3 = Ring Back Tone for Trunk 4, 5 = Reserved

80

Input Data
Tone Detector Type Number 1 = Dial Tone for Trunk 2 = Busy Tone for Trunk 3 = Ring Back Tone for Trunk 4 = --- Reserved --5 = --- Reserved ---

Item No
01 Detection Level

Item

Input Data
0 = 0 dBm ~ - 25 dBm 1 = - 5 dBm ~ - 30 dBm 2 = - 10 dBm ~ - 35 dBm 3 = - 15 dBm ~ - 40 dBm 4 = - 20 dBm ~ - 45 dBm 5 = - 25 dBm ~ - 50 dBm 6 = - 30 dBm ~ - 55 dBm 0 ~ 15 0 = - 10 dBm (0) ~ - 25 dBm (15) 1 = - 15 dBm (0) ~ - 30 dBm (15) 2 = - 20 dBm (0) ~ - 35 dBm (15) 3 = - 25 dBm (0) ~ - 40 dBm (15) 4 = - 30 dBm (0) ~ - 45 dBm (15) 5 = - 35 dBm (0) ~ - 50 dBm (15) 6 = - 40 dBm (0) ~ - 55 dBm (15) 0 ~ 4 (0 dB ~ - 20 dB) 0 ~ 255 (30 + 30 ~ 7680 ms) (0 = not detect) 1 ~ 255 = 60 ~ 7680 ms The formula is 30 + 30N When set to N = 1, it means 30 + 30 1 = 60. When set to N = 255, it means 30 + 30 255 = 7680.

02

Min. Detection Level

03 04

S/N Ratio No Tone Time

05 06 07 08 09 12 13

Pulse Count ON Minimum Time ON Maximum Time OFF Minimum Time OFF Maximum Time Frequency No. 1 Frequency No. 2

1 ~ 255 1 ~ 255 (30 + 30 ~ 7680 ms) 0 ~ 255 (30 + 30 ~ 7680 ms) 1 ~ 255 (30 + 30 ~ 7680 ms) 0 ~ 255 (30 + 30 ~ 7680 ms) 1~8 (Frequency Table No. set by 80-07) 0 ~ 8 (0 = Not Used) (Frequency Table No. set by 80-07)

2-414

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No
14 Twist Level

Item

Input Data
0 ~ 10 (1 dB ~ 10 dB) (0 = Not Used)

Default
Item
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 13 14

Name
Detect Level Min. detect level S/N ratio No tone time Pulse Count ON min. time ON max. time OFF min. time OFF max. time Frequency No 1 Frequency No 2 Twist Level

Type 1 (DT)
0 (- 25 dBm) 15 (- 25 dBm) 4 (- 20 dB) 132 (3990 ms) 1 63 (1920 ms) 0 1 (60 ms) 1 (60 ms) 1 0 0

Type 2 (BT)
0 (- 25 dBm) 15 (- 25 dBm) 4 (- 20 dB) 132 (3990 ms) 1 12 (390 ms) 20 (630 ms) 12 (390 ms) 20 (630 ms) 1 0 0

Type 3 (RBT)
0 (- 25 dBm) 15 (- 25 dBm) 4 (- 20 dB) 132 (3990 ms) 1 25 (780 ms) 40 (1230ms) 52 (1590 ms) 80 (2430 ms) 1 0 0

Type 4
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

Type 5
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

Program

80

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-415

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-05 : Date Format for SMDR and System
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 80-05 : Date Format for SMDR and System to define the date format when printing out the SMDR, alarm report, and system information report.

80

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Date Format

Input Data
0 = American Format (Month / Day / Year) 1 = Japanese Format (Year / Month / Day) 2 = European Format (Day / Month / Year)

Default
2

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-416

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-06 : Reference Impedance Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 80-06: Reference Impedance Setup to define the change of Reference Impedance (600 or complex) in COIU PKG Program

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Reference Impedance Setup

Input Data
0 = 600 1 = Complex

Default
1

80

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-417

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-07 : Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 80-07 : Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup to set the frequency of the detection tone set with Program 80-04-12 and Program 80-04-13.

80

Input Data
Frequency Table Number 1~8

Frequency Table No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Input Data
0, 10 ~ 255 (100 ~ 2550 Hz) (0 = Not used)

Default
40 (400 Hz) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-418

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-08 : MFC Tone Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 80-08 : MFC Tone Setup to define the duration (On time) and pause (Off time) for MFC dialing. This option affects all trunk line calls system wide. And also it is possible to adjust the level of tone. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01 02 03 Duration (On time) Pause (Off time) Tone Level

80
Item Input Data
1 ~ 255 (20 ms ~ 5100 ms) 1 ~ 255 (20 ms ~ 5100 ms) 1 ~ 97 (- 45 dB ~ + 3 dB)

Default
5 (100 ms) 5 (100 ms) 77 (- 7 dB)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-419

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-11 : MFC Tone Receiver Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 80-11 : MFC Tone Receiver Setup to various data for the MFC signal detection. Program

Input Data

80
Item No.
01

MFC Tone Receiver Type Number

1 = MFC Receiver for Extension 2 = MFC Receiver for Trunk 3 = Reserved 4 = Reserved 5 = Reserved

Item
Detect Level 0 = 0 dBm ~ - 25 dBm 1 = - 5 dBm ~ - 30 dBm 2 = - 10 dBm ~ - 35 dBm 3 = - 15 dBm ~ - 40 dBm 4 = - 20 dBm ~ - 45 dBm 5 = - 25 dBm ~ - 50 dBm 6 = - 30 dBm ~ - 55 dBm

Input Data

02 03

Start delay time Min. detect level

0 ~ 255 (0.25 step, 0 ms ~ 64 ms) 0 ~ 15 detect level 0 = - 10 dBm (0) ~ - 25 dBm (15) detect level 1 = - 15 dBm (0) ~ - 30 dBm (15) detect level 2 = - 20 dBm (0) ~ - 35 dBm (15) detect level 3 = - 25 dBm (0) ~ - 40 dBm (15) detect level 4 = - 30 dBm (0) ~ - 45 dBm (15) detect level 5 = - 35 dBm (0) ~ - 50 dBm (15) detect level 6 = - 40 dBm (0) ~ - 55 dBm (15) 0 ~ 15 detect level 0 = 0 dBm (0) ~ - 15 dBm (15) detect level 1 = - 5 dBm (0) ~ - 20 dBm (15) detect level 2 = - 10 dBm (0) ~ - 25 dBm (15) detect level 3 = - 15 dBm (0) ~ - 30 dBm (15) detect level 4 = - 20 dBm (0) ~ - 35 dBm (15) detect level 5 = - 25 dBm (0) ~ - 40 dBm (15) detect level 6 = - 30 dBm (0) ~ - 45 dBm (15) 0 ~ 9 (1 dB ~ 10 dB) 0 ~ 4 (- 5 step, 0 dB ~ - 20 dB) 1 ~ 255 (15 step, 30 ms ~ 3840 ms) 1 ~ 255 (15 step, 30 ms ~ 3840 ms)

04

Max. detect level

05 06 07 08

Twist level S/N ratio ON detect time OFF detect time

Table 2-13 Default Table

Item
01 02 03 04 05 06

Name
Detect Level Start delay time Min. detect level Max. detect level Twist level S/N ratio

Type 1
0 0 15 (- 25 dBm) 0 (0 dBm) 9 (10 dBm) 2 (0 dBm)

Type 2
0 0 15 (- 25 dBm) 0 (0 dBm) 9 (10 dBm) 2 (0 dBm)

Type 3
0 0 15 (- 25 dBm) 0 (0 dBm) 9 (10 dBm) 2 (0 dBm)

Type 4
0 0 15 (- 25 dBm) 0 (0 dBm) 9 (10 dBm) 2 (0 dBm)

Type 5
0 0 15 (- 25 dBm) 0 (0 dBm) 9 (10 dBm) 2 (0 dBm)

2-420

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item
07 08

Name
ON detect time OFF detect time

Type 1
1 (30 ms) 1 (30 ms)

Type 2
1 (30 ms) 1 (30 ms)

Type 3
1 (30 ms) 1 (30 ms)

Type 4
1 (30 ms) 1 (30 ms)

Type 5
1 (30 ms) 1 (30 ms)

Conditions
None Program

Feature Cross Reference

None

80

Programming Manual

2-421

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-12 : Caller ID Receiver Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 80-12 : Caller ID Receiver Setup defines the type and level for Caller ID detection of DSP.

80

Input Data
Item No.
1 Type

Item
0 = NTT 1 = other 2 = Korea 0 ~ 32766

Input Data
1

Default

Level

80

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-422

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-01 : CO Initial Data Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 81-01 : CO Initial Data Setup to define the various basic data parameters for the COIU. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 14 15 16 17 20 21 22 23 27

Item

Input Data

Default
1 (A-law) 60 (600 ms) 59 (295 ms) 10 (100 ms) 66 (660 ms) 10 (100 ms) 40 (400 ms) 70 (700 ms) 50 (5000 ms) 30 (300 ms) 70 (700 ms) 80 (800 ms) 25 (2500 ms) 30 (3000 ms) 30 (3000 ms) 10 (100 ms) 86 (860 ms) 50 (500 ms) 70 (700 ms) 13 (65 ms)

Note

81

PCM Encoding Method Specifica- 0 = -law tion 1 = A-law Loop Current Detection Time Clear Signal (Open Loop) Detection Time Ringing Signal Detection Minimum Time Single Ringing Detection Minimum Time Double Ringing Detection Minimum Off Time Double Ringing Detection Maximum Off Time Ringing Signal not Detection Minimum Time Ringing Signal Stop Detection Time Continuous Ringing Minimum Time Continuous Ringing Maximum Time Hook Flash 1 Time Hook Flash 2 Time Pause Time PFT Idle Detection Time Loop Reverse Detect Minimum Time Loop Reverse Detect Maximum Time Loop Disconnect Detect Minimum Time Loop Disconnect Detect Maximum Time Dial Pulse Break Time (10pps) 1 ~ 255 (10 ~ 2550 ms) 1 ~ 255 (5 ~ 1275 ms) 1 ~ 255 (10 ~ 2550 ms) 0 ~ 255 (0, 10 ~ 2550 ms) 0 ~ 255 (0, 10 ~ 2550 ms) 0 ~ 255 (0, 10 ~ 2550 ms) 1 ~ 255 (10 ~ 2550 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms) 0 ~ 255 (0, 10 ~ 2550 ms) 0 ~ 255 (0, 10 ~ 2550 ms) 1 ~ 255 (10 ~ 2550 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (10 ~ 2550 ms) 1 ~ 255 (10 ~ 2550 ms) 1 ~ 255 (10 ~ 2550 ms) 1 ~ 255 (10 ~ 2550 ms) 1 ~ 255 (5 ~ 1275 ms)

Programming Manual

2-423

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item No.
28 29 36 37 38

Item
Dial Pulse Make Time (10pps) DP Inter-digit Time (10pps)

Input Data
1 ~ 255 (5 ~ 1275 ms) 1 ~ 255 (10 ~ 2550 ms)

Default
7 (35 ms) 61 (610 ms) 24 (2400 ms) 10 (1000 ms) 20 (2000 ms)

Note

Long Ringing Detection Minimum 1 ~ 255 Time (100 ~ 25500 ms) Loop Close Time for Double Answer Signal Loop Open Time for Double Answer Signal 1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms)

Program

81

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-424

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-04 : ISDN BRI Layer 1 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup
Level

MF
Description
Use Program 81-04 : ISDN BRI Layer 1 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup to define the various basic data for layer 1 of ISDN BRI. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01 02

Item
Wait time for Physical Activation (Timer 3) Detection time for Physical Deactivation

Input Data
1 ~ 255 (200 ~ 51000 ms) 1 ~ 255 (200 ~ 51000 ms)

Default
100 (20 sec) 5 (1 sec)

81

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-425

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup
Level

MF
Description
Program Use Program 81-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup to define the various basic data for layer 2 of ISDN BRI and PRI.

81

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Timer T200

Input Data
1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms)

Default
10 (1 sec)

Description
Specify the timer value in 1/100ths of a second at the end of which transmission of a frame may be initiated. Specify the minimum time in 1/100ths of a second between retransmissions of the TEI Identity check messages. Specify the minimum time in 1/100ths of a second between retransmissions of the TEI Identity check messages. Specify the maximum time in 1/100ths of a second allowed without exchanging frames. Specify the retransmission count. Specify the frame lengths in ocelots. Specify the maximum number of transmissions from a TEI identity request message when the user requests a TEI.

02

Timer T201

1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms)

10 (1 sec)

03

Timer T202

1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms)

20 (2 sec)

04

Timer T203

1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms)

250 (25 sec)

05 06 07

N200 N201 N202

1 ~ 255 1 ~ 65535 (Byte) 1 ~ 255

3 260 3

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-426

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 81-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup to define the various basic timers for layer 3 of ISDN BRI/PRI (defined in Program 10-03-04). Program

Input Data
Layer 3 Timer Type Number 1~5

81
Default
180 seconds 15 seconds

Item No.
01

Item
T301

Description
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second of the timer to be started when the ALERT message is received.

Input Data
0, 180 ~ 254 seconds

02

T302

Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a 1 ~ 254 seconds second of the timer to be started when the SETUP ACK is sent. Timer is also restarted when INFO is received. Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second of the timer to be started when SETUP is sent. Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second of the timer to be started when the SETUP ACK is received. Timer is also restarted when INFO is received. Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second of the timer to be started when DISC without progress No. 8 is sent. Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second of the timer to be started when DISC with progress indicator No. 8 is sent. This timer is valid for Network side use only. Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second of the timer to be started when SUSPEND ACK is sent. This timer is valid only for Network side use only. Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second of the timer to be started when REL is sent. Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second upon data link disconnection. Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second of the timer to be started when CALL PROC is sent. Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second of the timer to be started when SETUP is sent or re-sent on broadcast data link. This timer is only valid for Network side use only. Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second of the timer to be started when connection request is sent. Valid range 1 ~ 4 seconds in 1 second increments. Value of 0 indicates timer not used. 1 ~ 254 seconds

03

T303

4 seconds

04

T304

0 ~ 254 seconds

30 seconds

05

T305

1 ~ 254 seconds

30 seconds

06

T306

0 ~ 254 seconds

30 seconds

07

T307

1 ~ 254 seconds

180 seconds

08

T308

1 ~ 254 seconds

4 seconds

09 10

T309 T310

1 ~ 254 seconds 0 ~ 180 seconds

90 seconds 180 seconds

11

T312

1 ~ 254 seconds

6 seconds

12

T313

1 ~ 254 seconds

4 seconds

Programming Manual

2-427

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item No.
13

Item
T314

Description
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second of the timer to be started when message segment is received.

Input Data
1 ~ 254 seconds

Default
4 seconds

14

T316

Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a (T317 + 1) ~ 254 second of the timer to be started when RE- seconds START is sent. Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a 1 ~ (T316-1) second of the timer to be started when RESTART is received. Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second of the timer to be started when RES is sent. This timer is valid for user side use only. Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second of the timer to be started when SUSPEND is sent. This timer is valid for user side use only. Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second when B-channel access: connection is received, or D-channel access: DLESTABLISH confirmation or indication is received. Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second of the timer to be started when STATUS ENQ is received. Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second upon D-channel failure. 1 ~ 254 seconds

120 seconds

15

T317

60 seconds

Program

16

T318

4 seconds

81

17

T319

1 ~ 254 seconds

4 seconds

18

T320

1 ~ 254 seconds

30 seconds

19

T321

1 ~ 254 seconds

30 seconds

20

T322

1 ~ 254 seconds

4 seconds

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

ISDN Compatibility

2-428

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 81-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port to define the CODEC (QSLAC) Filter for each analog trunk port. Program

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

81

CODEC Filter Type

0 = Type 0 1 = Type 1 2 = Type 2 3 = Type 3 4 = Type 4 5 = Type 5 6 = Type 6 7 = Type 7 8 = Type 8 9 = Type 9 10 = Type 10 11 = Type 11 12 = Type 12 13 = Type 13 14 = Type 14 15 = Type 15

Default
2

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-429

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup to define the basic timer setting of each T1 Trunk type.

Input Data

81

Item
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

Name
Answer Signal Detection Time (Loop) Answer Signal Detection Time (Ground) Answer Signal Detection Time (DID) Answer Signal Detection Time (E&M) Answer Signal Detection Time (OPX) Clear Signal Detection Time (Loop) Clear Signal Detection Time (Ground) Clear Signal Detection Time (DID) Answer Signal Detection Time (E&M) Clear Signal Detection Time (OPX) Ringing Signal Detection Time (Loop) Ringing Signal Detection Time (Ground) Ringing Signal Detection Time (DID) Ringing Signal Detection Time (E&M) Ringing Signal Detection Time (OPX) Ringing Signal Stop Detection Time (Loop) Ringing Signal Stop Detection Time (Ground) Ringing Signal Stop Detection Time (DID) Ringing Signal Stop Detection Time (E&M) Ringing Signal Stop Detection Time (OPX) Loop Current Detection Time (Loop) Loop Current Detection Time (Ground) Loop Current Detection Time (DID) Loop Current Detection Time (E&M) Loop Current Detection Time (OPX) DP Break Send Time (ALL) DP Make Send Time (ALL) DP InterDigit Send Time (ALL) HookFlash Send Time (Loop) HookFlash Send Time (Ground) HookFlash Send Time (DID)

Input Data
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms) 1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms) 1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms) 1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms) 1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)

Default
15 (60 ms) 15 (60 ms) 15 (60 ms) 15 (60 ms) 15 (60 ms) 6 (600 ms) 6 (600 ms) 6 (600 ms) 6 (600 ms) 6 (600 ms) 10 (80 ms) 10 (80 ms) 10 (80 ms) 10 (80 ms) 10 (80 ms) 50 (5000 ms) 50 (5000 ms) 50 (5000 ms) 50 (5000 ms) 50 (5000 ms) 40 (160 ms) 40 (160 ms) 40 (160 ms) 40 (160 ms) 40 (160 ms) 15 (60 ms) 10 (40 ms) 7 (700 ms) 5 (500 ms) 5 (500 ms) 5 (500 ms)

2-430

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68

Name
HookFlash Send Time (E&M) HookFlash Send Time (OPX) Pause Send Time (ALL) Wink Send Duration Time (DID) Delay Send Duration Time (DID) Incoming-Wink Send Time (DID) Wink Send Duration Time (E&M) Delay Send Duration Time (E&M) Incoming-Wink Send Time (E&M) Seizure-WINK/DELAY Receive Max. Time (DID) Receive Wink Duration Min. Time (DID) Receive Wink Duration Max. Time (DID) Seizure-WINK/DELAY Receive Max. Time (E&M) Receive Wink Duration Min. Time (E&M) Receive Wink Duration Max. Time (E&M) Receive DP Make Min. Time (ALL) Receive DP Make Max. Time (ALL) Receive DP Break Min. Time (ALL) Receive DP Break Max. Time (ALL) Receive DP InterDigit Min. Time (ALL) Receive HookFlash Duration Min. Time (E&M) Receive HookFlash Duration Max. Time (E&M) Receive HookFlash Duration Min. Time (OPX) Receive HookFlash Duration Max. Time (OPX) Loop Off Guard Time (Loop) Loop Off Guard Time (Ground) Loop Off Guard Time (DID) Loop Off Guard Time (E&M) Loop Off Guard Time (OPX) Double Ringing Send Time 1 (OPX) Double Between Ringing Send Time 1 (OPX) Double Ringing Send Time 2 (OPX) Double Between Ringing Send Time 2 (OPX) Single Ringing Send Time (OPX) Single Between Ringing Send Time (OPX) Guard Time 1 (LOOP) Guard Time 1 (GROUND)

Input Data
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (1 sec ~ 255 sec ) 1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms) 1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms) 1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms) 1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms) 1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms) 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)

Default
5 (500 ms) 5 (500 ms) 3 (3 sec) 25 (200 ms) 25 (200 ms) 3 (300 ms) 25 (200 ms) 25 (200 ms) 3 (300 ms) 48 (4800 ms) 12 (96 ms) 45 (360 ms) 48 (4800 ms) 12 (96 ms) 45 (360 ms) 3 (12 ms) 19 (76 ms) 3 (12 ms) 25 (100 ms) 125 (500 ms) 3 (300 ms) 6 (600 ms) 3 (300 ms) 6 (600 ms) 20 (2000 ms) 20 (2000 ms) 20 (2000 ms) 20 (2000 ms) 20 (2000 ms) 5 (500 ms) 5 (500 ms) 25 (2500 ms) 30 (3000 ms) 10 (1000 ms) 9 (900 ms) 9 (900 ms) 9 (900 ms)

Program

81

Programming Manual

2-431

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item
69 70 71 72 73 74 75

Name
Guard Time 1 (DID) Guard Time 1 (E&M) Guard Time 1 (OPX) Guard Time 2 (ALL) Dial Sending Complete Time ON-HOOK bit Send Time Open Loop Time (LOOP) Open Loop Time (GROUND) Open Loop Time (DID) Open Loop Time (E&M) Open Loop Time (OPX) Close Loop Time (LOOP) Close Loop Time (DID) Ring GND Time (GROUND)

Input Data
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)

Default
9 (900 ms) 9 (900 ms) 9 (900 ms) 3 (12 ms) 20 (2000 ms) 40 (4000 ms) 6 (600 ms) 6 (600 ms) 6 (600 ms) 6 (600 ms) 6 (600 ms) 13 (52 ms) 13 (52 ms) 13 (52 ms)

Program

76 77 78 79 80 81 82

81

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-432

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-09 : COT CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Setting
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 81-09 : COT CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Setting to define the filter setting data (when Program 81-07 is set to 4). Program

Input Data
Item
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

Name
B1 Filter Setup (1) B1 Filter Setup (2) B1 Filter Setup (3) B1 Filter Setup (4) B1 Filter Setup (5) B1 Filter Setup (6) B1 Filter Setup (7) B1 Filter Setup (8) B1 Filter Setup (9) B1 Filter Setup (10) B1 Filter Setup (11) B1 Filter Setup (12) B1 Filter Setup (13) B1 Filter Setup (14) B2 Filter Setup (1) B2 Filter Setup (2) AISN and Analog Gains Z Filter Coefficients (1) Z Filter Coefficients (2) Z Filter Coefficients (3) Z Filter Coefficients (4) Z Filter Coefficients (5) Z Filter Coefficients (6) Z Filter Coefficients (7) Z Filter Coefficients (8) Z Filter Coefficients (9) Z Filter Coefficients (10) Z Filter Coefficients (11) Z Filter Coefficients (12) Z Filter Coefficients (13) Z Filter Coefficients (14)

Input Data
0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255

Default
43 102 228 58 75 189 58 194 45 194 219 45 178 208 178 208 17 250 173 50 165 59 70 106 175 163 79 179 83 84 31

81

Programming Manual

2-433

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item
32 33 34 35 36 37 38

Name
Z Filter Coefficients (15) R Filter Coefficients (1) R Filter Coefficients (2) R Filter Coefficients (3) R Filter Coefficients (4) R Filter Coefficients (5) R Filter Coefficients (6) R Filter Coefficients (7) R Filter Coefficients (8) R Filter Coefficients (9) R Filter Coefficients (10) R Filter Coefficients (11) R Filter Coefficients (12) R Filter Coefficients (13) R Filter Coefficients (14) X Filter Coefficients (1) X Filter Coefficients (2) X Filter Coefficients (3) X Filter Coefficients (4) X Filter Coefficients (5) X Filter Coefficients (6) X Filter Coefficients (7) X Filter Coefficients (8) X Filter Coefficients (9) X Filter Coefficients (10) X Filter Coefficients (11) X Filter Coefficients (12) GR Filter Coefficients (1) GR Filter Coefficients (2) GX Filter Coefficients (1) GX Filter Coefficients (2)

Input Data
0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255

Default
1 170 192 187 32 203 42 171 165 42 35 67 91 43 37 202 48 37 187 170 189 162 163 165 204 164 165 202 160 58 178

Program

39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62

81

Conditions
This is used if Program 81-07 is set to 4 (Specified data).

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-434

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-13 : E1 Trunk Timer Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 81-13 : E1 Trunk Timer Setup to define the basic timer setting of E1 Trunk. Program

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126

81
Default
3 (48 ms) 50 (800 ms) 50 (800 ms) 125 (500 sec) 47 (3008 ms) 15 (60 ms) 10 (40 ms) 50 (800 ms) 3 (12 ms) 19 (76 ms) 5 (20 ms) 26 (104 ms) 38 (304 ms) 32 (2048 ms) 25 (200 ms) 50 (400 ms) 24 (1536 ms) 47 (3008 ms) 25 (100 ms) 25 (100 ms) 75 (300 ms) 25 (100 ms) 25 (100 ms) 75 (300 ms) 25 (100 ms) 75 (300 ms) 32 (2048 ms)

Item
01 02 03 04 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

Name
Loop Current Detection Time (Loop) Clear Signal (Open Loop) Detection Time Transmit Clear Signal Time for Forced Release Receive DP Inter-digit min. Time Pause Time Pulse Dial Break Time Pulse Dial Make Time Pulse Dial Inter-digit Time Receive DP Make min Time Receive DP Make max Time Receive DP Break min Time Receive DP Break max Time Transmit Answer duration Time Transmit Double Answer duration Time Receive Answer min Time Receive Answer max Time Receive Double Answer min Time Receive Double Answer max Time

Input Data
1 ~ 255 (16 ms ~ 4080 ms) 1 ~ 255 (16 ms ~ 4080 ms) 1 ~ 255 (16 ms ~ 4080 ms) 1 ~ 255 (4 ms ~ 1020 ms) 1 ~ 255 (64 ms ~ 16320 ms) 1 ~ 255 (4 ms ~ 1020 ms) 1~255 (4ms ~ 1020ms) 1 ~ 255 (16 ms ~ 4080 ms) 1 ~ 255 (4 ms ~ 1020 ms) 1 ~ 255 (4 ms ~ 1020 ms) 1 ~ 255 (4 ms ~ 1020 ms) 1 ~ 255 (4 ms ~ 1020 ms) 1 ~ 255 (8 ms ~ 2040 ms) 1 ~ 255 (64 ms ~ 16320 ms) 1 ~ 255 (8 ms ~ 2040 ms) 1 ~ 255 (8 ms ~ 2040 ms) 1 ~ 255 (64 ms ~ 16320 ms) 1 ~ 255 (64 ms ~ 16320 ms)

Transmit Seizure Acknowledge duration 1 ~ 255 (4 ms ~ 1020 ms) Time Receive Seizure Acknowledge min Time 1 ~ 255 (4 ms ~ 1020 ms) Receive Seizure Acknowledge max Time Transmit Digit Acknowledge duration Time Receive Digit Acknowledge min Time Receive Digit Acknowledge max Time Receive Meter Pulse min Time Receive Meter Pulse max Time Receive Line Block min Time 1 ~ 255 (4 ms ~ 1020 ms) 1 ~ 255 (4 ms ~ 1020 ms) 1 ~ 255 (4 ms ~ 1020 ms) 1 ~ 255 (4 ms ~ 1020 ms) 1 ~ 255 (4 ms ~ 1020 ms) 1 ~ 255 (4 ms ~ 1020 ms) 1 ~ 255 (64 ms ~ 16320 ms)

Programming Manual

2-435

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item
39 40 41 42 43 44 45

Name
Receive Line Block recover min Time Transmit Remove Ring Time Transmit Clear Signal Send Time Transmit Seizure Signal Time Group A Response Time Group A Tone Complete Time Group B Response Time Group B Tone Complete Time Group C Response Time Group C Tone Complete Time Group I Signal Time Group I Tone Complete Time Group II Signal Time

Input Data
1 ~ 255 (64 ms ~ 16320 ms) 0 ~ 255 (0 ms ~ 1020 ms) 1 ~ 255 (16 ms ~ 4080 ms) 1 ~ 255 (8 ms ~ 2040 ms) 1 ~ 32 (1 sec ~ 32 sec) 1 ~ 32 (1 sec ~ 32 sec) 1 ~ 32 (1 sec ~ 32 sec) 1 ~ 32 (1 sec ~ 32 sec) 1 ~ 32 (1 sec ~ 32 sec) 1 ~ 32 (1 sec ~ 32 sec) 1 ~ 32 (1 sec ~ 32 sec) 1 ~ 32 (1 sec ~ 32 sec) 1 ~ 32 (1 sec ~ 32 sec)

Default
32 (2048 ms) 0 (0 ms) 63 (1008 ms) 100 (800 ms) 12 (12 sec) 12 (12 sec) 12 (12 sec) 12 (12 sec) 12 (12 sec) 12 (12 sec) 12 (12 sec) 12 (12 sec) 12 (12 sec)

Program

46 47 48 49 50 51

81

Conditions
After set from Program 81-13-01 to 42, the E1 unit will be reset.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-436

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone to set the incoming ring tones, which are the tones a user hears when a call rings an extension. These tones are grouped into four ring tone Ranges (1 ~ 4), also called patterns, that consist of a combination of frequencies. (You assign a specific Range to trunks in Program 22-03 and to extensions in Program 15-02.) Within each range there are three frequency Types : High, Middle and Low. (Service Code 820 allows users to choose the Type for their incoming calls.) Each Type in turn consists of two frequencies and the modulation played simultaneously to make up the tone. These frequencies are determined by their Frequency Number selected in Items 1 and 2 (see below). In this program, you assign the two Frequency Numbers and Modulation for each Type, for each of the four Ranges. The chart below shows the default Frequency Numbers for each Type in each Range.

82

Input Data
Incoming Ringing Tone Number 1 = Pattern 1 (Trunk Incoming) 2 = Pattern 2 (Trunk Incoming) 3 = Pattern 3 (Trunk Incoming) 4 = Pattern 4 (Trunk Incoming) 5 = Intercom Incoming Pattern 6 = Alarm Sensor Tone Pattern

Ringing Tone Type Number

1 = High 2 = Mid 3 = Low

Item No.
01

Item
Frequency 1

Input Data
1 = 520 Hz 2 = 540 Hz 3 = 660 Hz 4 = 760 Hz 5 = 1100 Hz 6 = 1400 Hz 7 = 2000 Hz 0 = No Modulation 1 = 8 Hz Modulation 2 = 16 Hz Modulation 3 = Envelope

02

Frequency 2

03

Modulation

Default
Incoming Ringing Tone Number
Pattern 1 (Trunk Incoming) Pattern 2 (Trunk Incoming) Pattern 3 (Trunk Incoming)

Tone Type
High Mid Low High Mid Low High Mid Low

Frequency 1 (Hz)
1100 Hz 660 Hz 520 Hz 1100 Hz 660 Hz 520 Hz 2000 Hz 1400 Hz 1100 Hz

Frequency 2 (Hz)
1400 Hz 760 Hz 660 Hz 1400 Hz 760 Hz 660 Hz 760 Hz 660 Hz 540 Hz

Modulation
16 Hz Modulation 16 Hz Modulation 16 Hz Modulation 8 Hz Modulation 8 Hz Modulation 8 Hz Modulation 16 Hz Modulation 16 Hz Modulation 16 Hz Modulation

Programming Manual

2-437

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Incoming Ringing Tone Number

Pattern 4 (Trunk Incoming) Pattern 5 (Intercom Incoming Pattern) Pattern 6 (Alarm Sensor Pattern)

Tone Type
High Mid Low High Mid Low High Mid Low

Frequency 1 (Hz)
2000 Hz 1400 Hz 1100 Hz 1100 Hz 660 Hz 520 Hz 760 Hz 760 Hz 760 Hz

Frequency 2 (Hz)
760 Hz 660 Hz 540 Hz 1400 Hz 760 Hz 660 Hz 760 Hz 760 Hz 760 Hz

Modulation
8 Hz Modulation 8 Hz Modulation 8 Hz Modulation 8 Hz Modulation 8 Hz Modulation 8 Hz Modulation No Modulation No Modulation No Modulation

Program

82

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns Selectable Ring Tones

2-438

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

82-02 : Key Telephone LED Pattern Setup
Level

MF
Description
Use Program 82-02 : Key Telephone LED Pattern Setup to setup the LED flashing pattern.

Program

Input Data
Item No.
01

82

Item
LED01 Incoming Extension/Trunk Call, Voice Call, Callback, Camp On, Callback Follow-me (Setup Terminal), Monitor (Terminal been Setup), Call Forward (Terminal been Setup), Message Waiting (Terminal been setup) LED02 Other Terminal that been Hold, Normal Hold, Follow-me (Terminal been Setup), Transfer (Setup Terminal) LED03 Own Hold, Message Waiting (Terminal that has been Transferred) LED04 CO Line Key, CO Callback key LED05 Own used CO Line Key 0~7

Input Data

Default
0

02

0~7

03

0~7

04 05

0~7 0~7

0 7

Programming Manual

2-439

SL1000
0 200 1 0 400 1 600 0 800 1 1000 0 1200 1 1400 0 1600 1 1800 0

ISSUE 1.0
2000 ms

pattern #0

000

pattern #1

001

pattern #2
Program

010

pattern #3

011

82

pattern #4

100

pattern #5

101

pattern #6

110

pattern #7

111

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-440

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

82-04 : ASTU Initial Data Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 82-04 : ASTU Initial Data Setup to set the basic data of the SLT.

Input Data
Item No.
01 02

Item
Companding Method Type Ringing Frequency

Input Data
0 = -law 1 = A-law 0 = 25 Hz 1 = 20 Hz 2 = 16 Hz 1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms) 1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms) 1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms) 1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms) 1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms) 1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms) 1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms) 1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms) 1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms) 1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms) 1 ~ 255 (10 ms ~ 2550 ms) 1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms)

Default
1 0 (25 Hz)

82

03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14

Minimum Break Time Maximum Break Time Minimum Make Time Maximum Make Time Minimum Hook Flash Time Maximum Hook Flash Time Minimum Ground Flash Time Minimum Off-Hook Time No Detection Time after Off-Hook No Detection Time after Pulse Dial Detection Loop Disconnect Time, Reversal Time Ring, Message Wait Period Time

2 (10 ms) 20 (100 ms) 2 (10 ms) 20 (100 ms) 108 (540 msec) 132 (660 msec) 21 (105 ms) 21 (105 ms) 60 (300 ms) 70 (350 ms) 60 (600 ms) 150 (750 ms)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-441

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

82-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer2 (S-Point) Initial Data Setup
Level

MF
Description
Program

82

Use Program 82-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer2 (S-Point) Initial Data Setup to set the basic data for the Layer 2 of ISDN BRI/PRI S-Point.

Input Data
Item No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 Timer T200 Timer T201 Timer T202 Timer T203 N200 N201 N202

Item Name

Input Data
1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms) 1 ~ 255 1 ~ 65535 (Byte) 1 ~ 255

Default
10 (1 sec) 10 (1 sec) 20 (2 sec) 100 (10 sec) 3 260 3

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-442

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

82-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer3 (S-point) Timer Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 82-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer3 (S-Point) Timer Setup to set the basic timer for the layer 3 of ISDN BRI & PRI S-Point.

Input Data
layer3 Timer Type No. 1~5

82

Item No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Item
T301 T302 T303 T304 T305 T306 T307 T308 T309 T310 T312 T313 T314 T316 T317 T318 T319 T320 T321 T322

Input Data
0, 180 ~ 254 (sec) 1 ~ 254 (sec) 1 ~ 254 (sec) 0 ~ 254 (sec) 1 ~ 254 (sec) 0 ~ 254 (sec) 1 ~ 254 (sec) 1 ~ 254 (sec) 1 ~ 254 (sec) 0 ~ 180 (sec) 1 ~ 254 (sec) 1 ~ 254 (sec) 1 ~ 254 (sec) (T317 + 1) ~ 254 (sec) 1 ~ (T316 - 1) (sec) 1 ~ 254 (sec) 1 ~ 254 (sec) 1 ~ 254 (sec) 1 ~ 254 (sec) 1 ~ 254 (sec)

Default
180 (sec) 10 (sec) 4 (sec) 20 (sec) 30 (sec) 30 (sec) 180 (sec) 4 (sec) 90 (sec) 30 (sec) 6 (sec) 4 (sec) 4 (sec) 120 (sec) 60 (sec) 4 (sec) 4 (sec) 30 (sec) 30 (sec) 4 (sec)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-443

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

82-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Station Port
Level

IN
Description
Program

82

Use Program 82-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Station Port to set the filter value of the CODEC (QSLAC) filter of each analog port.

Input Data
Station Port Number 001 ~ 128

CODEC Filter Type

0 = Type 0 1 = Type 1 2 = Type 2 3 = Type 3 4 = Type 4 5 = Type 5 6 = Type 6 7 = Type 7 8 = Type 8 9 = Type 9 10 = Type 10 11 = Type 11 12 = Type 12 13 = Type 13 14 = Type 14 15 = Type 15

Default

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Station Selection (DSS)

2-444

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

82-09 : SLIU CODEC Filter Data Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 82-09 : SLIU CODEC Filter Data Setup to define the filter setting data (when Program 82-07 is set to 4).

Input Data
Item
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

82

Name
B1 Filter Setup (1) B1 Filter Setup (2) B1 Filter Setup (3) B1 Filter Setup (4) B1 Filter Setup (5) B1 Filter Setup (6) B1 Filter Setup (7) B1 Filter Setup (8) B1 Filter Setup (9) B1 Filter Setup (10) B1 Filter Setup (11) B1 Filter Setup (12) B1 Filter Setup (13) B1 Filter Setup (14) B2 Filter Setup (1) B2 Filter Setup (2) AISN and Analog Gains Z Filter Coefficients (1) Z Filter Coefficients (2) Z Filter Coefficients (3) Z Filter Coefficients (4) Z Filter Coefficients (5) Z Filter Coefficients (6) Z Filter Coefficients (7) Z Filter Coefficients (8) Z Filter Coefficients (9) Z Filter Coefficients (10) Z Filter Coefficients (11) Z Filter Coefficients (12) Z Filter Coefficients (13)

Input Data
0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255

Default
105 122 166 42 227 46 169 242 151 41 122 135 168 112 45 1 14 178 162 53 83 42 171 194 43 106 163 43 169 166

Programming Manual

2-445

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item
31 32 33 34 35 36 37

Name
Z Filter Coefficients (14) Z Filter Coefficients (15) R Filter Coefficients (1) R Filter Coefficients (2) R Filter Coefficients (3) R Filter Coefficients (4) R Filter Coefficients (5) R Filter Coefficients (6) R Filter Coefficients (7) R Filter Coefficients (8) R Filter Coefficients (9) R Filter Coefficients (10) R Filter Coefficients (11) R Filter Coefficients (12) R Filter Coefficients (13) R Filter Coefficients (14) X Filter Coefficients (1) X Filter Coefficients (2) X Filter Coefficients (3) X Filter Coefficients (4) X Filter Coefficients (5) X Filter Coefficients (6) X Filter Coefficients (7) X Filter Coefficients (8) X Filter Coefficients (9) X Filter Coefficients (10) X Filter Coefficients (11) X Filter Coefficients (12) GR Filter Coefficients (1) GR Filter Coefficients (2) GX Filter Coefficients (1) GX Filter Coefficients (2)

Input Data
0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255

Default
159 1 220 1 58 32 35 202 195 174 74 51 170 171 74 197 1 17 1 144 1 144 1 144 1 144 1 144 1 17 35 32

Program

38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62

82

Conditions
This is used if Program 82-07 is set to 4 (Specified data).

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-446

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

82-13 : Volume Level Data Setup for TXD TEL2 [LKTS]
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 82-13 : Volume level Data Setup for TXD TEL2 to defines each Volume type in the speaker, and the group listening for TXD TEL2. Volume type means small volume, middle volume (1), middle volume (2), large volume.

82

Input Data
Volume Table Number 1~4

Item No.
02 Speaker

Item

Input Data
1 ~ 99 (%)

Default
Volume Table No. 1 = 18 Volume Table No. 2 = 22 Volume Table No. 3 = 24 Volume Table No. 4 = 34 Volume Table No. 1 = 18 Volume Table No. 2 = 22 Volume Table No. 3 = 28 Volume Table No. 4 = 34

03

Group Listening

1 ~ 99 (%)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-447

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

82-14 : Handset/Headset Gain Setup for Multi Line Telephone
Level

IN
Program

Description
Use Program 82-14: Handset/Headset Gain Setup for Multi Line Telephone to define the Handset/ Headset Gain Level for Multi Line Telephone.

82

Input Data
Extension Number Up to four digits

Item No.
01

Item
Handset/Headset Transmit Gain level

Input Data
0 = Fixed (6 = + 6.5 dB) 1 ~ 32 = LR value : - 3.5 ~ + 58.5 dB

Default
0

02

Handset/Headset Receive Gain level 0 = Fixed (15 = + 4.0 dB) 1 ~ 32 = LR value : - 24 ~ + 38.0 dB

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-448

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

82-18 : KST CODEC Filter Data Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 82-18 : KST CODEC Filter Data Setup to defines the CODEC (QSLAC) Filter for each KST station port.

Input Data
Station Port Number 001 ~ 128

82

Item No.
01

Item
CODEC Filter Type The CODEC filter operates according to a set value of <Program 82-19> when CODEC filter type 4 is set in this setting.

Input Data
0 = Type 0 1 = Type 1 2 = Type 2 3 = Type 3 4 = Type 4 5 = Type 5 6 = Type 6 7 = Type 7 8 = Type 8 9 = Type 9 10 = Type 10 11 = Type 11 12 = Type 12 13 = Type 13 14 = Type 14 15 = Type 15

Default
1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-449

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

82-19 : KST CODEC Filter Data Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program

82

Use Program 82-19 : KST CODEC Filter Data Setup to defines the KST CODEC (QSLAC) Filter data.

Input Data
Item No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29

Item
B1 Filter Setup (1) This setting is applied when CODEC filter type 4 is set in <Program 82-18>.

Input Data
0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255

Default
105 122 166 42 227 46 169 242 151 41 122 135 168 112 45 1 14 178 162 53 83 42 171 194 43 106 163 43 169

B1 Filter Setup (2) B1 Filter Setup (3) B1 Filter Setup (4) B1 Filter Setup (5) B1 Filter Setup (6) B1 Filter Setup (7) B1 Filter Setup (8) B1 Filter Setup (9) B1 Filter Setup (10) B1 Filter Setup (11) B1 Filter Setup (12) B1 Filter Setup (13) B1 Filter Setup (14) B2 Filter Setup (1) B2 Filter Setup (2) AISN and Analog Gains Z Filter Coefficients (1) Z Filter Coefficients (2) Z Filter Coefficients (3) Z Filter Coefficients (4) Z Filter Coefficients (5) Z Filter Coefficients (6) Z Filter Coefficients (7) Z Filter Coefficients (8) Z Filter Coefficients (9) Z Filter Coefficients (10) Z Filter Coefficients (11) Z Filter Coefficients (12)

2-450

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62

Item
Z Filter Coefficients (13) Z Filter Coefficients (14) Z Filter Coefficients (15) R Filter Coefficients (1) R Filter Coefficients (2) R Filter Coefficients (3) R Filter Coefficients (4) R Filter Coefficients (5) R Filter Coefficients (6) R Filter Coefficients (7) R Filter Coefficients (8) R Filter Coefficients (9) R Filter Coefficients (10) R Filter Coefficients (11) R Filter Coefficients (12) R Filter Coefficients (13) R Filter Coefficients (14) X Filter Coefficients (1) X Filter Coefficients (2) X Filter Coefficients (3) X Filter Coefficients (4) X Filter Coefficients (5) X Filter Coefficients (6) X Filter Coefficients (7) X Filter Coefficients (8) X Filter Coefficients (9) X Filter Coefficients (10) X Filter Coefficients (11) X Filter Coefficients (12) GR Filter Coefficients (1) GR Filter Coefficients (2) GX Filter Coefficients (1) GX Filter Coefficients (2) 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255

Input Data

Default
166 159 1 220 1 58 32 35 202 195 174 74 51 170 171 74 197 1 17 1 144 1 144 1 144 1 144 1 144 1 17 35 32

Program

82

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-451

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

82-20 : Volume level Data Setup for KST
Level

IN
Description
Program

82

Use Program 82-20 : Volume level Data Setup for KST to defines each Volume type of the speaker, and the group listening for KST. Volume type means small volume, middle volume (1), middle volume (2), large volume.

Input Data
Volume Table Number 1~4

Item No.
02 Speaker

Item

Input Data
1 ~ 99 (%)

Default
Volume Table No. 1 = 18 Volume Table No. 2 = 22 Volume Table No. 3 = 24 Volume Table No. 4 = 34 Volume Table No. 1 = 18 Volume Table No. 2 = 22 Volume Table No. 3 = 28 Volume Table No. 4 = 34

03

Group Listening

1 ~ 99 (%)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-452

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

82-21 : Sensor Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 82-21 : Sensor Setup to setup the Sensor for SL1000 .

Input Data
Sensor Number 1~8

82
Default
0 24 (120 ms) 24 (120 ms)

Item No.
01 02 03 Sensor Type Set sensor type.

Name
0 = Close Detect 1 = Open Detect

Input Data

Sensor Alarm Detect Minimum Level Set minimum level for Alarm detection. Sensor Idle Detect Minimum Level Set minimum level for Idle detection.

1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms) 1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-453

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-01 : H.323 Trunk Basic Information Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 84-01 : H.323 Trunk Basic Information Setup to set the basic information of the H.323 Trunk.

84

Input Data
Item No.
02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 11 15

Item
Number of G.711 audio frames G.711 VAD mode G.711 Type Number of G.729 audio frames G.729 VAD mode G.729 Jitter Buffer( min) G.729 Jitter Buffer (average) G.729 Jitter Buffer (max) Number of G.723 audio frames Jitter Buffer Mode 1~4 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 = A-law 1 = -law 1~6 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 ~ 300 ms 0 ~ 300 ms 0 ~ 300 ms 1~2 1 = Fixed 2 = Not used 3 = Self adjusting 0 ~ 255 ms 0 ~ 255 ms 0 ~ 255 ms 0 ~ 300 ms 0 ~ 300 ms 0 ~ 300 ms

Input Data

Default
3 0 0 3 0 30 60 120 1 3

16 17 18 19 20 21 22

G.711 Jitter Buffer( min) G.711 Jitter Buffer (average) G.711 Jitter Buffer (max) G.723 Jitter Buffer( min) G.723 Jitter Buffer (average) G.723 Jitter Buffer (max) VAD Threshold

30 60 120 30 60 120 20

1 ~ 30 (- 19 dB ~ + 10 dB and self adjustment) 1 = - 19 dB (- 49 dBm) : 20 = 0 dB (- 30 dBm) : 29 = 9 dB (- 21 dBm) 30 = 10 dB (- 20 dBm) 0~3 0 = G711_PT 1 = G723_PT 2 = G729_PT 3 = G722_PT 0 = Not used 1 = V.27ter, 4800 bps 2 = Not used 3 = V.29, 9600 bps 4 = Not used 5 = V.17, 14400 bps 10 ~ 32000 seconds

33

Priority CODEC setting Priority of voice encoding method.

36

The Maximum FAX Transmission Rate

41

FAX Communication no Communication Time-Out

30

2-454

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
44 45 46

Item
Low-speed Signal Data (FAX Proce- 0 ~ 2 dure Signal) High-speed Signal Data (FAX Procedure Signal) TCF Operation Setting 0~2

Input Data

Default
0 0 1

1 = Training signal (TCF) of the fax is locally generated and checked. 2 = Training signal (TCF) of the fax is sent over the network. 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 2 = Each port mode 0~5

59

FAX Relay Function

Program
0 0

61 62

Auto Gain Control

DTMF Relay Mode 0 = VoIPDB Set up information of VoIPDB is set by 1 = RFC2833 Program 84-06-10. 2 = H.245 3 = Disable Number of G.722 audio frames 1~4 1 = 10 ms 2 = 20 ms 3 = 30 ms 4 = 40 ms 0 ~ 255 ms 0 ~ 255 ms 0 ~ 255 ms 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 = Use the Default of VoIPDB Unit 1 = Use the Main System 1 = - 33 dBm : 28 = - 6 dBm 1 = - 33 dBm : 28 = - 6 dBm

84

63

65 66 67 68 69 70

G.722 Jitter Buffer (min) G.722 Jitter Buffer (average) G.722 Jitter Buffer (max) RTP Filter DTMF Level mode DTMF Level High

30 60 120 1 0 28

71

DTMF Level Low

28

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-455

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-02 : H.225 and H.245 Information Basic Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 84-02 : H.225 and H.245 Information Basic Setup to define the basic setup information of H.225 and H.245.

84

Input Data
Item No.
01 02 03 04 05 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

Item
H.225 Alerting Time H.225 Setup Acknowledge Timer H.225 Setup Timer H.225 Info Ack Timer H.225 Call Proceeding Timer H.245 Master Slave Determination Timer H.245 Master Slave Determination Retry Count H.245 Capability Exchange Timer H.245 Logical Channel Establishment Timer H.245 Mode Request Procedures Timer H.245 Close Logical Channel Timer H.245 Round Trip Delay Timer H.245 Maintenance Loop RAS GRQ Timer GRQ Retry Count RAS RRQ Timer RRQ Retry Count RAS URQ Timer URQ Retry Count RAS ARQ Timer ARQ Retry Count RAS BRQ Timer BRQ Retry Count RAS IRR Timer IRR Retry Count RAS DRQ Timer DRQ Retry Count RAS LRQ Timer LRQ Retry Count RAS RAI Timer

Input Data
0 ~ 255 seconds 0 ~ 255 seconds 0 ~ 255 seconds 0 ~ 255 seconds 0 ~ 255 seconds 0 ~ 255 seconds 0 ~ 255 seconds 0 ~ 255 seconds 0 ~ 255 seconds 0 ~ 255 seconds 0 ~ 255 seconds 0 ~ 255 seconds 0 ~ 255 seconds 0 ~ 255 seconds 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 seconds 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 seconds 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 seconds 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 seconds 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 seconds 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 seconds 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 seconds 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255 seconds

Default
180 9 4 9 10 5 3 5 50 50 50 50 50 5 2 5 3 3 1 5 2 5 2 5 2 8 2 5 2 3

2-456

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
32 33 35 36 37 RAI Retry Count

Item
0 ~ 255

Input Data

Default
2 1730 1 20001 60

Call Signaling Port Number Fast Start Mode RAS Unicast Port Number Terminal Type setting

0 ~ 65535 : 0 ~ 1719, 1721 ~ 65535 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 ~ 65535 0 ~ 255

Program

Conditions
None

84

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-457

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-07 : Firmware Download Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 84-07 : Firmware Download Setup to configure the settings related to Central Firmware Download for IP Phones.

84

Input Data
Item No.
01 02 Server Mode File Server IP Address

Item
0 = TFTP 1 = FTP

Input Data

Default
0 0.0.0.0

0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.254.254 Up to 20 Characters Up to 20 Characters

03 04

Login Name Enable only 84-07-01 is 1 Password Enable only 84-07-01 is 1

None None

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-458

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-09 : VLAN Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 84-09 : VLAN Setup to set up the VLAN data. I/F No.2 The packets send from LAN I/F on VoIPDB is set the VLAN tag. Program

Input Data
Interface Number 1~2

84
Default
0 0 0

Item No.
01 02 03 VLAN VLAN ID Priority

Item

Input Data
0 = Disable (Off) 1 = Enable (On) 0 ~ 4094 0~7

Conditions
System programming must be exited before these program options take affect.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-459

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-10 : ToS Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 84-10 : ToS Setup to set up the Type of Service data.

Input Data

84
Item No.
01 ToS Mode

Protocol Type

1 ~ 3 = Not used 4 = H.323 5 = RTP/RTCP 6 = SIP 7 = Not used 8 = SIP-MLT 9 = SIP Trunk 10 = Not used

Item

Input Data
0 = Disable (Invalid) 1 = IP Precedence 2 = Diffserv 0~7 0 = Low 7 = High 0~1 0 = Normal Delay, Low Delay 0~1 0 = Normal Throughput 1 = High Throughput 0~1 0 = Normal Reliability 1 = Low Reliability 0 ~ 63

Default

Description
When Input Data is set to 1, Item No. 07 is invalid. When Data is set to 2, Item No. 02 ~ 06 are invalid. 1 = Router queuing priority

02

Priority, IP Precedence

03

Low Delay

1 = Optimize for low delay routing 1 = Optimize for high bandwidth routing

04

Wideband (Throughout)

05

High Reliability Priority (D.S.C.P. - Differentiated Services Code Point)

1 = Optimize for reliability routing

07

DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point)

Conditions
The system must be reset for these program options to take affect.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-460

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-13 : SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 84-13 : SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup to set up the basic CODEC options for SIP trunks. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01

84
Item
Number of G.711 Audio Frame Maximum number of G711 Audio Frames. When the voice is encoded using the PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) method, a unit is a frame of 10ms. G.711 Silence Detection (VAD) Mode Select whether to compress silence with G.711. When there is silence, the RTP packet is not sent. G.711 Type Set the type of G.711. G.711 Jitter Buffer - Minimum Set the minimum value of the G.711 Jitter Buffer. G.711 Jitter Buffer - Standard Set the average value of the G.711 Jitter Buffer. G.711 Jitter Buffer - Maximum Set the maximum value of the G.711 Jitter Buffer. G.729 Audio Frame Maximum number of G729 Audio Frames. G.729 assumes the audio signal made by a specimen by 8 kHz and the frame of 10 ms is assumed to be a unit to 8 kbps by the encoding compressed method. G.729 Silence Compression (VAD) Mode Select whether to compress silence with G.729. When there is silence, the RTP packet is not sent. G.729 Jitter Buffer - Minimum Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer of G.729 is set. Jitter is the variation in the time between packets arriving and the buffer allows this variation to be absorbed. G.729 Jitter Buffer - Standard Set the average G.729 Jitter Buffer. G.729 Jitter Buffer - Maximum Set the maximum G.729 Jitter Buffer. Number of G.723 Audio Frame Maximum number of the G.723 Audio Frame. G.723 Jitter Buffer - Minimum Set the minimum value of the G.723 Jitter Buffer. G.723 Jitter Buffer - Standard Set the average value of the G.723 Jitter Buffer. G.723 Jitter Buffer - Maximum Set the maximum value of the G.723 Jitter Buffer. 1 = 10 ms 2 = 20 ms 3 = 30 ms 4 = 40 ms 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 = A-law 1 = -law 0 ~ 255 ms 0 ~ 255 ms 0 ~ 255 ms 1~6 (1 = 10 ms, 2 = 20 ms, etc.)

Input Data

Default
2

02

03 04 05 06 07

0 20 40 80 2

08

0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 ~ 300 ms

09

20

10 11 12 14 15 16

0 ~ 300 ms 0 ~ 300 ms 1 = 30 msec 2 = 60 msec 0 ~ 300 ms 0 ~ 300 ms 0 ~ 300 ms

40 80 1 30 60 120

Programming Manual

2-461

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item No.
17

Item
Jitter Buffer Mode Set the mode of the Jitter Buffer. 1 = Size set to the fixed amount for the codec. 2 = The minimum/maximum range for the codec is used. 3 = The minimum/maximum range for the codec is used and adjusts at any time, regardless of silence. Silence Compression (VAD) Threshold Set the voice level judged to be silence.Change value based .30This entry is ignored if silence compression is disabled in 84-01-03 with G.711 or 8401-06 with G.729.

Input Data
1 = static 2 = Not used 3 = adaptive immediately

Default
3

18

Program

84

1 ~ 30 (self-adjustment and - 19 dB ~ + 10dB) 1 = - 19 dB (- 49 dBm) : 20 = 0dB (- 30 dBm) : 29 = 9 dBm (- 21 dBm) 30 = 10dBm (- 20 dBm) 0 = G.711 PT 1 = G.723 PT 2 = G.729 PT 3 = G.722 PT 4 = G.726 PT 5 = iLBC PT 0~5 96 ~ 127 0 = Disable 1 = RFC2833 1 = 10 ms 2 = 20 ms 3 = 30 ms 4 = 40 ms

20

28

Priority Codec Setting The option selected here determines what other codec options are applied by priority.

30 31 32 33

EchoAuto Gain Control Define the Auto Gain Control. DTMF Payload Number Define the DTMF Payload Number. DTMF Relay Mode Determine the DTMF setup. G.722 Audio Frame Maximum number of G.722 Audio Frames. G.722 assumes the audio signal made by a specimen by 16 kHz and the frame of 10 ms is assumed to be a unit to 64 kbps by the encoding compressed method. G.722 Jitter Buffer - Minimum Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer of G.722 is set. Jitter is the variation in the time between packets arriving and the buffer allows this variation to be absorbed. G.722 Jitter Buffer - Standard Set the average G.722 Jitter Buffer. G.722 Jitter Buffer - Maximum Set the maximum G.722 Jitter Buffer. G.726 Audio Frame Maximum number of G.726 Audio Frames. G.726 assumes the audio signal made by a specimen by 16 kHz and the frame of 10 ms is assumed to be a unit to 32 kbps by the encoding compressed method. G.726 Silence Compression Mode Select whether to compress silence with G.726. When there is silence, the RTP packet is not sent. G.726 Jitter Buffer - Minimum Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer of G.726 is set. Jitter is the variation in the time between packets arriving and the buffer allows this variation to be absorbed. G.726 Jitter Buffer - Standard Set the average G.726 Jitter Buffer. G.726 Jitter Buffer - Maximum Set the maximum G.726 Jitter Buffer. iLBC Audio Frame Maximum number of iLBC Audio Frames. iLBC assumes the frame of 10 ms is a unit.

0 110 0 3

35

0 ~ 255 ms

30

36 37 38

0 ~ 255 ms 0 ~ 255 ms 1 = 10 ms 2 = 20 ms 3 = 30 ms 4 = 40 ms

60 120 3

39

0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 ~ 255 ms

40

30

41 42 43

0 ~ 255 ms 0 ~ 255 ms 2 = 20 ms 3 = 30 ms 4 = 40 ms

60 120 3

2-462

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
45

Item
iLBC Jitter Buffer - Minimum Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer of iLBC is set. Jitter is the variation in the time between packets arriving and the buffer allows this variation to be absorbed. iLBC Jitter Buffer - Standard Set the average iLBC Jitter Buffer. iLBC Jitter Buffer - Maximum Set the maximum iLBC Jitter Buffer. ILBC Payload Number The payload number of iLBC is set. However, the same number as Item 31 cannot be set. RTP Filter Fax Relay mode T.38 Protocol mode Fax Max Rate 0 ~ 255 ms

Input Data

Default
30

46 47 48

0 ~ 255 ms 0 ~ 255 ms 96 ~ 127

60 120 98

Program

49 50 51 52

0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 = RTP 1 = UDPTL 0 = Not used 1 = V.27ter, 4800 bps 2 = Not used 3 = V.29, 9600 bps 4 = Not used 5= V.17, 14400 bps 0~2 0~2 0 = Local 1 = Network 96 ~ 127 0 = VoIPDB Unit 1 = Main Soft 1 = 33 dBm : 28 = - 6 dBm 1 = - 33 dBm : 28 = - 6 dBm

0 0 1 5

84

56 57 58 61 62 63

Low Speed Data Redundancy High Speed Data Rebundancy TCF Handling T.38 RTP Format Payload Number DTMF Level mode DTMF Level High

0 0 1 100 0 28

64

DTMF Level Low

28

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-463

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-14 : SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 84-14 : SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup to define the basic setup for SIP trunks.

Input Data

84

Item No.
01

Item
INVITE ReTx Count Specifies the number of times the INVITE message is sent. Request ReTx Count Specifies the number of times Request message except INVITE are sent. Response ReTx Count Specifies the number of times the Response message is sent. Request ReTx Start Time Request Maximum ReTx Interval SIP Trunk Port Number Session Timer Value Minimum Session Timer Value Called Party Information URL Type

Input Data

Default
7

Note

02

11 0 ~ 255 7

03

04 05 06 07 08 09 10

0 ~ 65535 (0 ms ~ 6553.5 seconds) 1 ~ 65535 0 ~ 65535 0 ~ 65535 0 = Request URI 1 = To Header 0 = SIP-URL 1 = TEL-URL

5 (500 ms) 40 (4000 ms) 5060 0 1800 0 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-464

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-15 : H.323/SIP Phone Keep Alive Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 84-15 : H.323/SIP Phone Keep Alive Setup to set the Keep Alive Configuration of the H.323/SIP phone. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Registration Information Automatic Deletion When set to 1 (Enable), the registration information is automatically deleted (for H.323). Keep Alive Message Interval Time interval that system sends a Ping to the terminal. Keep Alive Message Timeout Time that system waits for a Ping response from the terminal. Keep Alive Timeout How many times the system waits for a non response before determining the terminal is down.

Input Data
0 = Disable 1 = Enable

Default
0

84

02

1 ~ 10 minutes

1 minutes

03

1 ~ 10 seconds

5 seconds

04

1 ~ 5 times

3 times

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-465

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-16 : VoIPDB Limiter Control Gain Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 84-16 : VoIPDB Limiter Control Gain Setup to set the Limiter Control Gain configuration of VoIPDB.

84

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
RX Limiter Control Gain Gain setting to control limiter in the direction PCM. of IP This option adds gain to the voice input from the LAN and removes it from the voice output to highway.

Input Data
0 ~ 30 (- 15 dBm ~ + 15 dBm) 0 = - 15 dBm 1 = - 14 dBm : 15 = 0 dBm : 29 = 14 dBm 30 = 15 dBm

Default
15 (0 dBm)

02

TX Limiter Control Gain Gain setting to control limiter in the direction of PCM IP. This option adds the gain to the voice input from highway and removes it from the voice output to the LAN.

15 (0 dBm)

03

RX Limiter Control Gain (COIU) This option controls the limiter gain for a COIU call in the IP to PCM direction. TX Limiter Control Gain (COIU) This option controls the limiter gain for a COIU call in the PCM to IP direction.

15 (0 dBm)

04

15 (0 dBm)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-466

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-19 : SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 84-19 : SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup to define the CODEC information for the SIP extensions. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01

84
Item
Number of G.711 Audio Frame Maximum number of G711 Audio Frames. When the voice is encoded using the PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) method, a unit is a frame of 10ms. G.711 Silence Detection (VAD) Mode Select whether to compress silence with G.711. When there is silence, the RTP packet is not sent. G.711 Type Set the type of G.711. G.711 Jitter Buffer - Minimum Set the minimum value of the G.711 Jitter Buffer. G.711 Jitter Buffer - Standard Set the average value of the G.711 Jitter Buffer. G.711 Jitter Buffer - Maximum Set the maximum value of the G.711 Jitter Buffer.

Input Data
1 = 10 ms 2 = 20 ms 3 = 30 ms 4 = 40 ms 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 = A-law 1 = -law 0 ~ 255 ms 0 ~ 255 ms 0 ~ 255 ms

Default
2

02

03 04 05 06 07

0 20 40 80 2

G.729 Audio Frame 1~6 Maximum number of G729 Audio Frames. G.729 (1 = 10 ms, 2 = 20ms, etc.) assumes the audio signal made by a specimen by 8 kHz and the frame of 10 ms is assumed to be a unit to 8 kbps by the encoding compressed method. G.729 Silence Compression (VAD) Mode Select whether to compress silence with G.729. When there is silence, the RTP packet is not sent. G.729 Jitter Buffer - Minimum Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer of G.729 is set. Jitter is the variation in the time between packets arriving and the buffer allows this variation to be absorbed. G.729 Jitter Buffer - Standard Set the average G.729 Jitter Buffer. G.729 Jitter Buffer - Maximum Set the maximum G.729 Jitter Buffer. Number of G.723 Audio Frame Maximum number of the G.723 Audio Frame. G.723 Jitter Buffer - Minimum Set the minimum value of the G.723 Jitter Buffer. G.723 Jitter Buffer - Standard Set the average value of the G.723 Jitter Buffer. G.723 Jitter Buffer - Maximum Set the maximum value of the G.723 Jitter Buffer. 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 ~ 300 ms

08

09

20

10 11 12 14 15 16

0 ~ 300 ms 0 ~ 300 ms 1 = 30 msec 2 = 60 msec 0 ~ 300 ms 0 ~ 300 ms 0 ~ 300 ms

40 80 1 30 60 120

Programming Manual

2-467

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Item No.
17

Item
Jitter Buffer Mode Set the mode of the Jitter Buffer. 1 = Size set to the fixed amount for the codec. 2 = The minimum/maximum range for the codec is used. 3 = The minimum/maximum range for the codec is used and adjust at any time, regardless of silence. Silence Compression (VAD) Threshold Set the voice level judged to be silence. Change value based 30. This entry is ignored if silence compression is disabled in 84-01-03 with G.711 or 84-01-06 with G.729.

Input Data
1 = static 2 = Not used 3 = adaptive immediately

Default
3

18

Program

84

1 ~ 30 (self-adjustment and - 19 dB ~ + 10 dB) 1 = - 19 dB (- 49 dBm) : 20 = 0 dB (- 30 dBm) : 29 = 9 dBm (- 21 dBm) 30 = 10 dBm (- 20 dBm) 0 = G.711 PT 1 = G.723 PT 2 = G.729 PT 3 = G.722 4 = G.726 5 = iLBC 0~5 96 ~ 127 0 = Disable 1 = RFC2833

20

28

Priority Codec Setting The option selected here determines what other codec options are applied by priority.

30 31 32

EchoAuto Gain Control Define the Auto Gain Control. DTMF Payload Number Define the DTMF Payload Number. DTMF Relay Mode Determine the DTMF setup used between the SIP extensions. It is effective when a terminal call is made through the VoIPDB. G.722 Audio Frame Maximum number of G.722 Audio Frames. G.722 assumes the audio signal made by a specimen by 16 kHz and the frame of 10 ms is assumed to be a unit to 64 kbps by the encoding compressed method. G.722 Jitter Buffer - Minimum Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer of G.722 is set. Jitter is the variation in the time between packets arriving and the buffer allows this variation to be absorbed. G.722 Jitter Buffer - Standard Set the average G.722 Jitter Buffer. G.722 Jitter Buffer - Maximum Set the maximum G.722 Jitter Buffer. G.726 Audio Frame Maximum number of G.726 Audio Frames. G.726 assumes the audio signal made by a specimen by 16 kHz and the frame of 10 ms is assumed to be a unit to 32 kbps by the encoding compressed method. G.726 Silence Compression (VAD) Mode Select whether to compress silence with G.726. When there is silence, the RTP packet is not sent. G.726 Jitter Buffer - Minimum Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer of G.726 is set. Jitter is the variation in the time between packets arriving and the buffer allows this variation to be absorbed. G.726 Jitter Buffer - Standard Set the average G.726 Jitter Buffer. G.726 Jitter Buffer - Maximum Set the maximum G.726 Jitter Buffer.

0 96 0

33

1 = 10 ms 2 = 20 ms 3 = 30 ms 4 = 40 ms

35

0 ~ 255 ms

30

36 37 38

0 ~ 255 ms 0 ~ 255 ms 1 = 10 ms 2 = 20 ms 3 = 30 ms 4 = 40 ms

60 120 3

39

0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 ~ 255 ms

40

30

41 42

0 ~ 255 ms 0 ~ 255 ms

60 120

2-468

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
43

Item
iLBC Audio Frame Maximum number of iLBC Audio Frames. iLBC assumes the frame of 10ms is a unit.

Input Data
2 = 20 ms 3 = 30 ms 4 = 40 ms

Default
3

45

iLBC Jitter Buffer - Minimum 0 ~ 255 ms Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer of iLBC is set. Jitter is the variation in the time between packets arriving and the buffer allows this variation to be absorbed. iLBC Jitter Buffer - Standard Set the average iLBC Jitter Buffer. iLBC Jitter Buffer - Maximum Set the maximum iLBC Jitter Buffer. ILBC payload number The payload number of iLBC is set. However, the same number as Item 31 cannot be set. RTP Filter Fax Relay mode T.38 Protocol mode Fax Max Rate 0 ~ 255 ms 0 ~ 255 ms 96 ~ 127

30

46 47 48

60 120 98

Program

84

49 50 51 52

0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 = RTP 1 = UDPTL 0 = Not used 1 = V.27ter, 4800 bps 2 = Not used 3 = V.29, 9600 bps 4 = Not used 5 = V.17, 14400 bps 0~2 0~2 0 = Local 1= Network 96 ~ 127 0 = VoIPDB Unit 1 = Main Soft 1 = - 33 dBm : 28 = - 6 dBm 1 = - 33 dBm : 28 = - 6 dBm

1 0 1 5

56 57 58 61 62 63

Low Speed Data Redundancy High Speed Data Redundancy TCF Handling T.38 RTP Format Payload Number DTMF Level mode DTMF Level High

0 0 1 100 0 28

64

DTMF Level Low

28

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-469

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-20 : SIP Extension Basic Information Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 84-20 : SIP Extension Basic Information Setup to set up proxy information, session timers, called party information and expire value of invite.

84

Input Data
Item No.
01 02 03 04 05

Item
Registrar/Proxy Port Session Timer Value Minimum Session Timer Value Called Party Info

Input Data
1 ~ 65535 0 ~ 65535 0 ~ 65535 0 = Request URI 1 = To Header

Default
5070 180 seconds 180 seconds 0 180 seconds

Expire Value of Invite 0 ~ 256 seconds Arrival of a message is ended when this time expires and there is no cut from the caller. Expire Value of Invite (send) 1 ~ 3600 seconds The expiration time is set for the Invite message.

06

180 seconds

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-470

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-22 : DR700 Multiline Logon Information Setup
Level

SA
Description
Use Program 84-22 : DR700 Multiline Logon Information Setup to set the DR700 Multiline logon information. Program

Input Data
Personal ID Index 001 ~ 128

84
Default
No setting No setting

Item No.
01

Item
User ID Input the User ID when using manual or auto registration (10-46-01). Password Input the Password when using manual or auto registration (10-46-01). User ID Omission Input the Personal ID from terminal automatically when log on again. Log Off Input the Personal ID from terminal automatically when log on again. Nick Name Input the Personal ID from terminal automatically when log on again.

Input Data
Up to 32 characters

02

Up to 16 characters

03

0 = Off 1 = On 0 = Off 1 = On Up to 32 characters

04

05

No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-471

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-23 : DR700 Multiline Basic Information Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 84-23 : DR700 Multiline Basic Information Setup to set the basic information for the DR700 Multiline Terminal.

84

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Registration Expire Timer The Expires value of the REGISTER message which received from DR700 terminal is out of range or when the Expire value is not set up, in case it assigns the effective time to the DR700 terminal. The timer for supervising whether DR700 terminal is connected or not. Subscribe Expire Timer The subscribe Expire timer to transmit and receive the terminal operation instructions between the Main Device and DR700 terminal. Session Expire Timer Set effective time for supervising the Voice Path. Minimum Session Expire Timer Set minimum value of effective time for supervising the Voice Path. Invite Expire Timer Set effective time for Incoming/Outgoing call when the Expire value is not set in the INVITE message received from DR700 terminal. Signal Type of Service Set Type of Service value which applied to send SIP Message Packet from DR700 terminal to Main Device. Error Display Timer Digest Authorization Registration Expire Timer Temporally Password Number of Password Retries Input the number of times an incorrect password can be entered when the security key is pressed. Password Lock Time Reference Number Media Type of Service Refer Expire Timer

Input Data
60 ~ 65535 seconds

Default
180 seconds

02

60 ~ 65535 seconds

3600 seconds

03 04

60 ~ 65535 seconds 60 ~ 65535 seconds

180 seconds 180 seconds

05

60 ~ 65535 seconds

180 seconds

06

0x00 ~ 0xFF (0 ~ 9, A ~ F) 0 ~ 65535 seconds 0 ~ 4294967295 seconds Maximum 16 characters (0 ~ 9, a ~ f, A ~ F) 0 ~ 255 (0 = No Limit) 0 ~ 120 (0 = No Limit) Up to 32 digits (0 ~ 9, , #, P, R, @) 0x00 ~ 0xFF (0 ~ 9, A ~ F) 0 ~ 65535 seconds

00

07 08 09 10

0 0 None 0

11 12 13 14

0 No setting 00 60 seconds

Conditions
None

2-472

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Feature Cross Reference

None

Program

84

Programming Manual

2-473

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-24 : DR700 Multiline CODEC Basic Information Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 84-24 : DR700 Multiline CODEC Basic Information Setup to set the codec of each type of DR700 Multiline Telephone.

84

Input Data
Type 1 = Type 1 2 = Type 2 3 = Type 3 4 = Type 4 5 = Type 5

Item No.
01

Item
Number of G.711 Audio Frame Maximum number of G711 Audio Frames. When the voice is encoded using the PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) method, a unit is a frame of 10ms. G.711 Silence Detection (VAD) Mode Select whether to compress silence with G.711. When there is silence, the RTP packet is not sent. G.711 Type Set the type of G.711. 1 = 10 ms 2 = 20 ms 3 = 30 ms 4 = 40 ms 0 = Disable 1 = Enable

Input Data

Default
2

02

03 04

0 = A-law 1 = -law

0 20

G.711 Jitter Buffer - Minimum 0 ~ 255 ms Set the minimum value of the G.711 Jitter Buffer. G.711 Jitter Buffer - Standard Set the average value of the G.711 Jitter Buffer. G.711 Jitter Buffer - Maximum Set the maximum value of the G.711 Jitter Buffer. G.729 Audio Frame Maximum number of G.729 Audio Frames. G.729 assumes the audio signal made by a specimen by 8 kHz and the frame of 10 ms is assumed to be a unit to 8 kbps by the encoding compressed method. G.729 Silence Compression (VAD) Mode Select whether to compress silence with G.729. When there is silence, the RTP packet is not sent. G.729 Jitter Buffer - Minimum Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer of G.729 is set. Jitter is the variation in the time between packets arriving and the buffer allows this variation to be absorbed. G.729 Jitter Buffer - Standard Set the average G.729 Jitter Buffer. G.729 Jitter Buffer - Maximum Set the maximum G.729 Jitter Buffer. 0 ~ 255 ms 0 ~ 255 ms

05 06

40 80

07

1~4 (1 = 10 ms, 2 = 20 ms, etc.)

08

0 = Disable 1 = Enable

09

0 ~ 300 ms

20

10 11

0 ~ 300 ms 0 ~ 300 ms

40 80

2-474

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
17

Item
Jitter Buffer Mode Set the mode of the Jitter Buffer. 1 = Size set to the fixed amount for the codec. 2 = The minimum/maximum range for the codec is used. 3 = The minimum/maximum range for the codec is used and adjust at any time, regardless of silence. Silence Compression (VAD) Threshold Set the voice level judged to be silence. Change value based .30 This entry is ignored if silence compression is disabled in 84-01-03 with G.711, or 84-01-06 with G.729.

Input Data
1 = static 2 = Not used 3 = adaptive immediately

Default
3

18

1 ~ 30 (self-adjustment and - 19 dB ~ + 10dB) 1 = - 19 dB (- 49 dBm) : 20 = 0 dB (- 30 dBm) : 29 = 9 dBm (- 21 dBm) 30 = 10dBm (- 20dBm) 0 = G711 PT 2 = G729 PT 3 = G.722 PT 0~5 96 ~ 127 1 = 10 ms 2 = 20 ms 3 = 30 ms 4 = 40 ms

20

Program

28

Priority Codec Setting The option selected here determines what other codec options are applied by priority. EchoAuto Gain Control Define the Auto Gain Control. DTMF Payload Number G.722 Audio Frame Maximum number of G.722 Audio Frames. G.722 assumes the audio signal made by a specimen by 16kHz and the frame of 10ms is assumed to be a unit to 64kbps by the encoding compressed method. G.722 Jitter Buffer - Minimum Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer of G.722 is set. Jitter is the variation in the time between packets arriving and the buffer allows this variation to be absorbed. G.722 Jitter Buffer - Standard Set the average G.722 Jitter Buffer. G.722 Jitter Buffer - Maximum Set the maximum G.722 Jitter Buffer. RTP Filter DTMF Level mode DTMF Level High

84

30 31 32

0 96 3

34

0 ~ 255 ms

30

35 36 37 38 39

0 ~ 255 ms 0 ~ 255 ms 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 = Use the Default of VoIPDB Unit 1 = Use the Main System 1 = - 33 dBm : 28 = - 6 dBm 1 = - 33 dBm : 28 = - 6 dBm

60 120 1 0 28

40

DTMF Level Low

28

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-475

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-26 : VoIP Basic Setup (DSP)
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 84-26 : VoIP Basic Setup to set the IP address and the port of VoIP.

Input Data

84
Item No.
01 02

Slot Number VoIPDB GW Number

GW Number will not be shown in Telephone Programming mode.

Item
IP Address RTP Port Number

Input Data
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 0 ~ 65534

Default
172.16.0.20 ~ VoIPDB GW1 = 10020 VoIPDB GW2 = 10052 VoIPDB GW3 = 10084 VoIPDB GW4 = 10116 VoIPDB GW5 = 10148 VoIPDB GW6 = 10180 VoIPDB GW7 = 10212 VoIPDB GW8 = 10244 VoIPDB GW1 = 10021 VoIPDB GW2 = 10053 VoIPDB GW3 = 10085 VoIPDB GW4 = 10117 VoIPDB GW5 = 10149 VoIPDB GW6 = 10181 VoIPDB GW7 = 10213 VoIPDB GW8 = 10245

03

RTCP Port Number

RTP Port Number + 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-476

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-27 : VoIP Basic Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 84-27 : VoIP Basic Setup to set the DTMF Relay and the SRTP mode of the VoIPDB.

Input Data
Slot Number 0

Program

Item No.
01

Item
DTMF Relay Setup

Input Data
0 = DTMF Relay disabled 1 = In-Band DTMF Relay - Do not report to host processor 2 = Out Band Relay - Do not pass tones as voice 0 = Default 1 = Mode 1 (G.723/iLBC)

Default
2

84

02

Setup CODEC Mode Default means the system uses another CODEC except G.723. Mode 1 means the system uses all CODECs, but the limitation of the total number of available DSP will be applied. SRTP Mode Setup SRTP Mode Select H.245 Port Number Preparation Completion Response Port Number DTMF Duration DTMF Pause DTMF Twist Positive Level DTMF Twist Negative Level DTMF Duration DTMF Level

03 04 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13

0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 = Mode1 0 ~ 65535 0 ~ 65535 0 = Use RFC2833 25 ~ 2000 ms 0 = Use RFC2833 25 ~ 2000 ms 0 ~ 24 dB 0 ~ 24 dB 30 ~ 2000 ms 1 ~ 61 (- 36 dB ~ + 24 dB 1 = - 36 dB 2 = - 35 dB : 37 = 0 dB : 60 = 23 dB 61 = 24 dB 0 = Enable 1 = Disable

0 0 10100 4000 0 0 5 0 100 25 (- 12 dB)

14

ICMP REDIRECT

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-477

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-28 : DR700 Multiline Firmware Name Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 84-28 : DR700 Multiline Firmware Name Setup to set the firmware name to download for the IP Phone.

84

Input Data
Terminal Type 1 ~ 3 = Not used 4 = IP4WW-24TIXH

Item No.
01 02

Item
Firmware Directory Firmware File Name

Input Data
Maximum 64 characters Maximum 30 characters

Default
No setting No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-478

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-29 : SIP-MLT CODEC Information Fixed Mode Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 84-29 : SIP-MLT CODEC Information Fixed Mode Setup to set the CODEC data of the SIP-MLT when it uses Multicast. Program

Input Data
1 = Type 1 (Multicast) 2 = Type 2 (reserved) 3 = Type 3 (reserved) 4 = Type 4 (reserved) 5 = Type 5 (reserved)

84
Input Data
1 = G.711 A-law 2 = G.711 -law 3 = G.729 4 = G.723 5 = G.722 1~6 1 = 10 ms 2 = 20 ms 3 = 30 ms 4 = 40 ms 5 = 50 ms 6 = 60 ms 0 = Disable 1 = Enable

Type

Item No.
01 Audio Capability

Item

Default
1

02

Number of Audio Frames

03

RTP Filter

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-479

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-31 : VoIPDB Echo Canceller Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 84-31 : VoIPDB Echo Canceller Setup to sets VoIPDB echo canceller value.

Input Data

84

Type

1 = H.323 Trunk 2 ~ 7 = Not used 8 = SIP Trunk 9 = SIP Extension 10 = Not used 11 = DR700 Type 1 12 = DR700 Type 2 13 = DR700 Type 3 14 = DR700 Type 4 15 = DR700 Type 5 16 = Not used

Item No.
01 02

Item
TDM Echo Canceller mode TDM Echo Canceller NLP mode(2W)

Input Data
0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 2 = Echo Path Mode 3 = Echo Path Auto Detect Mode 0 ~ 15 0 = Disable 1 = Line Echo Canceller 2 = Acoustic Echo Canceller 0 = Disable 1 = TxLevelControl mode 2 = TxAutomaticLevelControl mode 3 = HLC 0 ~ 16 (- 24 ~ 24 dB) 0 = - 24 dB 1 = - 21 dB 2 = - 18 dB : 8 = 0 dB : 14 = 18 dB 15 = 21 dB 16 = 24 dB 0 ~ 42 (- 42 ~ 0 dBm) 0 = - 42 dBm 1 = - 41 dBm : 42 = 0 dBm

Default
1 1

04 08

TDM Echo Canceller NLP Threshold TDM Echo Canceller Echo Type

12 1

10

TDM Tx Level Control

11

TDM Tx LevelControl Level

13

TDM Tx HLC Threshold

41

14 15

TDM Tx Gain Compression mode 0 = Disable 1 = Enable TDM Tx Gain Compression Threshold 0 = - 42 dBm 1 = - 41 dBm : 42 = 0 dBm 0 = Disable 1 = Enable

1 41

19

RTP Echo Canceller mode

2-480

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Item No.
20 22 26

Item
RTP Echo Canceller NLP mode

Input Data
0 = Disable 1 = Enable

Default
0 12 0

RTP Echo Canceller NLP Thresh- 0 ~ 15 old RTP Echo Canceller Echo Type 0 = Disable 1 = Line Echo Canceller 2 = Acoustic Echo Canceller 0 = Disable 1 = TxLevelControl mode 2 = TxAutomaticLevelControl mode 3 = HLC 0 ~ 16 (- 24 ~ 24 dB) 0 = - 24 dB 1 = - 21 dB 2 = - 18 dB : 8 = 0 dB : 14 = 18 dB 15 = 21 dB 16 = 24 dB 0 ~ 42 (- 42 dBm ~ 0 dBm) 0 = - 42 dBm 1 = - 41 dBm : 42 = 0 dBm 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 ~ 42 (- 42 dBm ~ 0 dBm) 0 = - 42 dBm 1 = - 41 dBm : 42 = 0 dBm 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 2 = Echo Path Mode 3 = Echo Path Auto Detect Mode

28

RTP Tx Level Control

Type 1, Type 8 = 3 Type 9, 11~15 = 0

Program
8

29

RTP Tx Level Control Level

84

31

RTP Tx HLC Threshold

Type 1, Type 8 = 36 Type 9, 11~15 = 42

32 33

RTP Tx Gain Compression mode RTP Tx Gain Compression Threshold

Type 1, Type 8 = 1 Type 9, 11~15 = 0 Type 1, Type 8 = 36 Type 9, 11~15 = 42

37

TDM Echo Canceller NLP mode (4W)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-481

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-01 : Installation Date
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 90-01 : Installation Date to define the installation date of the system.

Input Data

90

Item No.
01 02 03

Item
Year Month Day 00 ~ 99 01 ~ 12 01 ~ 31

Input Data

Default
00 (No setting) 00 (No setting) 00 (No setting)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-482

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-02 : Programming Password Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 90-02 : Programming Password Setup to set the system passwords. For password entry, the system allows eight users to be defined. Each user can have a: Unique alphanumeric name (up to 10 alphanumeric characters) Password entry of up to eight digits (using 0 ~ 9, # and ) Password level Program

90

The IN level password is used by the System Installer for system programming. The SA or SB level password cannot access the IN level programs. The reverse type (white on black) just beneath the Description heading is the program access level. You can only use the program if your access level meets or exceeds the level the program requires. (SA level password can access to SA or SB programs, and SB level password can access to SB programs only.)

It is NOT recommended to change these data. If you must change these Data make sure you keep the ID/Password or you will never be able to enter the program unless you clear all the System Data/Setting.
Input Data
User Number 1~8

Item No.
01 02 03 User Name Password User Level

Item
Maximum 10 characters Up to eight digits

Input Data

0 = Prohibited User 2 = IN (Installer Level) 3 = SA (System Administrator Level 1) 4 = SB (System Administrator Level 2) 5 = UA (User Programming Administor Mode Level 1)

Default
User No.
1 2 3 4 5

User Name
nec-i tech admin1 admin2 user1

Password

Level
1 (MF) 2 (IN) 3 (SA) 4 (SB) 5 (UA)

Level Description
Manufacture Level - Access to all system program Installer Level - Access to all IN level programs. System Administrator Level 1 - Restricted Access System Administrator Level 2 - More Restricted Access User Programming Administor Mode Level 1

******
12345678 0000 9999 1111

Conditions
More than one extension can be in the programming mode.

Programming Manual

2-483

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Feature Cross Reference

None

Program

90

2-484

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-03 : Save Data
Level

SA
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming. Use Program 90-03 : Save Data to save the programmed data on the CF Card. This program should be used after changing the programmed data. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01

90

Item
Save Data

Input Data
Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)

Conditions
Before Uploading Customer Database please make sure you reset the system either by using 9008 or Power down/up the system.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-485

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-04 : Load Data
Level

SA
Description
Program Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming. Use Program 90-04 : Load Data to load the system data from the inserted CF Card into the PZ-VM21 Daughter Board installed to the system.

90

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Load Data

Input Data
Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)

Conditions
After uploading the data the display will change to a next Program. Then make sure you EXIT the Program order for upload to complete. Now some of the setting needs to have system reset order for setting to be effective (example: IP Address, Line Key Assignment) so we Recommend to reset the system.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-486

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-05 : Slot Control
Level

IN
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming. Use Program 90-05 : Slot Control to reset or delete (uninstall) units (slots 1 ~ 16 ). Delete allows you to completely uninstall the unit. You should do this if you want to remove a unit and plug it into a different slot and still retain the port assignments. If a different type of interface unit is being installed in a slot previously used, the slot should be deleted (option 1) first before installing the new interface unit. Reset allows you to send a reset code. Program

90

Input Data
System ID Not Used

Menu Number

1 = Delete 2 = Reset 3 = Set Busy Out 4 = Reset Busy Out

Item No.
01 Slot Control

Item
Slot Number 0 ~ 16

Input Data

Conditions
When you delete or reset a unit, you must first remove it from its slot then run Program 90-05. When reusing the slot for another unit, you must plug the unit in or reset the system before the system can use the slot again. When you delete or reset a unit, all related programming in Program 10-03-01 is set back to default.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-487

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-06 : Trunk Control
Level

SA
Description
Program Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming. Use Program 90-06 : Trunk Control for trunk maintenance. Busy Out lets you block a unit from placing outgoing calls (just like placing the unit switch down). Once busied out, none of the ports on the unit can be used for new calls. Existing calls, however, are not torn down.

90

Input Data
Menu Number 0 = Set Busy Out 1 = Reset Busy Out (idle)

Item No.
01

Item
Trunk Control

Input Data
Trunk Port Number : 001 ~ 126

Default
1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-488

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-07 : Station Control
Level

SA
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming. Use Program 90-07 : Station Control for extension maintenance. Program

Input Data
Menu Number 1 = Hardware Reset 2 = Software Reset

90
Item
Extension Control

Item No.
01

Input Data
Extension Number (up to four digits)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-489

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-08 : System Reset
Level

IN
Description
Program Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming. Use Program 90-08 : System Reset to perform a system reset.

90

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
System Reset

Input Data
Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold key only to cancel.)

Conditions
Some of changes made to a program may need to reset the system order for the change to be effective.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-490

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time Setup to define the time for the system to automatically reset. Program

Input Data
Item No. Item
00 ~ 12

Input Data

Default

90

01

Month

If the Month is set to 00 and Day is set, the system is automatically reset every month on the predefined day.
00 ~ 31

00

02

Day

If the Day is set to 00 and the Time (Hour and Minute) is set, the system automatically resets every day at the predefined time.
00 ~ 23 00 ~ 59

00

03 04

Hour Minute

00 00

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-491

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-10 : System Alarm Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 90-10 : System Alarm Setup to assign a status to system alarms. You can designate an alarm as Major or Minor. This program also assigns whether or not the alarm information is reported to the pre-defined destination.

90

Input Data
Alarm Number 001 ~ 100

Item No.
01

Item
Alarm Type 0 = Not Set 1 = Major Alarm 2 = Minor Alarm

Input Data

02

Report

0 = Not Report (No autodial) 1 = Report (autodial)

Table 2-14 Description of Alarm

Alarm Type No.
1 2

Report
0

Name
PKG Initialize Error.

Content of Alarm
1 The PKG failed to initialize. 2 The PKG did not start normally.

Cause
1 PKG not inserted firmly. 2 PKG was removed, but not reinserted firmly. 3 Old PKG data still reported due to no initialization. 1 The package is not completely inserted. 2 The package is out of order.

Action
1 Insert PKG firmly. 2 Insert PKG firmly. 3 Delete slot information in Program 90-05 and insert the PKG again.

Recovery
During initialization, the PKG is recognized.

Alarm Status
ERR REC

PKG Mounting Error

The unit did not step on a regular procedure and it was pulled out. Or, it is not normally inserted.

1 Please insert When unit is the package reconfirmed, firmly. the error is 2 Please try again recovered. after initializing the system data once when LED doesn't blink normally. 3 Exchange packages.

ERR REC

2-492

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Alarm Type No.

3 2

Report
0

Name
Connection fault between CPU and other PKGs.

Content of Alarm
The error occurred when communicating with the package. When the package is broken, it recognizes it as a communication fault.

Cause
1 The unit is not completely inserted. 2 The powersupply voltage of the system is outside ratings. 3 The equipment that generates the noise in the same power supply system as the power supply origin of the system is connected, and it malfunctions because of the power supply noise. 4 The equipment to which it is adjacent to of a main device, and has put out the radiation noise exists, and it malfunctions because of the radiation noise. 5 The chassis is not properly grounded. 1 The package software is not stored in the downloaded USB memory. 2 The stored package software is illegal.Package information that was installed before remains.

Action

Recovery

Alarm Status
ERR REC

1 Please insert When unit is the unit firmly. confirmed, 2 The powerthe error is supply voltage recovered. must use another power supply when is in the range of ratings or measuring with the voltmeter, and deviating from the rated range. 3 Please use the power supply besides the equipment with the possibility of the noise source. 4 Please separate as much as possible and use a main device from the equipment by which you seem may generate the radiation noise. 5 Please ground the chassis correctly.

Program

90

PKG S/W Download Error

The unit program could not be downloaded normally. The unit could not able to be started normally.

1 Delete slot inPlease exformation that change corresponds by units, Program 90-05- though it is 01 to delete likely to repackage inforstore by mation that was mounting installed before. the unit 2 There is a posagain. sibility that the When the unit program is unit program broken though is normally an external facdowntor of the noise loaded, the etc. is thought. error is re3 Please load into covered. the USB memory and try again when you back up the unit program. 4 PleaseCheck with maker on uncertain points.

ERR REC

Programming Manual

2-493

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Alarm Type No.

6 0

Report
0

Name
Blocking

Content of Alarm
The link of terminals connected with the ESI package came off.

Cause
1 Terminal Breakdown. 2 Faulty wiring and wiring termination. 3 External noise. 4 ESI package Breakdown.

Action
Confirm the terminal connected with same ESI. If they work normally, confirm the breakdown or the wiring for the terminal. Exchange the terminal that doesn't work and the working terminal, and confirm its working. An external factor of the noise etc. is thought. Please reconfirm wiring and the installation, etc. Please inquire of the manufacturer when the problem occurs after it confirms it. Check the battery connector. If it is connected correctly, replace the battery.

Recovery
The error is recovered when connecting or exchanging it.

Alarm Status
ERR REC

Program

90
8 1 0 RAM Backup Battery Error ISDN Link Error RAM backup battery on the CPU unit is unplugged or defective. Layer1 link of ISDN lines came off. 1 Check Connection between main device and ISDN line. 2 DSU Breakdown. 3 The setting of Program 10-03 does not correspond to an actual line. 1 LAN cable defective. 2 Connected HUB broken. 3 The CTI server doesn't start normally.

The error is recovered once the battery is replaced. When the connection returns normally, the error is recovered.

ERR REC

10

1 Confirm the data of Program 10-03. 2 Confirm wiring and the installation of DSU. 3 Check with the manufacturer if the problem occurs again.

ERR REC

11

CTI Link Error

The link with the CTI server came off.

1 Confirm the CTI server, wiring, and the connection. 2 Check the manufacturer if the problem occurs again.

When the connection returns normally, the error is recovered.

ERR REC

14

LAN Link Error

The link with LAN on CPU came off.

1 LAN cable de- Confirm the operafective. tion of LAN con2 Connected nector, LAN cable, HUB broken. and HUB again. 3 Defective CPU. Service outage (Dos attack) Confirm whether to find abnormality on the net side.

When the connection returns normally, the error is recovered.

ERR REC

17

Denial of service Connection Error

The system received illegal packet.

WAR

18

2-494

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Alarm Type No.

30 2

Report
0

Name

Content of Alarm

Cause
1 Problem of wiring to connect main device with PC. 2 PC Problem.

Action
1 Confirm whether there is problem in wiring to connect a main device with PC. 2 Execute the reactivation of PC.

Recovery
When the output is restarted, the error is recovered. However, the SMDR data after the error occurs is not recorded.

Alarm Status
ERR REC

SMDR Buf- The temporary buffer full fer for SMDR in main device overflowed, and a part of unoutput SMDR data disappeared because it could not output SMDR data.

Program
INF

31

Security Sensor detected Automatic Transmission from Remote Surveillance

Sensor detected abnormality. Remote watch function did auto dialing.

Sensor detected abnormality. Remote watch function did auto dialing.

Especially, anything need not be done. Especially, anything need not be done.

32

INF

90

50

System The system started. Start Notification System Data change CPU Upgrade is performed or Programming change is made.

The system was started.

No action needed.

51

No action needed.

54

License A new TCP/IP terMaximum 512 liPlease delete liManageminal and the DSP cense information cense information ment Table board were not able on the TCP/IP ter- on an unnecessary Full to be added to the minal is regisTCP/IP terminal application license tered, and a new with Program 90management table. terminal cannot be 44. The license registered. management table is registering full. Regular The regular maintemaintenance exchange nance exday has passed. change notification. The regular maintenance exchange day that had been set with Program 90-51 exceeded it. Please do the maintenance exchanges of pertinent parts, and set the next regular maintenance exchange day with Program 90-51. The excess on the regular maintenance exchange day is canceled by changing Program 90-51 or when the function is invalidated, the error is recovered. Recover the IP Address collision.

WAR

55

ERR REC

57

IP Collision error

Check the IP Adress collision (CPU, VOIPDB, Program 84-26-01 GW : 1 ~ 8).

Collision IP Address in the network.

Check the IP Address in the network.

WAR

Programming Manual

2-495

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Alarm Type No.

60 2

Report
0

Name
SIP Registration Error Notification.

Content of Alarm
1 The registration of the SIP trunk to the SIP server failed. 2 The registration of the SIP trunk to the SIP server failed in the authentication. 3 There is no response from the SIP server to the SIP registration request.

Cause
1 The setting of the system data is wrong. 2 The setting of the router is wrong. 3 It is an error to the link of LAN. 4 Net side trouble.

Action
1 Confirm the following system data setting -Programs 1012, 10-28, 1029, 10-30, and 10-36. 2 Confirm the setting of routers. 3 Confirm whether abnormality occurs on the net side. 4 Confirm the authentication system data setting. 5 Confirm wiring and the system data setting. Please inquire on uncertain points of the maker. 1 Confirm wiring and the system data setting. 2 Confirm whether each equipment such as access points works normally.

Recovery
The error is recovered when normally connecting it.

Alarm Status
ERR REC

Program

90
61 0 0 SIP extension trouble information.

1 Failed registration of the SIP extension terminal. 2 The SIP extension terminal was not acquired: At Regist of the SIP extension terminal to SL1000 . When you cannot acquire the DSP resource when it sent. 1 The trouble occurred by the SIP-MLT relation. 2 The DSP resource could not be acquired at incoming/ outgoing. 3 The negotiation with VoIPDB failed. The link of LAN of VoIPDB came off.

1 The registered port is used by other extension. 2 The license is insufficient. 3 DSP of VoIPDB not acquired.

ERR REC

63

SIP-MLT trouble information.

1 The packet loss occurred on the network or the wiring cutting occurred. 2 DSP of VoIPDB not acquired.

Confirm whether each equipment such as wirings and HUB is normal.

WAR

64

VoIPDB LAN Link Error.

1 LAN cable is defective. 2 Connected HUB broken. 3 Defect CPU. VoIPDB. defective.

1 Confirm LAN connector and wiring. 2 Check with maker on uncertain points. 1 Possibility of defective hardware. 2 Check with maker on uncertain points.

When the connection returns normally, the error is recovered.

ERR REC

65

VOIPDB trouble information.

When DSP of VoIPDB notifies Error.

WAR

2-496

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Alarm Type No.

66 2

Report
0

Name
SIP extension License Error.

Content of Alarm
More than the number of licenses to which the SIP extension terminal was turned on at REGISTER.

Cause
Wrong number of licenses.

Action
1 Confirm the number of licenses for SIP extension terminals. 2 Check with maker on uncertain points. Check with maker on uncertain point, when happening frequently when operating it. Install VMDB with more DSP resources.

Recovery
When the number of registration of SIP extension terminals falls below the number of licenses.

Alarm Status
WAR

67

SIP illegal Packet received

The system received illegal packet.

A client or network was illegal state.

INF

Program

68

VoIPDB DSP All Busy Alarm

1 Provides alert when all DSP resources are being used. 2 Used to troubleshoot or alerting when upgrade is needed.

Not enough DSP resources in system.

90

Conditions
The entire terminal that has an Alarm Display setting can be set at Program 90-50-01. System Alarm Type is shown despite the setting done at 90-10-01. If multiple Alarm Display Setting is set, only one highest priority alarm will be shown on a LCD Display. The priority level (highest -> lowest) : Alarm 55 > Alarm 7 > Alarm 5 > Alarm 30 > Alarm 8 > Alarm 52> Alarm 29 > Free Demo License Period.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-497

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-11 : System Alarm Report
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 90-11 : System Alarm Report to define the details of the system alarm report.

Input Data

90

Item No.
02

Item

Input Data

Default
0

Report Method 0 = No Report When alarm reports are e-mailed, set this option to 1. 1 = E-mail Address E-mail address set in 90-11-08. --- Not Used --SMTP Host Name When alarm reports are e-mailed, set the SMTP name (ex : smtp.yourisp.com). Contact your ISP (internet service provider) for the correct entry if needed. SMTP Host Port Number When alarm reports are e-mailed, set the SMTP host port number. Contact your ISP (internet service provider) for the correct entry if needed. To E-mail Address When alarm reports are e-mailed, set this e-mail address to which the report should be sent. Reply Address When alarm reports are e-mailed, set the e-mail address where replies should be e-mailed. From Address When alarm reports are e-mailed, set this e-mail address for the station sending the report. DNS Primary Address When alarm reports are e-mailed, set the DNS primary address. DNS Secondary Address When alarm reports are e-mailed, set the DNS secondary address. Customer Name When alarm reports are e-mailed, enter a name to identify the particular system. Up to 255 Characters

04 06

No setting

07

0 ~ 65535

25

08

Up to 255 Characters

No setting

09

Up to 255 Characters

No setting

10

Up to 255 Characters

No setting

11

0.0.0.0 ~ 255.255.255.255

0.0.0.0

12

0.0.0.0 ~ 255.255.255.255

0.0.0.0

13

Up to 255 Characters

No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-498

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-12 : System Alarm Output
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 90-12 : System Alarm Output to set the options for the alarm report. This program has six separate menu options. Define the output port to be used as the output for system alarm report and set the system alarm options. The system can have up to 50 reports. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01

90
Item Input Data
0 = No setting 1 ~ 4 = Not Used 5 = Compact Flash

Default
0

Output Port Type Indicate the type of connection used for the System Alarms.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-499

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-13 : System Information Output
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 90-13 : System Information Output to define the output port to be used as the system information output.

90

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Output Port Type Indicate the type of connection used to print the system information. Output Command

Input Data
0 = No setting 1~ 4 = Not Used 5 = Compact Flash Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)

Default
0

05

This program only be able to access by Telephone programming.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-500

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-16 : Main Software Information
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 90-16 : Main Software Information to display the main software information on the CPU. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01 02 Version Number Software Release Date

Item
01.00 ~ 99.99

Input Data

Default
ASCII Code (5 Bytes) ASCII Code (20 Bytes)

90

May 22 2002 17 : 53 : 46

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-501

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-17 : Firmware Information
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 90-17 : Firmware Information to display the firmware versions of the various system units.

90

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
DSP Firmware Version No.

Input Data
00.00.00.00 ~ 15.15.15.15

Default
BCD Code (2 Byte)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-502

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-19 : Dial Block Release
Level

SA
Description
When the extension number is entered in Program 90-19 : Dial Block Release, the extension is released from the Dial Block restriction. Program

Input Data
Extension Number Up to four digits

90

Item No.
01

Item
Delete IP Telephone This assignment removes the station number association with the MAC address of the IP station.

Input Data
[Release ?] : Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Code Restriction/Toll Restriction

Programming Manual

2-503

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup to define the details of the traffic report.

Input Data

90

Item No.
01 03

Item
Call Traffic Output All Line Busy Output

Input Data
0 = Not Measured 1 = Measure 0 = Not Detected 1 ~ 256 (Report when the data reaches the defined value) 0 = Not Detected 1 ~ 256 (Report when the data reaches the defined value) 0 = Not Detected 1 ~ 256 (Report when the data reaches the defined value) 0 = Not Detected 1 ~ 256 (Report when the data reaches the defined value) 0 = Not Detected 1 ~ 256 (Report when the data reaches the defined value) 0 = Not Detected 1 ~ 256 (Report when the data reaches the defined value) 0 = Not Recorded 1 = Recorded

Default
0 0

04

DTMF Receiver Busy Output

05

Dial Tone Detector Busy Output

06

Caller ID Receiver Busy Output

07

Voice Mail Channel All Busy Output

09

Attendant Channel All Busy Output

11

Security Sensor Dial Record Record Security sensor dialing and Remote Inspection dialing to security report

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Traffic Reports

2-504

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-21 : Traffic Report Output
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 90-21 : Traffic Report Output to define the output port to be used as the traffic report output. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Output Port Type

Input Data
0 = No setting 3 = LAN

Default
0

90

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Traffic Reports

Programming Manual

2-505

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-23 : Deleting Registration of IP Telephones
Level

IN
Description
Program Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming. Use Program 90-23 : Deleting Registration of IP Telephones to delete the registered IP telephone from the system.

90

Input Data
Extension Number Up to four digits

Item No.
01

Item
Delete IP Telephone This assignment removes the station number association with the MAC address of the IP station.

Input Data
[Delete?] : Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-506

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup to set the date and time for the alarm report to print. Program

Input Data
Notification Number 1 ~ 12

90
Default
00 00 00 00

Item No.
01 02 03 04

Item
Month Day Hour Minute

Input Data
00 ~ 12 (0 = Not Set) 00 ~ 31 (0 = Not Set) 00 ~ 23 00 ~ 59

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-507

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-25 : System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 90-25 : System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup to define the mail address to receive the system alarm report CC Mail setup.

90

Input Data
CC Number 1~5

Item No.
01

Item
CC Mail Address

Input Data
Up to 255 Characters

Default
No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-508

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-26 : Program Access Level Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 90-26 : Program Access Level Setup to define the password access level required to change a system program. Program

Input Data
Program Numbers 1001 ~ 9903

90

Item No.
01

Item
Maintenance Level

Input Data
Level 1 = MF Level Level 2 = IN Level Level 3 = SA Level Level 4 = SB Level

Default
Refer to the Level indication for each individual program (located in the upper left corner at the beginning of each program).

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-509

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-28 : User Programming Password Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 90-28 : User Programming Password Setup to set the password used to enter the user programming mode.

90

Input Data
Extension Numbers Maximum four digits

Item No.
01 Password

Item

Input Data
Fixed four digits

Default
1111

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-510

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-31 : DIM Access over Ethernet
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 90-31 : DIM Access over Ethernet to enable DIM (Diagnostic Information Maintenance) access over the LAN, and to define the user name and password. DIM is a maintenance tool used by engineering to extract trace level information. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01 02 03

90
Item
Access Enabling Username Password 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 20 characters (alphanumeric) 20 characters (alphanumeric)

Input Data

Default
0 (Disable) SL1000 12345678

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-511

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-33 : Preselected Data Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use 90-33 : Preselected Data Setup to setup the system to preselected setting.

Input Data

90

Item No.
01 02 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 China Chile Taiwan Korea Hong Kong Brazil Malaysia Thailand India

Item Name

Input Data
Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.) Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.) Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.) Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.) Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.) Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.) Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.) Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.) Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)

Default
China
Program No.
10-02-01 14-02-09 14-02-18 15-03-15 20-01-09 20-02-12 20-17-01 20-31-02 20-31-07 20-31-08 20-31-19 21-03-01 22-01-03 Country Code Busy Tone Detection Busy Tone Detection on talking Disconnect without dial after hooking hold Camp-on cancel time Mode setting for incoming call from extension Operators Extension number Callback / Trunk Queuing Cancel Time Ring No Answer Alarm Time DIL/Incoming Ring Group No Answer Time DISA Conversation Warning Tone Timer Trunk Group Routing for Trunks Incoming ring no answer alarm start Timer

Name

Default
86 (For China) 1 (All trunks : On) 1 (All trunks : On) 1 (All stations = Disconnect) 30 1 (Signaling call) 200 (Operator 1 = 200) 30 30 30 180 1 (All trunks : All modes : Group1) 30

Note

2-512

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program No.
22-01-04 22-01-08 22-08-01 25-03-01 25-04-01 25-07-07 26-01-04 30-02-01 80-04-06 80-04-07 80-04-08 80-04-09 80-04-12 80-04-14 80-05-01 80-07 81-01-09 82-04-08 15-03-09 15-03-14 40-07 47-02-16 47-06-14 47-07-03 47-10-03

Name
Normal DIL incoming no answer Timer DID (DDI) Pilot Call No answer timer Second IRG Setup for unanswered DUD/DISA Transfer Ring Group at Wrong dialing DUD/DISA Transfer Ring Group at No answer/Busy DISA Conversation Warning Tone Timer LCR Mode Option DSS Console Extension Assignment ON min. time (Busy Tone for Trunk) ON max. time (Busy Tone for Trunk) OFF min. time (Busy Tone for Trunk) OFF max. time (Busy Tone for Trunk) Frequency No 1 (Busy Tone for Trunk) Twit Level-Rcv1/Rcv2/Rcv3 Date Format Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup (Table2) Time ringing signal stop detection time Maximum hook flash time Caller ID Function Forwarded Caller ID display mode Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS Voice Prompt Language (All Station Mailbox Number) Voice Prompt Language (All Group Mailbox Number) Prompt Language (All Routing Mailbox Number) Voice Prompt Language (All Trunk port Number)

Default
30 30 1 (All trunks : All modes : IRG1) 1 (All trunks : All modes : IRG1) 1 (All trunks : All modes : IRG1) 180 1 200 (Console No.1 = 200) 9 12 9 12 2 1 1 (yy/mm/dd) 45 70 (4.5 s) 132 (660 ms) 1 1 15 15 15 15 15

Note

Program

90

Chile
Program No.
10-01-01 10-01-02 10-01-03 10-01-04 10-01-05 10-01-06 - Year - Month - Day - Week (1 : SUN) - Hour - Minute

Name

Default
5 7 10 4 18 30

Programming Manual

2-513

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program No.
10-01-07 80-01-02 12-01-02 20-02-07 20-02-09 20-02-12 - Second Basic Tone No

Name

Default
0 1 (Svc Tone 2 Unit 1) 0 8 1 1 1 (Class 1 ~ 15) 1 (Class 1 ~ 15) 1 (Class 1 ~ 15) 0 (Class 1 ~ 15) 1 (Class 1 ~ 15) 0 (Class 1 ~ 15) 0 (Class 1 ~ 15) 0 (Class 1 ~ 15) 0 (Class 1 ~ 15) 1 (Class 1 ~ 15) 1 (Class 1 ~ 15) 1 5 15 10 1 30 0 0 0 1 (All Trunk) 1 (All Trunk) 1 (All Trunk) 715 866 200 (Operator 1 = 200) 200 (DSS Console No.1 = 200)

Automatic night mode switch Display mode of Date and Time Disconnect Supervision Mode setting for incoming call from extension Force Trunk disconnection (Analog trunk only) Trunk port disable Dial Block Notification for Incoming Call List existence External Call Forward (Off-Premise) Long conversation alarm Break-In Broken-in Account Code/Toll Restriction Operator Alert Group listening service Connected Line identification (COLP) Dial pause at first digit Time of Repeat Dial Interval of Repeat Dial Repeat Dial Calling Timer Transfer to busy extension No answer time for call forward DISA Conversation Warning Tone Time DISA Conversation Disconnect Timer VRS Fixed Message SMDR print-out Trunk to Trunk transfer Busy Tone Detection Trunk access via Networking Direct extension call pickup Operators Extension number DSS Console Extension Assignment

Program

20-07-11 20-07-12 20-08-08 20-09-04 20-11-12 20-13-01 20-13-15 20-13-16 20-13-20 20-13-26 20-13-31 21-01-06 21-08-01 21-08-02 21-08-03 24-02-01 24-02-03 25-07-07 25-07-08 40-10-01 14-01-06 14-01-13 14-02-09 11-12-16 11-12-29 20-17-01 30-02-01

90

2-514

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program No.
10-02-01 15-02-01 40-07-01 47-02-16 47-06-14 47-07-03 47-10-03 Country Code

Name

Default
56 12 7 7 7 7 7

Display Language Selection Voice Prompt Language Assignment for System based Voice Prompt Language Voice Prompt Language Prompt Language Voice Prompt Language

Program

Taiwan
Program No.
15-01-01 20-02-12 21-04-01 21-05-07 Extension Name Forced Intercom Ringing Toll Restriction Class for Extensions Permit code table

Name

Default
(Delete all station name) 1 1 (Class 1, EXT 200 ~ 295, mode 1 ~ 4) Class 1 set 1 Class 2 set 2 Class 3 set 3 Class 4 set 4 Class 1 set 1 Class 2 set 2 Class 3 set 3 Class 4 set 4 PmitTBL 1 = None PmitTBL 2 = None PmitTBL 3 = 080, 081 PmitTBL 4 = 110, 119 TollRes 1 = 0204 TollRes 2 = 00, 01, 0204, 100, 108 TollRes 3 = 0, 100, 18, 108 TollRes 4 = @ 1 (All stations) 1 (All stations) 1 (Trunks 1 ~ 27) 1 (Trunks 1 ~ 27) Set to 200-207 (IRG1) 0 0 for Type 3 Trunk access code 9 for Type 5 operator DEVICE 5 set to 1 1 (Port 1 only) 0 (Port 1 only) 1 (Port 1 only)

Note

90

21-05-08

Restriction table

21-06-06

Permit code table

21-06-07

Restriction table

31-02-01 31-02-02 14-02-10 14-02-16 22-04-01 11-09-01 11-01-01 10-20-01 35-01-01 35-01-04 35-02-09

Internal Paging Group Assignment Internal Paging Group Assignment Caller ID Caller ID signal Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Trunk Access Code System Numbering LAN Setup for External Equipment (SMDR) SMDR-Output Port Type SMDR-Omit Digits SMDR-Extension Number or Name

Programming Manual

2-515

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program No.
35-02-14 20-02-07 15-03-03 21-01-06 20-13-01 SMDR-Date

Name

Default
1 (Port 1 only) 5 1 (All stations) 1 0 (Class 1 only) 1 (Class 1 only) 0 (Class 1 only) 1 (Trunks 1 ~ 27) 3 (Trunks 1 ~ 27) 10 (Trunks 1 ~ 27) 7 7 1 1 (Table 1) 2 (Table 2) TABLE 1 set to 48 TABLE 2 set to 62 0 (Trunks 1 ~ 27) 20 30 2 1 (Class 1 only) 1 (Trunks 1 ~ 27 Mode 1) 1 (Trunks 1 ~ 27 Mode 1) 16 3 Set to EXT.200-207; DOOR 1; Mode 1-2 9 0 (Trunks 1 ~ 27) 180 0 16

Note

Time and Date Display Mode Terminal Type Dial pause at first digit Long Conversation Alarm Called Party Status Notification for Incoming Call List existence Busy tone detection on talking Busy tone detection frequency Busy tone detection interval ON Minimum RCV2 time OFF Minimum RCV2 time Busy tone detection TONE RCV 2 frequency 1 TONE RCV 2 frequency 2 Call progress TONE detector frequency Flash For Timed Flash or Disconnect Flash (Hooking 1) Flash (Hooking 2) Caller ID Wait Timer Manual Night Service Enabled DID/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing DID/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy DID/DISA No Answer Time DID/DISA Answer Delay Timer Door Box Ring Assignment Voice Prompt Language Assignment for Voice Mail CODEC Filter Setup for Analogue Trunk Ports Disconnect after DID/DISA re-transfer to IRG Default Setting of Microphone of Key Telephone Delayed Call Forwarding Time

Program

20-13-22 20-09-04 14-02-18 14-02-19 14-02-20 80-04-06 80-04-08 14-02-09 80-04-12 80-04-13 80-07-01 14-02-04 81-01-14 81-01-15 20-19-02 20-07-01 25-03-01 25-04-01 25-07-02 25-07-11 32-02-01 40-07-01 81-07-01 25-07-03 20-02-11 24-02-03

90

2-516

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program No.
14-02-02

Name
Ring Detect Type This option to sets Extended Ring Detect or Immediate Ring Detect for the trunk Forced Trunk Disconnect (analogue trunk only) Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Forced Trunk Disconnect Trunk Call Dial Sending Time by SLT DID/DISA Talkie to assign the VRS message number VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment Call Attendant Message - when Busy Call Attendant Message - when No Answer DID/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup Loop Disconnect Supervision Trunk Group Routing for Trunks Call Forwarding Off-Premise DISA Conversation Warning Tone Time Automatic night service Patterns Automatic night service Patterns Automatic night service Patterns Automatic night service Patterns Country Code Repeat count

Default
1 (Trunks 1 ~ 27) 1 (Class 1 only) 1 Trunks 1 ~ 27 Talkie = 1 Mode 1 data = 1 (Day Mode) Mode 2 data = 2 (Night Mode) 4 (Trunks 1 ~ 27 Mode 1, 2) 8 9 MSG (1, 2, 4, 8, 9) Recv. 9 data=200 1 (Trunks 1 ~ 27) 1 (Trunks 1 ~ 27 Mode 1, 2) 1 (Class 1 only) 0 01 ~ 02 set to 08 : 30 Mode Group 1 only 01 ~ 01 set to 08 : 30 Mode Group 1 only 01 ~ 03 set to 17 : 30 Mode Group 1 only 01 ~ 02 set to 17 : 30 Mode Group 1 only 886 6

Note

20-07-11

20-03-04 25-02-01

Program

25-05-01 40-10-08 40-10-09 25-06-02 14-01-13 21-03-01 20-11-12 25-07-07 12-02-01 12-02-01 12-02-01 12-02-01 10-02-01 80-01-01

90

Korea
Program No.
10-02-01 11-01-01 11-09-02 11-10-20 11-12-27 Country Code Dial * Digit 2nd TRK Access Ope VRS Msg Call Pickup

Name
82 1 6 #716 *

Default

12-02-01

Automatic night service Patterns ( Start of time )

ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set Time 01 = 00:00 ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set Time 02 = 09:00 ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set Time 03 = 18:00 ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set Time 01 = 09:00 ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set Time 02 = 18:00 ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set Time 03 = 00:00

12-02-02

Automatic night service Patterns ( End of time )

Programming Manual

2-517

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program No.

Name

Default
ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set Time 01 = Mode3 ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set Time 02 = Mode1 ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set Time 03 = Mode2 sun = Pttrn 3, sat = Pttrn 2 Mode Group 1-4 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 32 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 200 0 1 3 1 Class 1 set 1 Class 2 set 2 Class 3 set 3 Class 4 set 4 PmitTBL 1 = None PmitTBL 2 = 119, 112, 113, 080 Class 1 set 1 Class 2 set 2 Class 3 set 3 Class 4 set 4 2

12-02-03

Automatic night service Patterns ( Mode No. )

12-03-01 14-01-13

Night mode week setting TRK-TRK Transfer Flash for timed Flash or Disconnect DTD-Manual Dl Busy Tone Detection Caller ID Busy Tone Detection Talking Extension Name Extension Display Hook disconnect mode Auto Step Call Hunting Mode Max Queue No Transfer Retrieve Microphone of Keytelephone ICM Call Type SLT DTMF Dial Dial Start Forced Dial Manual night Service Enabled Hotline Hot key Pad Long Conversation Alarm Call Party Status Attendant Caller ID wait timer 1st Digit P Hotline Start T/R Class for Extension

Program

14-02-04 14-02-05

90

14-02-09 14-02-10 14-02-18 15-01-01 15-03-09 15-03-15 16-01-03 16-01-04 16-01-08 20-02-04 20-02-11 20-02-12 20-03-03 20-03-04 20-03-07 20-07-01 20-08-09 20-08-20 20-13-01 20-13-22 20-17-01 20-19-02 21-01-06 21-01-09 21-04-01

21-05-07

Permit code table

21-06-06

Permit code table

21-05-08

Restriction Table

21-15-01

2nd TRK Ace Route TBL

2-518

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program No.
22-01-11 22-14-01 22-14-03 22-14-05 22-14-07 22-15-01 22-15-03 22-15-05 22-15-07 24-02-03 24-02-04 25-01-02 25-07-01 25-07-02 25-07-03 31-02-01 31-02-02 32-01-02 35-01-04 35-02-09 35-02-14 80-04-06 80-04-08 80-04-12 80-04-13 80-06-01 80-07-01 81-01-09 81-01-14 81-01-15 81-07-01 82-04-04 82-04-07 82-04-08 Msg Interval

Name
10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 15 15 0 5 60 30 1 1 1 0 1 1 7 7 2 3 0

Default

Message1 Start Time MSG1 Count MSG2 Count Disconnect Time Message1 Start Time MSG1 Count MSG2 Count Disconnect Time CFW not answer Time TRF Recall time without Password VRS Dial Time DISA No Answer Time DISA Disconnect Retransfer to IRG Internal Paging Group Internal all Paging Group Door Box Lock Cancel SMDR-Omit Digits SMDR-Extension Number or Name SMDR-Date ON Minimum RCV2 Time OFF Minimum RCV2 Time TONE RCV 2 Frequency 1 TONE RCV 2 Frequency 2 Impedance set Busy Tone Frequency Signal Stop Dtct Flash (Hooking 1) Flash (Hooking 2) CODEC Filter Setup for Analogue Trunk Ports Max. Break TM Min. Flash TM Max. Flash TM

Program

90

table 2 ~ 48, table 3 ~ 62 80 20 30 0 (Trunks 1 ~ 27) 14 17 120

Hong Kong
Program No.
14-01-13 14-02-02

Name
Loop Disconnect Supervision Ring Detect Type

Default
1 (Trunks 1 ~ 27) 1 (Trunks 1 ~ 27)

Programming Manual

2-519

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program No.
14-02-04 14-02-09 14-02-10 14-02-18 14-02-19 14-02-20

Name
Flash for Timed Flash or Disconnect Busy Tone Detection Caller-ID Busy Tone Detection on Talking Busy Tone Detention Frequency Busy Tone Detention Interval Forced Intercom Ringing SLT DTMF Dial Trunk Call Dial Sending Time by SLT Manual Night Service Enabled Long Conversation Alarm Called Party Status Operator Extension Number Caller ID Wait Timer Dial pause at first digit of dialing VRS Waiting Message Interval Time Delayed Call Forwarding Time Internal Paging Group Number Internal All Call Paging Receiving Door Lock Cancel Time Tone 14 Intercom Ring-Back Tone (Unit1Basic TN) Tone 39 Special Audible Ring-Busy Tone (Unit1Basic TN) Tone 39 Special Audible Ring-Busy Tone (Unit2Basic TN) Tone 39 Special Audible Ring-Busy Tone (Unit1Duration) Tone 39 Special Audible Ring-Busy Tone (Unit2Duration) TONE RCV2 (Frequency 1) TONE RCV2 (Frequency 2) Table 2 (Frequency) Table 3 (Frequency) Flash (Hooking 1) CODEC Filter Type for analog trunk port Country Code

Default
0 (Trunks 1 ~ 27) 1 (Trunks 1 ~ 27) 1 (Trunks 1 ~ 27) 1 (Trunks 1 ~ 27) 3 (Trunks 1 ~ 27) 10 (Trunks 1 ~ 27) 1 1 1 1 (Class 1 only) 0 (Class 1 only) 1 (Class 1 only) 200 0 1 10 15 1 (All stations) 1 (All stations) 2 10 10 0 10 20 2 3 48 62 25 0 (Trunks 1 ~ 27) 852

Program

90

20-02-12 20-03-03 20-03-04 20-07-01 20-13-01 20-13-22 20-17-01 20-19-02 21-01-06 22-01-11 24-02-03 31-02-01 31-02-02 32-01-02 80-01-02 80-01-02 80-01-02 80-01-03 80-01-03 80-04-12 80-04-13 80-07-01 80-07-01 81-01-14 81-07-01 10-02-01

2-520

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0
Brazil
Program No.
10-20-01 11-01-01 11-01-01 11-09-01 12-02-01 12-02-01 12-02-01 12-02-01 12-02-01 12-02-01 12-02-01 12-02-01 12-02-01 12-02-01 12-03-01 12-07-01

SL1000

Name
TCP Port SMDR Ex - Dev 5 System Numbering - ACC Operator System Numbering - ACC Trunk Trunk Access Code for Type 3 Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 1) Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 1) Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 1) Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 1) Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 2) Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 2) Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 2) Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 2) Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 2) Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 3) Weekly Night Service Switching Text Data for Night Mode Day / Night Mode 1 Day / Night Mode 2 Day / Night Mode 3 Day / Night Mode 4 Day / Night Mode 5 Day / Night Mode 6 Day / Night Mode 7 Day / Night Mode 8

Default
60000 Dial = 9 (1 = Digit) Type (5 = Opr) Dial = 0 (1 = Digit) Type (3 = Trunk) 0 Set Time 02 = S 0800, E 1200, M1 ModeGrp 1 Set Time 03 = S 1200, E 1300, M3 ModeGrp 1 Set Time 04 = S 1300, E 1700, M1 ModeGrp 1 Set Time 05 = S 1700, E 0000, M2 ModeGrp 1 Set Time 01 = S 0000, E 0800, M2 ModeGrp 1 Set Time 02 = S 0800, E 1200, M1 ModeGrp 1 Set Time 03 = S 1200, E 1300, M3 ModeGrp 1 Set Time 04 = S 1300, E 1600, M1 ModeGrp 1 Set Time 05 = S 1600, E 0000, M2 ModeGrp 1 Set Time 01 = S 0000, E 0000, M2 ModeGrp 1 01 = Sunday, 3 ModeGrp 1

Note

Program

90

Dia (Mode Grp 1) Noite (Mode Grp 1) Almoo (Mode Grp 1) (Mode Grp 1) (Mode Grp 1) (Mode Grp 1) (Mode Grp 1) (Mode Grp 1) Linha 01 ~ 51 1 (All Trunk) 1 (All Trunk)

14-01-01 14-01-13 14-01-14

Trunk Name Loop Disconnect Supervision Long Conversation Cut Off

Programming Manual

2-521

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program No.
14-01-15 14-01-17 14-01-18 14-02-04 14-02-09 14-02-12

Name
Long Conversation Alarm before Cut Off Trunk to Trunk Warning Tone For Long Conversation Alarm Warning Beep Tone Signaling Flash for Timed Flash or Disconnect Busy Tone Detection Detect Network Disconnect Signal Caller ID Type for Analogue Trunk Extension Name Off Hook Signaling Type Multi Language Calendar Display on LCD Call Register Mode Caller ID Type Fixed Cadence Programmable Function Key

Default
1 (All Trunk) 1 (All Trunk) 1 (All Trunk) 1 (All Trunk) 1 (All Trunk) 1 (All Trunk) 1 (All Trunk) 200: 200 ~ 327: 327 4 (All stations) 1 (All stations) 1 (All stations) 1 (All stations) 0 (All stations) Key 21 : 00 Key 22 : 00 (All stations) 1 5 1 0 1 1 (Class 1 Only) 1 (Class 01 ~ 15) 0 (Class 01 ~ 15) 11 10 11 10

Note

Program

90

14-02-16 15-01-01 15-02-12 15-02-33 15-02-34 15-03-11 15-03-12 15-07-01

20-01-01 20-02-07 20-02-09 20-02-11 20-02-12 20-07-01 20-07-11 20-13-01 20-15-01 20-15-03 20-15-05 20-15-09 20-16-01

Operador Access Mode Time and Date Display Mode Disconnect Supervision Default Setting Microphone of KTS Forced Intercom Ringing Manual Night Service Enabled Forced Trunk Disconnect Long Conversation Alarm Normal Incoming Call of Trunk Internal Incoming Call DID Call Back Selectable Display Message Message Number 1 Message Number 2 Message Number 3 Message Number 4 Message Number 5

REUNIO_# # : # # SERVIO_EXTERNO RETORNA_ # # : # # LIGAR _ # # # # # # # # # # LIGAR_APS_ # # : # #

2-522

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program No.

Name
Message Number 6 Message Number 7 Message Number 8 Message Number 9 Message Number 10

Default
ALMOO VIAGEM _ AT # # / # # FRIAS_ AT # # / # # FORA DE SERVIO AUSENTE_AT # # / # # 7200 (Class 01 ~ 15) 2 (TRK G.10 only) 1 0 (All Trunk) 1

Note

20-31-02 22-09-01 24-02-01 25-01-02 26-01-04 26-02-01

Callback / Trunck queing cancel time Expected Number of Digits Busy Transfer DISA User ID LCR Mode Option Dial Data Dial Analysis Table number 151 Dial Analysis Table number 152 Dial Analysis Table number 153 Dial Analysis Table number 154 Dial Analysis Table number 155 Dial Analysis Table number 156 Dial Analysis Table number 157 Dial Analysis Table number 158 Dial Analysis Table number 159 Dial Analysis Table number 160 Dial Analysis Table number 161 Dial Analysis Table number 162 Dial Analysis Table number 163 Dial Analysis Table number 164 Dial Analysis Table number 165 Dial Analysis Table number 166 Dial Analysis Table number 167 Dial Analysis Table number 168 Dial Analysis Table number 169 Dial Analysis Table number 170 Dial Analysis Table number 171 Dial Analysis Table number 172 Dial Analysis Table number 173 Dial Analysis Table number 174 Dial Analysis Table number 175 Dial Analysis Table number 176 Dial Analysis Table number 177 Dial Analysis Table number 178

Program

90

00@@@@@@@@@@ 01@@@@@@@@@@ 02@@@@@@@@@@ 03@@@@@@@@@@ 04@@@@@@@@@@ 05@@@@@@@@@@ 06@@@@@@@@@@ 07@@@@@@@@@@ 080@@@@@@@ 081@@@@@@@@@ 082@@@@@@@@@ 083@@@@@@@@@ 084@@@@@@@@@ 085@@@@@@@@@ 086@@@@@@@@@ 087@@@@@@@@@ 088@@@@@@@@@ 089@@@@@@@@@ 090@@@@@@@ 091@@@@@@@@@ 092@@@@@@@@@ 093@@@@@@@@@ 094@@@@@@@@@ 095@@@@@@@@@ 096@@@@@@@@@ 097@@@@@@@@@ 098@@@@@@@@@ 099@@@@@@@@@

Programming Manual

2-523

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program No.

Name
Dial Analysis Table number 179 Dial Analysis Table number 180 Dial Analysis Table number 181 Dial Analysis Table number 182 Dial Analysis Table number 183 Dial Analysis Table number 184 Dial Analysis Table number 185

Default
1@@ 2@@@@@@ 3@@@@@@ 4@@@@@@ 5@@@@@@ 6@@@@@@ 7@@@@@@ 8@@@@@@ 90@@@@@@@@@@ 91@@@@@ 92@@@@@ 93@@@@@ 94@@@@@ 95@@@@@ 96@@@@@ 97@@@@@ 98@@@@@ 99@@@@@

Note

Program

Dial Analysis Table number 186 Dial Analysis Table number 187 Dial Analysis Table number 188 Dial Analysis Table number 189 Dial Analysis Table number 190 Dial Analysis Table number 191 Dial Analysis Table number 192 Dial Analysis Table number 193 Dial Analysis Table number 194 Dial Analysis Table number 195 Dial Analysis Table number 196 26-02-02 Service Type Dial Analysis Table number 151 Dial Analysis Table number 152 Dial Analysis Table number 153 Dial Analysis Table number 154 Dial Analysis Table number 155 Dial Analysis Table number 156 Dial Analysis Table number 157 Dial Analysis Table number 158 Dial Analysis Table number 159 Dial Analysis Table number 160 Dial Analysis Table number 161 Dial Analysis Table number 162 Dial Analysis Table number 163 Dial Analysis Table number 164 Dial Analysis Table number 165 Dial Analysis Table number 166 Dial Analysis Table number 167 Dial Analysis Table number 168 Dial Analysis Table number 169 Dial Analysis Table number 170 Dial Analysis Table number 171 Dial Analysis Table number 172

90

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

2-524

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program No.

Name
Dial Analysis Table number 173 Dial Analysis Table number 174 Dial Analysis Table number 175 Dial Analysis Table number 176 Dial Analysis Table number 177 Dial Analysis Table number 178 Dial Analysis Table number 179 Dial Analysis Table number 180 Dial Analysis Table number 181 Dial Analysis Table number 182 Dial Analysis Table number 183 Dial Analysis Table number 184 Dial Analysis Table number 185 Dial Analysis Table number 186 Dial Analysis Table number 187 Dial Analysis Table number 188 Dial Analysis Table number 189 Dial Analysis Table number 190 Dial Analysis Table number 191 Dial Analysis Table number 192 Dial Analysis Table number 193 Dial Analysis Table number 194 Dial Analysis Table number 195 Dial Analysis Table number 196

Default
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Note

Program

90

26-02-03

Additional Data Dial Analysis Table number 151 Dial Analysis Table number 152 Dial Analysis Table number 153 Dial Analysis Table number 154 Dial Analysis Table number 155 Dial Analysis Table number 156 Dial Analysis Table number 157 Dial Analysis Table number 158 Dial Analysis Table number 159 Dial Analysis Table number 160 Dial Analysis Table number 161 Dial Analysis Table number 162 Dial Analysis Table number 163 Dial Analysis Table number 164 Dial Analysis Table number 165 Dial Analysis Table number 166 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

Programming Manual

2-525

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program No.

Name
Dial Analysis Table number 167 Dial Analysis Table number 168 Dial Analysis Table number 169 Dial Analysis Table number 170 Dial Analysis Table number 171 Dial Analysis Table number 172 Dial Analysis Table number 173

Default
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

Note

Program

Dial Analysis Table number 174 Dial Analysis Table number 175 Dial Analysis Table number 176 Dial Analysis Table number 177 Dial Analysis Table number 178 Dial Analysis Table number 179 Dial Analysis Table number 180 Dial Analysis Table number 181 Dial Analysis Table number 182 Dial Analysis Table number 183 Dial Analysis Table number 184 Dial Analysis Table number 185 Dial Analysis Table number 186 Dial Analysis Table number 187 Dial Analysis Table number 188 Dial Analysis Table number 189 Dial Analysis Table number 190 Dial Analysis Table number 191 Dial Analysis Table number 192 Dial Analysis Table number 193 Dial Analysis Table number 194 Dial Analysis Table number 195 Dial Analysis Table number 196 26-02-06 LCR Carrier Table Dial Analysis Table number 151 Dial Analysis Table number 152 Dial Analysis Table number 153 Dial Analysis Table number 154 Dial Analysis Table number 155 Dial Analysis Table number 156 Dial Analysis Table number 157 Dial Analysis Table number 158 Dial Analysis Table number 160 Dial Analysis Table number 161

90

1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

2-526

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program No.

Name
Dial Analysis Table number 162 Dial Analysis Table number 163 Dial Analysis Table number 164 Dial Analysis Table number 165 Dial Analysis Table number 166 Dial Analysis Table number 167 Dial Analysis Table number 168 Dial Analysis Table number 170 Dial Analysis Table number 171 Dial Analysis Table number 172 Dial Analysis Table number 173 Dial Analysis Table number 174 Dial Analysis Table number 175 Dial Analysis Table number 176 Dial Analysis Table number 177 Dial Analysis Table number 178

Default
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Note

Program

90

26-05-01

Delete Digits Carrie LCR Tabela 1 Carrie LCR Tabela 2 4 3 1 (All Trunk) 8 (TRK 04 ~ 126) 3 (TRK 04 ~ 126) 1 (TRK 04 ~ 126) 3 (TRK 04 ~ 126) 1 (Port 1 only) 0 (Port 1 only) 1 (Port 1 only) 1 (Port 1 only) 2 (Port 1 only) 9 9 7 6 8 6 8

34-01-05 34-11-01 34-11-02 34-11-03 34-11-04 35-01-01 35-01-04 35-02-09 35-02-14 35-02-16 40-07-01 40-08-01 80-04-04 80-04-06 80-04-07 80-04-08 80-04-09

System Toll Restriction E1 Trunk Type MFC Dialing Type MFC Group B Expected Number Of MFC Digits Output Port Type Omit Digits Extension Number or Name Date data Trunk Name or Received Dialed Number Voice Prompt Language Assignment Voice Prompt Language Assignment No Tone Time Type 2 BT On Minimum Time Type 2 BT On Maximum Time Type 2 BT Off Minimum Time Type 2 BT Off Maximum Time Type 2 BY

Programming Manual

2-527

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program No.
80-07-01 80-08-01 82-04-04 82-04-06 82-04-07 82-04-08 10-02-01

Name
Frequency Table 1 Duration Maximum Break Time Maximum Make Time Minimum Hook Flash Time Maximum Hook Flash Time Country Code Display Language Selection Voice Prompt Language Voice Prompt Language Prompt Language Voice Prompt Language

Default
42 200 14 14 16 70 55 15 13 13 13 13

Note

Program

15-02-01 47-02-16 47-06-14 47-07-03 47-10-03

90

Brazil - PRG80-01 Service Tone Setup Service Tone Setup

Internal Dial Tone TONE 2 2 1 Special Dial Tone TONE 3 2 1 Busy Tone TONE 6 2 1 Ring Back Tone TONE 14 2 1 2 External Ring Back Tone TONE 45 3 4 1 External Busy Tone TONE 46 2 0 1 2 32 0 0 2 32 0 1 0 1 10 40 10 32 32 32 0 1 0 2 40 32 32 0 1 0 1 2 32 32 0 1 0 10 1 32 32

Unit
1

80-01-01
0

80-01-02
0

80-01-03
1

80-01-04
32

Malaysia
Program No.
10-02-01 Country Code

Name
60

Default

Thailand
Program No.
10-02-01 Country Code

Name
66

Default

2-528

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0
India
Program No.
10-02-01 Country Code

SL1000

Name
91

Default

Conditions
None Program

Feature Cross Reference

None

90

Programming Manual

2-529

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-34 : Firmware Information
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 90-34 : Firmware Information to list the package type and firmware units installed in the system.

90

Input Data
Slot Number 00 ~ 16

Item No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 Package Name

Item

Display Data
PKG Name 00.00 ~ 15.15 DEV/PR/REL - 00.00.00.00.00.00 DEV/PR/REL - FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF 00000000 - FFFFFFFF 00.00.00.00 - FF.FF.FF.FF 00.00.00.00 - FF.FF.FF.FF

Firmware Version Number VOIPDB Software Version DSP Project Number Vocallo Firmware Version OCT1010ID Version

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-530

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-35 : Wizard Programming Level Setup
Level

IN
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming. Use Program 90-35 : Wizard Programming Level Setup to set the maintenance level for Wizard Programming. Program

Input Data
Wizard Number 1 ~ 250

90

Item No.
01

Item
Maintenance Level

Display Data
0 = All 3 = SB (System Administrator B) 4 = SA (System Administrator A) 5 = IN (Installer Level) 6 = MF (Manufacture Level)

Default
0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-531

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-36 : Firmware Update Time Setting
Level

IN
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming. Program Use Program 90-36 : Firmware Update Time Setting to define the data for the firmware update feature. This data is available to set from the PC Programming FW update feature. The following firmware is available to update with this feature: main.bin Dspdbu.bin dsp.bin intradbu.bin is not supported

90

Input Data
Item No. Item Input Data
Year : 0 ~ 99 Month : 0 ~ 12 01 Firmware Update Schedule Time Day : 00 ~ 31 Hour : 00 ~ 23 Minute : 00 ~ 59 02 Update mode 0 = Non Active 1 = Activated

Default
0 0 0 0 0 0

Description
Set the time to update the firmware using a compact flash card. Time registration fails if an expired time is registered.

Activate the Firmware Update feature. If this setting is 1, new firmware on the compact flash card updates according to the setting at 90-36-01. Output a report when the update is executed and saves one copy on the system. If a new update occurs, the new report overwrites the old report. Refer to the Sample Report on this page shown.

03

Update Report

Maximum 256 characters

Sample Report
Result
Update Success Update Fail Update Fail Update Fail Update Success Update is fail. Since A drive is not available. Update is fail. Since main up is not exist on A drive. Update is fail. Since Time is expired.

Report Display

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-532

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-38 : User Programming Data Level Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 90-38 : User Programming Data Level Setup sets system data to turn on/off each User Programming Feature. Program

90

Programming Manual

2-533

SL1000 Input Data

Item No.
1 2 3 4 5 Time setting Change of music on hold tone Automatic Night Service Pattern Weekly Night Service Switching Text Data for Night Mode Holiday Night Service Switching DISA User ID Setup Mail Box Setup Text Messages Setup Incoming Ring Group Setup Abbreviated Dial Number and Name Night-mode switching Other Group DSS Key Assignment Doorphone Ringing Assignment Extension Numbering Extension Name Night-mode switching Own Group Call Forward-Immediate/No Answer /Both Ring

ISSUE 1.0

Item

Program (Reference Only)

10-01 (11-10-03) 10-04 (11-10-02) 12-02 12-03 12-07 12-04 25-08 40-02 20-16 22-04 11-10-04 13-04 11-10-12 30-03 32-02 11-02 15-01-01 11-10-01 11-11-01 11-11-03 11-11-05 11-11-02 11-11-20 15-02-02 11-11-20 15-02-03 15-02-01 21-07 90-28 15-07 15-09 15-14 14-01-01 11-10-06 11-10-07 11-10-08 24-04 92-01 22-11-03 15-20 47-02

Input Data
0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On

Default
1 = Turn On 1 = Turn On 1 = Turn On 1 = Turn On 1 = Turn On 1 = Turn On 1 = Turn On 1 = Turn On 1 = Turn On 1 = Turn On 1 = Turn On 1 = Turn On 1 = Turn On 1 = Turn On 1 = Turn On 1 = Turn On 1 = Turn On 1 = Turn On

Program

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

90

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34

Call Forward-Busy Trunk Incoming Ring Tone Internal Incoming Ring Tone Display Language Selection Toll Restriction Override Password User Programming Password Programmable Function Key Virtual Extension Ring Assignment One Touch Key Assignment Trunk Name Automatic Transfer per Trunk SPD Area No. Telephone Data Copy Dial in Name LCD Line Key Name Assignment IntraMail Station Mailbox Options

1 = Turn On 1 = Turn On 1 = Turn On 1 = Turn On 1 = Turn On 1 = Turn On 1 = Turn On 1 = Turn On 1 = Turn On 1 = Turn On 1 = Turn On 1 = Turn On 1 = Turn On 1 = Turn On 1 = Turn On 1 = Turn On

2-534

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0 Conditions

None

SL1000

Feature Cross Reference

Maintenance

Program

90

Programming Manual

2-535

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-39 : Virtual Loop Back Port Reset
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 90-39 : Virtual Loop Back Port Reset to reset to initial status.

Input Data

90

Item No.
01

Item
Virtual Loop Back Reset

Input Data
[Reset?] : Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

PC Programming

2-536

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-41 : Server Setting to Update Terminal Local Data
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 90-41 : Server Setting to Update Terminal Local Data to define the Primary DNS Server address, the Secondary DNS Server address and the Data Roaming Server address. Program

Input Data
Server Information 1 ~ 13

90
Default
0 None 0

Item No.
01 02 03

Item
Server Address Type Server Address Port Number 0 = IPv4 1 = IPv6

Input Data

IPv4 form (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) IPv6 form (xxxx : xxxx : xxxx: xxxx: xxxx) 0 ~ 65535

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-537

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-42 : DR700 Multiline Terminal Version Information
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 90-42 : DR700 Multiline Terminal Version Information to set the hardware version and firmware version of the DR700 MLT Terminal.

90

Input Data
Terminal Type 1 ~ 3 = Not used 4 = IP4WW-24TIXH

Item No.
01 02

Item
Software Version Hardware Version

Input Data
00.00.00.00 ~ FF.FF.FF.FF 00.00.00.00 ~ FF.FF.FF.FF

Default
00.00.00.00 00.00.00.00

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-538

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-43 : Deleting Terminal License of DR700
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 90-43 : Deleting Terminal License of DR700 to delete the terminal license information delivered to the DR700 terminal. Program

Input Data
Extension Number Up to four digits

90

Item No.
01

Item
Delete Terminal License

Input Data
[Delete?] : Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-539

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-44 : Deleting Terminal License of TCP Interface
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 90-44 : Deleting Terminal License of TCP Interface to delete the terminal license information delivered to the terminal with a TCP interface.

90

Input Data
License Delete Code 000-000-000 ~ 999-999-999

Item No.
01

Item
Delete Terminal License

Input Data
[Delete?] : Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-540

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-45 : Temporary Password Change for Multiline Telephone
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 90-45 : Temporary Password Change for Multiline Telephone to change the Temporary Password that is set in the Encryption function. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01

90

Item
Temporary Password Change Request

Input Data
00.00.00.00 ~ FF.FF.FF.FF Change? (Yes = 1)

Default
00.00.00.00

Conditions
This Program is activated when the Program 10-46-07 set to 1.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-541

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-50 : System Alarm Display Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 90-50 : System Alarm Display Setup to set the system alarm report display.

Input Data

90
Item No.
01

Index Number

01 ~ 50

Item
System Alarm Display Telephone

Input Data
Up to four digits

Default
No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-542

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-51 : Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 90-51 : Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange to set the day for the maintenance exchange of parts that need regular maintenance. Program

Input Data
System ID Not Used

90
Default
Refer to table 00 00 00

Index

1 ~ 10

Item No.
01 02 03 04 Display Name Year Month Day

Item

Input Data
Up to 16 characters 00 ~ 99 01 ~ 12 01 ~ 31

Index
01 02 03 04 ~ 10

Default
--- No setting --Backup battery --- No setting ----- No setting ---

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-543

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-52 : System Alarm Save
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 90-52 : System Alarm Save for the system alarm output operation.

Input Data

90
Item No.
01 02

System ID of Source System

Not Used

System ID of Destination System

Not Used

Item
Save All Alarm Reports Save New Alarm Reports

Input Data
Print All? (1 = Yes) Print All? (1 = Yes)

Default
-

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-544

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-53 : System Alarm Clear
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 90-53 : System Alarm Clear to clear the system alarm. Program

Input Data
System ID Not Used

90
Default
-

Item No.
01

Item
Clear All Alarm Reports

Input Data
All Clear? ( 1 = Yes)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-545

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-54 : PC/Web Programming
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 90-54 : PC/Web Programming sets parameters for PC and Web Programming.

Input Data

90

Item No.
01

Item

Input Data

Default
80

Web Pro TCP port number 1 ~ 65535 The port number of TCP of the Web programming is set. The port number of new TCP is not reflected from the Web Pro to the logout of all users of the Web Pro who is logging in the system after data is changed in the setting. PC Pro TCP port Number 1 ~ 65535 The port number of TCP of the PC programming is set. The port number of new TCP is not reflected from the PCPro to the logout of all users of the PCPro who is logging in the system after data is changed in the setting.

02

8000

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

PC Programming

2-546

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-55 : Free License Select
Level

IN
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming. Use Program 90-55 : Free License Select to validate the Free License. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01

90
Item
Start Free License

Input Data
0 = Stop 1 = Start

Default
0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-547

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-56 : NTP Setup
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 90-56 : NTP Setup to set the NTP.

Input Data

90

Item No.
01 02

Item
NTP Synchronize Server Address

Input Data
0 = No 1 = Yes IPv4 form : xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx IPv6 form : xxxx.xxxx.xxxx.xxxx.xxxx

Default
0 No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-548

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-57 : Backup Recovery Data
Level

SA
Description
Use Program 90-57 : Backup Recovery Data to backup the system data in the Compact Flash memory on the CPU and to make the recovery data. Program

Input Data
Data ID 1~5

90

Item No.
01

Item
Backup Recovery Data

Input Data
[Backup?] : Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-549

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-58 : Restore Recovery Data
Level

SA
Description
Program Use Program 90-58 : Restore Recovery Data to select the recovery data stored in the Compact Flash memory of the CPU. After this command is executed, the system restarts automatically.

90

Input Data
Data ID 1~5

Item No.
01

Item
Restore Recovery Data

Input Data
[Restore & Reset?] : Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-550

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-59 : Delete Recovery Data
Level

SA
Description
Use Program 90-59 : Delete Recovery Data to select and delete the recovery data stored in the Compact Flash memory of the CPU. Program

Input Data
Data ID 1~5

90

Item No.
01

Item
Delete Recovery Data

Input Data
[Delete?] : Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-551

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-60 : T1/ISDN Layer Status Information
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 90-60 : T1/ISDN Layer Status Information to display layer status information for T1/ PRI/E1/BRI packages.

90

Input Data
System ID Not Used

Slot No.

00 ~ 16

Item No.
01 Link Status

Item
None

Input Data
None

Default

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-552

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-63 : DR700 Control
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 90-63 : DR700 Control to adjust settings of the DR700. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Priority Timer

Input Data
0 ~ 255

Default
80

90

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-553

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-65 : 1st Party CTI Authentication Password Setup
Level

SA
Description
Program Use Program 90-65 : 1st Party CTI Authentication Password Setup to set the authentication password.

90

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Password Sets the authentication password when the 1st Party CTI application is connected to the system via a NAT router. If a password is not set, the system does not certify it.

Input Data
Up to 16 characters

Default
nec-i

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-554

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-66 : FTP Firmware Update setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 90-66 : FTP Firmware Update setup to setup the Login info to connect to the FTP Server. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01 02 User Name Password FTP Server Host Name Input URL or IP Address of FTPServer. Use xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format in case of IP Address. FTP Server TCP Port DNS Primary Address DNS Secondly Address

Item

Input Data
Up to 32 characters Up to 32 characters

Default
None None

90

03

Up to 255 characters

None

04 05 06

0 ~ 65535 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

21 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-555

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-67 : Backup Data Auto-save Interval Time Set
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 90-67 : Backup Data Auto-save Interval Time Set to set time interval D-RAM data that is saved in F-ROM memory. D-RAM memory : Configuration information such as call transfer and Do Not Disturb.

90

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Interval time

Input Data
0 ~ 255

Default
48 (24 hr)

This Program is ..
0 = Do not Auto-save 1 = 30 min 2 = 60 min 3 = 90 min : 255 = 30 min (127 hr)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-556

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-68 : Side Tone Auto Setup
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 90-68 : Side Tone Auto Setup to setup the volume level of Side Tone for each Analog Trunk Port. This program will change the seting of "PRG 81-07 CODEC Filter Setup for Analogue Trunk Port" If the Analog Port is in used or if it is other than a Analog Trunk Port then it will give out the error message. Program

90

Input Data
Item No.
01

Item
Adjustment Start This will start the Adjustment of Side Tone for each Analog Trunk Port. If it is successful it will change the PRG 81-07-0. If it is sucessfull it will ask to change it for all Analog Trunk Port.. If you select to change the Setting All Analog Trunk Port it will change all the Port in 81-07. 1 digit data This setting will ask to use the digit after Line is retreived.

Input Data
Trank Port Number 001 ~ 126

Default
No setting

Related Program
81-07-01 21-01-05 21-01-06 14-01-07 21-06-06 21-05-07

02

Dial (1 dight)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-557

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 92 : Copy Program

92-01 : Copy Program
Level

IN
Description
Program Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming. Use Program 92-01 : Copy Program to copy the data for one program to another multiline terminal, port, group, or other number. Refer to the following charts to see which programs can be copied.

92

Input Data
Program Number XX ~ XX

Item No.

Item
Source Number Enter the extension, trunk, group or other number from which the data is to be copied. Destination Number (From) Enter the first extension, trunk, group or other number to which the information is to be copied. Destination Number (To) Enter the last extension, trunk, group or other number to which the information is to be copied. If the information is being copied only to one extension, trunk, group or other number, enter the information entered in the Destination Number (From) entry.

Input Data
For Trunk Base : Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126 For Trunk Group Base : Trunk Group Number 01 ~ 25 For Extension Base : Extension Number Maximum four digits For Department Group Base : Department Group Number 01 ~ 32 For DSS : DSS Console Number 01 ~ 12 For Door Phone: Door phone number : 1 ~ 8

01

The Copy Program is applicable only for the following programs : Trunk Port Base
Program No.
14-01 14-02 14-04 14-08 14-09 20-30 21-03 21-12 21-21 21-22 22-02 22-03 22-05 22-08 31-05

Program Name
Trunk Basic Data Setup Analog Trunk Data Setup Behind PBX Setup Music on Hold Source for Trunks Conversation Recording Destination for Trunk Timer Class for Trunk Trunk Group Routing for Trunks ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk Toll Restriction for Trunks CO Message Waiting Indication Incoming Service Type Setup Trunk Ring Tone Setup IRG Assignment for Normal Ring Trunk Second IRG Setup for Unanswered DIL / IRG Incoming Ring Tone Audible on External Speaker

Note
Copy all data except Trunk Name (Item 01).

2-558

Program 92 : Copy Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program No.
8107

Program Name
Codec Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port

Note

Trunk Group Base

Program No.
35-03

Program Name
SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group

Note

Extension Base
Program No.
15-01 15-02 15-03 15-06 15-07 15-08 15-09 15-10 15-11 15-12 15-17 15-18 20-06 20-29 21-02 21-04 21-11 23-02 23-03 23-04 24-03 31-02 82-14

Program
Program Name Note
Copy all data except extension name (item 01).

Extension Basic Data Setup (include Virtual Extension) Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Trunk Access Map for Extension Programmable Function Key Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup Virtual Extension Ring Assignment Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment Conversation Recording Destination for Extension CO Message Waiting Indication Virtual Extension Key Enhancement Options Class of Service for Extension Timer Class for Extension Trunk Group Routing for Extensions Toll Restriction Class for Extensions Hotline Assignment Call Pickup Groups Ringing Line Preference Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions Park Group Assignment Internal Paging Group Assignment Handset/Headset Gain Setup for Multi-Line Telephone

92

Department Base
Program No.
16-01 35-04

Program Name
Department (Extension) Group Basic Data Setup SMDR Port Assignment for Department Group

Note
Copy all data except Group Name (Item 01).

DSS Console Base

Program No.
30-01

Program Name
DSS Console Operation Mode

Note

Programming Manual

2-559

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program No.
30-03 DSS Key Assignment

Program Name

Note

Door Box Base

Program No.
32-02

Program Name
Door Box Ring Assignment

Note

Program

Conditions
Using this program to copy a multiline terminal Programmable Function Keys, copies all keys whether or not they exist on the terminal to which the programming is being copied. This may cause confusion when trying to define a key which is already defined but which does not exist on the terminal (displays as DUPLICATE DATA). It is recommend to either clear these non-existent keys or copy only from an extension which has the same or fewer number of keys than the extension to which the programming is being copied.

92

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-560

Program 92 : Copy Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 92 : Copy Program

92-02 : Delete All Extension Numbers
Level

IN
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming. Use Program 92-02 : Delete All Extension Numbers to delete all extension numbers <Program 1102>, <Program 11-04>. However, the extension number of the first port is not deleted. Program

Input Data
Extension No. Delete Yes : 1 [Dial 1] + Hold key (Only press Hold key is canceled.)

92

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-561

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 92 : Copy Program

92-03 : Copy Program by Port Number
Level

IN
Description
Program Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming. Use Program 92-03 : Copy Program by Port Number to copy extension and the data of each outside line.

92

Input Data
Program Number XX-XX

Item No.
01 02

Item
Source Number Enter the port number from where the data is to be copied. Destination Number (From) Enter the first port number to where the information is to be copied Destination Number (To) Enter the last port number to where the information is to be copied. If the information is to be copied only to one port, enter the information entered in the Destination Number (From) entry.

Input Data
For Trunk Base : Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 126 For Trunk Group Base : Trunk Group Number 01 ~ 25 For Extension Number : 001 ~ 128 Including Virtual Extension : 01 ~ 50 For Department Group Base : Department Group Number 01 ~ 32 For DSS : (DSS Console Number 01 ~ 12

03

Refer to Program 92-01 Copy Program on page 2-558 for program that can be copied.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-562

Program 92 : Copy Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 92 : Copy Program

92-04 : Extension Data Swap
Level

IN
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming. Use Program 92-04 : Extension Data Swap to swap data between two extensions. Program

Input Data
Item No.
01 02 1st Extension Number Up to four digits. 2nd Extension Number

92
Item Input Data

The following table lists Programs that use the Extension Data Swap function.
Program Number
11-02 12-05 13-03 13-06 15-01 15-02 15-03 15-06 15-07 15-08 15-09 15-10 15-11 15-12 15-13 15-17 15-18 16-02 20-06 20-29 21-02 21-04 21-07 21-10 21-11 Extension Numbering Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions Abbreviated Dial Group Assignment for Extensions Station Abbreviated Dial Number and Name Extension Basic Data Setup Multi-Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Trunk Access Map for Extension Programmable Function Key Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup Virtual Extension Ring Assignment Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment Conversation Recording Destination for Extension Loop Key Data CO-Message Waiting Indication Virtual Extension Key Enhance Options Department Group Assignment for Extensions Class of Service for Extension Timer Class for Extensions Trunk Group Routing for Extension Toll Restriction Class for Extension Toll Restriction Override Password Setup Dial Block Restriction Class per Extensions Hotline Assignment

Program Name

Note

Programming Manual

2-563

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program Number
21-13 21-15 21-18 21-19 21-20 22-04 22-06

Program Name
ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extension Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions IP Trunk (H.323) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension SIP Trunk Call Discernment Setup for Extension Incoming Ring Group Setup Normal Incoming Ring Mode Call Pickup Group Ringing Line Preference Ringing Line Preference of Virtual Extension Park Hold Group Assignment Call Forward Split Settings ARS Class of Service LCR Cost Center Code Table Internal Paging Group Assignment Hotel Extension Basic Data Setup Handset/Headset Gain Setup for Multi-Line Telephone User Programming Password Setup Data Swap Password of each Extension Setup

Note

Program

23-02 23-03 23-04 24-03 24-09 26-04 26-07 31-02 42-02 82-14 90-28 92-05

92

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-564

Program 92 : Copy Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 92 : Copy Program

92-05 : Extension Data Swap Password
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 92-05 : Extension Data Swap Password to define the 4-digit password for each extension to allow Extension Data Swap. Program

Input Data
Extension Number Up to four digits.

92
11-15-12

Item No.
01

Item
Password Password required on a per station basis when utilizing the station swap feature.

Input Data
Fixed four digits (No setting at default)

Related Program

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-565

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Program 92 : Copy Program

92-06 : Fill Command
Level

IN
Description
Program Use Program 92-06 : Fill Command to allocate the data of each extension number of each extension group or each table.

92

Input Data
Program Number XX - XX

Item No.
01 02 03

Item
Source Number Destination Number (From) Destination Number (To)

Input Data
Each extension port = 001 ~ 128 (Program 11-02) Each virtual extension port = 01 ~ 50 (Program 11-04) Each extension group = 1~32 (Program 11-07)

The following table lists Programs that use the Fill Command function.
Program Number
11-02 11-04 11-07 Extension Numbering Virtual Extension Numbering Extension (Department) Group Pilot Number

Program Name

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-566

Program 92 : Copy Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Program 92 : Copy Program

92-07 : Delete Command
Level

IN
Description
Use Program 92-07 : Delete Command to delete the data of each extension number of each extension group or each table. Program

Input Data
Program Number XX-XX

92

Item No.
01 02

Item
Destination Number (From) Destination Number (To)

Input Data
Each extension port = 001 ~ 128 (Program 11-02) Each virtual extension port = 01 ~ 50 (Program 11-04) Each extension group = 1~32 (Program 11-07)

The following table lists Programs that use the Delete Command function.
Program Number
11-02 11-04 11-07 Extension Numbering Virtual Extension Numbering Extension (Department) Group Pilot Number

Program Name

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual

2-567

SL1000

ISSUE 1.0

Memo

2-568

Program 92 : Copy Program

ISSUE 1.0

SL1000

Memo

Programming Manual

2-569

Programming Manual
NEC Corporation ISSUE 1.0